Audio

052: How Carole Rains Leverages Pinterest To Drive Sales To Her Rustic Furniture Store

Carole Rains

I met Carole Rains at the Ecommerce Fuel Live conference and I’m happy that we met. Carole runs 2 online stores, RusticArtistry.com and EmuBliss.com, and she uses Pinterest heavily to promote her products.

In this interview, you will get an in depth tutorial on how to maximize your Pinterest account and how to leverage Pinterest to promote your products.

What You’ll Learn

  • How Carole decide on the niche for her online store
  • How Carole found dropshippers for her online furniture shop
  • How Carole gets vendors to dropship for her
  • What the logistics are like when selling handcrafted products
  • How Carole gets photos for her product when she doesn’t get to see them in person
  • Carole’s primary traffic source and how she leverages it due to the nature of her products
  • How Carole uses blogger outreach to sell product
  • How Carole leveraged a competitor’s name to generate traffic
  • Why Pinterest should be such an important part of your strategy
  • How to grow your Pinterest account.
  • How often you should be pinning
  • What tools you should be using to grow your Pinterest account
  • How to get more Pinterest followers

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. In this episode I`m going to be talking to Carole Rains, now Carole has actually been a long time reader of mywifequitherjob.com and we actually had the pleasure of finally meeting face to face at the ecommerce fuel conference in Austin Texas several months ago. Now Carole runs a site Rusticartistry.com where she sells rustic furniture and accessories online, and what’s cool about Carole is that she generates a lot of her sales and awareness through Pinterest. Now I actually had a couple of people on the podcast already to talk about Pinterest, but this is actually the first person that I have had online who is specifically using Pinterest to promote an ecommerce store. So welcome to the show Carole, really happy to have you today.

Carole: Thanks Steve, glad to be here.

Steve: Yes, so let’s talk about your business a little bit first. Can you give us a quick background story? Tell us about how Rustic Artistry got started and what it sells exactly.

Carole: Sure. So I started rustic artistry in 2013. Prior to that I was a chef and prior to that I was in pharmaceutical advertising. So I had some background and experience with marketing and design and copy writing and print production and all that, and what happened then with the restaurant job was it just started to bore me, and I wasn’t using my brain and I was thinking use it or lose it.

So I knew that I needed something that was going to be more stimulating to me and my daughter had been and entrepreneur since she graduated college in 2009 and we would have lots of conversations about entrepreneurs and that kind of a life, and I decided that maybe that was the direction that I would take rather than just looking for another job working for somebody else. And I wanted to have time to do things and you know have a really-really flexible schedule, be able to go on trips with my sister and what not.

So I got bit by the entrepreneurial bug and you know I had been as I said reading your website and understood a little bit about ecommerce. Certainly I was an exceptional online shopper. So I had the customer perspective down pat, and I decided I was going to create an online store. So I read a lot of your articles, I found Andrew Youderian’s eBook on starting an online store.

He had a start up guide that was a step by step process and I went through the niche selection process of you know trying to think of what I could sell and whether I should pick something that I really knew well. You know, maybe something in the cooking field or you know whether to just go with the theory that just take something that meets all the proper criteria for a good product to sell and then the interest will follow. I decided that I just couldn’t bring myself to go that route, so I went with something that I was interested in…

Steve: Okay…

Carole: Which was rustic furniture and decor with an emphasis on hand crafted items, because I had always really respected and liked the items that I would see at craft ship– craft fairs and craft shows. And I had an experience trying to purchase a cow hide chair a couple of years ago and really had trouble finding it, and I thought well if I can’t find it and I know how to search then other people you know are probably having trouble finding you know interesting hand crafted rustic décor. So I put the two together and I created Rustic Artistry where I represent artisans from around the country, who make unique and customizable furniture and décor, and I do marketing and promotion for them in exchange for a commission on any sales that I make.

Steve: Okay, so these people don’t have their own websites of their own, right?

Carole: Well they do, but they are really weak and that’s the thing, that’s why I had to do a lot of digging, a lot of goggling to find them because they are hard to find.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And you know for us who live locally where they may be doing a show, people don’t know about them, so they’re missing out on all this great stuff and the artisans are missing out on a lot of potential customers.

Steve: Okay, so you are essentially a drop shipper is that right?

Carole: Yeah.

Steve: Okay and then, so how do you find these people?

Carole: I had a really fun time for a few months when I first started just looking and looking for different artisans and you know goggling rustic furniture or at around that furniture, and then there`s like a lot of organizations that they might belong to especially like in the ad around axis [phonetic] there is a lot of groups for all these types of people, and then I would just start looking up their names and seeing what I could find and looking at the websites you know that they had or if they had a Facebook page to see their style. And if it was something that made my jaw drop then I would send them an email and propose to represent them and you know get some publicity and exposure for them.

Steve: Okay, and so what is your hit rate? Do you get turned down most of the time or people are generally receptive?

Carole: No, they are generally receptive because these are mostly people that you know, they don’t want to deal with a website and advertising. They want to be sawing and hammering and nailing you know and that kind of stuff creating.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: So they are happy to give up a little of their profit in order to get some more sales and customers in.

Steve: So do you typically source piece by piece or do you just take the whole portfolio of products and list them on you site?

Carole: I pick some of their items. So I might try to have say a dozen from any one particular artisan, and a lot of what I show is pieces that they’ve made in the past. It’s not like these pieces are sitting around waiting to be shipped to someone. You know they are one of a kind pieces that have been made and shipped to another customer, but they are items that they feel that they could recreate closely.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: You know given the nature of sticks and you know natural materials that are used. So I just pick things that I think have a good general appeal out of what they created in the past.

Steve: So that implies that everything is hand and custom made upon order, is that correct?

Carole: Correct, yes.

Steve: Okay which leads– that means there is long lead times involved in everything, right?

Carole: Yes. In fact that’s why I can’t put any of these on Amazon because you are required to ship immediately on Amazon, so it’s not an option for me.

Steve: Okay and then so how does the arrangement work? So someone places an order on your site and then how do you convey that order to your artisan?

Carole: So I have a regular shopping cart on my site, it’s– I have a WooCommerce shopping cart, and when the order comes through to me, then I will forward them to the artisan and you know with email and also speak to them on the phone.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And then they will create the item and ship it directly to my customer, and the artisan will bill me either through pay pal or if they have my credit card on file or you know however they chose to be paid.

Steve: Okay and then– shit I lost my train of thought. So what happens with the photos? So do you get to see these pieces of furniture at all?

Carole: Well, I download photos that they supply to me or that I pick up off of their website or their Facebook page.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: Then if they are creating something new they will, they can send a photo to me, sometimes the customers will send me the photo of the item in their home, so that’s sort of how I handle the photography.

Steve: So you typically don’t see any of these items before they are shipped out or anything?

Carole: Unfortunately no, I wish I could.

Steve: Okay I was just wondering logistically how it works. So what about customer support if someone is unsatisfied with the item, how do you deal with that exactly? Does it go to you or does it go to the artisan?

Carole: It would come through me initially, because I am the contact to the customer.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: So fortunately no one has had an issue to date, but if they did they certainly would approach me and I would do whatever is necessary to make the situation right, then I would need to negotiate with the artisan.

Steve: Okay, and then how many artisans are we talking about here [inaudible 00:10:26].

Carole: I’ve got close to– I’ve got between two and three dozen active right now, and then I have an ever note file of 100, probably more that I you know would like to contact and you know I`m interested in so…

Steve: Okay.

Carole: But right now it’s probably about two dozen or so on the site.

Steve: Okay and so that’s actually sounds like a lot of people to manage and presumably different artisans might have different response rates in terms of shipping and that sort of thing. So what are some of the challenges of running a business like this where you are dealing with so many different players?

Carole: There is sometimes little lag time on you know being able to respond to a customer because they are asking me a question and I have to in turn ask that question to the artisan and wait for their response. So you know I have to let the customer know I got your question and I`m checking on it, and I will get back to you as soon as I can. So I think you end up with a little bit more of emails back and forth. There is a lot more hand holding with the customers because you know with a custom item it has to go back and forth of how they want it and things like that, so there is a lot of customer interaction.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: But the thing is that I`m also you know, I`m making a decent dollar on an item. So it’s not like I`m making only six dollars and I wouldn’t want to put so much time into it. If I`m making several hundred dollars you know it’s worth it for me to have some chats with the customer and you know and they love it. I mean they absolutely love the handle.

Steve: I imagine this furniture is pricy so, does that imply that you have like a phone line as well as email and that sort of thing to handle customer support?

Carole: Yes, I’ve got a phone line, I have got an [inaudible 00:12:21] pop up chat box, and I have contact information all over the website.

Steve: Okay. Okay and then I have actually never sold really-really expensive items. I would imagine the lead times for sale are much longer than just some sort of impulse buy online, right?

Carole: They are, yeah.

Steve: Do you happen to actually know what this time period typically is from like initial customer contact to actually a sale on average?

Carole: I don’t know, I can’t quantify that.

Steve: Okay. So yeah you know Carole I brought you on to talk about Pinterest, but before we talk about Pinterest, I was just curious what are some of the different ways that you get customers to your online store and what is kind of working the best for you right now?

Carole: Well because of the visual nature of what I sell, I get a lot of people to the store who are doing Google image searches. So if they are looking for you know cow hide bar stool, my images all have descriptive tags, and they show up very-very well on Goggle image for my key words.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: So I get organic traffic that way from Google image search, and I`ve also gotten a lot of traffic recently through– this was just pure luck. There was a big company called Crow’s Nest Trading that did a lot of western fashion and décor and they closed last November. And one of the bloggers who had written an article about rustic artistry had also written something about Crow`s Nest Trading, so everybody was coming to her saying where are they where are they, and she finally just wrote a blog post that said they are closed, but here try these other places. And so she mentioned Rustic Artistry and I started getting a ton of traffic from that. So then what I did is, I [Inaudible 00:14:27] even more traffic, I created a landing page called “Looking for Crow’s Nest trading?”

Steve: That’s ingenious.

Carole: And I can’t even tell you how much traffic I get from that, and you know every key word variation you can think of with Crow`s Nest, people have looked and have gotten to my site from that. And then on that landing page I’ve got you know an explanation that they are closed, but here are some similar items, and then I link to a bunch of different categories on my site.

Steve: So is blogger outreach one of you strategies for your store?

Carole: Absolutely yes.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: Mm-huh.

Steve: Okay, so can you talk about that a little bit, so how do you do that, what’s your technique?

Carole: Well it’s a little hard to find home décor blogs that are more rustic themed, it’s just not really the way they go. But I`ve had a lot of success with going towards the western and like the cow girl kind of audience. So there is a blog called Horses In Heals and she wrote a piece about me, and Maverick Style News she wrote a piece. And so those have been really-really helpful and moving forward I have you know a number of other bloggers that I`m going to be reaching out to, to let them know about the site as well and possibly do you know maybe a raffle or giveaway or something like that.

Steve: So what is you’re– so what do you say in your outreach emails, like how do you convince them to cover you?

Carole: I include some photos of pieces that I have right within the email so that they can see if it’s the kind of décor that their readers would probably like.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And I basically try to you know position it that way that this is– these are items that their readers might find unique and interesting. It would be something different for them to show.

Steve: And then they use your images that you send typically for this? And then so back to this landing page thing, sorry to skip around.

Carole: It’s okay.

Steve: So this landing page, did you just buy a new URL and then you just specifically tried to rank for Crow’s Nest or whatever the store was called?

Carole: I literally created it as a page on my word press dashboard for Rustic Artistry.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: So it’s got my regular header and footer and then you know in the middle is that headline looking for Crow’s Nest Trading, and I created in pink monkey which we will probably talk about for Pinterest. I created a nice collage with a bunch of different pieces of furniture that I thought would really appeal to people who had been Crow’s Nest Trading shoppers. So as soon as they landed on the page they would you know see things that looked sort of familiar to them from Crow’s Nest.

Steve: Very smart very smart, and so did you try anything to actually specifically rank for this page? Did you drive links to it, or buy ads on it or anything like that?

Carole: Nope. It’s just because it’s got Crow’s Nest Trading on it, and it shows up as– when you goggle Crow’s Nest Trading it comes up as number two and number one is the article on Horses in Heals where she is referring people to me for that.

Steve: That’s awesome. That’s really awesome, so do you run any paper click ads or anything like that?

Carole: I just signed on with Adrol recently and have started doing some PPC, and I have seen my old ads show up now on other websites that I`m on. But that’s recent; I actually hadn’t been doing any Google PPC until then.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: I have run some Ads on Facebook for Rustic Artistry, usually for a specific piece of furniture, a western type of thing. Don’t think I ever did any to generate likes to the Facebook page, but I do occasionally run product specific ads, or promote a post that shows a product on it.

Steve: The reason why I am asking this question is typically people who drop ship don’t necessarily have the margins to be able to be profitable with their campaigns. So in your experience have your campaigns that you have run all been profitable, and if so what have you done to make them profitable?

Carole: I have gotten sales that I know have come out of Facebook posts and I think promoted posts. It’s really tough Steve for me to quantify a lot of these things because I just don’t have the volume of sales to really analyze it that well. You know there is not enough for me to particularly draw conclusion from at this point.

Steve: Okay. So let’s talk about Pinterest then which is and this is originally– you posted this article on your amazing success with Pinterest. So, I know for our store Pinterest is easily the best converting social media for us too. I think it converts at around 1% of all the Pinterest traffic that we actually get which is really good for our social media, and in some of our stats that I read about your Pinterest account were pretty amazing. So this is where I read that 90% of your pins get at least one re pin, 64% of all your social traffic comes from Pinterest and all of your visitors from Pinterest seem to have a very low bounce rate, is that right?

Carole: Correct, and I just checked last night and that’s– those stats are actually still holding.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: So like I`m getting about two to three times as much traffic to my site from Pinterest as from Facebook and I work both those social media platforms you know pretty hard. I don’t do any other ones, I don’t do Instagram, I don’t do twitter. I just do Facebook and Pinterest and you know I try to be active on them every day, but definitely there is a lot more visitors from Pinterest than from Facebook.

Steve: Okay, and then so what I was hoping to get out of you today is you know from the perspective of a brand new shop owner, let’s say somebody who has just opened up and they want to start focusing on Pinterest. What are some of the very basic things that they should be doing just from a beginner perspective?

Carole: Well the first thing that you want to do is make sure that your Pinterest profile is really well filled out so that you know up on the top there is a good description of your store. So that when people land on your Pinterest page they can you know read in a sentence or two what it is that you are all about, and you can use key words in there because Pinterest is becoming quite the search engine. So it’s good to do that and in fact even each board can have a description and a key word rich description. So it’s important to go through and make sure that those are all properly filled out, and then the next thing that I would suggest is finding some other good pinners or blogs to follow, specifically ones that have a lot of followers themselves.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And then…

Steve: What does that do for you?

Carole: Well that gives you some really good material to re-pin.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And you can look when you start getting their pins in your feed you can see which ones are popular because it will show how many times they’ve been repined. So obviously those are things that resonate with people and those are good ones to re-pin on to your own boards because they will continue to get repined. So you want to get on some boards that already are popular.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And the other thing is you know try to follow some group boards and then get invitation to contribute to group boards. There is a website called pin groupie, which allows you to search for group boards by different categories, and sometimes it can be tricky to get in touch with the owner of the group board although Pinterest now has this message option, when you can message somebody directly. And so I think that’s going to make it a lot easier to contact the owner of the board and say you know, hey I’d like to receive an invitation to contribute to your board.

Steve: Okay and so why would someone want you to contribute, and presumably you have to build up your profile a little bit before you start asking, right?

Carole: I guess so, I would think so. One thing you could do is create your own group board and then start inviting anybody who is following any of your other boards you know let them know that you got a group board and you know need to welcome pinners on it.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: In fact you could promote something like that on Facebook and I’ve done that, I have run Facebook posts that– to send people to my Pinterest pages and to let them know that if you find that what I have posted on Facebook is of interest to you, then check out my Pinterest boards because there is even more good stuff there.

Steve: I see and then the advantage of having a group pin board is that you don’t have to be actively pinning, you can rely on the people who are contributing to do it.

Carole: That and also because now that board shows up on all of their boards. So your exposure is exponentially increased for you know just through that one board.

Steve: Okay but presumably with this group board you have to build it up a little bit yourself otherwise people won’t…

Carole: Yes, you’re correct, you would need to put a bunch of decent pins in yourself just to get it up and running, and then you know start getting other people to pin to it and sending out invitations, there is just a little edit button where you can invite people to your board.

Steve: Okay and then just I’m just curious. How often do you Pin and how many Pins do you do a day?

Carole: I try to Pin every day, that’s not always possible. I would like to Pin at least say 8 to 10 Pins a day.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: Because it’s good to have your Pins sort of spread out throughout the day. People get– people follow a lot of boards and therefore their feeds are so huge that’s there is no way that they’re seeing everything that comes through.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: So if you spread out during the day you have better chance of possibly being you know seen in their feed. I am a beta tester for a scheduling tool by Tailwind and hopefully they will bring that live because that makes it so much easier to get my Pins spread out. Because some days I just have you know I’ll have a half hour I’ll just want to look for good Pins, and if I Pin them all at once, I would basically be spamming somebody’s pin with all my Pins.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And you do not want to do that because people will un-follow you basically.

Steve: So it works a whole lot like Twitter in that respect?

Carole: Yes.

Steve: So I was going to ask that was actually my next question. Is there a way to automate the process because I know there are services out there that do that, what is special about this Tailwind service?

Carole: Tailwind is working on putting something together so that you can just when you– instead of Pinning it you just click schedule. And you can actually set up a schedule for the best days and times and their analytics. It’s a whole analytics program as well.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: You look at the analytics to see when your Pins are most viral and then you can set up your schedule so that you know you got Pins going out every five minutes, say at 8:00 clock on Thursdays from 8:00 to 8:30. And that way you know it’s really the optimized time for your Pins to go live. So that’s the beauty of that option is that you know– or let’s say I’m sitting in bed late at night you know 1:00 clock in the morning and you know I’m adding Pins, but it’s not the best time for them to go live with the…

Steve: Okay.

Carole: Scheduling tool, you know they won’t hit until you know the next morning or whenever it is I set them for.

Steve: Have you ever used viral tag?

Carole: No.

Steve: Okay. It does this similar function, I was just curious. Is Tailwind going to charge or is it going to be a free service?

Carole: I don’t know, I do pay for the analytics. They have a couple of different plans for the analytics. But and it’s really-really a great program for seeing you know what your Pins are doing, who your most influential followers are, what kind of exposure. And you know Pinterest is recently really beefed up the analytics that they provide. And that’s really good, but there is still a lot more that is available in the Tailwind Analytics Program.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And so while so I found it really-really worthwhile.

Steve: So what are some of the things that you’ve done based on the analytics data you’ve gathered through Tailwind?

Carole: I look at which Pins are the most popular, and then I might re-pin that to a different board.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: Or I will use that for a Facebook post because I know it’s an image that is attracting a lot of people. So I also use those analytics to find the new people that are following me, and then I checkout their boards to see if there is somebody that I want to follow. So that helps me you know get new material for my boards.

Steve: Okay and then just a very fundamental question for you. How do you get more followers? I think in that article you mentioned that you grew it pretty dramatically in a matter of months. What did you do during those months to get so many followers?

Carole: Well when I watched Rustic Artistry a year ago this past summer. And I changed my Pinterest account from my personal account into a business account. So I had you know maybe 200 followers as a personal account, and now it’s getting close to 8000. So I’ve noticed over the past few months that like once it started to really get moving that it really became self motivated. You know I’m getting about 30 to 50 new followers a day everyday now.

And that’s with just doing the same amount of work of you know putting 10 to 15 Pins a day, hopefully everyday but not even. So it seems to just sort of self propagate itself after a while. But I do promote my Pinterest boards on Facebook. I’ve got a tab on Facebook that you know lets people know that connects to my Pinterest page like I said I put posts up every once in a while to promote it.

I’ve got a signature on all my emails both my personal and my business emails and I use WiseStamp for that. And it puts my logo and it puts the Pinterest and the Facebook logos on there, and those are clickable, so you know anytime anybody gets an email from me there is an opportunity for them to get over to my Pinterest page and start following it there.

And in addition I’m about to re-launch Rustic Artistry with an entirely new theme. And I’m using the Pinterest widget in the sidebar which picks up about 8 to 10 of your most recent Pins and shows them in the sidebars. So there will be a real active way to promote the Pinterest boards right on my website.

Steve: Okay, so is this a plug in?

Carole: Yeah.

Steve: What is it called?

Carole: This is a Pinterest widget. I think if you go to business.Pinterest.com they have widget builders which is where you can get the Pin It Button so that when and if ever anybody harbors over an image it automatically pops up with a little Pin It Button they can Pin right from there.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And that’s absolutely you know– that’s like step one almost just to make sure you have Pin It Button. But they offer these other options for blogs and for websites that sort of bring the Pinterest board to your website.

Steve: Okay, then what percentage of your Pins are from your own stuff versus other people stuff?

Carole: Very-very few. I’m adamant about not spamming people with my products. And you know I’ve seen businesses and I’ve looked at their Pinterest accounts and every board is nothing but their products. So it’s basically just like their catalog on Pinterest, and that’s a veil interest to Pinners. So you have to have to have a lot of Pins that are just more generic and lifestyle related. And then I’ll pop in every once in a while, I’ll pop in a pin for one of my products. But I do not want to alienate people by just showing picture after picture after picture of my items even if they are you know cool looking.

Steve: So what you are saying is if you just go ahead and Pin of all of your own stuff, you are not going to gather very may followers?

Carole: No you are not and you may actually lose followers. And the thing about that too is that if you go and populate a board with all of your products, then now there is no activity you know. Unless you keep adding Pins no one is going to see it. So there has to be constant fresh content. And that’s why I’m always looking for many-many other pictures, and then you know maybe not even one a day is for my products.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: I use it a lot for brand recognition and to get my name out there so people know the name Rustic Artistry.

Steve: Okay. And then in terms of the actual photo creation, can we talk about how you do it and some of the tools that you use?

Carole: Sure.

Steve: And what is kind of your strategy?

Carole: Yeah there is a couple of good tools out there. There is one called Pinthemall.net and so if you are on a website or like an article that’s got multiple pictures, for example I might be on a website for a local manufacturer, and there is a whole bunch of great photos on their site. With Pinthemall.net it actually catches all those photos and lets you select which ones you want to include in your Pin, and it automatically puts them in a big tall stack and then you can write your description and post it right to Pinterest.

In fact I think you can post it to other social media as well. But it’s a nice way to get a whole bunch of Pins in a big stack without having to save them all to your computer and then upload them to you know an imaging app.

Steve: So it’s like a photo collage tool so to speak?

Carole: Pretty much yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And it just does a vertical stack. So like I might do up to maybe up to 5 pictures, if you go too-too deep Pinterest does cut it off and even somebody has to click on to see the entire thing. So I don’t go too much more than five, but it’s helpful or like let’s say you wanted to do– you had a tutorial for example on you know on your website you could pick the five photos that are associated with that tutorial, and it would just put them all together in a nice little row.

Steve: I see. Nice.

Carole: That’s a really quick and easy way to get a good tall vertical Pin.

Steve: What is your feeling on text? Do you always put text in your photos?

Carole: I put text in my photos if I’m specifically creating a Pin to drive email sign ups, or to announce that I’ve got a new board. So in that case I will go and use PicMonkey and which I know a lot of people are using PicMonkey now, and that may has a collage builder and you can set it up to any form that you want. But usually its best to just do picture stack one on top of the other.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And then I might take one of those boxes and instead of putting a photo in I’ll put text in, and so I’ll say you know check out my new board on western décor.

Steve: Interesting.

Carole: And I’ll post that on a different board so you know people will see it. And I’ve also used really great success on driving email sign ups and I had for example a newsletter that was all about decorating with cow hide, or I heard another one it was about buffalo plaid, and I did Pins that had several photos from that and then a text box in it saying you know if you want to get ideas for how to decorate with cow hide sign up for this newsletter. And then in the Pin description was the link to my newsletter sign up. So if they clicked the Pin or they clicked the description, it brings them right to my sign up form.

Steve: Okay. And what do you use to collect the email addresses?

Carole: I’m on Mad Mimi now as a matter of fact I actually…

Steve: Interesting.

Carole: Had been on had been on Infusionsoft and I’m going to switch to Mad Mimi because it turns out that I just don’t need all that Infusionsoft offers.

Steve: Okay. That’s surprising most people because it costs like $1000 just to join, right?

Carole: Yeah. It was a lot, it was a big chunk of change.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And you know I waited a while before I did it and then I finally decided you know I just– I’m going to bite the bullet and do it. And it’s a great platform and you know you can make great drip campaigns on it. But I just– I can do pretty much everything that I need on Mad Mimi and I like the design of the emails so much better.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: So I’m just going to cut my losses.

Steve: Okay. And then question I had about Pins, so it sounds like the majority of Pins do not have texts, but occasionally if you want to promote something you put some text in there, right?

Carole: That’s exactly right, yes.

Steve: So what about a price tag on the Pins? Do you recommend doing that?

Carole: I generally don’t. I have tried it on some Pins because I read consistently that that helps drive clicks to your website. So sometimes I do put a price in there, but I couldn’t really say whether it’s helpful or not.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And you know especially with expensive furniture like I’m kind of scared to put that right out there.

Steve: That’s true yes.

Carole: You know I’m afraid if I say this $5000 it’s like well you know why would I even bother clicking over. But if I could get somebody to click over to look at that sofa then they might start moving around the rest of the website and see something else they like.

Steve: Right, okay that makes sense.

Carole: So I think it’s a factor of you know what your price points are.

Steve: Okay. And then I remember reading that you are trying Pinterest ads. Have you actually spent any money on that yet?

Carole: So I did try Pinterest ad and I ran an ad for one of these sofas and the way you do it on these ads is you have to– you put in whatever keywords you want, and then they let you do a little bit of targeting. You can target some metropolitan areas, you can target gender and language, so I don’t think the targeting is that good. And when I looked at the results that I got from that I really was less than thrilled because I get better re-Pins and clicks organically from that Pin than I did from promoting it.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: So I’m doing it– I’m running another experiment now with a much less expensive item it’s a $100 item, and I’m going to see how that compares. So I Pinned it to my board at the same time that I started running the ad and I’ll really be able to I think compare you know what kind of interest people have organically versus whoever Pinterest is showing this to.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of getting charged is it just per click or…?

Carole: Yes it’s just per click. So you know it cost me like $35 or something to run that sofa ad for a few weeks. It really wasn’t that much. And you know if I had gotten one sale out of it, it would certainly be worthwhile because of you know…

Steve: Sure.

Carole: The profit margin on that item.

Steve: And in terms of just cost per click I mean it’s a pretty new service right? Is it even out for the general public yet?

Carole: I think it’s out for the general public in the US. I know it’s not available in Canada yet.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And I’m not sure whether I was you know selected to receive an invitation to it or whether that went out to everybody, but I did get an email from Pinterest saying you know you can now do this.

Steve: Okay. And here is just a question from my own personal experience. There is this one competitor of ours that actually Pins our photos but uses her URL. Is that something that’s legal or is that…

Carole: Wow, that’s just really bad for him.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: I mean that’s– that is such a slimy thing to do. I don’t know if there is anything you can do about that because I know for a fact that Pinterest can’t go in and change the URL for a Pin, because I was trying to do that with my email sign up because it was linked to Infusionsoft and now I needed a link to Mad Mimi.

Steve: Sure-sure.

Carole: So I just created a new Pin, but I did check with them to see if they could change it and they can’t.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: So that just stinks basically.

Steve: Okay, yeah I was just curious if you know people do that, I mean it’s a little annoying right? Because she is essentially using our intellectual property to drive traffic to her site.

Carole: Yeah I mean you might just want to try and sue if she persists right after that.

Steve: Okay. And you know on a holistic level you know all the marketing strategies that you typically employ for your store, where does Pinterest fall on that hierarchy? So when it comes to like SEO, Facebook, Pinterest, all the different things that you do?

Carole: I would say that Pinterest falls really quite high for me and for anybody that has products that are visually interesting or are related to– you know you can really tie any product into things that are visually interesting for example Shivani Yoga. They are doing really well with Pinterest and it’s not that they are showing pictures of yoga, like they created a blog that’s all about yoga because they know that people that do yoga eat yoghurt.

So they created a lifestyle board like that and like the Four Seasons Hotels they’ve got a board that highlights restaurants, good restaurants in all of the cities where they have a hotel. So it’s not promoting their hotels per say, but it’s getting people on their account. And then once you know so if somebody is following the restaurant board they’ll be– you know they might just sign up to follow all the boards.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: So it’s really important to you know make sure that you are Pinning a lot– a wide variety of things that relate to the lifestyle and the interest of your customers even if that doesn’t have something specific to do with your product.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And I’d imagine you guys are doing that and probably have you know bride– some things like that…

Steve: Ours is easy yeah, we’ve got wedding stuff so yeah.

Carole: It totally lends itself to that. One other thing I’d like to you know mention is there is a lot of great sources out there for getting good photos. And for example I will go to the websites of manufacturers of log homes or architects or interior designers or magazines that might follow us with like and either I will bookmark those sites so that I can remember them and come back to them, or I will subscribe to their emails and then I will open up the emails with specific purpose of just seeing if there is any good photos in there that I would want to Pin.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: So I would suggest that you know people do that as a source for fresh material because certainly you can just re-Pin other things that you are following. But it’s really-really good to you know put new content into Pinterest as well.

Steve: So in terms of your daily Pins do you try to look for the majority of Pins to be brand new things, or like what’s the breakdown of re-Pins versus new Pins?

Carole: I’ve been doing a lot more new Pins lately because I just haven’t had the time to get onto my feed.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: But it’s probably pretty equal. You know there is certainly nothing the matter with re-Pinning.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: I mean that’s really the beauty of Pinterest is that things do get re-Pinned.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: But you know a lot of times it’s I like to see new stuff because I find that even when I go through my feed most of what I’m seeing I know I’ve already Pinned previously.

Steve: Okay and then you recommend everyone who runs a business to actually sign up for a business account. Is that correct?

Carole: Absolutely yes.

Steve: Okay. Outside the analytics what’s the other benefit? Is it pra…

Carole: It gives the– allows you to have a link to your Facebook page on that as well. And I guess it’s really the analytics.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And the board that come up customer service that you can get from Pinterest.

Steve: Okay. And then where did you learn all of your Pinterest tactics? Did you read any books? Take any courses? Anything you recommend?

Carole: Melanie Duncan I think does some pretty good trainings on Pinterest. And then I had gotten some books and you know I just looked for blog articles. I read all kinds of blog articles on it. I was approached by a woman who writes for NewspaperGirl and there is a Facebook page I could think of it on Pinterest.

Steve: Okay. You can tell me later.

Carole: Yeah I will tell you later. And you know so there is lots of good material on that as well.

Steve: Okay. Hey well Carole we’ve been talking for 45 minutes I want to be respectful of your time. You supplied of lot of great stuff.

Carole: Good thank you.

Steve: If anyone out there has any questions for you where can they find you?

Carole: They can reach me through Rusticartistry.com, there is certainly lots of ways to contact me on that, it’s Carole with an ‘E’ @Rusticartistry.com.

Steve: Okay. Sounds good Carole and thanks a lot for coming on the show, I learnt a lot.

Carole: It was my pleasure Steve.

Steve: Alright thanks Carole.

Carole: Okay.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that interview. Even though we’ve only met face to face once, Carole is just one of those people who is constantly learning new things and she always offers excellent tips whether it be about Pinterest, or other ways of marketing an online store. For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode52, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to ITunes and leave me a review.

When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps to keep this podcast up in the ranks so that other people can use this information, find the show very easily and get awesome business advice from my guest. It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information go to mywifequiteherjob.com/contest, and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

051: How Mike Crowley Created The 94Fifty Sensor Basketball – A Top 25 Invention Of The Year

94fifty

Mike Crowley is the founder of 94Fifty.com, a company that produces sensor basketballs and is perhaps the coolest technology that I’ve seen come out in a long time. Here’s a video below of how his product works.

In this podcast, you’ll learn how Mike developed this product and how he leveraged Kickstarter to generate massive buzz. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Mike came up with the idea to create a basketball training tool
  • How Mike raised over 130,000 in a kickstarter campaign for his product
  • How to use Kickstarter to improve the visibility of your business
  • How to create a complex product like a sensor basketball
  • The difference between getting angel investors versus doing a kickstarter
  • How to set up a successful kickstarter campaign
  • The most important aspect of a good kickstarter campaign
  • How Mike got the word out about his company and kickstarter

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have a very special guest on the show Mike Crowley. Now Mike is the founder and CEO of 94fifty.com which is a company that creates freakishly smart sensor basketballs. Now here’s how they work, embedded in each 94fifty ball are a bunch of sensors that are programmed to measure things that you can’t really see with the human eye. So things like how the ball spins, how it leaves your hand, how you dribble, and then along with a phone app it helps you train to become a better basketball player.

Now since this is an audio podcast and I can’t really adequately express in words how cool these basketballs are, I’m going to link up to the demo video in the show notes so you can check it out yourself. Now mike is actually the first person that I’ve had on the show that has had a successful kick starter campaign, and he managed to raise over $130,000 in 30 days. Now before we start I just want to let the listeners know that I’m currently in negotiations with Mike to make this technology exclusive to Asians, so that we can have more Jeremy Lin in the NBA, and with that welcome to show Mike. How are you doing today?

Mike: Good Steve thanks for having me.

Steve: So can you give us the quick background story, tell us how you came up with the idea for 94fifty?

Mike: Well sure the– I’m from Indiana, so that’s the very first and probably most important thing. We’ve known to play the game a little bit in that state, and like many others it’s the one sport that I had a passion for since probably I was one or two. So that I was predispositioned to basketball and I knew the game very well. I’ve been taught the game by many great coaches, but over the last maybe 10 or 15 years you can see that there was this shift in the way that players were learning not just this game but just sports in general.

The younger athletes because they had been so exposed to not only the internet, but mobile devices and the instantaneous nature of information and expectation for results, you could see that there is a difference in the way that they were learning, or their the need for learning particularly very complex motions that are boring to practice. So we took that basic concept. How can we address that need? We talked to a lot of coaches, players, parents and there’s clearly a need for it and develop something that worked in the exact same way that people were used to.

So it had to be invisible from a tech standpoint but gave this experience to the player where they could get that instant feedback about whether or not they are doing something right. So that we could turn any parent whether they knew anything about the game and they were pretty elite coach, and then gave that 24 hour access to hey if I want to get better and I want to see an improvement in my confidence on the court or in other case in other sports that they can have access to it in an affordable way. So that’s really the evidence for where the business started and then from there to try to build that product into that initial vision was really the challenge, but that I came– started in Indiana and then carried right through to the modern day tech world.

Steve: And you played in college as well, right?

Mike: I did yeah, I played at St. Joseph’s college division two school in Indiana so…

Steve: Okay.

Mike: I’ve got my feel all the way through college ranks.

Steve: Yeah and did you– have you coached at all before or is this just a passion of yours in general?

Mike: You know I haven’t coached at the team level. I went into the business world after school and stayed there, but I’ve trained many-many kids over the years hundreds and hundreds, how to play, how to shoot. So I have a pretty good feel for what it takes to be a trainer, but no I did not have any formal coaching.

Steve: Okay and I thought I just ask you know are you a technical guy at all?

Mike: I only pretend to be one on podcasts like this, no I’ve got a business background, I just surround myself with a lot of very smart technical people.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: And it makes a great combination for the business.

Steve: Yes I was going to ask you something. So I’m a hardware engineer with a background into software and I’m fairly confident that I could take a reasonable stab at creating the guts of a sensor ball with some algorithm help, but to create a product like this requires a combination of everything including mechanical design hardware design, as well as you I design. So how does one kind of execute on such a complicated product from the beginning, so how did you get started with def process and assemble the team?

Mike: Yeah so we you know the company when I founded it we started with the really difficult part at the time with how do you build algorithms that can recognize that something is happening with the sensor. A motion sensor can’t see it just senses motion. So how do you build those programs and say the sensors know or can recognize that something has happened and it’s reliable and accurate. So that was my co founder Kevin King, he had his PhD in that area for sports sensor development and algorithms…

Steve: Okay.

Mike: But from that then you had to go out and find somebody who is very good at assimilating all of that technology into a full system. You know a product and it just so happens that one of the guys I grew up with my little town in Indiana who was my college roommate was one of the world’s best people doing it. He started you know working on internet stuff back in the early 90s and has done some amazing simulations of technology over the years. And he was working for Accenture bringing Bluetooth products out to market.

We brought him into the company a few years ago and said help us do this with Bluetooth and you know hardware and algorithms and everything else that goes with it, because there are a bunch, it’s very complex. And from that project management experience with the right technical people behind it, you can start to pull together what the guts of it look like. But then at the end of it the real key is to have a really good understanding of your customer and the experiences that you want them to have. Because the tech is just the enabling piece but you’ve got to be able to deliver it in a way that people can understand information they are getting.

It’s more than just getting a number to somebody. You have to say here is your number and here’s what you have to do about it to get better, and that’s the real piece that I think we’ve innovated with this that drove the tech requirements, because we wanted to have this experience that as soon as the ball is taken out of the box people can understand right away that it’s different and responsive and it’s there, you know it’s there for them and it’s very accurate. And that was really the whole key to it to bring it together and bring it to life.

Steve: So in terms of your initial team who were your core people and what were their competencies when you were putting together the team?

Mike: Yeah so we have obviously project management from the tech side. So you have to understand all of the technologies and how to manage that, and then we have the PhD level algorithm hardware assimilator which is the co founder Kevin King. Then we have a lot of embedded system engineers, mechanical engineers, those types of people that can also be multidimensional, but then focus on specific areas of turning this you know all these things to very reliable systems– embedded systems that go into a product. So that when somebody uses it they aren’t going to break and it’s going to turn on every time, and you know all the little things that count to that customer experience.

Steve: So in terms of so you live in you said Massachusetts Indiana, was it you grew up in Indiana. Outside of your core team, how did you actually find the engineers and the staff? Like we live out in Silicon Valley and there’s a lot of those embedded system guys out here, but out there I’d imagine there’s a lot less.

Mike: There are although we find them all over the place. So you know people move our engineering is in Ohio. So a ton of people will move there because we’re passionate about what we do you know they love the fact that we’re in the sports world, that we’re really innovating and pushing the envelope of what sports product or fitness product can do, and what they mean in the future. So when you have an exciting story like that with really innovative award winning technology– we have won the larger awards, it’s truly not that hard to find the people, they’ll find you…

Steve: Okay.

Mike: You’re not going to get too many to move from Silicon Valley to Ohio, but there’s not a monopoly out there. They’re very plenty of very good talented people across the country.

Steve: Okay yeah so you know I wanted to talk kind of about the early stages and your kick starter campaign. So I think I originally found out about you guys– I think it was from tech crunch but I can’t remember but there’s a lot of buzz about your kick starter campaign. So one of my questions was why did you decide to do a kick starter as opposed to other ways of raising money?

Mike: Well you know we’ve been successful raising capital, so it wasn’t necessarily a need for raising money that drove our desire to do a kick starter. But we did think because this was on a very early part of our launch plan for the product, for the basketball product, that it was a great way to build awareness and early I guess prototype validation that we’re on the right path. And you know it does get a ton of– you know the media launch is what happens on kick starter. So you know the plan was if we could at least pay for the cost of what it takes to do a kick starter campaign and be committed to it, it’s a great launch plan for the rest of the product and I think that held true.

So you know we had $100,000 goal and I think we raised $130,000 which was good, it was good it was solid. What it drove for us was just a ton of early press before we even had a product on the market. It attracted the attention of Apple, and we launched a product in Apple stores that was successful, a bunch of retailers saw it. So it gave that validation in the market, I think that was really our main goal and I think we were very successful in hitting that goal.

Steve: So you used your kick starter as a marketing vehicle as opposed to just for purely money raising reasons?

Mike: Yeah I think for money raising standpoint if you’re doing a very sophisticated tech product you know to launch it you know you need to be able to raise a couple of million bucks out of a program like that to really have a meaningful impact on the launch of the business.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: And we didn’t expect that we would do on the best. I think for us it was part of our launch plan which we could pay for you know through the kick starter funds, and then really help to spring board to the next level where we needed to go from you know early prototypes up to market. I think that was successful because all those early little things that come from kick starter, the awareness, the media coverage, the contacts with the retailers, it helps give confidence to the investor that you do have that you’re on the right path, and get you from point A to actually taking a product to market which is– that’s 20% is the most difficult piece of the equation. And that’s really kick starter has helped you go from the 80% to the 100% mark, and it accelerated that for us.

Steve: Okay and then so did you have a working prototype before launching the kick starter?

Mike: We did, you know we had reached that prototype stage and I think if you found our kick starter video, you’ll see it working. Those are actually working prototypes that we used in creating that video, but it was far from product ready you know being ready to launch. So we still had quite a bit of work to do to get to where we could put it into the Apple store and be confident it was going to be reliable, and deliver the experience we wanted.

Steve: Okay. So at that point you hadn’t had any volume manufacturing, and then this kick starter campaign kind of funded that first run, is that…?

Mike: Well it did, it helped fund that first run although when you are going out and producing in tens of thousands of units and you have to do it over seas, it funds it to a certain degree, but I think it helps bring the validation in the market that gave our current investors even some new investor’s confidence that we could go all the way with it, and so…

Steve: Okay.

Mike: In that sense yes it helped us go from prototype out to market because it does all those other intangible things for you, which is important; it’s an important piece of a thing. I think it’s a rare case where kick starter funds the whole thing. There’s a few stories like that, like the pebbles of the world and a few others, those are the exceptions, they are on the long end of the tail, not [Inaudible] [00:13:04].

Steve: I see that’s interesting, so you would say a lot a lot of these companies going kick starter just to kind of generate the buzz in the marketing?

Mike: You know it’s hard for me to say what their intentions are when they go on. I knew what ours were you know so we did not believe because our product was a little narrow. It wasn’t you know a wearable for example where you’d have that many potential customers. So I think we went in realistic. There may be a lot of companies that go in there thinking this is going to– I’m going to you know be the next pebble and they put all of their planning into having that kind of volume.

But I think it’s a very risky strategy because kick starter has gotten to a point where it’s not the novelty that it was, it’s much harder to raise that kind of money, and I think you really need to have an alternate plan or at least understand where this fits into your ultimate plan rather than being the sole plan, and I don’t know if other companies go in with that. I suspect that they do and they’re disappointed a lot because there’s a lot of competition in the you know the crowd funding space, and it’s gotten a little stale you know it’s much tougher to hit those numbers anymore.

Steve: So I was just thinking if I could get your take on kick starter for raising money versus angel funding versus VCN, kind of what was your thought process in terms of just raising money?

Mike: Well raising capital is a full time job whether it’s kick starter, angel or VC you got to know what’s your plan is and it takes a lot of time to get that right. So for example even with kick starter it is a very intensive, it is a time intensive month. The only thing you’re doing for those 30 days is trying to figure out how to get the word out about your kick starter campaign and it just consumes you. But to make it successful you have to spend the two months to three months before that really planning it out to get it done right, and that’s no different then, whether or not you’re doing it with kick starter or Angel or trying to raise VC money. It’s about your plan and how well thought out the time you put in to the though process to be successful with it. So I think kick starter is part of the early funding plan.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: Whether you choose to go Angel or VC, that’s really the type of company you have in the market you have and it’s really difficult to make a general statement about it.

Steve: Sure.

Mike: But it all requires the same thing as you’ve got to be very well thought out and you have to have tons of validation that you’re on the right path and that’s where success comes from.

Steve: Okay. So let’s talk about some of the things that you said about kick starter. You said that first 30 days was very intense. So what were some of the things– so first of all what’s the process involved in creating a kick starter campaign?

Mike: Yeah that’s a good question. So the real process is you know you’re going to create a very good video you know a visual for people to understand what you’re doing and tells a good story, and that’s takes a lot of planning. You’ve got to have the right you know team that’s– and not always internal, sometimes you’re going to bring outside help and we did that can help direct the shots and scripts and get everything put together and that takes about a month to do it right, just to get it filmed and edited. And so once the video is ready and towards the end of that the last week you’re applying for the kick starter, you’ve got to get in that information, so it’s just about a week of just prep to get approved by kick starter.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: But once it goes live is really where the time intensive work comes to play, and part of the process heading up to that it really helps if you have a really strong social media connection or network because you’re going to rely on the network out of the gate to give it it’s jump it’s pop in the first you know 5-10 hours.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: You really want to see a whole bunch of people coming in and supporting right out of the gate, because again it validates to the rest of the kick starter market that there’s something hot here. Now the worst thing you want to do is stall out, or kind of come out of there with no momentum because then it [Inaudible] [00:16:52] it must not be very good. So if you can leverage the fact that you got the network right out of the gate where everybody knows it’s coming as soon as it’s live, you get it out to that network and they’re all chipping in you know they’re all supporting you, that’s the first like three to five days, but then…

Steve: Okay.

Mike: Then the next part of it though and the real grind is day five to days 30 or you know day 28 because you’ve used up your initial network and now you’ve got to go and find new, and it’s just a constant network of social media and social media and more social media and everything you can imagine to bring out the awareness and could build out that viral component to what you are doing where it takes out a life of its own you know other people are talking about it, that’s the whole key to the difference between the very big kick starter campaigns and the ones that push through moderately well.

Steve: So let’s dig a little bit deeper so how did you establish that initial social media network for that initial pop?

Mike: You know you do it let’s say you’re going to do that six months before you know if you go in with no social media network at all you’re not going to be successful, it’s just too hard. You’ve got to have– this is something that if you’ve got a business that you’ve been working on you should be developing that network all the time. You should be getting lots of followers on Twitter, lots of likes on your Facebook page, if you don’t have them you need them, you should be using Pinterest. You should be in all of the different social media assets that are free and readily available; you need to be developing them.

Steve: So what are some of the things that you did to– so what did you focus on; Facebook, Pinterest, was there any one social media platform that you focused on or?

Mike: It was mostly Twitter and Facebook for us.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: Pinterest at the time we did was vague, but it was a medium we weren’t very confident in using yet. We didn’t know how to leverage that, and so our presence was a lot smaller you know we had a lot because we had a lot of beta stock you know beta products trusting with previous year and half. We had a pretty good email list that we could tap into, you know a lot of contacts in there of different coaches and players and things that could spread the word.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: So we leveraged you know we just went it’s kind of old school now, we went email that’s what we focused on.

Steve: It’s not old school at all actually yeah everyone relies on it. So you were gathering email addresses from the teams and the players that you were kind of… ?

Mike: Yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: We had over 25,000 different players that had used our beta product in some way shape or form that we had access to heading into that. So we leveraged that obviously pretty intensively heading into this, but we had we had a pretty good you know starting point of all the assets that we could get out with it well.

Steve: So 25,000 is actually a lot of people, so you’re saying that 25,000 people actually tried out your balls prior to the kick starter?

Mike: Not these balls. So we had a beta form of the ball, the systems that we would sell, the team so they could use with their groups of players and camps and practices and it was just a very primitive form of this, it wasn’t the Bluetooth version.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: But it allowed for a lot of data collection from lots of players because you can run through 100 players in a couple of hours. So we had a bunch of those all over the world, we had 100 of those systems all over the world, that were just constantly collecting information and data for us that help drive the requirements for the new product, but with that we would be collecting information about who these people were and we could go back and talk to them, that was the whole point.

Steve: I see, okay so the ball that was going around was not the final polished version, it was more like a data collection device.

Mike: Yeah it was a Wi-Fi ball that we’d talked to a dedicated laptop that we would supply with the two balls that we would send out, and it was only for team use, it wasn’t for the consumer, it was for a team.

Steve: Got it.

Mike: And when a team would use it, they would technically use it with anywhere from 20-200 players in over the course of a month.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: If you get hundreds of those around the world, you’re collecting data and you’re collecting tons of data.

Steve: Yes.

Mike: That’s what the whole point of that was.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of your Facebook strategy were you buy likes, were you driving ads to your site, how were you generating buzz on Facebook?

Mike: You know that really comes down to the quality of your video and your ability to make things go viral, so we didn’t spend any money on buying likes and doing that kind of thing.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: We kept our budget to what went into the front end of it, so we spent a lot of time you know it’s the little stuff, it’s the grind. So if somebody likes you on Twitter for example or likes you on Facebook or follows you on Twitter you need to follow them back and then you need to encourage them to retweet and build that network. And so it seems like it’s very Minusha driven you know every like and every follow counts, that’s what it comes down to, you’ve got to be prepared, that’s the grind of that day five through 25.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: Mentally you have to be ready for because unless you have a million people you’re coming in with. If you don’t, you feel like everybody else, you’re going to run through that initial network in about five days.

Steve: Right.

Mike: And the whole trick is how do you turn any newcomers into that into somebody who also goes out and shares with somebody else, and that is just I mean it is I call it a grind because that is what it was, you just have to work it and you have to be prepared for that mentally.

Steve: Okay. So let’s talk about the grind for a bit. So how did you get some publicity and you know can you kind of describe the grind? What are the things that you were doing just to kind of reach out to people?

Mike: Well that’s the other part of it that I haven’t touched on. So one of the other parts of the plan is we did retain some independent PR experts, not a firm but they had a lot of years in PR and we had a little one month contract with them to help us build a buzz about the kick starter campaign and the product. So the other big part of our strategy that was beyond just the social media was we put out there that this product was coming, and in our case the media loved it, I mean they locked on to it very early and they wrote about it extensively. I think we had about 400 articles that were written about it in a one month time period.

Steve: Wow, okay.

Mike: So every time one of those articles was written, it expanded our universe immensely. So I’m a big believer in PR if you do it right and if you have the right story and right product. It could be immensely valuable, and it is probably one of the key parts of our strategy even today, where the media really likes this product, it’s a tactile very physical object that people can see or amazed by. So we use that to our advantage. Now I don’t know if every other product is going to have that same potential, but it was hugely important to us as we did it.

Steve: Yeah I can completely see that I mean as soon as I watched that first video, I knew your product is very compelling and you had an awesome story. So I can imagine something like that would just naturally generate buzz. I’m sure your PR person had a much easier job with your product than maybe some of their other clients.

Mike: Well you know it’s easy when it clicks, if it doesn’t click then you know it’s not so easy but in this case it took on a life of its own. So I talked about the viral nature and what can happen in social media. Our viral uptake was on the media side you know we just got a ton of press and that we did it in March, it was the month of March, and then that press was what generated the awareness to retailers and others and allowed us to carry it forward. And in fact generated a whole another round of PR for us and holiday when we launched, because it had been on kick starter, people were watching it, we were visible now to the world you now they took us seriously.

Steve: Okay and then I had to ask this question so in terms of approaching the NBA, did you do that earlier on or was it just after this press wave happened?

Mike: Well, approaching the NBA in what way, so what…?

Steve: Teams I guess.

Mike: So we have never really approached the NBA in that manner and there’s a pretty simple reason, there’s only 32 teams and they’re only going to buy so much product, so there’s…

Steve: Okay.

Mike: To get validation from the NBA is a whole different animal that I don’t think we want to talk about it really quick in the podcast. I don’t know if this is a good area for it, but to come back to your question is this working with validators in the market, that we think would have an influence in our market and our market is 818.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: What we found in our surveys in our studies that we did in building the product is that the college level coaches were far more influential on the normal family, because I think that in our market that it’s for any player that has an aspiration not necessarily to play in college, but they just want to get better and they want to have more confidence. They want to perform a little better and they’re willing to practice and we give them a better way to do that. It’s more responsive et cetera et cetera, but the college voice is more influential to that market, we found that in the NBA voice.

So we went out and sought out partnerships with like the national association of basketball coaches, but all the college level coaches and the organization that they’re a part of, and that’s what we use today as more of an influencing factor to validate that what we measure is real and it helps and it’s used by that level and it’s useful. So that’s where we put our focus, it was initially the NBA.

Steve: I guess that makes complete sense, your target market is younger kids who are aspiring to become really good players.

Mike: Yeah.

Steve: So if you can just kind of break down your sales. I’m not going to ask you about numbers but where do you make the majority of your sales today. Is it through the internet? Is it through the Apple Stores? How does the sales strategy play out?

Mike: Yeah, so you know for this holiday we started with Apple and they were a dominant provider or distributor for us last year when we launched. We were exclusive in apple and online 94fifty net sales and then partially because that’s all we could produce for last year.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: The product wasn’t ready until mid November, so we were even a little late to the party. But this year our strategy has been how do we expand that? So we have run Amazon now which is a big distributor for us in East Bay and Dicks Online, and we try to focus right now. We even have a big retailer up in Canada called Sport Check which is both in store and online. But we– the product is still so different and new.

And because it looks like a regular basketball, but it costs a lot more you still have the story have to tell. And we found that telling it through video and giving people more time to understand what they are purchasing and the benefits is best done online. So most of our distribution today is done through online channels through either our own 94fifty.com or partners that can use the assets that we create, and so it’s about 50/50 right now.

We do about 50% of our own and 50% of our distributions through partners. And we have a pretty strong international distribution at this point. And we have markets like Asia and China really start to pop for us because they love to play the sport over there. So it’s a pretty good mix and you know we really take our time in evaluating who is going to commit to really helping customers understand the value prop.

And it’s not just about stocking it in the store because it is an expensive product to build and you know it’s a whole different animal when you are running a retail, you got to do that right. So we’ve taken a pretty measured approach to how we get distribution out there and how we achieve the you know the production capacity really is our biggest constraint. We can produce so much and we sell so much and that’s it. You know it’s not like we can prop up a million of these tomorrow. It takes time.

Steve: Right. I actually I had a couple of questions on your retail strategy. I interviewed someone in the past where they had a very high end product and they put in retail stores, but they weren’t doing an adequate job of pointing out the benefits.

Mike: That’s right.

Steve: They were sitting here with the product that was very expensive compared to the rest. And so I would imagine you know your basketball looks like all the other basketballs and it feels the same, so in these retail outlets is there like a huge station set up where there is a video and then it can really educate the customer about why they should buy your product?

Mike: What we found with retailers in general with the internet of things type products they are starting to think this way, but they really have been caught a little flat footed in that there this wave of products. Not just basketballs but just about everything you can imagine that has the same problem that you have with the smart product. It is designed to look and feel exactly like the product.

It isn’t smart because that’s what people– that’s how they know how to use it. But the value prop is totally different because the information you get out of it and it is going to be more expensive. But retailers in general were not prepared for the pace at which these products enter the market including ours. And so they are just now starting to build those strategies is to how we set up these areas within the stores to deliver that value prop in a way that somebody will buy it in a retail setting in volume.

And a few companies have figured out that you know like a nest for example and how they get to retail, but the vast majority of them they struggle with how you educate both the employees that need to sell them and the customers that want to buy them. And it’s very time intensive and costly. So our approach has been when we see a retailer who sort of gets it we work with them, but if we feel like it’s pushing a string that the retailers aren’t ready, we just disengage and move on.

And because there are other avenues in which ways you can sell these products they are just as effective. But the market is still just I think a tad bit behind and I think you’ll start to see retailers and customers will see retailers really dedicating more space and time to developing the winning smart products strategy probably within the next 12-18 months.

Steve: The reason why I asked that question is I think earlier you alluded to the fact that your earlier sales were from the Apple Store, right?

Mike: Mm-huh.

Steve: As opposed to focusing more you had limited inventory it sounded like, right?

Mike: Yeah.

Steve: So the allocation of that it sounds like you allocated a big chunk of the Apple store as opposed to your own online efforts and I was just curious why that was the case?

Mike: Well they had 250 stores.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: So you know in order to supply that many stores where we started in you know they need to have not only what they put on the shop but they need to have an inventory and they need to have a couple of weeks backlog. So just by the nature of trying to go into that many stores out of the gate, they’re going to get a good chunk of it, but it was you know we reserved the knock that we could adequately supply internally as well. I think we did a pretty good job of broadcasting. If you want to immediately jump into that many stores that sell that much, you’ve got to have product you know be prepared to commit it.

Steve: How do you forecast the allocation, or make these estimates?

Mike: You know you’ve got to work with the retailer they do the best they can but our new products nobody really knows so…

Steve: Right.

Mike: You know you work with them for a couple of months and you know you try to do the best you can and say this is what we think but nobody has ever sold the product, seen the product, used the product, in the market, so how do you make that work? You know…

Steve: Yeah okay, yeah I was just…

Mike: It’s really a best guess in everybody’s part and…

Steve: Okay.

Mike: That’s the best kind of advice I can give there is no magic bullet to it I think.

Steve: Okay. So let’s talk a little bit about manufacturing. So you mentioned that earlier that these balls are manufactured overseas. So what is the process of such a complicated product you know you have the ball, the mechanical aspects of it, then you’ve got the you know the circuitry and that sort of thing, so how does that all come together?

Mike: Oh wow the– you know when you’re dealing with smart products you’ve got PCBs or circuit boards and all the components. The hardest part about it is you’re carrying the components, you know there’s roughly 70 to 80 different little pieces that go into this and they come from many different vendors, and the thing that’s happening is because there are so many products that are using these same components, it could be the least costly little thing on your PCB, but its n the highest demand and you’re going to get stocked out if you’re going to wait for it. So one of the hardest things to manage is the lead times which you have to allocate to just secure the parts to get it into manufacturing. That can take three months if you start from scratch sometimes four.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: So accounting for lead times is very difficult and then you know we’re not doing we’re not– you’re competing with you know the smart phone maker, so you’re not buying in the millions of units a month to start.

Steve: Right.

Mike: So you’re always at the bottom of the totem pole. We did a very good job of managing and really building strong relationships with the big vendors with the key parts so that they liked us and we really helped them with some really cool things with our basketballs that they wanted to do. You know it’s really just a matter of trying to make as many friends as you can so that you can ask for the favor and say I need this part, can you reserve you know 25,000 pieces for us for a run next month, and they will always find a way to help you.

But once you get all the parts, then you’ve got to have a very good contract manufacturing relationship, you want to do it as low cost as you can. You’ve got to have all the receipts and contacts now that we looked at both, but the key thing for us is that the inflatables industry which is basketball, soccer ball et cetera, is completely overseas now. That moved over there 30 years ago, so there’s no way we could finish our product unless we did it in China or overseas.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: There is just no way, it’s just not in the US anymore. So once that was the case, we just made the decision as you may as well have both of those components done as close together as possible because you eliminate risk of trying to ship things overseas, and trying to get parts here and there and we tried to put it all into a geographic area that was very-very close together, and that was our strategy, and I think it worked, but it’s not the same for everybody. We had a unique situation trying to bring the inflatables and the electronics industry together, that was new.

Steve: So in terms– so you did all the PCB design in-house and then you shipped the [inaudible 00:34:22] over to Asia and then you had all the PCBs and everything assembled over there?

Mike: Yeah, we do all of the design and engineering here and then the [inaudible 00:34:31] as you said, the files about what they are supposed to produce in their you know from a board perspective, they manage the whole securing the parts and getting it done on the QC and then they work with us on how you get the parts or the work in process or the finished goods or the sensors over to the ball manufacturer and how that’s all going to come together is really a fairly complex process of which we had to build our own apps to do a QC at every point so we could see that the sensors and the balls were being produced right, they weren’t being destroyed and we had to innovate the whole thing, so it was very complex.

Steve: That was actually my next question, but first of all how did you find the vendor to make the ball and do the assembly. I imagine it’s more than just finding a regular ball manufacturer right?

Mike: Yeah while we used the best factory in the world, they make the NBA ball and you know a lot of other top name top quality balls that you’d see in the market. That came from one of our key hires that we made who came out of one of those companies and build many-many products and sourced them for years. So we had to have that asset internal and those relationships to make it work. So that was just a key hire that we made and it’s been very effective for us.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of introducing this new electronic component to the ball that was just something where you had to fly over and just work out with the manufacturers directly.

Mike: Yeah, they flew here, so there was a mix and flights back and forth and you know make sure we were always on the same page and again came from our relationship of one of our other employees who had worked with them in the past. So I think we had some pre-knowledge and confidence in their capabilities in what they could do and what we could do so.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: It’s very much a team effort across the board you know.

Steve: Yeah.

Mike: With a small company you have to leverage every asset you got and those little intangibles can go a long way to making it happen or not happen.

Steve: And in terms of quality control, is it just a set of electronic diagnostics or are there quality control aspects of the actual physical ball itself as well?

Mike: All of it you know, so our app can scan every chip. You know it’s got a MAC address on it as it comes off the line and we can scan and do a little test that we designed you know just a little tablet consister [phonetic] literally scans everything that comes off the line.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: And gives us a real time report on it, and then when it gets over to the ball factory they have a process where they once they have sealed everything into the ball, they throw it into this bin to dry for 24 hours. We’ve got another app there that’s just scanning every MAC address to make sure it still works. And then when it gets back into the states, we ship everything here, we do a final physical check and we inflate everything with a special machinery that we invented to inflate it perfectly.

Steve: Wow.

Mike: And to make sure that the battery still has a charge in it because a very big thing for us that we learned that when we wanted to work out of the box, we always have to charge it to work. So one of the big things about our product is you pull it out of the box and you put it on the charging pad its wireless charging, and it turns on and you’re ready to use it within 30 seconds of pulling it out of the box. There is no pre charging required, so to innovate that process we had to think of all these little steps to make sure that not only did it work when we ship it out, but it’s charged and it’s going to come out in just two seconds you pull it out, plug it in, plug in the charging pad and put on the pad and off you go, you’re ready to play.

Steve: Nice and why was that such an important factor for you to have the battery charged upon opening?

Mike: Well it’s such a new product and we– and people had never experienced it before and we didn’t work with other smart products for example Nike basketball shoes or whatever. And almost all of them require this setup, this 15-20 minute of trying to figure it out, and in our market its not necessarily the most tech savvy you know these are these are people that just want to play.

Steve: Right.

Mike: They want to start and the anxiety level that builds up with the new tech product that you’ve never used is very-very rapid. Every minute that you make them you make your customer try to fiddle with something. So we say let’s design a product where it’s so easy to pull out of the box, take one step you know you’ve already got your app downloaded, dribble it four times, it’s going to connect and off you go. And that was it was very important to us to make the success of the product from the customer’s prospective, the momentum after sale, that’s why we did it.

Steve: Yeah that actually makes complete sense now that I think about it a little bit more. I would image people who are tech adverse if the ball is not ready to go right off the bat they might think it’s busted or something as well, right?

Mike: That’s right, that’s exactly right and then you know with social media if they think that they can tear you part very quickly and you know that’s death for a new product that hits the market, particularly when they’ve got some high profile press and we had so much press and you don’t want that. So we work very hard to make sure we could sustain the expectation after the customer has bought the product and used it for the first time. Now we’re not perfect, I’m not going to– I mean there are some product that got out to the field that didn’t– somehow got through our screening and that’s got to be normal for any logical…

Steve: Sure, right.

Mike: But we kept it at a very minimal range manageable range and your customer service and how you replace and get people up and running is very critical. So we had all that planned out and it’s all very practical.

Steve: Okay, and then you know just this question mainly for the listeners, you know for an aspiring entrepreneur that wants to create an incredible physical product that involves tech, what advice would you give just you know from a starting standpoint. What would you focus on initially?

Mike: Oh, so, ask me that again Steve, and you could edit out the first one, let me make sure I understand that question.

Steve: Okay so you know, this is actually a question for me for the most part because I’m very interested in tech and you know physical hardware products. So for an aspiring entrepreneur that wants to create you know this kind of marrying of physical product with tech, there’s just so many directions you can go when you first start out. So what would you focus on when first starting out you know in terms of establishing the team and in terms of defining the product? How’s that?

Mike: You definitely need a team, you need– it’s not a one man job for tech. You need some very smart founders in the business that are multi-facetted and that can think in a couple of different ways, business, strategy and tech. So that I think that’s first. Don’t be afraid about the things like whether somebody is going to steal your idea you know if you get bogged down with those things– the whole key is get through the green lights you know imagine yourself driving down the road and you’ve got to get to the airport, you’re about to have a child, you’ve got to get to that hospital you know.

So you have to get there, and it’s all about speed, so if you get caught at a red light or get slowed down by yellow it’s bad. So sometimes you’ve got to shift out of a lane that you think you need the green, leave and just to get to that green light, you’ve got to get through the green and that’s got to be the philosophy you have.

But then the second thing is if you have your team and you are comfortable and the chemistry is there and you know you’ve got the right vision, getting to the customer and really understanding that you are on the right path and making those adjustments is so critical, and I mentioned before we started talking that we have large companies coming to us now saying can you help us build a product like this for a different form factor or a different space. You know what you’ve done is that innovative, and we give the same advice to them as yes not only can we do it, but we can do it fast but fast means we’re going to take you to the customer from day one because you have to get the experience right.

This new wave of products where I think many are failing in it is that they think data in it of itself is the answer and it is not. I think what the customer is going to want and we’re seeing it today and we’re going to see it more and more is give me data that is usable that, okay I get the number but what do I do with it, what’s the next action I take so that I can see some improvement in the thing I’m passionate about. And understanding those connections between data and actionable contextual kind of feedback, something you can use is critical and the only way you can get it is to get to a customer with a real prototype. So build your prototypes fast, get to your customers fast, fail fast, and go back and try it again.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: Over and over again is the real key to it, and if you can do that and do it efficiently then you have a chance of winning. If you can’t or you avoid it, I pretty much guarantee you are going to lose because you’re going to end up with a product that looks just like everything else or worse.

Steve: And then along the way gather emails and contacts and establish your social stuff so that when you’re ready to launch, you already have a following.

Mike: Well absolutely. Every person you talk to is going to know about 1000 others. So you know you’ve got to win them even if it’s an early prototype that they buy in your vision and they’re willing to talk about it to their next 1000 people, and you try to collect and build that every step of the way so that if you get to a point where you’re trying to do a kick starter or something like that, you’ve got that asset ready to leverage, and it is an asset that’s a very valuable asset.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of doing the kick starter, will that be something that you would definitely do again?

Mike: It depends on what we were– what the goal was, so you know if I was starting a new company with a new product yes.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: For our company today I don’t think we need it because it satisfied what our goal was and we’ve got all the things that give it its own momentum now, so we’re sort of beyond that, we wouldn’t use it again for this company. But if you are starting if I was starting a new company yeah it would definitely be in my launch plans.

Steve: Okay cool, hey Mike we’ve already been talking for 45 minutes and I want to be respectful for your time. Where can people find out more about your ball and perhaps even contact you if they had any questions about your product?

Mike: Yeah, the best place where we have by far the most information is 94fifty.com and that’s the number 9 and number 4 and the word fifty spelled out 94 and F-I-F-T-Y and just a ton of great information there, that’s about the product. Our company website is informotionsports.com and that’s more of a broader strategic kind of website, you can learn more about us you know we’re distributed as I mentioned kind of all over the internet whether you go to Amazon or Dicks online or wherever, East Bay, but they’re all going to point back to the information we have there, and you can find out how to contact us directly from any of those sites. That would make it pretty easy for people to access us and we’re trying to be as responsive as we can about responding to everybody either as a question or a concern or whatnot, a piece of feedback.

Steve: Okay well hey thanks Mike for coming on the show; I know you’re busy man and I really appreciate you coming on.

Mike: I appreciate you having me, thanks Steve.

Steve: All right, take care.

Mike: All right, bye.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Mike’s company 94fifty.com is one of the coolest companies that I have seen in a while, and I’m definitely going to get one of those basketballs for my son after all he’s going to be the next Jeremy Lin, count on it. For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode51, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud but it also keeps this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best ways to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to mywifequitherjob/contest, and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure o sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

050: How Brandon Eley Makes Millions Catering To A Small Niche In A Huge Market

Brandon Eley

I met Brandon Eley at the Ecommerce Fuel conference and I can honestly say that he was one of the most well-spoken and intelligent entrepreneurs that I’ve ever met. Brandon runs 2BigFeet.com, which is an online store that sells shoes specifically catering to people with big feet.

Not only does his store make 7 figures but Brandon also runs a successful blog at BrandonEley.com and is a prolific speaker specializing in online marketing and ecommerce. Don’t miss this interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • Brandon’s biggest early mistake with his shop
  • How to properly outsource different tasks for your business
  • Brandon’s views on outsourcing SEO
  • A sound strategy for introducing new products in your store
  • What the margins are like for selling shoes
  • How Brandon gets customers into his shop
  • How Brandon ranks his shop in search
  • Which marketing methods yields the most sales for his shop
  • How Brandon increased his conversion rate 50%
  • How Brandon leverages email marketing to boost his sales.

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m really excited to have Brandon Eley on the show. Now Brandon is someone who I met at the ecommerce fuel conference in Austin Texas last month and he runs the incredibly awesome site 2bigfeet.com, which you guessed it sells shoes for people with really big feet. Now here is what’s cool about 2bigfeet.com. On the surface you would think that selling shoes online would be over saturated, but Brandon found a niche where he could truly make his store unique and stand out among the competition.

Now this just goes to show that running a successful shop online doesn’t necessarily mean that you have to invent the next big thing, you just have to find that special something to make your store stand out even if you sell well known products like shoes, and plus you have to be smart and a hustler like Brandon, and you know what they say about guys with big feet, right? So welcome to the show Brandon, how are you doing today?

Brandon: I’m great, how are you?

Steve: Pretty good man. So you’ve actually got a really interesting back story about 2 big feet and you’ve got a lot of kind of failure stories and mistakes to share, and so I thought you know to begin this interview, what’s the background story behind 2bigfeet.com and I kind of want to hear about some of the mistakes that you made early on with your partner.

Brandon: Sure. Well when I was 19, I was an intern at the company pretty big company had about 500 employees. The guy in the office next to me had really large feet, he had size 16 shoes, and he came over to my office one day and told me a story about how he always had a really hard time finding shoes in his size. And in a rural area, or suburban area not one of the major metropolitan hubs in the country, if you walk in a shoe store and ask you know can I see this in a size 16, can I see this in size 17, they will literally laugh at you.

This is true in the 90s, it’s true today, and so he ended up having to just walk into a shoe store and ask “what do you have in a size 16?” And they would usually bring back one pair of ugly sneakers that had been in the back room for a couple of years, and that was all he had to chose from for years and years, and even as an adult he had a really hard time finding shoes that were appropriate for work, finding shoes that were appropriate for church.

So he came up with the idea and asked me if I could build him a website and at the time I had never done anything with the internet or built a website, I didn’t know HTML or anything. So we both quit our jobs and raised a little bit of money. It was trial by error for the first few years. I think it took us three years before we ever even hit $100,000 in revenue. Our third year we passed $100,000 in revenue. So it was a real struggle in those early days as we were just teaching ourselves how to do everything.

I had to teach myself how to build a website, HTML, PHP, JavaScript. I had to teach myself online marketing, what worked and what didn’t and we got burned quite a bit along the way trying to use vendors and contractors like search engine optimization companies, paper click management, PR firms. So it was a rough [inaudible 00:04:23] years, but then we turned it around and started doing pretty well and I took over the business in 2007, me and my wife and we’ve really taken it from that point to a seven figure business since that time.

Steve: So you know what were some of the early mistakes that you were talking about? When you were first starting out? When you didn’t know what you were doing?

Brandon: Well I think one of the best mistakes we made was hiring search engine optimization company that back in the days of doorway pages and keyword stuffing and not knowing anything about what was white had a black had– we just took them at their word, they said they would get you to the top of the first page in Google and we trusted them. And so we spent many thousands of dollars a month with them for a few months and ended up in a worst situation than we were when we started because instead of just being low in the search engines– of course we were kicked off the search engines, we were gone and we had to just start slowly building our way back. Of course we started using paper click because it was the only way we could actually get traffic to our website.

Steve: So just curious what is your opinion on outsourcing SEO today?

Brandon: My opinion on outsourcing SEO is the same as my opinion on outsourcing any service like marketing SEO paper click, and as that you really have to understand the fundamentals of anything that you are going to outsource. If you are a business owner and you want to outsource the book keeping you need to understand everything you can about book keeping not on the micro level but on the macro level. You need to understand for instance with SEO what’s white hat and what’s black hat.

Read the Google overview, the guides that they have which aren’t that long, it won’t take you that long to really get up to speed on what Google thinks is appropriate and what would get you in trouble. That way when you are speaking with a contractor or a vendor you understand enough to know if they’re telling you the truth or if they have experience doing what they’re doing, and you can usually spot the ones that are not going to work out for you.

Steve: Okay and then you also mentioned PR agencies as well, so you have experience contracting that out as well?

Brandon: We did in the early days we hired a PR firm that did us no good whatsoever, they– I think we paid them either three or six months and it was several thousand dollars a month; never got an interview, never got an article written about us, never got really anything. In fact the only PR we ever really got was when we did get pretty much kicked off of Google during the Florida update. We reached out personally to a lot of people that we knew. My partner knew a reporter for the AP at the Albany Herald and he wrote about it and it got picked up on the AP south wire I think it’s called, which hit every newspaper in the southeast and that landed us a national NPR interview on the NPR radio show.

Steve: Cool, okay.

Brandon: And we actually filmed a Discovery Channel documentary at one point and our segment didn’t end up airing, but it was really– that was the best PR we ever got was getting kicked off of Google.

Steve: So it sounds like some of that early PR was just a result of your own hustling as opposed to anything that any agency did for you, right? So would you recommend going with the PR agency today, like do you have one today or do you still do your own PR stuff?

Brandon: We don’t, we don’t really do a lot of PR right now.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: We focus more on the marketing we really can control. I would, I would definitely be interested in going with another firm in the future. I think PR is tricky though, you really have to have a really well crafted story that’s going to resonate with reporters, or talk show hosts or you know the producers of shows to get you know if you just have some product that is not truly unique or really innovative or you know you just have a really good story, it’s going to be really tough to get any coverage.

Steve: Okay. That makes sense yeah you know I want to talk about the nuts and bolts of your business, because there’s actually several students in the online store course that I run that want to sell shoes. Now obviously they don’t want to sell shoes for people with big feet, but you know some of the other more specialized shoes. So I thought I ask you a couple of questions about sourcing. So first of all let’s say I want to sell shoes, where do I go to source the shoes and do you actually have to carry inventory or can you dropship?

Brandon: Well when we got started in 1999, it is about the same now as it was back then which is sad. The shoe industry is obviously one of the older industries out there and it’s very slow to change. To find inventory you go to the manufacturers directly and you open accounts with them, and the vast majority of them will require you to have a physical presence. That doesn’t always have to be warehouse and retail store, but many times it does. For instance even though we do the vast majority of our business through internet and phone orders, we still have a small retail store just to satisfy the handful of our vendors manufacturers they require.

So you go directly to the manufacturers like New Balance or Keen or Timberland or whoever, and you open an account directly with them and they usually have minimums for the first opening order. We have hidden a password; they only have a couple of shoes that go up to big sizes and then trying to order those just couple of shoes, we didn’t quite hit the minimums. So then usually a few thousands of dollars to get, and many of them don’t drop ship, so you’re required to stock your own inventory.

Steve: Okay and so given that how you kind of decide what sizes you need to carry earlier on and what are the some of the logistics involved?

Brandon: Well we learned by trial and error what sizes worked for us, our biggest sellers were size 16, 17, and 18.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: Which is going to be a lot different for a traditional retailer. We start at size 14, so we don’t have anything lower size 14 in our warehouse. The people who find us, who search for size 16 size 18 still put boots or whatever they search for long tail on Google, they find us because they can’t find anything else.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: In traditional even online shoe stores.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: So our makeup of the size ranges is a lot different than the traditional shoe store. I think the sales rep in the shoes– in the manufacturers you know they can give you a really good idea what’s the best selling sizes, what are the best selling styles, that doesn’t always work out. Some of the best selling styles that we bring in don’t do so well with our audience; you have to learn by trial and error.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: But it’s you know with the style of shoes you’re not going to bring in 1000 pair of one particular style, you’re going to bring in a few dozen and if it doesn’t sell you mark it down, you get rid of it, you bring in another style and try out.

Steve: Okay and have you ever thought of running your own styles in your own brand, or has it been just all third party stuff so far?

Brandon: We have early on– not too early on probably about five years in, we created our own brand of dress shoes and we made them up to size 24.

Steve: Wow.

Brandon: And we had the manufacturer and lay on Mexico. We actually went there and met with the factory and went through a broker here. It’s a really complicated process to do it all on your own, to actually build a brand and go to the factories and try to source it yourself. So we didn’t do that again, it was expensive, we didn’t get the margins we were hoping for back then. But I would definitely be interested in doing it again at some point, but one thing that has worked really well for us is we go to the manufacturers we already have relationships with, they already own the factories or they have really large or strong relationships with factories in China, in Mexico, in Argentina and we say can you make this particular style, that particular style for us the way we want it in the sizes we want. Sometimes that means buying 1000 pair, but that’s better than trying to you know fly to China, find a factory to make just 1000 pair for us.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: They’re making tens of thousands or hundreds of thousands of pair for the manufacturer. Making 1000 in big sizes is much more feasible through them than trying to do it on our own.

Steve: Okay and then these are just kind of existing styles that you want them to make larger sizes of for you, right?

Brandon: Sometimes and sometimes we’ll have them you know, they’re more than happy to customize, a lot of the smaller manufacturers you know not your multibillion dollar conglomerates like New Balance or Brown Sheet brands, but the smaller companies that are in the 50-100 million dollar range, they’ll be more than happy to do custom runs and make things and tweak them. If you are willing to buy enough merchandise they will put their factories to work for you.

Steve: Okay and then in general D margins on those shoes are higher or…?

Brandon: Not so much, they are a little higher. We do get more of the keystone in the shoe industry is you double your price so if we buy a pair of shoes for 50 dollars we retail or sell for 100.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: And you get a little bit better than that if you are buying 1000 pairs or something like that, but you have to really get into buying a whole lot of pairs, and that’s a lot of pairs to sell.

Steve: And that’s a lot of money upfront too right that you need to foot.

Brandon: They will want it in 30 or 60 days.

Steve: Okay and so okay, so you mentioned a couple of things, so the margins typically for the shoe industry is around 50%, is that what you said?

Brandon: That’s right.

Steve: Okay. So given that there is a lot of people that sell shoes and chances are there’s probably a lot of stores that sell large shoes, how did you actually get customers into your shop early on?

Brandon: Well, we’ve always focused on search engine optimization even when we didn’t really know what we were doing.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: And the vast majority of our traffic does come through organic search.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: We are currently getting about 64% of our traffic and 55% of our revenue from organic search, which is good because it’s cheap but it’s also a little bit scary because if Google changes their algorithm you could be in a lot of trouble.

Steve: Okay. So what are some of the special things that you are doing to optimize your cipher search?

Brandon: We definitely focus on the long tail key words, so we have pages for each sizes we carry, we specify each size that we carry on each product.

Steve: On a separate page– sorry.

Brandon: Yeah. We have pages for each particular size and then we have on our product pages themselves, we list every size that is available, and you know we have brand pages, vendor pages, we have detailed product pages, and we try to just go into as much information as we can. You know a lot of the shoe manufacturers will give you a little blur but this just like steel toe, slip resistance sole, meets antsy whatever ratings, that’s kind of all they give you on a description. They don’t go in and write these complex products descriptions. So we have to write the product description from scratch, and that helps us a lot and a lot of our competition just simply puts up the specs.

Steve: Right.

Brandon: Of the shoe and then really write anything unique, and then we target some of our better selling categories, like for instance restaurant shoes, these are really big categories. We found a supplier to provide us with a restaurant shoe in big sizes that’s really affordable, and it’s slip resistant and it’s made specifically for that. So we’ve got an entire page for restaurant shoes.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: And so if you type in, in size 17 restaurant shoes we’re very likely to come up at the very top of the first page.

Steve: So just curious those products where you are putting in different page for every size, is the content on those pages different, like do you write specific descriptions for each?

Brandon: No, we don’t because I guess because our niche is so small. We’re going to have to go into a whole lot of– I mean there’s only so much you can write about size 17 versus size 16.

Steve: Right exactly which is why I was asking yeah.

Brandon: We try not to keyword stuff too much. We try not to artificially inflate the pages by simply having a good URL structure and passing the page link logically through the home page, and we do know follow a lot of pages all pragmatically know follow any page. For instance if we have a product listing and the image linked to and the product name links, we are very careful not to pass any page link we know follow the picture and anything that says click here, we only pass it on the product name and then we only pass it on certain ones not only just to add.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: That we might have, so we try to pass page link a little bit logically, so more of the page link goes to the pages we want to.

Steve: So do you kind of consolidate those products with different sizes using like the canonical tag or anything like that, or is it– are those just separate pages that you’re trying to rank?

Brandon: We do sometimes use a canonical tag. Our site is pretty small, so we don’t have to go into a whole lot of– we have a page for every brand which is probably I would say most of our pages are brand pages because…

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: We carry a lot of manufacturers, but then you know we have a few categories. We got athletic boots, casual, close outs, dress shoes, off shoes which run down the list. So it’s really kind of a flat architecture. I guess we’re fortunate in that our niche is small enough that we don’t have to spend a whole lot of time really worrying about you know…

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: Which ones are going to get the most page rank and which ones are going to be the least, we pass it through the links we want to and just followed by half the links on our site and it seemed to have worked really well for us.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of where the search traffic lands, would you tend to say that they are more landing on like the category pages on your brand pages that you have created as opposed as to the actual products themselves?

Brandon: They do and we do have a lot of people land on product pages, and a lot of those are actually because we rank so low for a lot of products without any keyword, like size 17 or big or large, those are bounces. So we have a higher bounce rate when people land on our product pages because they are often times coming just looking for you know a new balance 621 running shoe.

Steve: Right.

Brandon: And we rank well for it even though there’s no identifier for large size big or whatever. So those are often bounces, but we do get a ton of traffic on our category pages on our individual sites pages people who type in size 17 shoes and our brand pages.

Steve: Okay. So in terms of search engine traffic, so that’s a large portion of your traffic but early on it takes a while right for the search engine traffic to kick in. So what were you doing prior to the search engine traffic kicking in to get customers to your site?

Brandon: A lot of things that didn’t work.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: We did…

Steve: You need to…

Brandon: We did banner ads.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: We did radio ads like traditional radio ads; this is before podcasting was even a thing. I think it was before the iPod even came out– when did that happen, two thousand and something? So we did radio ads on South Eastern radio stations, we did a bill board one time.

Steve: You mean like on the freeway?

Brandon: On the freeway yeah, when I say we made every mistake you can possibly make in that business– you know we had never built an internet business and there were no books or courses at college campuses about how to build an internet business, it was all trial by error. So we learned pretty quickly what didn’t work, but once we found paper click that’s when we really started being able to buy traffic and early days paper click was so affordable, it’s still really affordable for us. But back then we were able to just put as much money as we could in to paper click, and that was our saving grace in early days because we could pay for the traffic coming to our site and we could target it on someone searching for size 17 shoes or size 18 shoes or you can use negative keywords to remove the categories that we didn’t sell or brands that we didn’t sell.

Steve: Okay. So let’s go into that a little bit more, so you are talking about ad words in particular or which paper click services do you use?

Brandon: We have used them all; I remember using overture back in the day.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: But right now we are primarily using Google.

Steve: Okay and then this is just search ads or everything like the product ads like Google shopping?

Brandon: We do– currently we are not on pro listing ads, we’re trying but we have a hard time because you can’t specify product listing and you can’t specify what [inaudible 00:21:15] you want to show up under, you can only specify things you don’t want them show up.

Steve: Right.

Brandon: And because what we sell, the products that we sell are only available in certain sizes. We don’t sell that product in a size 11 or 10 or 9 you know you look up our new balance 623 running shoe, and my product listing ad shows it for you then I’m losing money because our conversion rates on those are much lower. Some– our company that manages our paper click is looking in how they can tweak our ads with enough negative keywords or tweak our ads with the right product names with the particular size and the product name. So they only trigger when we want them to so far it hasn’t really worked out for us. So most of what we are doing is just in the text ads and they’ve done a really good job. We use a company called White Shark Media.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: And started using them a couple of years ago and I’m a Google ad words surf a consultant. So I mean I went through the whole test and got certified several years ago. So I’ve always done it myself thinking I’m certified I can do a really good job, and they just blew me away with our cost per customer acquisition, it cut in half when a few months after we started using them.

Steve: What are some of the things that they’re doing differently that you couldn’t have done?

Brandon: Well they have the time you know being a business owner I have tons of things to work on and I will very solemnly go in and tweak my campaign and they go in and tweak it several times a month and any keywords that are not converting they pause. Anything that’s coming through you know for a brand we don’t carry or a size we don’t carry they add negative keywords to get out of that.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: So they’re really prudent about going in meaning they send me a report every single month we can only find every month and talk about how they are tweaking the campaigns to work really well, and they are also working with some product listing ads and remarketing, that’s another thing they do for us.

Steve: Okay and this is display remarketing or do you do search and text remarketing as well?

Brandon: We do, we do both.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: We have traditionally only done it in holiday shopping season.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: The first company that we used for remarketing I wasn’t really happy with the return that we were getting. We used– I’m trying to remember the name of the company. It was one of the huge ones and we just weren’t really happy. I mean it was costing us a fortune and when I looked in my analytics even with the tracking codes present, I wasn’t seeing many people came back and converted. Now they said that we had many conversions, but I wasn’t seeing any ROI analytics and I think it wasn’t coming through analytics I really didn’t trust them.

Steve: So let’s talk about remarketing a little bit. What customers generally do you bring back to your site, just anyone who’s visited your site, anyone who has inserted something in a shopping cart, like how do you kind of segment your retargeting list?

Brandon: The way we did it is we cookied them when they came to our site and we looked at individual brand pages or category pages, and we specifically excluded anyone who had already converted.

Steve: I see.

Brandon: And a lot of times in the holiday season when we ramp up and start spending more money we’ll only retarget people who added something to their shopping cart. So they got something in their shopping cart but did not convert. So we know that they were invested enough to actually check out the shipping prices, or they were really deep in the process, they were in the cart. And then we do have a really good conversion rate on retargeting those people by saying come back you forgot something in your cart or come back for a 5% discount, and getting– because our shopping cart currently doesn’t have cart recovery.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: That was one way we kind of did the cart recovery through remarketing.

Steve: So you offer a coupon, do you ever run these retargeting ads without a coupon or a price base incentive?

Brandon: Absolutely yeah, we don’t do a lot of coupons.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: So any buyer that chooses to be on our site, we will remarket on the general campaign, we don’t offer any kind of discount, we never really do. I have tried some coupons before on email signups and offer a $5 off first time customers to sign up for email newsletter, but we rarely do real deep promotions or coupons just because we have to warehouse everything and our margins aren’t really that deep.

Steve: And so when you remarket, do you remarket very specific ads based on exactly what they look like looked at, so for example if someone was looking at Timberland shoes do you retarget them with an ad– with a picture of a Timberland shoe?

Brandon: No we usually do brand ads because of just the time in creating multiple ads. We have even as few products as we have compared to a large site like Amazon, we have hundreds and hundreds of different products and we find that a lot of our customers being that they’ve never been able to shop for big shoes, a lot of our new customers will look at dozens of products.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: You know [inaudible] [00:26:25] average time on site is pretty long, it’s looking at– let’s see four minutes average time on site this year.

Steve: Wow, okay.

Brandon: The average person looks at more than five pages.

Steve: I’m just curious what is your conversion like for your retargeting efforts?

Brandon: Last year we ran around a holiday season. It was not as good as we wanted it to be. In fact it was lower than our overall conversion rate which is why we are going with White Shark, I looked it up– the company we used last year was admiral.

Steve: Okay, yeah.

Brandon: And you know they offer what they say is come like hands off, you just go within they wouldn’t help you with your creative and everything.

Steve: Yeah.

Brandon: But the information that we were getting, I mean we– at least in Google analytics it was saying we were getting virtually no conversions, but what they were saying is there were view through conversions.

Steve: Yes yeah exactly, that was my experience also.

Brandon: So they would say that somebody viewed an ad and then came back later and bought which we have no way of tracking. They said it was– they would say you know see an ad so I don’t trust that really. I want somebody to see it, be compelled to click on it and actually you know I want to be able to track it in my view of analytics that we actually got that conversion. So we are going through Google directly now and White Shark is getting our campaign ready for this holiday season. So I’m excited to see what difference we get this year since last year.

Steve: Yes you know one thing the reason I kind of asked you that question about you know you would target your people is because I found that with our store retargeting people that just landed on the site period as opposed to targeting those people who inserted something in their cart and abandoned ended up being higher for some strange reason and it’s all due to experimentation. I was just wondering if you had experimented with that as well.

Brandon: We seem to do better with people who’d put something in their cart and somehow got distracted. A lot of people and this is something that live chat has helped us a lot with is a lot of people would put something in their cart and have a question. And if it’s after our business hours we are not answering the phone, they would just kind of go away. They wouldn’t really– we found that people don’t really read. They don’t read the frequent asked questions. They don’t search how to answer. If they are confused then they pick up the phone.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: But they are much more likely to hit that live chat button or just kind of they’ll eventually get busy doing something else and totally forget about it.

Steve: So do you have someone live manning that? Like the whole business day?

Brandon: We are not as good as we should be.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: Like I should really be manning it right now because our employees are out in the warehouse packing and shipping right now so they are not able to look at it, but we try to man it most of the day every day. And often times even when I’m at home I’ll go ahead and pull it up because it dings pretty you know I’ll turn my volume up on my Mac, you know ding really loud when a customer clicks the button, so we’ll run over and check it out even if it’s at ten in the night.

Steve: And when it’s not open, when you are not able to do live chat you hide the box, right?

Brandon: We do, yes.

Steve: Okay. I had a couple of questions that just kind of popped into my mind. Do you take your own product photos or do you use the stock images from the manufacturer?

Brandon: We do because we’ve always taken our own product photos. We do have a few brands that will give us product photos that look descent, but initially I’m kind of OCD about some things. And one of the things is that I want you know a little bit of consistency in the product photos.

Steve: Right.

Brandon: And I found that some companies send us straight on product photos, some people send us product photos in an angle, some with the left shoe, some with the right shoe, some with both shoes, some are high quality, some look you had some kind of background in them. And so we decided early on we are going to take our own photos. And we used to use one of those fold up translucent white box things that you put lights on the outside and move them around until they are just right. And it took a lot of time.

Every season we get a new style, so two to four times a year we are getting pretty large shipments of shoes that we never sold before. So we were spending days you know setting up lights and moving them around just so there wasn’t too much light on this part or that part was blown out, and we finally just invested in a really good professional white box. We have– it’s called an Ortery Photosimile. And they are not cheap, but being that we take all our own photos, it does what most I’d say we take 95% of our photos. It does a really good job.

Steve: Okay and so basically it’s just put the shoes in there, it’s already set up, lighting is perfect and you just take the shot and you are done, right?

Brandon: You just take the shot and I do I like a totally white background. They would look fine if you didn’t edit them at all, but you can see you know obviously even with the perfect lighting you can still see the background. You can still see what’s behind it. So we have a company that outsources I think it’s in the Philippines maybe. And I just upload all the photos that I shot and they cut up the background and even touch up the photo a little bit if there is hair on one of the shoes or you know just a little dot or something they will remove those little blemishes and I think they charge per 2 or 2.50 in image.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of pricing your products since these are just products from manufactures is there any lee way on pricing for you or is basically any time you discount goes straight you know off of what you are going to make in terms of– so what I’m trying to ask is there a map pricing on these shoes?

Brandon: There is and a lot of the manufactures kind of bully you into pricing things at map. We do close things out after the season or if a company is no longer making something in big sizes which happens a lot with if a brand has a product that’s not selling really well, they’ll cut the big sizes. And they may still sell for another season or so, but they won’t make our sizes. So when we can’t get them anymore, if they are not selling we’ll close them out, but it’s just come to straight off our margin.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: And they really don’t like for you to do that. If you do it too often a brand, a manufacturer will drop you from selling their products.

Steve: Okay. Let’s go back to pay per click for a minute. Do you do anything on Facebook right now?

Brandon: We have done Facebook in the past and I’ve learnt a lot more about Facebook with the last few conferences I’ve been to and really want to put some of that knowledge to test, but the only thing that I found with Facebook that has done anything for us was using the fairly new custom audience.

When we did Facebook ads for just sending people directly to our site to buy products because we have such a wide variety of products we can only target big sizes. And even then how do you target someone who has big feet on Facebook? You know it’s– there is no real easy way to find those people. So when customers…

Steve: You target the NBA.

Brandon: Yeah people who like the NBA, but what we did is when they released the custom audiences we uploaded not our email list but our entire customer data base.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: Which after 15 years being in business it’s tens and tens of thousands may be a hundred thousand, I mean it’s a huge list and that was very successful in giving us likes. We didn’t try the campaign to try and get people to buy because these are people we know have bought before, we just wanted another channel to be able to communicate with them. And at the time we had a few hundred likes on our Facebook page and we shot up to about 2000.

So that was in my opinion the most successful campaign we’ve done is by using our custom audience and putting all of our customers in there. Now we have a lot more engagement on Facebook when we go to shoe shows. There are shoe shows around the country where all the manufacturers get together and show in the spring and fall what the next season is going to coming out.

So we place our orders– you place your orders like in the fall for the next spring and then the spring for the next fall. And when we are there we’ll actually take pictures– sometimes you are not supposed to, but we do it anyway. We’ll take pictures with our cell phones and post them to our Facebook page and say what do you guys think about this? And they love having a kind of an inside track on what may be coming next season.

Steve: So you are getting people who are already on your email list to like your fan page or are you using look alike audiences?

Brandon: No we are actually using our customer database, so it could be people on our email list but it’s everyone who has ever purchased anything from us in the past.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: And some of them are on our email list, but it’s many times bigger than our email list was. Our email list is only about I want to say 15,000 right now.

Steve: Okay. And so these are just people who have purchased from you and then entered in their email and then you are basically trying to get them like your fan page as another marketing channel. Is that it?

Brandon: Correct.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: And we communicate through our page pretty regularly. Any time we are having any kind of promotions or sales, when we are going to the shoe shows or when things are coming back in stock that are really popular items or are out of stock for a particular time, we always post that stuff to our Facebook page. And we’ve been getting some pretty good engagements as we showed up, I mean we still don’t have our 2000 fans but we do get pretty good engagement when we target them.

Steve: So do you track the actual sales from that page then?

Brandon: We do, it’s not much.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: But even traffic from social is only 1% of our traffic.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: So it’s negligible, but we use it more as a way to keep communicating with our customers.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: Than you know to try to sell them just because it’s such a small part of our traffic right now only having 2000 fans.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: If we get to 10, 15 then I think we’ll probably see a little better conversion on it.

Steve: I was just curious because you know Facebook is really down-down the exposure for posts on our fan pages. I was wondering if you’ve ever tried any sponsored stories or retargeting on Facebook as well.

Brandon: We haven’t but Facebook retargeting is definitely one of the things I want to do for people again who have been on our site to be able to retarget them to come back and finish their order. I think that might be pretty effective.

Steve: Okay and so basically in terms of pay per click, are you just primarily using Ad Words at this point?

Brandon: We are because we’re maxing out our spend on Ad Words and we are still not spending a whole lot of money. I think we are spending between 1500 and 2000 a month.

Steve: Wow okay.

Brandon: And we are getting really good return on investment on that money, but you know we are just constantly looking for new keywords and new Ad Groups and we had to expand it and really I just want to spend as much money as I can because it’s a profitable. So I haven’t really spent the time to get Bing Ads up and going because they are going to charge me another having hundred dollars a month. The company we used to manage it to do the Bing Ads and I’m wondering you know I’m I willing to spend 3 or 400 dollars a month if I can only spend 1500 to 2000 on Google.

Steve: Okay, right.

Brandon: So I may hire like an intern on Pinterest or something to just copy everything you know hire somebody on oDesk to copy everything on our Google…

Steve: Right.

Brandon: Over to Bing…

Steve: Actually you could just import it over.

Brandon: Yeah.

Steve: Traditionally in my experience the Bing traffic is on the order of like 10% where Google is, so I wouldn’t expect to see too much but you know an actual boost like that might make a difference for you. One of the things I did want to get into was conversion rate optimization because you’ve mentioned in your talk at the E-commerce conference some of the things that you tried. And I was just wondering if you could elaborate on some of your biggest conversion hits for your site.

Brandon: Sure, back in 2007 when my wife and I took over the business our conversion rate was pretty bad. It was 1% or just under 1% of you know all the visitors. And I mean that’s a low even by retail E-Commerce standards. I think at the time 2% was the average, so you know we were getting a descent amount of traffic, we were getting lots and lots of traffic to our site.

And I knew we had to do something and this is back when Google Website Optimizer was around, but I had no clue it even existed. I was– I think it was around 2008 maybe early or late 2007, I started doing a free shipping, of course everybody is doing free shipping. We were doing free shipping with the coupon code and we had a banner on every page of our site that said you know free shipping you know coupon code is I think it was free ship with no space in between, and it had instructions on how to check it out.

And then on check out we actually had that banner that said free shipping inner coupon code free ship. Still a lot of people were ordering without entering the coupon code and we were just thinking okay well that’s better for us because we’re paying for shipping. But then we strictly got a few people through the email forum that complained that you know you say free shipping on your website, but when I go to my shopping cart it doesn’t have free shipping.

Steve: Yeah, it’s in the link.

Brandon: Yeah even though you have it on the banner on every page of the website. So I did a test and of course this is not something you really AB test because it is a feature in the shopper cart.

Steve: Sure.

Brandon: But I just flipped the switch and make– configured our shopping cart to make it automatically apply free shipping to the continuation you ask when an order total was over a $1000. And we still offered other options but free shipping was defaulted, and instantly our conversion rate went up 50%.

Steve: Wow okay.

Brandon: I mean that’s the by far the biggest single job our conversion rate is taking. So of course we left that went free shipping now just if you live in the States you get free shipping. And that was the biggest part, but that’s what kind of showed me the importance of making changes and testing things to see what works and what doesn’t. So since then we’ve tested a lot of things. We’ve tested seals on different things you know like the buySAFE which did an amazing job for us. BuySAFE was a– I actually read a blog post about it, it was 18.6% boost.

Steve: Really?

Brandon: So it’s probably one of the better ones as well. We did the A B split test on that so I knew exactly what buySAFE did verses the others, now of course over time your customers get used to it. May be it’s not quite as much anymore, but I still think it’s very much worth it. But we did other things like hacker safe, we didn’t do anything to force it, it actually reduced our conversion rates slightly.

Steve: Okay, interesting.

Brandon: And we’ve done custom manors, we did a custom manor on our shopping cart that just says you know our safe shopping guarantee where we say you know we use some encryptions this and that and that really helped, that gave us about a 10% boost.

Steve: Wow.

Brandon: So all of the different things that we’ve done have made a huge impact. We’ve tested our Buy box a lot and now it’s pretty ugly. If you look at our site it’s pretty simple, but our buy box is got this bright red border around and the background is this pale yellow, it’s got bright red text, big bold text at the top of the buy box, and I mean we tested that, and we were getting a lot of people that didn’t know how to put things in their shopping cart.

And so we made it as ugly and as bold and as out there in front of their faces as we possibly could and every little thing has increased our conversion rate slightly to the point where our conversion rate right now seeing it over all 3%. It’s actually a bit more than 3% because our mobile conversion rate is awful. We don’t have the mobile website yet. So our conversion rate if you look at PC traffic is like close to 4%, but mobile drags it down a good bit.

Steve: Wow, okay that’s really interesting. I never thought– I’ve always been skeptical about those seals but now that you are bringing up that it actually– the buySAFE one opted by 18%, that’s very significant.

Brandon: It was a shock to me considering how inexpensive the buySAFE is so much that I read a blog post about it. This was back in 2012 when we implemented it. And I couldn’t be more surprised because we had tried numerous seals in the past and buySAFE had been after me, I’d been an IRCE conference internet retailer a couple of times and those guys had taken me out to dinner and you know they were after me for a new account. And I had always just kind of been like yeah whatever.

And so for about a year and a half I think I kept saying yeah one day I’ll sign up, one day I’ll sign up, whatever. And they finally were like dude, do it for free. We are not going to charge you anything. We’ll do the AB test. That at the end of the AB test if you don’t like it just– you don’t have to do it and it really only took about maybe 15 minutes to install 20. So it wasn’t a huge investment of time.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: It was definitely one of the better and that and the free shipping was definitely the two best things that we’ve done.

Steve: Okay and then the things you’ve done with your buy box and that sort– so first of all how much traffic do you need to do your AB testing and how long does a typical test take for you to run?

Brandon: We don’t have a huge amount of traffic, like our average when we pull up last month– our average is in the tens of thousands of visitors a month. And we were running between 20 and 30,000 and then we’ll head up just 50 and 60,000 visitors during the holidays. So it still takes us weeks to run a test if we are running it on something like the shopping cart or something where you know only a percentage of your visitors are going to go.

Steve: Right, okay.

Brandon: If I run it on like every single product page of the site so through our template system you know every product not just a particular product, it’s usually like maybe a week or two.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: On the shorter sides 7 to 10 days, but I don’t let it get to the point where it tells you it has statistical relevance all the time.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: If it’s trending one way or the other I’ll go ahead and go with it. I’d rather move on to another test or you know find something else to do than let something sit for a month.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of social media what percentage of your traffic is social media?

Brandon: Social was only 1%.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: Email is 5% of our traffic, but 10% of our sales.

Steve: Wow. Okay you want to talk about a little bit of about what you are doing with your email campaigns that are making it so successful?

Brandon: Sure we have sent only a few campaigns a month for many-many years, one to two– we rarely do promotions. But when we do send an email we try to do something. So we are showing new shoes that we’ve got in stock for the season, or we are asking for feedback, like we send an email every time we go to a shoe show asking you know is there anything in particular you want us to look for? Anything you’d like us to ask, brands to make.

We do that kind of thing but I’ve gotten to where I’m much less shy about sending reminder emails and when our revenue started jumping was when I started sending many several reminders. Many several years ago I would just send one email over a particular sale because I didn’t want to get a lot of unsubscribes. I didn’t want to take people off to where they would just leave and not get any future emails.

So I didn’t want– you know I was really cautious about that. And now even though we still only do one to two campaigns what I call campaign a month. During the campaign you know if we have a sale that’s like a really long weekend, say Columbus day is on a Monday and we start the sale on Wednesday I’ll send a Wednesday email, a Friday email and then a Monday email saying that the [inaudible] [00:46:36] and hours left to save.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: So I’m not newly as shy as I used to be in– I just schedule along right when we schedule the original email doesn’t take any more time. We also do the same on Facebook where [inaudible] [00:46:51] online, of course Facebook is such a small percentage of traffic, but we still try to communicate everything through there. And that’s when our sales really started ticking up. And so our conversion rates on email is much-much higher than it is on any other channel.

Steve: So this is a key take away from what you said, it’s don’t be afraid to email your customers right, that’s what the list is for.

Brandon: Absolutely I mean you going to get some unsubscribes, but we don’t get any more unsubscribes than we did before.

Steve: Okay you know one last question and I want to ask you this from the perspective of a beginner. You know if you had to focus on one single tactic when starting out with your online store knowing what you know today, what would that one tactic be?

Brandon: One thing.

Steve: To get customers on the door.

Brandon: I would say if you are trying to get customers in the door and you are brand new, you know Conversion Rate Optimization is not a good thing because you really need some traffic to be able to do it well. So I’d focus on Search Engine Traffic. And I’d say traffic engine not SEO because I’d I would work on working in like a paid at the same time.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: I think it depends on your industry though. I’ve seen a lot of people who just can’t do Pay Per Click because there is no margin in it, if you are drop shipping there is probably not a margin in it.

Steve: Right.

Brandon: But if you have the margin I would definitely go paid and I would find a professional to do it so that they can get your costs down to the point where it’s profitable on one sale. I mean ours is a profitable on a single sale, so if a customer never comes back we still make money, which is almost unheard of in Pay Per Click right now, a lot of people focus on lifetime value of the customer. And while we do have a very high lifetime value I want to make sure that we are profitable enough this month, month to month and we have you know positive cash flow to keep putting that back in the business.

Steve: Okay and so you– when you are bidding on keywords you are not considering lifetime value, you are focusing more on how much profit you can make directly from a sale. Is that inaccurate?

Brandon: Absolutely.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: Our customer acquisition cost right now $89.

Steve: Okay that’s very good and your– I’m sure your average profit pursue is at least like $50 right? Somewhere on that…

Brandon: Well it depends on gross or net but our average order value is 120.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: That’s with shipping and tax and whatever else might get charged. So we’ve got you know, we’ve got a good 20 to $25 in net profit before you know that we can spend and I’m still going to have money at the end of the month after paying all the bills. So yeah as long as I don’t spend $20 on a new customer I’m really happy.

Steve: Okay. And then I assume that once you find something that works you just max it out, right?

Brandon: Yeah we are totally max now. We are not even spending– I think on one of my Ad groups I’ve got $75 a day. I think I might be spending 40 on that particular Ad group. So I want it to run day in day out as much as it can if it’s working.

Steve: Okay. Awesome Brandon and hey we’ve already been talking for 50 minutes. I don’t want to take up too much more of your time. A lot of good stuff in this interview today, if anyone has any questions for you where is the best place to find you?

Brandon: You can find me at brandoneley.com. It’s an E-L-E-Y. I blog there about E-Commerce sometimes and it’s pretty easy to contact me just brandon@brandoneley.com.

Steve: Awesome Brandon. Well hey thanks a lot for coming on the show. I learnt a lot and I’m sure the listeners have learnt a lot out of this interview as well.

Brandon: Yeah thanks for having me.

Steve: All right thanks Brandon.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. Brandon’s store 2bigfeet.com is the perfect example of how someone can be successful selling regular everyday staples like shoes. By niching down and becoming the best online store for selling shoes for people with big feet, Brandon has carved out a very profitable business for himself.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequiteherjob.com/episode50, and if you enjoyed listening to this episode please go to ITunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this info, find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from my guests.

So I’ll say the best way is to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to mywifequiteherjob.com/contest, and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

049: Adam Kreitman On How To Run Profitable Adwords Ads For Your Business

Adam Kreitman

Adam Kreitman reached out to me randomly 3 years ago via the contact page on my blog and we’ve kept in touch ever since. Adam runs WordsThatClick.com which helps small business owners increase the visibility of their business on the web.

What’s cool about Adam is that unlike most larger agencies, Adam focuses a lot of his efforts on small businesses which is directly applicable to the listeners of this podcast. In this episode, Adam will teach us how to run high converting Adwords campaigns for those on a budget. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Adam got introduced to Google Adwords and why he decided to run Adwords campaigns for a living
  • How Adam got his Adwords consulting boutique off the ground
  • What’s a good Adwords budget to start out with
  • What you need to think about when you first start using Adwords
  • How to structure your ads and landing page for maximum sales
  • Which match types are applicable to which situations

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

If you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consultations every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I have my friend Adam Kreitman on the show. Now Adam actually reached out to me like three or four years ago just kind of randomly, and I’m really happy that we’ve kept in touch over the years. He runs wordsthatclick.com which helps small business owners increase their visibility of their businesses on the web, and what’s cool about Adam is that unlike most larger agencies, Adam kind of focuses a lot of his efforts on small businesses which is directly applicable to the listeners of this podcast.

Now he’s an expert on Ad Words. He used to be a key contributor for the Rise at the top and he is also a regular author on the Crazy Egg Blog. And what’s also cool is that Adam started wordsthatclick.com because of drug testing, and with that interesting fact welcome to the show Adam. How are you doing today?

Adam: I’m doing great Steve, thanks for having me here.

Steve: Yes give us the quick background story and tell us about this drug thing that you had going on and Words That Click.

Adam: Sure. Now before people get the wrong idea I have not nor have ever used drugs. What you are referring to is I was president of a drug testing company here in St. Louis. And we were the distributors for this really– well it’s really cool technology kind of CSI like. It was called drug light and the drug light you can think of it as like a home pregnancy test but for drugs.

It was a stick– plastic stick and you would wipe the surface with kind of like a quack kind of swab on the end of this stick. And within five minutes drug light would tell you whether someone who touched that surface had used illegal drugs, and if so what kind.

Steve: Wow.

Adam: Yeah. It was an interesting business to be at more or less let’s put it that way.

Steve: Cool, so I can imagine a lot of people before that big interview like a lot of bigger companies do drug test these days I guess.

Adam: Yes.

Steve: And it was that your main customer base, was it the consumer?

Adam: Well we had a couple of markets we are going after. One was the market of parents of teenagers you know who were concerned that their child was involved with drugs. And the other were businesses especially warehouses, companies that had fork lift drivers, truck drivers in place and they were concerned we are using drugs, and this kind of gave them an overall picture of if there was drug use going on, if so where was concentrated within the workforce.

Steve: So how does paper click kind of fall into this drug testing company here.

Adam: Good question. When you start a business you try to market however you can, and I was doing everything. I still shudder saying this, but I do in cold calling, we are doing direct mail, I was going to networking events, all sorts of things. And I was looking for a way where instead of me having to go out and find people who are interested in this product, I could have them come to me.

And I was having networking event and I was talking to a friend of mine and he was telling me about how well his business is going and how the success is– was solely based on this new advertising platform from Google called Ad Words. And I thought well that sounds pretty interesting and we started using Ad Words for the drug testing business, and it was– this business was not a huge success for a whole bunch of reasons. But out of all the marketing that we did Ad Words was the one that we had the most success with.

Steve: And were you running all the campaigns?

Adam: I was.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: Yeah.

Steve: And then when did you kind of decide to do this for a living?

Adam: Well, so I was having success with it and one day we were doing a drug test for this company that hire security guards to you know for buildings. We were doing drug test of the employees like you could swipe somebody’s forehead with this. And we were in this room with this guy and we were explaining how the technology works, and he starts asking questions like well so if I smoked marijuana last week will that show up?

And then he started talking about rehab and started getting a little agitated. I was thinking you know what; it’s a lot more fun helping business owners like get more business instead of chasing drug users around.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: I made a move.

Steve: So how did you get your business off the ground?

Adam: Speaking.

Steve: Speaking?

Adam: Speaking.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: I had a friend who run a kind of different sort of networking event here in St. Louis. And he invited me to speak at one of his events. I spoke one night, the next morning somebody who was there called me up and said let’s have lunch and the next week I was running their Ad Words campaign.

Steve: Cool. Was this David [inaudible] [00:06:35] by any chance or no?

Adam: It was not.

Steve: Okay. So you got your first client and then from there was it just word of mouth from there? Or did you actually use PPC for your own PPC business?

Adam: I run a limited PPC campaign and I still do.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: And I know it’s paid for so many times over, but most of it– most of my business especially in the early days came from word of mouth. And it came from getting speaking gigs at you know local chamber events and networking events, places like that and also writing, doing a lot of writing for various publications.

Steve: Okay. So want you know one of the reasons I wanted to have you on the show is because you are a paper click expert and you’ve used Ad Words for almost a decade now, right?

Adam: Yeah.

Steve: And so I was hoping that you’ll be able to share some insights with the audience actually from the perspective of a much smaller shop.
Adam: Sure.

Steve: So first of all I’m sure you’ve worked with smaller companies and larger companies. What are kind of the characteristics of a smaller business that they are kind of set apart from a larger one and how do you treat them differently when you run their campaigns?

Adam: Well when we are talking about a smaller business we are generally talking about a much smaller budget.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: And that I would say more than anything else influences our approach to Ad Words.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: Infact I would say smaller companies can be very successful with Ad Words and can have big advantages over big companies when it comes to Ad Words, but I will also say that having a small budget impose great challenges to an Ad Words campaign.

Steve: Okay. So what are some of the advantages that a smaller business might have, and what would be a typically good budget that you would be comfortable starting out with as a small business?

Adam: Well I would say the advantage of a small company is they are just a lot more nimble, a lot more flexible.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: When I’m working with big companies there are committees usually. There are committees and well you know you make a suggestion to change the landing page, and well you know we have run that by legal and there is just a lot of red tape and bureaucracy that can affect the efficiency of managing a campaign.

Small business owner you can talk to the owner and hey you know this is what is going on, let’s make this change on your website or add this page or things like that and there are some more generally. They are more willing to try different variations of Ad Copies and keywords and things like that.

Steve: Okay, it makes sense.

Adam: So I enjoy working with small business owners more for that reason.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: As far as the budget I you know I say this a bit tongue in cheek, but I tell this to all my clients you know spend as much as will let you sleep at night.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: There are certainly advantages to starting with a bigger budget of you know $3, 5000 a month, but for a smaller business that may be a ton of money and I just don’t have it. And if that’s the case let’s say if all you could spend is 500 or 1000 you know is better than nothing. And start with a very small targeted campaign and see if you can get some traction on that, and then just build from there.

Steve: Okay. So hypothetically speaking let’s say you just started a brand new E-Commerce store, you have a brick and motor store as well selling a certain type of widget, what would be kind of your first plan of attack with Paper Click?

Adam: Well I want to start with the goal of the campaign right, you need to know what you’re trying to achieve.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: Are you trying to make the phone ring, if it’s an E-commerce store then you want to get the sale. Some people just want Ad Words for branding purposes. So the goal of the campaign is going to influence the Ad Copy, is going to influence the keywords that you choose to some extent, it could impact the budget.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: So understanding that is step one. Once you know what you are trying to achieve if you have a small budget you want to start a very small focused campaign. Don’t go crazy with your keywords and add like 50 or 100 keywords to your campaign to start.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: If it’s in E-Commerce store pick a couple of your top selling products, or pick a couple of products that you get the highest margin on.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: And start there and you know Ad Words as much as I’d like to say we hit it at the park every time and right off the bag it’s not usually the case. It’s very much a process of optimization, and you are probably not going to make money on day one.

Steve: Okay. So let’s talk about– okay so right then what you just said you recommended creating an ad and I assume we are talking about search and not the display network, right?

Adam: Yes.

Steve: Okay. And you want to design your Ad that points directly to the product or directly to a landing page that kind of sells the product, or a listing of products in a category? Could you be a little more specific on what you would do?

Adam: Sure. Well…

Steve: Assuming the goal is sales of course.

Adam: yeah, assuming the goal is sales this is not to avoid giving an answer but I would say test.

Steve: Okay. Sure.

Adam: Yeah because I could tell you well send it to you know best practices say that you should send it to the product page, but you may find on your site if you take a step back and have a more of a sales landing page to kind of set the stage for the product may be that works better. And it also depends on the keywords you are focusing on. If you have a key word that’s– I don’t know golf balls, there are a lot of options in there.

So you are going to take people to a page that shows the Nike and the title list and your other different types of golf balls that you sell, and let people dig down from there. Whereas if the key word is a specific type of Nike golf ball probably you’re going to want to take them directly to that product page because that’s what they are looking for.

Steve: So in terms of choosing the keywords, what do you kind of recommend in the beginning when you are first turning out? Do you start with broad phrase, modified broad? What’s your strategy?

Adam: When you have a small budget I would actually start out with exact match.

Steve: Exact match, okay.

Adam: Right. And just I’m assuming– well I know a lot of your listeners are familiar with Ad Words, but for those who may not be as familiar exact match so if your exact match keyword is Nike golf balls, then in order for your Ad to appear someone would have to type Nike golf balls into Google exactly.

Steve: What are some things that– so I just want you to answer a couple of these questions so your initial bid, exact match, one thing you know I teach a class and one thing that happens often to students is they start out with exact match which is actually what I recommend as well. They don’t see a whole lot of traffic for that exact match key word and then they bump it up to phrase and before you know it they go up to broad without telling me, and then they are spending all these money on just random stuff so…

Adam: Right.

Steve: Just wanted your thoughts on that.

Adam: Yeah, if you try exact match and it’s not getting a lot of traffic before you go to phrase you might try some other close variations of that initial keyword and see if you could get some traction with those. Primarily in the campaigns we run we are using exact match and modified broad match.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: There are a lot advantages to using modified broad match over exact match because you know especially for a local business there are all sorts of variations of the keywords people may type in with city names and zip codes and things like that. So if all you have is exact match you may miss out on a lot of those very big keywords. When you start migrating to modified broad match or even praise match, then you need to start paying very close attention to the negative keywords in your campaign.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: And negative keywords are keywords that basically tell Google if this word shows up in a search term, do not show my Ads.

Steve: Okay. And then how do you kind of manage the initial bids. Are you in the beginning do you try to bid to get in the top echelon so you can get the data faster, or do you just go with Google’s recommended minimum bid when you are first starting out.

Adam: I hardly ever go with Google’s recommended bids.

Steve: Okay. I just wanted your opinion because it’s usually really high and much higher than you actually need to bid in my experience at least.

Adam: Yeah. You know well they are in business to make money, so you just understand that going in. That said I do tend– I do try to bid on the higher end of things because the fact is when you first start an Ad Words campaign you are put in a bit of a sand box until you prove yourself to Google, until your campaigns have a little bit of history behind them you are just not going to get as many impressions. Google is not going to– you are going to pay more for clicks over all.

So I tend to go in with higher bids to show Google that I’m serious, and so that I can also as you said you know get some more data by being in those top spots to see how those keywords are performing.

Steve: And how long does it take to get out of the sand box and how does it work exactly?

Adam: Well, I would say it takes us I’d say two to three months to get a campaign to the place where it’s kind of let’s call it stable.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: You know where we feel that we have a pretty good idea of which keywords are working, whether bid prices are going to be what the quality scores are, all those things.

Steve: And then can we talk about quality scores and how that works?

Adam: Sure, so the Google Ad Words auction is not a straight auction. Just because you bid the most and you obviously don’t know what your competitors are bidding, but whoever bids the most doesn’t necessarily get the top spot in the Ad auction. So Google has this algorithm called Quality Score that really rewards relevancy.

So if you can show to Google that your Ads get high click through rates, and they have dozens and dozens of factors that go into Quality Score and they look at the landing page relevancy and all these factors. So at the end of the day if you have a higher quality score for your keywords than your competitor even if they bid higher than you, you can still end up wrecking higher than they do in the auction, and basically the higher the Quality Score the less you pay per click.

Steve: Okay. And this is of course doesn’t take into effect until after you’ve kind of come out of the sand box, right?

Adam: Well they– Google will assign you Quality Scores immediately. Like as soon as you launch your campaign, but they do that based on kind of the industry but until you get some history behind your Ads and your keywords and things like that your Quality Score in the beginning may be a bit misleading, it may not be where you end up.

Steve: Okay because I know that I’ve noticed with some of my search campaigns I always start out spending like almost three expert click and then over time you know it’s the cost per click is almost gone down by you know like 60% over time.

Adam: Yeah.

Steve: For some of my Ads.

Adam: Yeah.

Steve: And that’s actually not uncommon. So what’s your take on showing Ads on mobile?

Adam: Mobile is got it’s become a bit trickier in that you used to be able to run mobile only campaigns with Ad Words. And they took that functionality away. I wish they would bring it back and infact…

Steve: I mean it’s kind of still there, right? It’s kind of still there, right? You can reduce your bids for just mobile devices.

Adam: Yeah you can– there are some things you can do through bid adjustments to bid much higher if you have a campaign that you want to target mobile you can bid a lot higher for mobile clicks than for desktops and tablets. And infact what I was going to say is before you can even break desktop and tablet traffic apart you keep those separate, you can’t do that anymore.

Infact you don’t even have the ability to do bid adjustments on tablets which I know a lot of people are not happy with because that traffic can behave much differently. But you know as with everything else in Ad Words you kind of have to test the how the mobile traffic performs for you. I have some campaigns for local businesses where mobile performs as good if not better than desktop traffic.

Steve: Interesting.

Adam: So…

Steve: What is the goal of those campaigns?

Adam: This is [inaudible] [00:20:37] you get phone calls.

Steve: Interesting, okay.

Adam: Phone calls or phone fill out.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: And then we have others where we just– mobile doesn’t work, just doesn’t produce in our line but does what traffic does.

Steve: Okay. And so at that point do you just turn off mobile altogether or?

Adam: Generally, we either turn it off altogether or bid way down on it.

Steve: Okay, what are some– I know these are going to be kind of broad questions but just from the perspective of a new shop owner, what are some good guidelines to follow when you’re first starting out with your ad words campaign, and I also want you to kind of touch on whether you enable Google search partners when you’re first starting out as well?

Adam: Sure. So search partners are search engines like AOL and Ask.com that don’t have their own paper clip program, they’ve just partnered with Google and show Google ads depending on the budget, depending on the scope of the campaign. If it’s a smaller campaign we usually we use search partners ad to start. If it’s a bigger campaign we will usually separate, we will actually create two campaigns basically identical, but one will be focused only on Google search and the other will be– you can’t just focus on search partners you have to do Google search then search partners, but that other campaign will have lower bids by– it depends but maybe say 30% or so lower, and we do that so that we are not over paying for the search partner traffic.

Steve: Interesting. Okay.

Adam: And that actually leads into your other question about kind of just recommendations for getting started. Segmentation is key with an ad words campaign. Different traffic via key words via Google search versus search partners via mobile versus desktop often can behave very differently, and to really optimize a campaign you need to be aware of how that traffic, those different sources of traffic behave.

It’s very likely that in an ad words account you have multiple campaigns, and one may just target Google search with some top performing keywords that you have. You may have another one that targets global traffic. You may have another one that targets modified branch key words search partner and even within a campaign and this is really important to understand. Within campaigns you can create ad groups and an ad group is a group of related key words and they share ads.

So going back to the example I said before of golf balls; if you have a sporting goods store you just put all your key words into one campaign and you have an ad about come to our sporting goods store, we’re fantastic, that’s not going to be very effective because the person looking for tennis rackets is going to be very different than the person looking for golf balls, is going to be very different that the person looking for baseball gloves.

So you want to segment your campaign and have an ad group focusing on golf balls that have ads that speak specifically about golf balls and link to the page on your site about golf balls, and you may even go more niche than that. So you have an ad group for titleless golf balls, and then an ad group for Nike golf balls, really-really segmenting your ad groups and your campaigns overall I can’t emphasize the importance of that enough.

Steve: Okay and then do you actually also segment by geographical location?

Adam: Yes and again it depends on the campaign, but I will find for campaigns where we have clients that have locations spread out across the country, really if we segment those out by geo-location we tend to get better performance than trying to lump everybody together.

Steve: Okay. What are some of your– okay so let’s switch gears a little bit. So just to summarize everything that you said you want to segment out your ad campaigns as finely grained as possible, so that you it’s like an exploratory mission in the beginning until you find out what works and once you find something that works you kind of– once you know that it’s profitable you increase your ad spend for that particular segment.

Adam: Yes.

Steve: Is that accurate? Okay.

Adam: Yes.

Steve: Perfect and constantly you are adding negative keywords as you mentioned like 15 minutes ago to these campaigns to restrict the amount of traffic that you know is not going to buy anything.

Adam: Yes.

Steve: Right, and so you know so we’ve talked a lot about search, search campaigns now can we talk a little bit now about the Google display network?

Adam: Yes.

Steve: First of all what is it and what are some of the major differences between contextual versus query based advertising?

Adam: So the display network– Google, if you searched around the web you’ve seen the Google ads on websites and it can be like from the New York Times down to somebody’s personal blog, and as a website owner you get a cut of the action. When somebody comes to your website and clicks on that ad Google pays you a percentage, so it’s a way to monetize a website. As an ad words advertiser you have the ability to place ads websites and there are a number of different ways you can do that, we can get into that. Biggest difference between search and display I would say is the mindset of the person you are reaching.

When you’re targeting people on search they find your ad because they had they had a need, a desire, they’re going on a quest for information and they sat down at their computer with the intent, they typed in that keyword with the intent of finding a solution. They had an itch that needed to be scratched, so they are actively searching for what you offer. When you’re on the display network people are there consuming information, they are not actively looking for you. I say it’s more like TV, radio ads, although I think it could be much more targeted overall than you can on TV and radio, but…

Steve: Okay.

Adam: It’s just, it’s a different mindset.

Steve: So how do the guidelines change in terms of your ad copy?

Adam: There are a few things, number one with the displays you can run image ads, so it’s not just about the copy, it’s about the image that you use. And as far as the ad copy itself you can test out many-many more variations on the display network because there tend to be a lot more impressions out there than there are on search. They’re just a lot more, there’s no shortage of places your ads can be shown on the display network which is good and bad. You can test out a lot more variations of ad copy and you may find and again you have to test, but you may find being a bit more creative, a bit more in your face may work better on display than it does on search. Work clever I would say in your ads.

Steve: One thing I’m actually particularly interested in what you have to say here because I personally have not been able to make a profit off of the display network just yet, and primarily because you know going through you know I’ve tried very specific targets and at the same time you know every now and then a website will come up– pretty spammy website, send me a bunch of clicks and then I restrict it, but then you know the next day another spammy website comes up. So what’s your kind of strategy with the display network?

Adam: Persistence.

Steve: Okay. So first of all you don’t recommend display network if you are just starting out for a small business, right?

Adam: No, no definitely not. Stay clear of it, and in fact when you start a new ad words campaign Google is pretty sneaky about these things. The new default I believe is search with display select which they make sound really good like hey you know not only can you reach people on search, but we’re going to go on the display network and find really targeted places where we show your ads and you know we’re on your side, we’re here for you– well not really. If you do display, start with search, learn how ad words works, kind of cut your teeth on search. If you do display, then I would say create a separate campaign you know we talked about segmenting before– excuse me you definitely want to keep your search and display campaigns separate.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: Because they are totally different beasts.

Steve: Okay. So let’s say you are starting a display campaign for your golf ball store or your golf store, what is kind of your first plan of attack?

Adam: Well the first thing I would say when it comes to the display network is I would start with remarketing.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: Which is– have you been able to get remarketing working?

Steve: Yes remarketing works wonderfully, yes.

Adam: So and again for those who may not be familiar with what remarketing is, somebody comes to your website you cookie them and when they leave your site that gives you the ability to show ads to them on other websites that they visit that show Google ads. So it’s the display network, but you’re only showing your ads to people who have visited your website, and if you’re going to do display start there.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: With remarketing after that there are– there’s no shortage of ways you can target people with display. You can do it by topics; Google has a list of a few hundred different topics you can target people by. You can do it by interest, so I should say topics is about the content of the web page. So if you pick small business as a topic, the theory anyway is that the pages you are– your ads display on are related to small business. Now I can tell you a story about doing that and having our client’s ad show in a website that was a webcam for a chicken coup in Boston. So again you really have to be careful on this one.

Steve: So do you recommend those broad targeting, or do you recommend like targeted placement in the meeting, just physically going out looking for websites and articles that are relevant, what do you recommend?

Adam: If the budget is there I like trying the broad targeting like topic targeting or interest targeting to try and find placement because at the end of the day yeah you can search around and see some websites that may work for you, but Google’s algorithm is pretty impressive and for all the junk traffic that it sends your way, you’re also going to find some placements that you probably would not have found otherwise. So we like to– again if the budget’s there and if the client understands that you know this may not work but we’re going to give this a try and see if we can find some placements that are converting, and if we in a broader campaign if we find placements that are converting, then we will put those in a separate campaign where we’re specifically targeting those sites.

Steve: Okay. Can you comment on just the contextual nature of the display network versus search? Meaning is it in your best interest to create an ad on the display network that points to products, or is it in your best interest to point it to a page where you kind of grab an email address and then kind of market to them on the back end with an email list, what has worked better in your experience?

Adam: Again I would say test you know not to be evasive but it’s going to work differently for different businesses. I have found that you can drive a fair amount of sign ups you know free sign ups from display networks but the traffic quality may not be there. So you know again it really comes down to testing for your specific business.

Steve: So let me ask you this, you mentioned search budget of you know 500-1000 minimum, what would be your budget for like a display network since the net needs to be cast out a lot larger?

Adam: I would say again it’s as much as you are comfortable with. I would say the same budget range 500-1000 you can– you’re going to get a lot more action for that money. The clicks tend to be cheaper on the display network and they’re a lot more impressions to be had. So you may find as far as actual traffic goes your budget goes further on display. Now again the quality may not be as great but you’re probably going to get a lot more clicks.

Steve: Yeah. I mean I had an ad being displayed on some mobile app before I realized I needed to turn that off and I got like 20 clicks in like 30 minutes.

Adam: Yeah.

Steve: Or something like that but it was all junk traffic, probably some kid playing some game.

Adam: Yes yeah you– if you’re running display and especially these broader campaigns you have to be really-really vigilant because as I said you know things may be humming along and the next thing you know you get you know 50 clicks from a chicken coup webcam site in Boston so.

Steve: The thing is they don’t even show you where your ads are showing until 48 hours later, right?

Adam: Yeah. There is a bit of a lag again. It’s a challenge and you really-really have to stay on top of it if you’re going on display.

Steve: Okay. But do you and this is again a really broad question, but do you believe that paper click can be made to work with you know almost all sorts of businesses, e-commerce businesses and still make a profit or would you say there are some businesses where just PPC is it just doesn’t make sense?

Adam: I believe there are businesses PPC doesn’t make sense for example when people contact me and they have a very niche B to B business where they are trying to reach a very specific type of person you know maybe it’s HR manager at fortune 500 companies, that’s tough to do with paper click.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: Those people I say try LinkedIn ads, try direct mail because hey you know I focus on online advertising but you know good old fashioned direct mail still works.

Steve: Okay, it sounds like Facebook might be better for that sort of campaign.

Adam: I have seen Facebook campaigns absolutely wipe the floor with ad words as far as lead generation in some cases, so yeah I mean I love ad words I use it every day, but I’m not going to sit here and sell everybody and tell them they all need to be on ad words, and it’s the best and most fantastic advertising platform out there because for different businesses there are other fantastic options out there that may work much better.

Steve: Can you just kind of comment on some of the differences you know why you would chose ad words versus Facebook versus some other ad platform like LinkedIn that you mentioned?

Adam: Yeah, it depends on who you are trying to reach. You know for if you are a DUI attorney, nobody is on Facebook liking DUI attorneys or saying woohoo you know I’m a drunk driver, target me. So there you are pretty much stuck with ad words.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: But if you know– if there is a very specific demographic that you’re going after especially with the power editor that they introduced a year or two ago Facebook can be really-really powerful.

Steve: Okay. What is your comment on just kind of the demographic services that Google ad words offers for the display network?

Adam: I have no comment on that Steve. I wouldn’t– I don’t use a demographic targeting.

Steve: Okay, got it.

Adam: I just I don’t think it is all that accurate.

Steve: Okay. So when it comes to demographic stuff go with Facebook is basically what you are saying.

Adam: Yeah. In fact if I may add within the last year Google has kind of hidden this on a geo-targeting tab, but there is a way where you can target households based on income with ad words. So you can target like the top 10% of households the budding bottom 50% and I have tried those before on some campaigns, and I just I don’t trust the data.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: I don’t see it working very well.

Steve: So you didn’t see any difference in conversions when you tried that.

Adam: No-no, I mean we so we did this test for a client and I’m going to be careful about how I describe this, but we were selling a service that primarily would be consumed by the top, let’s call them 30% of households by income, and so we started a campaign where we were just targeting that demographic. And then after maybe a month or so of not really getting great results we opened it up and the results were better.

Steve: Interesting. Okay. Yeah. I know Google probably knows a lot about all of us, but I would imagine it’s mostly from our searches, right? And any data that they may have from android phones I would guess.

Adam: Yeah. Well they have a lot of data, I mean it’s impressive I mean it really is impressive what they know and I’m kind of trashing them a little bit, but it is impressive what they put together and how you can target people and I don’t know whether they’re just not sharing it with us as much as they could, I mean us as advertisers or something else is going on, but the data that they have is phenomenal and you can use it to create success if you know how to use it.

Steve: Okay. Hey. Well thanks Adam we’ve already been talking for quite a while and I want to be respectful of your time. If any of my listeners have any questions for you where can they find you?

Adam: They can find me at wordsthatclick.com, that’s my main website. If people who are using ad words campaigns are interested I’ve started another site with a couple of my buddies, who are top PPC guys, I think they’re top PPC guys in the world and we started this site PPC Audit Xmen, and the idea behind that site is we’re all pretty well booked, we can maybe handle a couple more actively managed campaigns, but there are a lot of people out there running ad words that just need a second pair of eyes, an expert pair of eyes to look at their campaign.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: Give them feedback on how to improve it. So we started the PPC Audit Xmen site to kind of provide that service and get people expert feedback on their campaigns.

Steve: Cool, I’ll definitely link that up and then I imagine there’s a contact form on that site as well, right?

Adam: Yes.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: Yes.

Steve: Well excellent Adam, thanks a lot for coming on the show, really appreciate it.

Adam: You’re welcome thanks for having me Steve, I appreciate it.

Steve: All right, take care.

Adam: You too.

Steve: I really love Adam, he’s actually someone who I met four years ago and I’m glad that we kept in touch over the years. Now if you look at our online store ad words represents a significant portion of our online store profits today. Don’t listen to random people out there telling you that ad words ads are too expensive for you to make money. If your margins are decent you can likely make ad words ads profitable, you just have to understand how to use the tool.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode49, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can get this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests. It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest complement that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now as an added incentive I`m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course. Where I show you how my wife and I manage to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

048: How To Buy An Existing Online Store And Double Revenues In Just 1 Year With Bill D’Alessandro

Bill D'Allesandro

Why start an ecommerce store from scratch when you can buy an existing site and double its revenues?

Today, Bill D’Alessandro shows us the exact process he goes through to buy an online business and how he finds stagnant businesses to buy that he can improve upon within a short time frame.

Bill D’Alessandro owns a portfolio of ecommerce stores which you can check out at ElementsBrands.com.

In this interview, Bill and I will be referring to his recent acquisition NurtureMyBody.com. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • Why you should consider buying a business as opposed to starting one from scratch
  • How to evaluate the right business to acquire
  • What multiples do ecommerce stores sell at
  • How to perform due diligence for a seller
  • How long does the entire process take?
  • What sort of help do you need to buy a business?
  • Where you can find potential businesses to buy

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

If you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consultations every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I`m really excited to have Bill D’Allesandro on the show, did I do that right Bill?

Bill: You did.

Steve: Bill is someone who I met at the at the ecommerce fuel conference in Austin Texas last month. And he runs a company called Elements Brands and a blog over at RebelCEO.com. Now here is what is cool about Bill. He used to be an investment banker, so he has got a lot of experience with evaluating companies, and as a result his company Elements Brands has been able to create a portfolio of high quality consumer brands, and in other words Bill is just very good at buying existing ecommerce brands, especially mom and pop type of business and then making them even better and more profitable. So in this interview today, Bill is going to teach us the ins and outs of buying existing businesses with potential, and with that welcome to the show Bill, how are you doing today?

Bill: Doing good Steve, thanks for having me.

Steve: Yeah, so give us a quick background story behind Elements Brands and why you started this company.

Bill: Sure so I started Elements Brands in 2010. At the time I was working in investment Banking, and I was you know working 100 hours a week, and not really enjoying it all that much. And I read a book that I`m sure many people listening are familiar with called The 4 Hour Work Week. I read The 4 Hour Work Week and I had an idea for a product, my first product called KP Elements. It’s a skin cream for a specific skin condition called keratosis pilaris, said you know there really was nothing on the market for the condition. So I said I don’t know anything about skin cream at all, but it sounds like there is a big market here and I need to learn.

So from that one product I launched it with a contract manufacturer and a contract warehouse because I was still working for someone else so– actually we launched the contract warehouse first. First I was shipping everything, I was chopping everything off of the post office on the way to work which was terrible.

Steve: I can’t imagine doing that and working a 100 hour weeks and having time to head over to the post office.

Bill: It was tough because I’m home and like have to box up like a couple of orders you know like on my way in the next morning, it was terrible. So I very quickly outsourced the fulfillment which was great and also because I was working so much, I really was forced to automate everything from the very beginning. You know I didn’t have time you know to forward PDFs or emails over to a supplier to ship them. You know I didn’t have time to email the customers their tracking numbers; I didn’t have time to do any of that stuff, so I automated all of that from the very beginning, and this is you know four years ago when there wasn’t a lot of software existing to do that.

So I wrote a lot of custom software to kind of stitch the business together. To stitch the ecommerce cart to the fulfillment center, to monitor the inventory in the fulfillment centre and reorder from my suppliers when I got low. So I built a lot of custom software and KP Elementsstarted to take off. I did the website for 600 bucks on Elance originally, and I started getting a bunch of orders. And I realized that while the KP Element business was doing well, I really had a lot more infrastructure. The code that I had built, the infrastructure that I had built could handle more revenue than I had.

So being an investment banker and you know working on selling other people’s companies throughout the day I said, why don’t I go out and look to buy more revenue and bolt it out of my platform?

Steve: Mm-huh.

Bill: And that when KP Elements became Element Brands.

Steve: Okay, and so your KP Elements, that first site was just designed completely from scratch, right?

Bill: Totally from scratch, yeah. I did it really in the classic 4 Hour Work Week style. I had it built on E lance for about 600 bucks, and the check out page you know when you got to the buy now page, you are adding your address and going to the next step and then it would say, well were out of stock. We`ll email you when we get back in stock. Well really we didn’t have any stock to begin with, I was just testing demand to see how many people intended to buy. So yeah I started that company with about 600 to 700 bucks to the website and then about seven to nine grand, I can’t remember exactly somewhere in that eight grand range for the initial inventory that we had.

Steve: Okay, and then you sold those just primarily on your own site not using any third party sites.

Bill: Initially on our first party sites and then on a whim threw it up on Amazon and that really exploded and we can get into that later.

Steve: I guess first question for you is what were some of your motivations for buying existing companies as opposed to just starting more from scratch?

Bill: Well, it really helps you skip a lot of the pain in the ass in the beginning because you can buy a business that you already know there is a market and you already know there are customers for. So if you have an idea and you are starting a business there is a lot of work that goes into validating the market, creating the product, creating the brand, and establishing a loyal base of customers? And a lot of times you are doing all that work while not making any revenue or making a very small amount of revenue just to get started with. And that can take a couple of years and all that time you are basically figuring out is the business going to work?

Whereas if you buy a business you can come in on year three after someone has done a lot of the slog, and go all right are you tired? Like do you really want– do you want to continue the slog and that person a lot of times will say, you know I`ve got competing interest. I`m kind of tired I’m exhausted, and I want to sell you the business. But really what they have done for you is they acquire is de-risk it. So they`ve spent the last three years proving this out and you know there are lots of businesses that fail after year one and year two, and that might have been you had you started it, but this business has been around for three years.

So obviously if there is revenue and repeat customers there, there is something there. So then you can come in and make improvements and try to take the business from X to 4X and you can totally do that. It’s a lot faster to go from 0X or slower from 0X to 1X, often times it needs to go from 1X to 4X if you have the right know how.

Steve: Okay. And then of course the disadvantage is that you have to pay for some that growth upfront, you know with the confidence that you can actually grow it in the end, right?

Bill: Yeah, you definitely have to pay. So the multiples that people typically pay and we can talk more about valuations if you want, but typically you will pay between two and three times cash flow for a business.

Steve: Cash flow, okay.

Bill: So that’s two or three times annual cash flow. So if you double the business, you get your money back in a year. So it’s– often times it’s not that much upfront if you can grow it.

Steve: Okay, and you know I know a lot of listeners in the audience have been considering purchasing an existing store as opposed to starting from scratch, and I know you`ve acquired three or four companies I think or…

Bill: Two.

Steve: Okay and that ball pack in it. So I was hoping to maybe pick you know one of the two and maybe go into a little more depth about the whole process. So, just looking on your site I saw you have Nurture My Body which is one of your acquisitions, and that sells organic skin health care. KP Elements which is something you started from scratch and the Ski Balm I guess is that your other acquire.

Bill: Ski Balm actually started from scratch as well. The second acquisition is not on the website yet, and I would rather not talk about it in detail quite yet, but Nurture My Body is a better case study anyway.

Steve: Okay yeah. So let’s talk about Nurture My Body and then just first off, is there a specific reason why you chose to just focus on skin care companies particular, did you feel comfortable buying these companies because you kind of became an expert over the years?

Bill: Yeah. I could say in hind sight, I could weave a very good story about why I focus on skin care you know good margins, like low start up costs, like you don’t need tooling, electronics, but at the time it was really just because I had started KP Elements and I learned a lot about skin care and then I was looking for another acquisition and I wasn’t necessarily looking for something in personal care or beauty. But then Nurture My Body came along and I said I`m not sure– I wasn’t planning on going down this industry, but it really right over home plate for me and that’s why I ended up buying it.

Steve: So I was just curious the nature of skin care products is that people are constantly coming back for more. I was just wondering if that was just one of your criteria in acquiring a company?

Bill: That’s always great for sure. I mean that’s– especially in beauty you know repeat customers and consumable products is always really good. But at the same time I wouldn’t say that’s a necessity.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: I have a friend, he sells camping helmets, and you know you are probably not going to buy very many camping helmets, maybe you buy a second one as a gift or something, but then he gets people that come back by selling them other things like camping chairs and other camping gear, things like that.

Steve: I see.

Bill: So if you don’t have a consumable product you can still create a repeat customer base.

Steve: Okay, and then so kind of like the first question that was just on my mind is, when you are looking to make a purchase– actually let’s take a step back, so where can you find these potential deals first of all, how do you find them?

Bill: That is the hardest part. There is a lot of grey spots. There are a couple of brokers out there, you can go on BizBuySell is the largest website in the internet, a clearing house for businesses for sale. You will wave through a lot of you know mechanic shops and liquor stores and local restaurants, things like that to find a couple of ecommerce businesses. There is a lot of junk on BizBuySell if you are looking for an ecommerce business, but that`s actually where I found Nurture My Body on BizBuySell.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So you`ve got to comb through BizBuySell, you can also find there are a couple of brokers out there if you just search for ecommerce business brokers on Google you will find several. They have listings on their websites; they list them every so often. There is also a due diligence firm I think called Centrica and they try to do a centralized listing. They try to scrap all the brokers’ websites and post them on their own. You can check them as well.

Steve: What are some of the pros and cons of using a broker, do you have to pay them of does the seller pay the broker?

Bill: The seller pays the broker, so if you are going to sell your business you can think of the broker a lot like a real estate agent. So if you are going to sell your house you hire a real estate agent. If you are going to sell your business you hire a business broker, and a business broker is going to charge you a percentage of sale when your business gets sold. Typically it’s about 10% of the sale value. So you as the seller are betting that by hiring this broker, I can get 10% more than I would have without him.

Steve: Wow 10% is a lot. I mean it a lot more that real estate.

Bill: It is and the reason it is that high is I`ve talked to several business brokers and the fact of the matter is that a lot of small businesses just never sell. So they do a lot of work and then never get paid at all. So that’s why the percentage has to be higher to account for all the business that never do sell.

Steve: Okay, and so you just mentioned that there is a lot of stuff to go through, a lot of junk that you might not be interested. So when you are looking to make a purchase you know what are kind of some easy ways for you to filter through all the stuff, and what do you look for in a business that you might want to buy?

Bill: I look for something that’s wrong with it, but easily fixable. So in the instance of Nurture My Body, they have really great products. What was in the bottles was really fantastic, they have really great repeat customers which is another thing to look for, are people coming back, do people love the brand, are people telling their friends about the brand, sharing on Facebook. What do the testimonials look like, and all that tracked down really well for Nurture My Body, but the original entrepreneurs while they were really good, and they created fantastic products, their design needed a little bit of help, so…

Steve: The website design or the product design?

Bill: All the above. So the whole brand, the logo was not great, the labels were really bad, they didn’t have UPC barcodes on them. So they couldn’t be sold in stores. The website was still running on Xcard, an old version of Xcard, it was really not optimized for conversion at all. So I saw what they had was a really good product and really bad branding, so that was the first thing I worked on when I bought the business, it’s rebranding it. So it took about seven months, and then we launched it all together a new logo, a new website, new packaging, new labels, new everything, but we didn’t change the formulas.

Steve: So just curious as you are going through I guess the perspective– what are the documents called that they give you to give all the numbers necessary.

Bill: Often times it called the confidential information memorandum or simply a memo.

Steve: Okay, and is all that information that you mentioned contained in these documents like repeat customers. Is there like a set of numbers that are required for someone to reveal in order to sell their business that you can look at, or is everything just different across the board?

Bill: So basically there is some standardization because people hire a business broker and the business broker basically will grill the seller, and source out all the information that he thinks the buyer is going to want to know and they will put it in the memo. So the memo will have a lot of good information, it will have all the financials of the business. Typically what it will exclude is things like the specific names of their suppliers; you know anything that you can use to rip them off to copy their business. But as far as the financials, obviously you need the financials to value the business.

They will also typically have a discussion to how the business started with the seller, how it’s grown, a link to the website, you can check out the products, but obviously you are going to have questions and what data beyond what’s in the memo. So typically the way the process works is you will ask your final listing, you will contact the broker, you will say hey I`m interested in this listing and the listing will be pretty generic. It will say you know the listing will say something like ecommerce brand of personal care products.

Steve: okay.

Bill: You know. And then you will say hey broker that sounds like something I might be interested in, and they’ll say okay you sign an NDA and if you sign an NDA then we’ll go ahead and send you the memo.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: And then we get the memo, you’ll read the memo and the broker says if you’re still interested I’d be glad to set you up with a call with the seller.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: And that’s just asking the questions that aren’t in the memo.

Steve: Okay. So you mentioned related to the products and the branding and you look for something wrong. Is there anything in the financials that you kind of focus on as well, I mean there are so many different aspects of buying a business, right?

Bill: Sure. So for me I like to look for good gross margins, and this is why I will never get into drop shipping because the gross margins are just brutally tight.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: I mean if you have a proprietary product, your gross margin should be closer to 70%, drop shipping gross margins are 15 to 20, and that’s before you pay for any of your expenses; your fulfillment, your branding, your website, your time, any of that. So I look for good gross margins and then that test also pull through to get that margin.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: I also look for a business that has been flat. If a business is up and growing 50% every year obviously that’s awesome, but you’re going to have to pay up for that, you’ll pay a much higher multiple.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: But if the– and if the business is down that’s obviously pretty scary unless you can really pin point exactly why it’s down and have confidence that you can reverse it. So I love to look for businesses that are flat and businesses that had the same revenue for the past three years as on track to the same revenue again. And what that tells me is the owners just don’t know how to grow it anymore, but there is a royal base of customers who like the product keep coming back, and that there’s something there like this is a decent product, it probably just needs to be exposed to more people.

Steve: Okay, and then so you mentioned the margins you’d like to see 70. That pretty much precludes drop shipping as well as carrying inventory of other people’s products, is that kind of accurate?

Bill: Yep. I agree with that and the reason I don’t like carrying inventory of other people’s products is because eventually you will end up competing with Amazon, which obviously sucks and they will– it’s a very [Inaudible] [00:17:10] on pricing and I don’t want to step in the ring with Jeff Bezos.

Steve: So to sum it up you look for companies that are flat. They sell their own kind of proprietary products– have you– have any of your two acquisitions been like kind of on the down trend or has everything been kind of flat?

Bill: Both have been pretty flat.

Steve: Okay, and then the sales have been really consistent and the repeat customer rate has been high as well since these are consumables.

Bill: Yes, and you know high is relative when you talk about repeat customer rate.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: If you’re selling software something and you have people locked in on contracts, then you have you know obviously ridiculously high recurring revenue, but if you’re selling a consumer product and you’re converting you know 50% of people are coming back and buying again, that is astronomical.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: I mean you could have you could be happy at 20-30% which would be pretty good.

Steve: Okay that actually sounds pretty high to me as well 20-30%.

Bill: Yeah, that would be very good.

Steve: Okay and then okay, so let’s go specifically with Nurture My Body. So when you acquired them they had a repeat customer in that range I guess.

Bill: Yeah, I think it was about 40%.

Steve: 40%, wow okay, and so that gave you the confidence that when you acquired it sales wouldn’t just fall off a cliff, right?

Bill: Right because I knew I had these people and I had their email addresses, and I knew that they were loyal to the brand.

Steve: And how much was the owner itself tied into the brand, was there any correlation at all?

Bill: Yes, there were some because the owner of the brand, she had been an esthetician for 20 years. She developed the formulas herself, and so you know I worked with her to transition it. I got her to agree that I could still use her likeness on the website. So it was a very sort of quiet transition.

Steve: Okay, and since we’re just talking about the transition, what is involved in actually getting a company handed off to you? Kind of how do you handle the whole on boarding process?

Bill: Most sellers will typically agree to train you for some period of time post acquisition. Simply about a month, two weeks to six weeks somewhere in there, and that’s obviously negotiable as well and then beyond that they’ll usually offer to be paid, if you want a consultant to stay longer. So you typically have a couple of weeks with the seller, but also during due diligence you know I want to make sure that I wasn’t buying a business that I couldn’t step into that was going to collapse once the sellers left.

Steve: Right.

Bill: So as part of my diligence I flew out to meet them and sat with them for two days while they run their business. I just said you know pretend I’m not here, just run your business, I just want to watch you and take notes, so I know that when it’s my time to do the things that you are doing, I’ll know what to do.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Because a lot of sellers will say “oh it’s really easy to run the business, I only do A and B everyday and it’s only a couple of hours and it’s done,” but then you sit and watch and see that they are doing ABCDE&F every day, and they’re like “oh I didn’t think of that just a little thing, or I didn’t think of that because it was a little thing,” and often it amounts to a lot more than they say they were doing every day.

Steve: Okay sure okay, and so this is even before money has changed hands you do this.

Bill: Yeah so…

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Just kind of finished the process from earlier, you get the memo and you have a chance for a call with the seller, they sort of answer any questions that you have and the broker will help you gather any further data request that you have, at which point they expect you to come in with a bid for the business. So you’ll submit what’s called an LOI, a letter of intent.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: And that LOI basically says “hey seller, I’ve taken a look at your business, I understand what it is. Here’s the number I’m prepared to pay you. Here is the date that I intend to close. Here is how I expect you to stay on and consult.” Basically outlines the terms of your offer, and it’s about a page long and well it’s not really a legal document, it’s more about– this is just our understanding, does this sound good to you?

Steve: Okay.

Bill: And if the seller says “yes this sounds good to me” they will sign the LOI and agree to give you what’s called exclusivity, and that says basically the seller is promising that for 30 days or 60 days or two weeks or however long you negotiate, that they won’t talk to any other buyers, that they’ll only talk to you, and they’re going to reveal to you, you know basically anything you want to know. This is your chance to dig deep into their accounting to make sure it matches what you see in their shopping cart, to make sure it matches what you see on their margin statements. This is your chance to make sure they’re not lying to you about everything or anything.

Steve: What is their incentive to sign such a document?

Bill: Because you are the buyer requiring.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Because you won’t pay them, I mean this is the type of thing if you buy a house you insist on being able to inspect it for mold and have your engineer inspect it to make sure the foundation is okay, it’s not going to fall down. I mean nobody would buy a house without doing those things.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Similar to buying a business and any buyer wants a diligence period.

Steve: Okay and so that period is typically how long then?

Bill: It’s typically about a month and the reason that…

Steve: A month, okay.

Bill: A buyer will ask for exclusivity is because typically diligence is when you the buyer going to start spending money. That could be hiring an accountant to go through their books. That could be flying out there to see them. That could be hiring a lawyer to begin to draft up the ask purchase agreement. So you as the buyer are going to spend money, and basically your seller is telling you that they’re serious, and you’re telling them that you’re serious, and it would be a bummer for you the buyer, if you were spending money and then the seller calls you one day and goes, I am on a contract with someone else.

Steve: So it is a lot like buying a house because there’s this contingency period and at that point you’re locked, right?

Bill: Well after you sign the LOI, the buyer typically is able to back out for any reason. It’s a very weak document, so you can back out for any reason you know if you find anything you figure out that they are kind of doesn’t match or if you decide that you just don’t like the way their building smells or whatever.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: You can back out, and that’s the time you should go out and actually meet the seller in person and you just see how they run their business.

Steve: I guess did you look at a bunch of other companies and go through this entire process before you found Nurture My Body?

Bill: So I looked at my NDAs folder the other day and I signed about 200 NDAs.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So it means I got about 200 books before I bought one company.

Steve: And how many of those did you actually submit a letter of intent to?

Bill: Three.

Steve: Three, okay and can you just tell us what some of the things happened when you actually went to visit some of the other two that you did not buy?

Bill: Well, so one of them I did buy, so the other two; one of them the seller got cold feet and flaked out, and one of them I discovered some risks to their business model that had not been talked about before.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Basically some large competitors and they say had said they had some opportunities that turned out to be not be as real as close to closing as they said they were.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So this is the time to find all that out during diligence.

Steve: Okay and so what are some of the things that you typically spend money on during this process?

Bill: Hands down the most important is a plane ticket to go see them.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Hands down I mean like yes you are going to spend a little bit of money on accountants and lawyers, but the very first thing you should do before hiring any of those folks is get on a plane and meet the seller. Spend a couple of nights in a hotel, sit with them and watch them do their business because you might decide hey right now before I even get in the functions and everything, this is not a business, I want out.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: The other things you will spend money on are lawyers and accountants. If you are a pretty savvy accounting you might not need to hire one. Basically what the accountant is going to do is what’s called a quality of earnings report, and they’re going to look and see– they’ll basically compare all the business accounting records, and they’re going to cross reference it to the margin statements and the carts and everything, just basically double check to make sure everything ties out.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: That they actually made the money that they say they made. Compare their bank balances right, because bank balance month to month– the difference in bank balance should be revenue minus expenses for that month.

Steve: So is it a huge red flag in general then if the business that you are trying to buy is kind of mixed a little bit of personal with their business?

Bill: No, every business has that.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: And that’s part of also what you’re going to do when you are accounting diligence, you’re going to go line by line to that income statement with the seller and try to understand which things are personal and which ones are business. Because the things that are personal the seller will try to say– the seller is going to try and exclude as many things as possible. “Oh this is personal, this is an expense you won’t incur,” because that will increase the perceived profitability of the business. So you will pay a higher multiple.

Steve: Okay, and then so you know also during your office visit, how much does the personality of the actual seller really matter to you? Are you just primarily looking at the nuts and bolts of how to run the business?

Bill: Yeah-yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Because for me when I buy a business I have a rule, I buy 100% of the business. I don’t let a seller stick around with 10% or 20% which might be tempting. If you’re buying a business say “hey if I let a seller keep 20% of the business, I can still have control over everything and it will be 20% cheaper and I will be able to have him stick around in case I need him.” I would advise against doing that because what you’re going to have is a person who used to own 100% of the business as their baby that they started, and then you’re going to come in and gut it or change it you know yank the ship in a different direction, and they’re probably not going to be happy about it.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: But they’re not going to do anything about it, but you’re not going to be able to make them go away because they own 20% of the business, so there is going to be a thorn in your side forever.

Steve: Okay, and then how does kind of inventory come into play, is that just all included in the sale?

Bill: This is a negotiated point typically, and I have fairly firm views on this that sometimes don’t jive with the views of the sellers or brokers. A lot of times you will see a business for sale and they’ll say this business is for sale for $200,000 plus you know $50,000 of inventory. You know the asking price for the business is $250,000. And they’ll say typically that– they’ll say all right three times my cash flow gets me to 200,000, and then I also want to sell my inventory. So really your effective multiple then creeps up from two and a half to three or more you know, so your effective multiple to cheque you’re paying divided by the cash flow you’re getting is much higher.

So I think that’s BS you know because my basically– my question to them is okay then I just want to buy the business, I don’t want the inventory. And they are like, “oh well you can’t do that,” and I’m like “well then can I just buy the inventory and not the business,” and they are like “oh no you can’t do that.” And I’m– so their total– they’re completely one and the same, but they are not, the inventory is wired to run the business. The inventory is part of the business; you wouldn’t sell me the business without the inventory, there wouldn’t be no business anymore.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So to me I think it’s fairly ridiculous for sellers and brokers to insist on valuing the inventory separately. Typically the way that it was handled and this is how– and the reason I say this is because coming from investment banking, we were representing– we were the brokers actually, and we were representing businesses for sale with $5000,000 of cash flow every year, I mean much larger businesses and much more professional deals. And the way the inventory was always valued every single time is what you do is you look for what is called a normalized level of inventory.

So you can say all right the business has had you know say it had $100,000 in sales and we have had twenty thousand dollars in inventory relatively consistently. So you say all right inventory should be about 20% of sales, so when the business– when you are going to close on the business you say all right what kind of sales do you have you know trailing three months. And if it’s not the same you take 20% of that, and that’s the amount of inventory that they should have. And if they have less than that what that really means is that the seller has been shirking, has been not buying new inventory because they know they are about to sell the business, which he is about to stick you with writing a big check for inventory from their supplier right after you buy the business.

Steve: Right.

Bill: So the business is under inventory. So if that happens what you’re going to do is if there is a delta, if they are under inventory by 10 grand, you’re going to reduce the purchase price by 10 grand. And this is pre-agreed upon ahead of time. So you agree upon a normalized little inventory, and then you agree upon on the date of closing we are going to value the inventory and adjust the purchase price by any under-inventory if there is any. And what this will do is it will prevent the seller form doing what I just described from running down their inventory.

Steve: Okay, that makes a whole lot of sense, okay.

Bill: And it goes the other way too, so you say, okay seller if you have more inventory than you typically have we’ll increase the purchase price by however much. So if you normally have $20,000 in inventory and you have 30, we’ll increase the purchase price by 10 grand. Because that’s your over inventory and that’s the inventory I’m getting beyond what is necessary to run the business on a day to day basis.

Steve: Okay. And a couple of questions that just popped into my head. When you are buying a business, does the platform that they are on matter at all? Or do you typically just use the platform of your own choice?

Bill: The technology platform?

Steve: Yes.

Bill: For me I wouldn’t care.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: If it’s good that’s one last thing I have to do. If it’s not a platform I like, like in the case of Nurture My Body is all outdated self hosted [inaudible] [00:30:25] that I can kind of use something that’s broken that I need to fix.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: And that could be an opportunity if they are on an old platform with cranky check out flow out flow and just a bad conversion outsmart website, that could be one of those things you look at you know this is broken, this is something I can fix and get a win.

Steve: Okay. And I kind of wanted to spend some time on some of the things that you did to kind of take some of the business you’ve acquired to the next level. So first of, you know what are some of the common plateaus that you see some of these small business owners get to and they just can’t seem to get past?

Bill: The biggest one is marketing. They create a product, they get some initial buzz, they get existing customer base, but they really don’t know how to get the product out of in front of a bunch of other people. And you know they are not doing AdWords or they are doing AdWords very poorly and very unprofitably which is very easy to do. AdWords is quite difficult to do over time profitably. So they might have tried it and got AdWords doesn’t work for me and stopped it. They are also probably not doing any email marketing at all. So many sellers…

Steve: Interesting.

Bill: Are doing no email marketing.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: And this was something that I even did not appreciate the value of for a long time, and I had a good friend who was beating me over the head to say you have to email. And I was emailing once a month. And Nurture My Body was emailing once a month too before I bought it, and I was like any more than that people are going to get pissed and they are going to unsubscribe. And I had a buddy and he basically all he does is email marketing consultant, and he was like if the people are going to unsubscribe they were never going to buy from you anyway. And so he convinced me to go to once a week form once a month.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Which is a dramatic increase, but still not that absurdly often and I went kicking and screaming to once a week. And it was a huge difference, huge difference. I mean email revenue is I think half of the revenue for Nurture My Body.

Steve: Really? Wow, okay.

Bill: It’s incredible, I mean like this is a huge level and everybody– nobody realizes it. And you don’t have to discount. I’m not saying you have to send a coupon every week. So we just sent emails and said, hey here is a profile of aloe vera, one of the ingredients in our personal care products. Or hey like here is new legislation about organic products that just came out. And every email just had our logo on the top and a signature at the bottom.

And it’s just a reminder, it’s like hey here we are, remember us? Remember this brand? Remember you like it? Remember you wanted to buy some? And people click through and they buy, it’s just a reminder, it’s just putting your logo in their face.

Steve: So is your call to action at the end of these emails to a specific product or just to your site?

Bill: It depends, sometimes it’s to a product like if we profile a product in the email, sometimes it’s to a blog post on the site like learn a little bit about more about the legislation that just happened.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Or sometimes is to a category, so we’ll say you know, winter is coming like look at these moisturizers for dry skin in the winter. You know and that would take them over the category page for moisturizers.

Steve: Yeah actually is what’s funny is we recently started emailing once a week as well, and we have everything just on this auto responder’s sequence. So as soon as you are on and you can email every week for you know 10 or 12 weeks and it’s just like on auto pilot, and the customers just keep coming, it’s really nice. Do you guys use auto responder’s sequences as well?

Bill: A couple, so we do some like replenishment auto responders; because we know it took last about a month.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So we start hitting you with replenishment. We are also starting to do some like cross promotional auto responders, so like if you buy shampoo but not conditioner you going to get a coupon for conditioner.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: To try to get you to broaden what products you are buying from us.

Steve: Okay. And then so what platform do you use for that just curious?

Bill: So the store is on Bigcommerce and then we using email platform called klaviyo.

Steve: Klaviyo.

Bill: K-L-A-V-I-Y-O

Steve: Okay.

Bill: It’s kind of pricy, it runs depending on how many people you have, it’s about 300 bucks a month.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Which is definitely more than MailChimp, or some of the other ones.

Steve: Cheaper than Infusionsoft still.

Bill: Yeah it’s cheaper than big boys; it’s kind of in this middle ground, a couple of a hundred bucks a month. But it has a really cool Bigcommerce integration and not just Bigcommerce, it integrates with a lot of carts, but it will pull in you know not only just people’s email addresses when they buy, but actually what they bought. And they also have a tracking pixel that you can put on your website. So not only will you know who they are and what they bought, you’ll also know what they are looking at?

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So if they come back like I can look at my activity feeding Klaviyo and see that Steve you know who bought for me a couple of weeks ago is now on the website in real time clicking on shampoo. And if I wanted to I can fire an email off to you with a coupon for 10% off shampoo.

Steve: As I’m in the store?

Bill: Yeah.

Steve: That is really cool, okay I have to take a look at that platform. So email marketing is one thing, AdWords, what are some of the other things that some of these small business, mom and pop business owners are not doing?

Bill: Let’s see. Another thing that really helps marketing wise is to reach out to bloggers.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: You know just getting by in this niche mummy bloggers are really big. So I just reach out to them and I go, hey I would love to send you some free shampoos, or some free body lotions or take a pick whatever you want if you would just review it on your blog. I’ll send you free whatever you want. I’ll send one for you and I’ll send you one to give away to a reader.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: And then they’ll do review on it, and then the best part of the giveaway is clutch because what you do that is you go– have them say enter your email address below. And we’ll enter you in a draw for a free thing of Nurture My Body shampoo that I’ve just told you it was awesome. And then you are going to get email addresses for all their readers, and then they are going to fall in your email flow.

Steve: I see. Okay so giveaways– do you actually have provide incentives for liking your Facebook page and Twitting as well?

Bill: Sometimes.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: I don’t care so much about any of those kind of social actions because I’ve had a hard time proving it they actually drive revenue where as I know email is a gold mine.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So if they do one thing, I would like to have them give me their email address.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: The software that will help you with this is called Blueboox with two O’s.

Steve: Blueboox, okay.

Bill: And that will– it kind of automates the actual email here before you know it works with Facebook like or whatever before it puts them in, and then it will give you a list of everybody that completed the action. So you can pick a winner.

Steve: Okay. That’s cool, so you just mentioned socially you haven’t been able to get working so much. Does that imply then that you don’t use Facebook advertising?

Bill: You know I’ve doubled in it.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: I had a great talk by Ezra Firestone about Facebook marketing, and so there is a couple of things I want to try. But I think the hard thing about Facebook is that people are tiply not in a buying mood when they are on Facebook, they are on a looking pictures of their friends and cat videos mode.

Steve: Great.

Bill: And they are not ready to buy anything. So I’ve had a lot of trouble trying to convert people to purchase from a Facebook ad.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: However, I just I learnt from Ezra what he is doing and seeing some success with is basically putting a squeeze page. So instead of the ad taking you directly to the product page, the ad takes you to like blog post or like a newsy type article that describes something about the product. And with a couple saddle links to the product in the text, and that’s kind of transition that from cat video mode into learning and buying mode. And then maybe they click over the store and buy one. And Ezra was telling me he has had a lot of success with that. So that’s something I’m going to look at try and see.

Steve: It’s funny you talked about that as soon as I heard that talk I went and created the exact same thing. And so I had this article with a whole bunch of really nice pictures where you click and it’ll take you to the product, but it’s like an article. So we are on the wedding industry, so the article is called like 9 Unique Wedding Ideas to Make Your Wedding Extra Special. And on there is a pop up screen to get their email addresses and everything. So it’s just worked out really well.

Bill: Nice. That’s good.

Steve: So you get to convert on the friend and earn a chance to get on the back and watch you get your email address.

Bill: That’s really good. Put a like to that on the comments I’d love to see it.

Steve: Oh yeah, yeah I’ll show it to you. So okay, so it just seems like when you are buying these companies you are looking for people who might not necessarily be that tech savvy then, right. They are not aware of all these different ways to market your store. And that’s where the opportunity lies. Is that kind of accurate?

Bill: Frequently yes.

Steve: Okay. And then one thing I did also want to touch on is on boarding. You mentioned it’s just like two weeks or a month together with the seller. And I assume that’s all negotiable, but it just doesn’t seem like enough time in order to transition over a full business that might have all these little small things to be aware of. And so I guess what I’m trying to ask is it smooth, is this process smooth and is there a lot of negotiating going on after the fact once money is changed hands?

Bill: I wouldn’t say there is a lot of negotiating going on because the money has already changed hands. I would actually I thought the same thing before I did it, and I actually ended up not even needing the whole time.

Steve: Really? Okay.

Bill: You know because it’s– you definitely need them for the first week or so. I mean you are talking about 8 hours a day you know all the time with this person training you. And you’ll pick it up, I mean assuming you are not a moron. You’ll pick it up pretty quick and then you know yeah I think I had a month with Nurture My Body sellers, and I don’t think I really hardly spoke to them after two weeks.

Steve: Really? Okay.

Bill: But then after the you know for the next three to four months once a month I would have a question, I’d just pick up the phone and call them, and they were very gracious about just taking my call.

Steve: Okay. And then I’m just curious so how much did you grow in Nurture My Body once you acquired it?

Bill: So I acquired it in February of 2013, it’s now September of 2014; business is about three times the size.

Steve: Wow. Okay and so some of the things that you did were you re-branded it, and then were they using paper click?

Bill: They were not doing any paper click. We started doing a little bit of paper click, another thing we did is we took the products to Amazon. They were selling on Amazon, but it was– the listings were poorly optimized and they weren’t doing any prime.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So they weren’t doing any FBI. So we are taking select products to FBI, we’ve re-optimized all the listings, bigger pictures, better key words and the descriptions more like likely descriptions, things like that.

Steve: So let’s talk about Amazon real quick, I know we are running out of time, but what were some of your motivations for going on Amazon, and how do you kind of decide what you want to list there?

Bill: There is only one motivation, it’s a huge market. It’s just a huge market. I mean if for me I was– so back in 2011 I have been selling KP Elements online for about a year at kpelements.com, and I have said you know I found out I like literally read an article I was like Oh you can sell on Amazon? You know I thought everything on Amazon was sold by Amazon. And I still think a large majority of the online shopping public believes that.

And I was like oh you can sign up as a seller, kind of like eBay, like there was a market place where you can sell things in the Amazon. And I sold $39 a month. And my product retail was 35 and so I said, if I sell one a month it would be worth it, and I tried on a whim. And that was just merchant fulfilled, I didn’t do prime or anything. Merchant fulfilled for people who are listening and don’t know what that is, is basically if Amazon sells your product, it’s basically you drop shipping for Amazon.

They’ll send you an email and go, hey mail to this person and they process the payment and just take their cut and send you the money. So I was just doing merchant fulfilled and really quickly Amazon became about half as big as the website.

Steve: Wow! This is from merchant fulfilled?

Bill: Merchant fulfilled.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Yeah. And then you know I was like I don’t want to do prime; it’s kind of a pain. I got to manage inventory in two different warehouses, and then I had a friend who had a brand of supplements and he was all over me to do prime for like a year. And like an idiot I was ignoring him, and I was like I just don’t want to deal with it etcetera. And I finally caved because he was insistent and sent two cases to Amazon. Literally within a week my sales on Amazon had tripled.

Steve: Crazy, okay.

Bill: I changed nothing else, just going to prime. So it’s a huge channel.

Steve: Do you know if it affected your existing channel at all?

Bill: I would say it cannibalized it by about 5%.

Steve: 5% okay.

Bill: Not a lot. But at the same time now Amazon is bigger than my primary channel.

Steve: I guess it’s that whole of energy involved in managing your Amazon listings, right?

Bill: I mean there is like you got a– you have to keep supplying their warehouse. You also have to manage the negative reviews, you also have– Amazon is becoming very competitive in the same way that you know before Google, before people realize how much money there was to be made on Google, the people that had realized it were just wreaking it in, and then you know the world of SEO became a thing and Google just became very-very-very competitive. Amazon is going through that same transition right now, where the broader public is starting to realize there’s a lot of money slashing out of Amazon and it’s getting very-very competitive.

Steve: Okay. And so do you foresee your Amazon sales grow faster than the sales of your regular site?

Bill: It’s hard to say. I don’t know, that’s really hard to say because it depends so much on you know the competition on Amazon. And their algorithm is such a black box, so you know what you rank for and everything. It’s hard to predict.

Steve: Okay. Yeah I mean one of the key take aways from attending their conference as well is I need to get on Amazon. So we are actually in the process of using FBI ourselves. So…

Bill: Awesome!

Steve: I’ll keep you posted.

Bill: I’m sure you’ll have good news to report.

Steve: Awesome. But hey I don’t want to take up too much more of your time; we’ve already been talking for 45 minutes. If anyone has any questions on just the whole process of buying and selling websites, how can they reach you?

Bill: Yeah you can find me at RebelCEO.com, there is a contact form on there, it drops right into my inbox. I see them all, that’s the easiest way to get hold of me. Or you can find me on Twitter @BillDA.

Steve: Okay. Awesome Bill, hey thanks a lot for coming on the show, I learnt a lot and a lot of good stuff that you brought today.

Bill: Yeah sure, thanks Steve, glad to do it.

Steve: All right man. Take care.

Bill: All right, you too.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. I have often wondered what it will be like to purchase an online business and grow an existing customer base as opposed to starting one from scratch. And Bill has got a lot of experience in this area and I’m thankful that he is willing to share his strategies with us. For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode48.

And if you enjoyed listening to this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show very easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show, and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

047: What It’s Like To Be On Shark Tank With Eric Bandholz

Eric Banzholz Shark Tank

I’m really happy to have Eric Bandholz back on the show. In the last episode when we talked about BeardBrand.com, Eric’s Shark Tank episode had not yet aired so we couldn’t talk about it.

But now that everything is out there, Eric can now finally share his experiences to the public. Since Eric went on Shark Tank, his business has grown dramatically. Here are some of his stats

  • His store went from about $4500/day to about $12k/day in revenues
  • His store got 20k visitors on Friday and Saturday of the show (40k total)
  • The most concurrent visitors he had was during the East coast airing with about 6300 visitors

Below is a photo of his stats during the show.

SharkTank Stats

What You’ll Learn

  • How to get on Shark Tank
  • What it’s like to be on the show
  • How to prepare yourself to be on Shark Tank
  • What numbers and data you should already have in your head before the pitch
  • How to prepare your website for the onslaught of traffic
  • What Eric would have done differently if he went on again

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

If you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consultations every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I`m really excited to have Eric Bandholz on the show again. Now Eric runs the incredibly profitable online store beardbrand.com and he is actually my very first return guest believe it or not. Now, why did I bring him back on the show again so soon? In between our last conversation, Eric went on my favorite TV show on television Shark Tank. And since I have not yet had anyone on the show who has been on Shark Tank yet, I knew I had to have him back. Now I`ve got a lot of question for Eric today and I must say that I`m a little bit jealous that he got to meet Daymond John and Mark Cuban, Barbra and Mr Wonderful, and with that welcome back to the Show Eric how are you doing today man?

Eric: Hey Steve I`m doing absolutely fantastic. How are you doing?

Steve: Pretty good man. I would imagine you would be doing pretty fantastic after going on the show.

Eric: Yeah.

Steve: It was an amazing show, I don’t want to spoil the show incase people haven’t seen it yet. So we can talk about the outcome a little bit too at the end.

Eric: Yeah we had to keep my lip shut because it happened, so long ago but it also aired a while ago as well. So– but it was you know I was following up on it and the ratings came out, and I was– the show was on Halloween and I was thinking because it was on the Halloween it would get lower ratings than normal. I looked back on old Halloween shows and they seem to be down, but it was actually the highest rated show of the season, so…

Steve: Really?

Eric: Yeah.

Steve: Awesome.

Eric: So I was pretty excited about that as well.

Steve: Do you get ratings for your own specific segment. Do they break that down for you?

Eric: I just looked on a public website, so I don’t know how they broke down…

Steve: Okay.

Eric: Per segment or anything like that.

Steve: Awesome and just curious before we get into the guts of the interview, did you have like your analytics open and then as soon as the show came on, did you see it like shoot up?

Eric: Yeah we had a TV set up for a viewing party. We had a bunch of people over here at the Beard Brand office, and then we had another monitor set up right next to it with the analytics from our website urbanbeardsmen.com, and from beardbrand.com with real time pages open on both of those so…

Steve: And I’m just curious like what’s your normal and what did it shoot up too as soon your segment aired?

Eric: Our normal kind of coming into this show was about 20 or 30 people.

Steve: Okay, on at a time.

Eric: On at a time and then during the show it just like– it would take time to refresh like it was– like real time wasn’t like real-real time, but it would be like you know 50, 100, 500…

Steve: Wow.

Eric: 1200 and then it went all the way up to 6300 simultaneous visitors.

Steve: Oh my goodness, okay. So what– I did want to get into this later, but since we are talking about it, what did you do to prepare for that onslaught of traffic?

Eric: So our shopping cart is on Shopify and they can handle up to half a million visits per minute.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: So, I was pretty sure we weren’t going to get that many visitors. So Shopify was totally fine and then with urbanbeardmen.com, I had that hosted on like a shared host, but it had been acting walky kind of leading up to the show. So we switched to Amazon web services and bought a bunch of server time, and we paid a lot of money– I mean it wasn’t a lot it was like 100 bucks and had a friend set it up, but you know it handled the traffic and we cashed out everything before the show, so that everything was loading quickly, and just kind of optimized to handle the onslaught, and a lot of people really didn’t go on to urban beards men from beard brand. But I mean– maybe a few hundred, but it wasn’t anything that we were just blown away with the traffic.

Steve: So in terms of shopify, I`m sure they can’t handle that much traffic for every store. So did you have to give them a heads up a head of time or…

Eric: I mean they seemed pretty confident.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: Of those abilities, so I gave– I did contact them and reached out to them and let them know, but I think they have seen that a few times. I think there is other companies who have been on Shark Tank who have just kind of opted out ahead of time.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: Shopify is for the most part you know, keeping the website up hasn’t been a big trouble for them.

Steve: Awesome, well that’s good to know. So let’s start from the very beginning. No first of give us 60 second refresher to what you sell in your store again just so the listeners remember, and then tell us what your motivations were for even applying to Shark Tank.

Eric: So Beard Brand we foster style for the urban beards men and that means we are trying to change the way society views beards men by helping them understand that beards men aren’t simply you know lumberjacks or bikers or hippies or outdoors men, but there is also you know what we call the urban beadsmen, which is maybe more professional, family oriented, community driven type of guys, you know your typical office guy.

Steve: Mm-huh.

Eric: And to help them out we provide beard care products. So we sell beard oil, mustache wax, combs, brushes, kits and the likes for that niche out there. And we wanted to be on Shark Tank because just the opportunity to expose our brand to millions of people, and then in addition to that to be able to partner with some high priority people. We are really heavy and focused on branding.

Steve: Mm-huh.

Eric: And I think part of branding is aligning with people who fit your image and can help you– who have the resources to help you grow quicker than you can grow, and specifically I`m talking about like celebrity endorsements.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: And I wasn’t thinking necessarily like one of the sharks would be a celebrity endorsement, but I was thinking that they probably have more connections to other beards men, who have more clout than I do, and they might be able to make that introduction or help us with writing the contracts or formulating those deals that we don’t have a lot of experience doing. And then from like the advisor stand point you know to build a multimillion dollar company is our goal. I have never done that before. So everyday I`m learning something new, and it would always be nice to have like an advisory community or platform, someone to help us out and help us grow.

Steve: So just curious, did you go into the show full on wanting an investment from the sharks?

Eric: We– for us it was a win-win situation.

Steve: Right.

Eric: Our business is healthy and growing in a sense that we don’t need any outside money. So we are not desperate for a deal, but if we could have worked out a deal we would have worked out a deal, so yeah.

Steve: And I`m just curious I mean just– I’ve seen the show I don’t know if all the listeners have watched the Halloween episode yet, but what were you– going in did you know how much you were willing to give up for the company and how much were you actually willing to the sharks and kind of how did you kind of evaluate how much you were willing to give up verses what they would have to offer you in your business?

Eric: We did a lot of research before going on to the show trying to figure out what the valuation of our business was, and you know at the time our business was only– had only existed for 18 months. So there is not a lot of backing data you know any of that, but from talking with a law firm that does a lot of MNAs to talking with other VCs and other successful business owners who have sold, we– they advised that our business was valued anywhere between four and ten million dollars.

Steve: Okay, is that about– what multiple is that? A three to four X or?

Eric: You know I don’t really know when you consider multiples if its– is it on revenue or is it on profit or anything like that, but at that point we had a run rate 1.2 million dollars.

Steve: Okay, and that’s revenue right.

Eric: That’s revenue. And we were focusing more on the run rate than we were on total sales because of the rapid growth, but and you know personally I don’t really get into valuation too much. it`s not like we are really looking forward to selling. It`s just some kind of– I just wanted amo [phonetic] and…

Steve: Absolutely.

Eric: Opinions from other people other than me, and what the valuation of the business was so that I could feel confident, you know pitching to them and standing ground for what we thought the business was worth. But if you watch the show you will see that we came in there asking for $400,000 for 15% which puts us at 2.6 million dollar valuation. So we gave– we factored in the unique opportunity that a Shark could have by being associated with the TV show, and discounted our business in results to that, and then I think we would have gone down as low as two million dollars to do the deal.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: So like, all that was kind of going in beforehand.

Steve: In terms of giving up equity though, were you willing to give up like 50%?

Eric: Well so, for those who aren’t familiar with how the show works, they– you set a number that you need and if you can’t get to that number the deal won’t get done. So, if you want to have a deal done, it’s going to be better to do like a lower amount like $100,000 or something like that. And we came in at $400,000. So it’s a little bit higher amount and a little bit bigger investment for them. So it’s a little bit harder to get a deal done with that higher price tag. I forgot what you asked.

Steve: I asked like let say Cuban came up to you and said hey I have a million bucks for…

Eric: [crosstalk 11:43] so we were willing to do…

Steve: Because you own 100%, is that right?

Eric: Yeah, I mean I would much rather just sell the whole thing than sell half of it.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: So I think, we would have stuck ground at that 400,000 and let’s see here what is that…

Steve: I`m busy asking you what percentage of the company were you willing to give up at let’s say about a $ 2,000,000 valuation?

Eric: Well, we would have done 400,000 because we would have had to, so that takes you to what percentage is that?

Steve: One fifth, twenty percent right?

Eric: Okay right. So we would have given up the 20%.

Steve: Interesting. Okay, so you went in with the dollar amount instead of– like I was just curious if one of the Sharks– sometimes they go up, right. They give you more money than you ask for and they ask for a higher percentage.

Eric: Yeah I mean, I probably wouldn’t have, I probably wouldn’t have gone higher than 20%.

Steve: Okay, all right.

Eric: So let’s talk about the application process, what is that like? Walk me through what you had to do to get on the show.

Eric: So there is a lot of different ways to get on the show. The best opportunity is when the producers just randomly stumble across you business and they reach out to you and they ask you to be on the show. So you are pretty much green lighted through several steps of processes. There are two other ways, the other ways, the other way– one other way is by filling out the application and submitting it and just sending it through their yahoo email address that you get online, and then the final way is to go to like a casting call out around the nation. That will happen, and I think we did the one where you emailed through their email system.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: And that worked for us. We were considering doing one of the casting call events in Austin Texas, but we didn`t want to stand in line for two hours for something that we really didn’t have control over. We were kind of at that time we had already submitted our application.

Steve: Right.

Eric: And so for us too is you know if they dig it they dig it if not we’ve got to move on with our business and focus on growing it.

Steve: So describe the application and how do you make yourself stand out? Like what are some tips and tricks on getting on that you did?

Eric: I think Lindsay just filled that out over the course just 15 minutes and just put in our information and kind of went with it. So…

Steve: Are you serious?

Eric: Yeah it wasn’t like– at that time I don’t even think she was familiar with the show Shark Tank, she is like oh this sounds cool, I`m going to fill it out and put it in. And so she filled it out in like 15 minutes and, I mean I think what we are doing is kind of cool by default. I think you know not a lot of people are doing what we are doing and I don’t think they`ve had anyone on the show who is doing what we`ve done. So I think the big thing is being unique. You know if you are not a beard oil company out there listening, then they are probably not going to air that, or if they do air it, it’s not going to be for a number of years. So they want to have like unique consumer based products.

Steve: You know what’s funny though Eric, I’ve watched every single episode of Shark Tank and a lot of times they have people that are just like baking cookies or cup cakes and what nots. That stuff isn’t that unique, so I would imagine that you have to make your application stand out a little bit. There must be something that Lindsay did in that 15 minutes. Perhaps she is amazing.

Eric: Yeah, I mean we were proud of our story and we tell our story and you know our story involves like Urban Beards and then and change in the way society views beards men, which are pretty big tasks, which I think stands out you know, it’s not like we just make cookies and we sell them. But you know our numbers we have pretty good numbers for growth as well and I think that tells the story as well. I don’t know if I’ll ever ask them like why did they pick us over the 35,000 other companies.

Steve: Okay. So you send in your email, how long did it take for you to response?

Eric: It took about like six months.

Steve: Six months? Okay, no you didn’t hear from them yet for six months?

Eric: Yeah, so we estimate like October-November something like that and we had from them I think in May.

Steve: I’m sorry this is a text based submission process, right. You didn’t include a video or anything, right?

Eric: I’m pretty sure at this point we didn’t do a video.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: But they followed up and we did a video.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: With my…

Steve: So they followed up and were you on the show at that point when they’d followed up, or did they want more information out of you?

Eric: Yeah, so I think they kind of said they were interested in you know having you continue through the Shark Tank process and you know shoot a video, let’s see what you are like and submit it. You know like sell the producers on why you should be on the show.

Steve: Okay. And then what– do you have that video?

Eric: I’m not allowed to show that video.

Steve: Oh you are not allowed to show that video, okay.

Eric: But I do have it.

Steve: So may be privately you can give me a link to it.

Eric: No, you don’t get it privately.

Steve: I don’t get it privately either.

Eric: No, no.

Steve: Yeah, all right. Well even with that personality video, you still going on the show huh Eric. Okay cool, so you send in that video and then what happens?

Eric: It’s just like a…

Steve: What’s it like to talk about that video? Is that just a personality thing– the video was just a personality thing? Or did you just pitch your company at that point?

Eric: Yeah I mean it’s both, right you know it’s essentially showing how you would appear on TV. Yeah, and then it’s just a lot more forms and a lot more back and forth, a lot more tweaking and you know communicating, and then just getting ready for the show essentially like just there is all these baby steps that needed to happen.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: To make sure that you are ready for the show, you know make sure that all their Ts are crossed and their eyes are dotted legally, and make sure that they want to cover their ass.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: So they don’t get sued for promoting something that’s panted or you know.

Steve: Sure.

Eric: So they don’t want to you know they are doing it not only like vetting you for talent, but also vetting you for your business, to make sure that the Sharks would you know that you are actually a rigid business, that it’s something that they would invest in as well. So there is a lot of like you would go for any kind of investment, you got to give up your numbers or reason and all that other stuff.

Steve: Do they come to you at your office?

Eric: No, it’s all on line, emails and stuff, yeah.

Steve: Oh it’s all on line, okay.

Eric: Yeah.

Steve: Interesting you know because you know I’m always under the impression that when people go on the show they haven’t been completely vetted yet. But it sounds like they vet you completely before you even get on the show.

Eric: So the Sharks are not that– the sharks have no idea what’s walking through that door. But the whole producing team, then Shark Tank show they’ll vet of course.

Steve: Okay. And then after that what happens? So you did your video, you submitted it, and then how much time has elapsed?

Eric: It’s a pretty quick process to get in on the show or getting to film the show, but it’s just a you know I’ll be a little vague here it’s pretty much you know sign a bunch of papers, walk through a lot of back and forth with the producing team you know just kind of they really like set your expectations. They just tell you what’s going to happen, and how it’s going to happen. They are very upfront, they are very clear, and they really just walking you through the process. I think it’s more in line our strategy was listening to these guys because they know what they are doing, like they’ve done how many episodes in the past and how many entrepreneurs.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: They really take advice from them on what they recommend that we should do as entrepreneurs. So we had a really open book on what we wanted to do, and how we wanted to do it, and just kind of fall in line with them. So you just walk through them and you talk with them and you work out all the details, and then you don’t talk about it which is…

Steve: Yeah we’ll see what you are willing to talk about here. So we can talk about the preparations right. So how did you prepare to be on the show?

Eric: Well of course we did the valuation for our business that we talked about. So you get a fill for what we thought our business was worth then. And kind of we watched a lot of episodes in the past to see who is going to react, and how we thought they were going to react and how we would handle various scenarios. I’m one of those guys who if I prepare too much, I underperform, I get nervous, I over think things, and so I actually prefer winning it a little bit.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: And just be myself.

Steve: I’m the same way actually yeah.

Eric: Which you know sometimes it’s good and sometimes it’s not so good, but it’s how I feel so comfortable. So I did one dry run with the– my co-founders.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: And I set the pitch like in my head and throughout the day like probably a thousand times. Like I was just constantly saying the pitch and saying it over and over and over again. Because that’s one thing that’s really scripted that you got to know is that first two minute intro.

Steve: Okay. Now how long is the pitch by the way?

Eric: It’s they want you to keep it under two minutes.

Steve: Under two minutes, okay.

Eric: And then I kept in there and they still– they cut out a few pieces of it which was a little annoying, like I had some good jokes in there, and they cut them, but I guess they weren’t that good if they cut them out.

Steve: Okay, so what are some of the facts that you just had to down part; you mentioned valuation, anything else?

Eric: You know it’s just knowing how you’ve grown and knowing your numbers.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: And I was very– at that point I was very hands on with the business. So I knew like all the day to day numbers, I knew everything.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: We had a lot of growth and you’ve got to know your numbers, but that’s with any business you’ve got to know your numbers. You’ve got to know your market and stuff like that, but…

Steve: Was there a particular Shark that you were hoping to get?

Eric: I think Daymond with his experience in branding and building [inaudible] [00:22:08] up.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: Would have been a good connection for us as well as Mark Cuban with his philosophical alignments to us. I think those two probably would have been our preferred Sharks to work with.

Steve: And given that none of the Sharks were kind of they didn’t have beards– if they did that would have been a huge advantage for you I’d imagine. But what was your overall strategy to convincing them to invest in something that traditionally at least what I feel they don’t traditionally invest in. What was your overall strategy besides letting them pay your beard and that sort of thing?

Eric: Well I guess we’ll start getting in a little bit of spoilers uh?

Steve: Yeah. Let’s do it.

Eric: So we– I don’t know we have a pretty good story, and the market is out there, the numbers are out there.

Steve: Yeah.

Eric: To back our stuff and our business shows in those numbers as well. So I was hoping that they could really look at our business from the financial stand point, and really just you know emphasize like what we’ve been able to do on a big struck budget, how we’ve been able to grow. But I think– apparently it was a harder task than I thought because it’s kind of odd when you know I do podcast like this, you guys have seen what we’ve done.

Steve: Yeah.

Eric: You’ve seen the website, you’ve seen the brand, you’ve seen the videos, you’ve seen all that, and you like totally get it, right? When you go up pitching you don’t have all that background information. So they’ve never seen my website, they’ve never seen the reviews from our customers, they’ve never you know seen the You Tube videos on our 2,000,000 views on You Tube, like they haven’t seen like any of the brand that we’ve build. And they are just taking…

Steve: Face value.

Eric: Yeah, face value that oh yeah we’ve built a brand and they are like no you haven’t, you haven’t a brand. Once you get into that kind of argument, it’s like I can’t prove it’s wrong because you know I don’t have the computer there and the likes. But I think it’s you know I didn’t have full control of them. They are like kids in a candy store you know they are all running around on these ideas on their heads and questions they want to ask and they are all ask them at the same time. So as the pitcher you’ve got to be in control of that room. And I think I had a fair amount of control of directing them with what I wanted to talk about, but…

Steve: I know a lot of stuff gets cut out by the time it gets to television. So I mean in terms of the actual appearance, how long were you up there in front of them?

Eric: I think I was up there for about 45 minutes.

Steve: Oh okay wow! Okay. So they cut all that down to about 5 minutes I think on TV, right?

Eric: Yeah it was like 6 minutes, I think I timed it.

Steve: Yeah, so can we talk about what happened in the other 39 minutes a little bit?

Eric: I don’t know if I’m able to discuss that information or not. But how they portrayed me on TV was for the most part pretty accurate…

Steve: It was pretty positive I think.

Eric: Yeah and then I think it was pretty accurate of the whole 45 minutes. Like I think you know they cut out probably some positive things that I would have liked to see, but they also cut out some negative things that were said. So I think it was pretty fair representation. I felt like the room was light and friendly and fun. And I think they showed it as that way, and I think that you know I think they showed them as being impressed with our numbers.

Steve: Yeah that came across in the episode actually.

Eric: They weren’t hammering me at all on my numbers, or you know I think Kevin had one mention evaluation, but the other guys they weren’t really joining him on this valuation. And I think that’s just kind of Kevin’s thing, right?

Steve: Yeah, Kevin always does that.

Eric: So I was like okay you know Kevin will say that, but other people they didn’t connect with the niche or the market in the show. And I think that’s how it’s portrayed on TV as well. So I think it was a pretty accurate portrayal of the events that happen.

Steve: Okay. I know you signed a whole bunch papers, but so in that 39 minutes your pitch was only you said a couple of minutes long, right?

Eric: Yeah.

Steve: And then after that is it just basically general Q&A, or they ask you questions? Or did you have you know an additional pitch after that?

Eric: No. So you going on with that pitch and you want to leave a little bit of tease on there. So they start asking questions.

Steve: Okay. And so for the remainder of the time they are just asking questions. Did any of them– I’m trying to remember if any of them have facial hair? Did any of them try your product on their face at all or?

Eric: They smelled the products, they opened them up.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: But I don’t know if I saw them putting on their face or not. Daymond– he kept some bottles after.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: He’s got a little bit of a goatee.

Steve: Right.

Eric: I think I probably like if it wasn’t late in the day, I probably could have twisted Daymond’s arm into partnering up with us. I do think he is kind of on the verge.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: But you know the circumstances didn’t work that way.

Steve: Okay. Are you allowed to talk about anything related to their personalities, or like the bencher [phonetic] that went on during your pitch?

Eric: I mean like when you are in this moment I don’t know if I could really take in their personalities. So it was just what you see is pretty much what I saw as well. But they were all very like, oh so Barbara was on the show as Lori.

Steve: Lori, right.

Eric: And Lori, Robert, Kevin, Daymond and Mark, all five of them were phenomenal people. They are very nice. They ask questions in a way that I would expect them to ask questions. They weren’t confrontational to me, they may have disagreed with things, but I didn’t feel that they presented in a way that was rude or…

Steve: I guess what I’m trying to ask is what questions did they ask that weren’t aired? You know stuff that they cut out, but that was stuff that they’d ask about your business.

Eric: Yeah, I mean it was just kind of…

Steve: I’m I putting you in hard place here?

Eric: It was more about learning about the product and learning about the business. And just kind of more details.

Steve: Okay, in kind of like a casual setting?

Eric: Yeah, I mean well it wasn’t super casual like taking a beer, it was pretty intense, but you know like they would just ask questions and they all ask like just imagine like five people who are interested in your business, and they all ask a different question on the exact same time.

Steve: With a bright red light, with a bright light, a hot light shining on you the whole time.

Eric: Yeah so, but it was– they just want to learn about the business and get a better understanding about where you are at, what you are doing, what’s your market’s like. Just a standard business set of questions.

Steve: Okay. Let’s talk about some of the fun stuff now. What impact has being on the show had on your sales and on your website?

Eric: So it’s been a huge impact. There’s first two days, so Friday night and Saturday were our two biggest sales for us ever. We did about $20,000 on each of those days.

Steve: Wow!

Eric: So that was before the show we were doing about anywhere between probably 5 and on a good day like a really good day it would have been like 7,500, but probably around 4 or 5 was our average daily volume.

Steve: And you mentioned they went from 30 visits to 6,000 visits at one point. That’s crazy, so the people that you are getting on the show– what I’m I trying to ask here? So were they people that had already purchased from you? Or these are like all new customers that were just watching the show and coming on. Like I guess a lot of people– I don’t know what I’m trying to ask, let’s just move on.

Eric: Well I get it, so we did a lot of promotion with our customers before the event, kind of letting them know that we are going to be on the show, to watch the show, to support us, to share the word the we are going to be on the show.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: If they wanted to purchase any of our products we encouraged them to purchase before the show because we knew that we were going to get backed up a little bit. So we were able to see a slight boost in sales before the show, because of I’d say like our business we had a lot of wholesale orders. We told our wholesalers that you know we are going to be on the show to stock up, and so there was a boost just from the pre-sales as for the show.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: And then once the show aired I think there was a lot of new people who had never had of the brand before and was able to connect with us, which I think was really great, a lot of gifts. I haven’t broken down the analytics yet to see like what the male to female ratio was, like before the show it was about jeez I think it was like 80 or 90% were guys ordering. So I’m sure after the show that ratio was probably changed a bit as they’ve got more gifts.

And it’s been nice because I think what happens is people watch the show and then they’ll come back into work and they’ll say, hey man you got a beard did you hear about that beard company that was on Shark Tank. You know so people just talk about it, and they tell their friends and it gets out there and it dropped down 20,000 in sales. And kind of dropped down to around like $10,000 a day.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: So that’s what we are doing now. Hopefully it stays at 10,000; hopefully that’s our new floor. And then we can start building from that.

Steve: And we are going into the Holiday seasons now, and traditionally I would imagine your sales spike during that period as well.

Eric: Yeah I mean we call this growing season.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: From September through February is really like when we make our most money. It’s really good for us not just Christmas time, but the whole season. So we are excited about what the Holidays will bring for us. We expected it to be higher, I don’t know. It’s an exciting time where we are building this company to level, well every day we are building the company to levels I’ve never done before because I’ve never built a successful business before.

So it’s just fun to see where I’ll go and where we need to invest our money to make sure that we have the resources to grow the company. That’s the most nerve wrecking thing, like when do I bring on talent, and who do I bring, and what is that process like, because we want to be a $100,000,000 company.

Steve: Wow!

Eric: We want to grow to be like a dominant player in the market place. And we do want to change the way society views beards men. So you are not going to be able to do that as a little [inaudible] [00:33:12] you know half a million dollar a year company.

Steve: Right, okay.

Eric: So we are not in this for the lifestyle or we are kind of in it to…

Steve: To make a big company right, got it. Okay in terms of your preparation you mentioned that you alerted your wholesalers that you are coming on the show. Did you send that email to your list, your consumer list as well that you are going to be on the show?

Eric: Yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: So anyone and everyone we surmounted out to everyone. You can go to our Facebook page and see the posts that we are making.

Steve: Okay. And did you make any changes to your website itself before as well as after?

Eric: We did. We did a little bit of AB testing to kind of make sure we had an optimal homepage. We added a Shark Tank banner up, which linked to our story.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: We added this little join our subscription club you know notification newsletter. And then we kind of tweaked the main images to show a little bit about our– yeah I mean that was– we had the opportunity; we talked to other people who were on the show and then listened to the kind of things that they did. And they put up like pop ups on their stores and live chat on their store, and you know threw up discounts and sales, and they are really trying to maximize like the exposure that they got.

And we had the– you know that’s really not our strategy and we don’t want you know a thousands of new people to their first interaction with us is a giant pop up banner on a cell. Like we don’t want them to think that’s how we run our business.

So we decided against that and maybe and man we left some dollars on the table, but you know our business model has always been about confidence and knowing we’ve got the best product. And they’ll be able to purchase when they are ready to purchase, and not to pressure our customers into buying.

Steve: Okay. That was actually part of my question was gathering email addresses part of your strategy as opposed– did you have any of your email sign up forms that you had added because of the influx of traffic. Because I would imagine a lot of them coming in and just want to take a look at the site might not be ready to buy it right away.

Eric: Yeah, I mean I’d also imagine a lot of people are going to decide never plan on buying either.

Steve: Sure.

Eric: I don’t want to get their email address to spend money on them, marketing to them when it’s not something they are interested in. So we are not big on you know the old school, or I wouldn’t even call the old school, just like modern day marketing techniques, like that’s not us.

Steve: Okay, got it.

Eric: We try to market by providing valuable content and just growing organically like just finding people who are passionate about what we are doing.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: Rather than tricking them into joining our list and then you know blasting out all these emails telling them to buy shit.

Steve: Okay. And so that’s why you had a link to your story, right? So you draw them into your content and your overall mission statement so to speak.

Eric: Yeah. I wanted them to continue to get to know us. And the link wasn’t really obvious so people kind of had a quick around for it, but some people clicked there in. And we wrote the story kind of based on you know my interactions with the Sharks and what we talked about.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: So it was a little bit different than what they heard because I kind of write that you know on the fly.

Steve: Sure.

Eric: it’s a good like a 1500 word article.

Steve: And going forward are you still in communication with the Sharks at all? Do you plan on communicating with them in the future?

Eric: No, no. We are not looking for money.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: We’ll always entertain it if one of them decided to call us up; I’d probably pick up the phone.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: [Inaudible] [00:36:57] what they have to say, but you know we are always willing to sell the business for the right price, but it’s not something that we are actively looking to do at all. So we are not investing our resources into that.

Steve: Okay. Sounds good men, hey I’m really happy that you came on the show and I’m really happy for the results that you got on the show even though you didn’t end up with an investment. It sounds like the whole experience was extremely positive for your business.

Eric: Yeah, I mean again for us it was a win-win situation and the only fear– our biggest risk and our biggest fear is of going on the show were that we would be perceived as like a stupid goofy type of business that everyone laughs at, like one of those that they mock.

Steve: Well you’ve got the numbers; you can’t laugh at the numbers.

Eric: Right. So I think you know may be if we only had like $1000 in sales when we got on there, we probably would be laughed out the door. But since we had the numbers I think it was pretty clear that we had our act together, and I think it was portrayed that way. So I think we were portrayed pretty accurately with the– and I think that the other risk is you know not a lot of the companies on the show like really have an established brand. They are kind of a product. And we didn’t want to get lumped in together with these companies out there that just have one product and no business sense. So we wanted to be portrayed in a way where we know what we are doing.

Steve: Yeah no that totally came across in the show to me, but I’m a little biased too because I know you. And I know your business, I’ve watched your videos and everything, so I was a little biased, but I thought it came across as that. I mean you were definitely not some newbie guy up there, you knew what you were doing, and so I was pulling for you to make a deal but…

Eric: Yeah I think viewers like it when deals get done; they feel more connected to the brand. They feel like the sharks are connected with the brand so you are connected with it. And I think there’s a lot of positive energy that you get from getting a deal or getting an offer, but I still think there’s a lot of value and energy you get by appearing on the show, and not getting a deal. So again it’s a win-win and maybe the win is not as big when you don’t get a deal, but it’s still a win.

Steve: Awesome Eric. Hey man thanks a lot for coming on to the show and talking about your experience, and I’ll be sure to link up all the stuff that you sent me before we started talking. You wrote a couple of articles about your experience as well, and I’ll be sure to link that up as well.

Eric: Great. Always a pleasure to hang with you Steve and pleasure to be on the show and hopefully the viewers out there, the listeners out there I got some good feedback and they can build their business.

Steve: Yeah and hopefully some of them have got beards as well. Send you some customers. All right man Eric, take care man.

Eric: All right cheers.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that interview. I’ve always wondered what being on Shark Tank was like and believe me; I’ve tried to extract as much info out of Eric as I could without him violating the NDA that he signed. And what I really admire about Eric is that he took a chance and it looks like his business increased by about 30% as a result of being on Shark Tank. For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode47 and make sure you check out the show notes because I posted actual revenue numbers for Eric’s store beardbrand.com before and after the Shark Tank appearance.

And if you enjoyed listening to this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

046: How Eric Bandholz Started A 7 Figure Beard Care Business In Just 1 Year

Eric Bandholz

I’m thrilled to have Eric Bandholz on the show today. Eric runs the successful beard care company BeardBrand.com, which has grown into a 7 figure business in just 12 months.

In today’s interview, you will learn how Eric grew his business quickly by focusing on branding and exposure via word of mouth. He’s got a great backstory and knows a ton about how to establish a brand and how to run a successful skin care business.

Oh and did I tell you that I tried his beard care products too? Check out what happened to me in Movember

Steve's Beard

What You’ll Learn

  • How Eric got the idea to go into the beard care business
  • How going to a beard competition changed Eric’s life forever
  • How to start a cosmetics company
  • Where to go to get skin care products made
  • Why branding is so important when it comes to running a successful skin care line
  • How Eric established such a strong brand for his products
    Which channels Eric focused on to proliferate his brand

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

If you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consultations every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I`m really excited to have Eric Bandholz on the show. Now Eric is someone who I met at the Ecommerce Fuel conference in Austin Texas last month, and he runs the incredibly awesome site beardbrand.com. Now Beard Brand is a really successful store that sells beard care products. And what’s really cool about his shop is the strength of his brand. In fact Eric devotes a lot of his efforts towards promoting the Beard Brand name, and it has paid a lot of dividends in establishing a fanatical following for his shop.

I also had the pleasure in witnessing Eric’s beard live in all of its glory last month in Austin, and it is indeed impressive and very well kept if I do say so myself, and with that welcome to the show Eric, how are you doing today?

Eric: Oh man Steve what a warm and awesome intro. It’s a pleasure being here this morning and excited for the chat.

Steve: I must say that the beard is impressive. I mean you see photos of it online, but in person it’s even more impressive.

Eric: Well what do you know, it just grows on me.

Steve: So you know give us a quick back ground story behind beardbrand.com, and how you decided to start your shop.

Eric: So I used to work for Merrill Lynch as a financial advisor and that is pretty much the antithesis of a big bearded image. It’s all about the all American boy that– the suits and the beardless faces and that job was really not a good fit for me. I don’t like working for the man and you know I’m a very philosophically driven guy and really in economics as well. And Merrill Lynch is core economics are different than my core economics. So it was just a matter of time before I left there, and when I left there I decided to start my own business as a freelance graphic artist and grew my beard out, so through this journey of growing my beard out I got really into it.

It tried to learn all the techniques there were to grow the quickest and the fullest and groom it the best way and use the right products, and at this time there really wasn’t a lot of stuff on it, and there was this beard competition in Portland Oregon that I had to go to, everyone was talking them. So I went to my first beard competition and absolutely just like fell in love. Like this is I don’t know for all the listeners out there who have– if you have never been to a beard competition you`ve got to add it to the list of things to do. It’s like a beauty pageant for men, but there is usually a little bit of alcohol and booze involved and a little bit of debauchery.

So it’s just you know a good time. What I noticed you know especially with my background in Merrill Lynch was that you know traditionally beards men were thought of as like lumber jacks or outdoors men or bikers, and I never really fit into this group, and what I noticed there was other people like me who were stylish and career driven and you know independent, and we coined the term urban beards men to kind of identify those people, and we`ve been able to unite the community and jus kind of grow from there.

Steve: That`s awesome man, so just curious, did you win this beard competition or…?

Eric: No there was probably about 30 people in my category, and I didn’t even get top 10. So there are– while you may think my beard is quite awesome, it dwarfs in comparison to a lot of these people at these beard competitions.

Steve: So just to also be clear while you were working at Merrill Lynch you were beardless, is that correct?

Eric: Yeah I mean, I would generally be completely shaven, but every once in a while I would grow out probably like one of two week long beard, so if I had any kind of facial hair it’s very-very short and very trimmed.

Steve: And I do kind of understand what you are saying there. You know a lot of times there is this connotation with people having these gigantic beards with people who are kind of like back woods type of folk, and just to be clear your products kind of cater to those working professionals with beards, is that right?

Eric: Right, and I want to emphasize that you know, we’re not anti biker or back woods like those are beautiful and awesome communities and as fellow beards men we really identify with those guys as well, but we decided to almost go with like a hyper niche and real specific niche and you know we`ve got a lot of customers who identify themselves more with outdoors men and kind of the bearded biker look and things like that, and that’s totally cool. So we definitely support that look as well.

Steve: And just to be clear, so the products that you sell are primarily focused towards skin care, is that correct.

Eric: Yeah, skin and hair care are going to be the big focus and of course the hair as in as in beard care.

Steve: Sure

Eric: Like our beard oils is a leave in conditioner, it’s going to be healthful or healthy both for your skin and your beard. So it kind of has a dual purpose.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: You can’t really have one without the other I suppose.

Steve: Okay and then you create all these product formulations yourself, is that correct?

Eric: Some of them we work– we`ve done internally. We`ve developed our own platform after lots of research online and you know looking at ingredient lists of our competitors and similar products and using that as a foundation for starting, and kind of going from there. But we are also developing some new products in the future that are probably outside our expertise of developing and in house. So we are working with a cosmetics company to develop a product for that as well.

Steve: Okay, and so for all my listeners who are thinking about creating or selling skin care products, like how do you begin? Like for example I would have no idea like how to create like beard oil or that sort of thing, how did you guys get started with that?

Eric: So for me I was really immersed in the bearded community and listened to what a lot of people said and was doing, and I’ll be the first to admit that I didn’t invent beard oil or beard care. Like there has been other people who have been doing it, and they talk about what works for them and what doesn’t work for them and I`ve used a good number of products out there. So I kind of knew like the attributes and features that I wanted, and it was just a matter of getting high quality ingredients and since it’s a natural product, it’s something that you can develop pretty easily though product testing and trial and error and just tweaking. We’re able to come up with a formula.

Steve: So how do you– is there a company that you go to do this, like how does it work exactly?

Eric: So yeah within the beauty industry if you are looking to get into this, there are a lot of cosmetic companies out there who produce shampoos and washes and soaps and oils, and you know beard oils and hair oils and just anything that you can think of from a cosmetics stand point they are going to be able to do. It’s pretty you know they are the companies that are manufacturing everything; they like to be in the background, so it’s going to be very difficult to find them.

One of the ways you might find them is by going to like a trade show for their cause and you can be able to connect with them there, or find other people in the industry and ask for referrals was the way that we went as well?

Steve: Okay and then when it comes to actually formulating your own stuff, is it just– do you tell them that you want this ingredient or this ingredient– you kind of have to have an idea of what you want in there, right?

Eric: Yeah it’s not like you can say make a shampoo and then they make a shampoo. So we tell them that it’s going to be used for beard care, we want to have you know higher end– we want it to be a higher end and nicer shampoo, sold in SOS free paradigm, free like without you know the type of chemicals that our community doesn’t want to have in their beard care. So there are like certain directions that you can point them.

Steve: And so you kind of have to have an idea already or know what ingredients do what, and that sort of thing before you even get started right?

Eric: Yeah, again like we didn’t just– I didn’t just roll out of bed and I was like I`m going to come up with a beard– you know a lot of research and a lot of time spent on you know– it’s funny like I was thinking about this one day when we were kind of testing things here in our kitchen, and it’s like you know I`m part sales man, part business owner, part designer, part you know finance guy and I’m also part chemist, which I thought I would never venture into.

Steve: Interesting.

Eric: So it’s kind of interesting when you think about that when I really started like digging down into like how ingredients worked and like the attributes of various ingredients and the things to look for and consider you know I`ve got much more to learn and understand as well, and I don’t think I`m ever going to be a super wealthy guy becoming a chemist. So that will be one thing that we`ll outsource. But it is like really interesting for me because I love learning new things and getting into it. So I definitely plan on expecting to spend a lot of time learning and researching.

Steve: How does the testing process work, so you have a new formulation, do you have like a bunch of people with beards that you have as like test subjects or…?

Eric: Yeah there is us testing it internally, trying the product out and using it and seeing how it’s working and going, and then there is like lab testing as well where you see like how long the product will last, do you need like additional preservatives, things like that.

Steve: That’s in terms of shelf life, right.

Eric: Right.

Steve: I was just talking in terms of just you know the actual beard, and how it makes your beard feel and that sort of thing. Is it like kind of like a more qualitative test, or do you have like quantitative numbers that you assign to certain things?

Eric: For us it’s more qualitative just kind of more of how it feels and the experiences that we have and…

Steve: Okay.

Eric: Just what I personally want with my beard care. So it’s a little bit of selfishness, but you know it’s kind of leaning on my expertise within the community as well.

Steve: Okay, and then in terms of just like getting your first batch made, how much would you expect to spend? Like if you can take us back to the very beginning for your first batch.

Eric: Yeah, with us I mean the beauty with our products and how we launched it, is it’s a really low cost eventually, I mean it was a couple of hundred bucks I think.

Steve: Really? Okay.

Eric: For the ingredients and the sizes that we’re doing. So we’re able to just– I mean it was almost like a lot of our research and development was through the market. Kind of like a lean start up where you test it with your customer base and go from there.

Steve: Does that mean that you didn’t have like a third party, I guess beauty supply manufacture make your first batch? Because I would imagine would they dabble with something so small in the beginning?

Eric: Yeah we started like super small and our business– like our first month of sales were like 900 bucks, and we’ve definitely gone the organic road. So a lot of it is just kind of boot strapping and getting something done. And when you’re a young company getting off the ground, you have a brand to build, but you don’t have a brand to tarnish. So you are able to take some risks that larger companies aren’t going to be able to do.

So we took some calculated risks to get our products out to the market and test it with the market and go from there. So you know if there is a listener on here who works for L’Oriel or Procter and Gamble, they would be turning in their grave for lack of a better term, probably some of our techniques and processes to get out there. But there is so much more to cosmetic business and grooming line business than the actual product.

There is this actually through the process in my research I downloaded this PDF that kind of gives an intro into beauty cosmetics and what to look for and how to do it and how to formulate your own things. And so much of it is actually like the brand and the image that you are trying to create to unite the audience that you are going after. So if you think that you can simply just create this great product and put it in like a brown bottle and people buy it, then you probably need to re-analyze your strategy.

Steve: Okay, that’s actually really good segway into what I really want to focus kind of like talk on, which is how you’ve been able to establish such a strong brand for your products. I mean from what I understand the audience of people who buy your products are actually very fanatical and very supportive of your brands. So I want to talk a little bit about how you did that? What are some of the things that you did early on to establish your brand?

Eric: Well I think what was one of our key aspects was giving away a lot of valuable content without the expectation of anything in return. So I’ve got a YouTube channel where I’ve done a lot of how to grooming type of videos, and how to you know take care of your beard and grow it faster. Just essentially giving out free content without any kind of expectation in return, and I think that builds trust with people you know you’ve become the expert within an industry, and people trust what your are saying, trust what you are doing. And then when you do come in, make a recommendation then they’re going to connect with you. They know there’s other products out there, they may just go with you simply because they like you which is a really fun thing to do as well.

Steve: So what I was going to ask you, how do you even get people to find your YouTube videos right? Because you just can’t put a bunch of videos– chances are people won’t be able to find them that easily.

Eric: Yeah you know I just kind of did that. I just created videos on things that I was passionate about. And I think the beauty with YouTube is it’s still a little bit of a wild west. There is like still a lot of videos out there that don’t exist within very specific niches, a lot of guides and how tos. And the beauty of YouTube is like viewed in a channel; I guess is it takes a lot of work to create a video and a good video that has good content. So if you are able to do that, then it’s going to be pretty easy to find new stuff.

Steve: So all of your YouTube growth was more or less organic?

Eric: Oh yeah totally, totally. Like I didn’t do– and I guess this isn’t like you know for the listeners out there, it’s kind of annoying and frustrating and say, “Oh you just put videos out there and people found it.” But it was essentially like that; I didn’t do any kind of optimization where like, what is the title that I need to put in? Or what is you know what type keywords are people searching for and things like that.

It was more of like you know this is kind of what I want to talk about and what I’m passionate about, what I’m interested in and I don’t know if there is people out there or not. So it wasn’t something that we built. You know we launch this YouTube channel and then like two months we had 10,000 subscribers. It wasn’t anything like this. This was something that took a very long time, very long process.

And you know not a lot of views, not a lot of new subscribers. So I’m sure I could have shortened up that time period by optimizing my topics and really optimizing my channel. But I think there is a little bit of authenticity that comes from not being very polished.

One of the YouTube guys that I follow on his channel, one of his first videos was him at a golf course like taking strokes and you know swinging at the ball. And his YouTube channel is about like electronics and technology. And it just shows that you know he was someone who is just kind of passionate about what he is talking about, and he is sharing videos on YouTube. So I think if you are trying to stand out in the crowd then stand out from the Amazons of the world, like you do need to do a little bit of that. You do need to be authentic.

Steve: Did you have your YouTube channel before your store, or did come after the store?

Eric: I had the– right when I came back from the beard competition is when I got the idea for Beard Brand, and that’s when we started writing and talking and sharing a lot of new content. So that was in 2012, February 2012 that we launched like all those platforms. And then it was January 2013 that we launched our store, so I had been…

Steve: Okay.

Eric: Talking in the community for about a year.

Steve: So that kind of implies that your YouTube videos at least the earlier ones don’t even have a link to your site at all, right? Because you didn’t have the site.

Eric: Yeah I mean I had Beard Brand, right? So I always had the name Beard Brand. And the beauty of YouTube is that you can always edit the description after the facts. So I added some links in there. And I had like my old logo on there. The older version of Beard Brand and you know I’ve played with different things, over the course of different videos like you know how I’m placing my icon on there, my water mark and things like that. But it’s always been called Beard Brand which I guess makes it easy.

Steve: Okay, and then in terms of just do you measure the click throughs from those links, or I guess what I’m trying to ask is how do you know that the YouTube videos are actually what is bringing customers to your site and your brand?

Eric: I just recently did a survey with our customers and how they first found out about us, and 46% found out about us through social media. And within social media, half of those people were from YouTube. So it was directly asking our customer base for direct results, and then I do do a little bit of analytics to see where people are coming from and where the traffic is coming from. And so I keep an eye out on that as well.

Steve: Okay, and so you mentioned that half was from YouTube, where was the other half coming from?

Eric: The other half was from Facebook was our second largest source and then Reddit was our third largest source. And which is kind of surprising I think a lot of people don’t see Reddit as a very high source of customer base, or may be for traffic they get. But we’ve been able to convert out customers, which has been a really rewarding experience.

Steve: So let’s talk a little bit about Reddit because in my experience the folks over at Reddit are kind of a neglected bunch, and they’re very quick to jump on anything that is self-emotional. And a lot of cases you can get banned if you do that, right?

Eric: Yeah, I mean it’s a tough community to crack and I would say that I still have many of them. The beauty was with Reddit are– is that there are sub-Reddits which is like very specific niche communities, which have their own personality. So you can’t just go to Reddit and say I understand the whole Reddit community, you have to really understand each individual sub-Reddit. And we’ve been able to build good community with the Beards sub-Reddit as well as the entrepreneur sub-Reddit has been really good to us.

Steve: So what is your strategy with Reddit?

Eric: With Reddit it’s pretty much just be authentic and give away content for free, and not ask for anything. And in addition to that whenever I make a post, I’m very involved. So if anyone asks any questions, I always respond to every question, spend a lot of time into it. You can’t just you know generate this giant long post and then a bunch of people ask you questions and then ignore those questions. I think probably one of the successes too is being involved in the community in addition to giving to the community.

Steve: So by that did you participate for a long time before you even decided to post anything?

Eric: On Reddit?

Steve: Yeah.

Eric: Oh yeah, I mean I got pulled into the whole Reddit thing, like I’m definitely like a fan of the website; it’s been probably too many hours on there. Looks like I have two tabs open right now on Reddit, so.

Steve: Okay. When you talk about posting an article, do you post a link to something or do you just post the entire article on there?

Eric: So to get in with Reddit, it’s going to be more advantageous to do what’s called a self post, where you post the full articles straight into Reddit. They will be a lot more suspicious if you post the link, because a lot of people are just trying to drive traffic to their website. And by posting a self post to a specific Reddit, then they’ll see that you are actually trying to help the community out and help the sub-Reddit out, and I think that’s a preferred way to go.

Steve: Okay, and then this article that you are posting on Reddit, is that unique to Reddit or do you use it anywhere else, or is it just for Reddit?

Eric: Yeah when I post to Reddit all I’m doing is just posting to Reddit. I don’t drive it to other blogs. I have recently written a fairly in-depth extensive article, I think it’s something like 2200 words. I’m hoping to get connected with you know as a guest writer on a larger website, but if I don’t do that, then I will come in and I’ll share with the Reddit community exclusively to them.

Steve: Okay, and so that’s pretty interesting. So you went out and you found a very specific sub-Reddit that I guess caters to beards, and then you started posting informational articles and just participating in that community. And that community was– a large percent of them was going to be potential customers for your products, is that kind of accurate?

Eric: Well, actually it’s been the entrepreneur sub-Reddit which I really post a lot of my articles to. On the Reddit beards I’ll just post photographs of my beard here and there, and then we’ll sponsor the community and donate some products to winners. But it’s the Entrepreneur community which has been really good to us. And those aren’t actually our customer base, so it’s kind of for us like getting value from the community. And with them helping us grow our business and give us feedback and insight that I may have not considered so…

Steve: Okay.

Eric: It’s completely different than what you would assume. But it’s good though because there is like other entrepreneurs on there, other bloggers, other people looking for content who have shared our articles that we’ve posted on the community on the entrepreneur sub-Reddit.

Steve: Okay, so indirectly your efforts on Reddit have kind of just boosted your brand and your business, even though that they might not be necessarily your target customers.

Eric: Yeah absolutely. So we’ll post something on Reddit and get like one or two thousand visits that day from the post. And those people you know the conversation rates are awful, like you know no one is buying, nor am I expecting them to buy. But they learn about us, they learn about the brand and then they tell their friends who have a beard, and then it kind of gets its own little growth structure.

So it’s a fun process. It’s a great community out there you know it’s tough and it’s fickle and they’re very skeptical. But one if you authentic and you are true and you do want to give to the community and you know get feedback from the community, there is just a great rewarding experience.

Steve: Okay, and then you mentioned the other part of your social media strategy was Facebook. So is that just driving traffic through your fan page? Like how do you run your Facebook page?

Eric: Yeah, we do somewhere on our Facebook page as our Tumblr page, but at a less frequent token. What we found on Facebook that works really effective are memes, they seem to get shared a lot. Unfortunately I’m not– we are not big on memes, so it’s kind of like a patch plan to, do I post this memes with the hope that you know people like it, or what do we do. It’s been a little bit of hit miss strategy, and Facebook isn’t my favorite platform for marketing.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: I think it’s just a lot of people are on there and we were buying advertisements as well. So I think we’re introducing our brand through buying eyeballs as well which isn’t the best way to grow in my opinion.

Steve: So buying eyeballs for the purposes of establishing a brand, or to actually drive target traffic to people that will actually buy?

Eric: Yeah, when I say buying eyeballs I just mean we’re paying for advertisements. And then people would see those advertisements and come to our brand. So I’d imagine most of the traffic from Facebook that were considered social media were actually paid type of customers.

Steve: Okay and then how do you kind of structure your Facebook ads. Is it just content that you are linking them to or…?

Eric: Again like we haven’t really had a lot of success with Facebook. It’s not something that we really are proud of, or want to brag about or probably have a lot of expertise in it.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: We’ve tested like just simply buying ads in the newsfeed and on the sidebar, and then of course trying to grow our page. Currently what we’re doing now is simply remarketing. So if someone visits our website, then they will see some Facebook ads in their newsfeed as well.

Steve: Okay, so how do you get customers to your shop? Like what is your main driver of converting customers?

Eric: We are active on many social media platforms. So of course YouTube’s been a great driver whereas also out in Tumblr, and we are on Instagram has been one that we put lot of resources into recently. And then of course YouTube has been huge for us. So those social media aspects are great ways for us to generate traffic. We also purchase advertisement on Google AdWords.

Steve: Okay and how’s that been doing?

Eric: It’s been good. I think we’re getting about a five time return on investments. So if we spend five bucks, it will generate about 25 bucks in revenue.

Steve: Is this just search, search AdWords, or do you do you do display network as well?

Eric: We do the– what’s that called, the product, the PLA is I think is what the…

Steve: Oh PLAs, okay.

Eric: So we do that, and then we do the adwords, but we don’t use their display at all. On the display we found it was just like erasing all the money we had, I wouldn’t recommend it at all.

Steve: Yeah I’ve been playing around with it recently too, which is why I thought I’d ask, but yeah it’s been really challenging.

Eric: Yeah it’s a good way to lose money pretty quickly. So for us personally and what’s worked with our customer base is been the PLAs and the Tech Search.

Steve: Okay, then you mentioned Tumblr and Tumblr is actually something that I don’t quite understand fully myself. How does it work? And what is different about Tumblr versus just any other blog platform?

Eric: So Tumblr is almost like a cross between social media and blogging. We use it as a way to curate content that fits our image, and share that seamlessly. So the beauty with Tumblr is they have a re-blogging platform where essentially you find something that looks cool, and you click on the re-blog button and it shows up on your blog. So we’re able to generate about 15 posts a day of photographs that are lifestyle photographs. And so there are more than just things that we’re creating and pushing.

Steve: And so it’s kind of similar to Instagram then in what you are saying?

Eric: Yeah, it’s really similar to Instagram in the sense that or how we use it is really similar to Instagram in the sense that we are posting up photographs that are really rapid paste. It’s different than Instagram in the sense that I don’t know of a sharing feature within Instagram. I know there is like an app called Regram or something like that. But there is no real like I run across a cool photograph and I’m able to just share it on my blog.

So Tumblr is great for that. One word of warning is the copyright trolls will get on there. So you have to do a little bit of due diligence with the photographs to make sure that people who are uploading them have the rights to upload them, or else you could be getting random mails from them to get the images of the world.

Steve: Okay, and then you know it sounds like a lot of– the majority of your efforts early on were specifically focused on building a brand and for your business. So how long did it actually take before you actually noticed some traction from your efforts?

Eric: We had, well I’ll just kind of give you the number of our sales.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: Our first full month was about 1000 bucks. Our second full moth was about 700 bucks, we went down. And then our third month was about probably another 1000, I think it was our first three full months we had about 4500 bucks in sales. In July of 2013 we– I know this only because I just wrote this article. We had– I think it was about $15,000 in sales in July. By November we had grown to about $75,000 in sales. And then in December of that year during the holiday rush we were up to $120,000 in sales.

Steve: Total or a month?

Eric: That was per month, each month. So I would guess it was like the July August September time frame where the momentum really started picking up.

Steve: And so basically you are saying within a year you were doing six figures per month in revenue. Is that right?

Eric: Yeah totally, we are…

Steve: Crazy, okay.

Eric: We had a million dollar run rate within the first year.

Steve: That is crazy. And then can you pinpoint a specific traffic source for that? Or is it just based on word of mouth and buzz that you’ve established through your brand.

Eric: Yeah, it’s a pretty broad source of traffic. I don’t think there is– we’ve never really like targeted one single platform to drive business. We’ve always been pretty broad with our strategy. So it’s just gain out there, it’s talking to our customers, providing a great product, really like sending products quickly and fast and just you know a little bit of luck, but also there’s lots of other companies doing what we are doing.

Steve: Yeah.

Eric: And they’re not– I don’t think they’ve been able to grow the way that we’ve been able to grow. So being able to really you know– the mission of what we’re trying to do and we’re not trying to self product, we’re trying to change the way society views beards men. You know we’re trying to show that just because you have a beard doesn’t mean that there should be a native stereotype with you. That there are beards men out there who are career driven and working professionals and they have families and they do good in the community as well. So that’s what we are trying to do at Beard Brand.

Steve: Okay and then can you talk a little– I mean it sounds like it was very smooth sailing for that first year. Can you kind of talk about some of the mistakes that you might have made, or some things that you might have done differently if you started all over.

Erick: Yeah it’s– the funny thing is you learn to do what is successful and then you become successful at it, and then you get cocky and you are there again, and you think that whatever you touch– you know you think that you have the Midas touch and everything you do turns to gold. So one of the things that allowed us to grow was by selling other people’s products, at least just being a simple reseller, and figuring out what items move the quickest and then developing those products internally.

So we made like a pretty large investment into a product that was a little bit outside of our core values, and ended up with us you know not moving it as quickly as I’d like. So we have a higher inventory in a sort of moving product. Now the shelf life on the product is long shelf life, so it’s just the pain of putting all this cash in something that’s not going to pay out for a longer period of time. So really like testing the market first at least from a boot strap perspective is going to be a more effective way of growth than kind of making decisions based on your gut.

Steve: Also I didn’t realize, so you started out selling other people’s products?

Erick: Oh yeah, so it was probably about five months that we sold another line of beard oil and mustache wax and sold that line all the way through November as well, so.

Steve: So you were carrying inventory, or was it drop shipped.

Erick: Yeah, we have never drop shipped, it was always buying inventory and reselling it, and know I would recommend against drop shipping.

Steve: And in terms of selling other people’s products, I imagine they were branded, right with– not with the beard brand name, is that correct? You weren’t white labeling anything.

Erick: Correct, so it was under a different name and you can still buy those products online. We didn’t have exclusivity or anything like that.

Steve: Okay, and then so it’s mainly the strength of your brand that allowed you to sell other people’s products and then graduate– within that first year, did you have your own products that you created from scratch as well?

Erick: Yeah, it took us about five or six months to develop our own product in-house.

Steve: And then gradually I guess you started replacing the branded stuff with your own stuff because the margins I imagine were a lot higher.

Erick: Well actually it was– we would probably still be selling that product online if that vendor wanted us to sell it. So I think he thought the success with Beard Brand was from his products and didn’t appreciate what we were doing as a company.

Steve: Interesting. That’s counter intuitive to me.

Erick: Yeah, he pretty much just stopped selling us his products and so.

Steve: Okay.

Erick: You know, but what can you do you know, if he doesn’t want to sell to us then.

Steve: For all the people who are listening out there, it’s obviously you know with the Amazons out there, it’s very important to establish your own brand. Actually I want to get your opinion on Amazon. Do you sell your stuff on Amazon as well right now?

Erick: We do sell on Amazon, and it’s not my favorite platform and it drives only a small portion of our business, probably about three to four percent of our sales come through Amazon. So much of us is being a brand and company and building an image, and we don’t– Amazon doesn’t provide those kinds of tools. They’re just all about the product and product-product-product, and getting the product as cheap as possible and that doesn’t fit our business model at all.

Steve: And is that something that you would– I just want your opinion here. Is that something that you think that all e-commerce stores should do? Like what is your view on selling on Amazon from the perspective of a small business ecommerce owner?

Erick: I think it’s– there’s a company in Spokane called Green Cupboards who built their business by drop shipping on Amazon. So I don’t want to say if you are a small business you should avoid Amazon. It’s just– I think you really got to commit to it and understand the ins and outs of it. And one of my fears as a control freak is by not having your own platform; you are dependent on the whims of Amazon.

They could change the commission structure which would totally affect your business. They could change so many things with the platform. They could kick you off, they could ban you. I mean there are certain things that go on with them that make it an un-enjoyable experience for someone who likes to be in control. But you know they have an audience as well and they could generate sales for you, you know, but yeah I don’t like them.

Steve: What is your– do you use FBA?

Erick: We do not use FBA yet, I think especially we’ll roll to them.

Steve: So what is your motivation for using Amazon, is it just like to just kind of dip your toe in that water just to see what’s going on or…?

Erick: Yeah, we had a sales person from Amazon call us and bug us and you know tell us to get our stuff on Amazon, and I was like no-no-no-no, and I’m like okay well it’s not going to be that much time investment for us, so we just put our products up there and we don’t promote it at all. We don’t push traffic there, we don’t optimize it; we don’t invest a lot of time on it. So it’s just– it’s purely capturing opportunities there that we wouldn’t be able to catch by not being on there. It’s you know all of our strategy is going to BeardBrand.com.

Steve: Okay, and then in terms of the products that you do list on there, they are all your own stuff that you make yourself, is that right?

Erick: Correct, there’s no other items on there, other than our beard oils and our mustache waxes.

Steve: Okay, do you do anything with Pinterest at all?

Erick: Yeah, we just started putting in a little more effort into our Pinterest account, and have actually gotten pretty good traction. I keep track, our growth– let me pull up our social media numbers. So with Pinterest we’re growing on a clip of probably like one or two followers a week for 69 weeks. And then actually just in July we started posting regularly and we have been adding about 30 to 50 followers per week.

Steve: Okay.

Erick: So simply consistent content has been a way for us to grow organically, and we’re up to about 1000 followers on air. But it’s not at a level that will really drive a significant amount of business to us currently.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of your experiences with buying ads and blogs, we’ve kind of talked about this before we started talking, but is that something– is that a part of your strategy as well?

Erick: Yeah, we advertise within community related websites. So something that’s going to be tied in around beard care or the bearded lifestyle, so it’s not a huge opportunity for us when we talk about you know growing to you know like what every entrepreneur wants to do grow to a hundred million dollar company. Like these websites are great for getting us off the ground and in connecting and being in tandem with the community, but they can only generate so much traffic. Like even if we got all their traffic, it probably wouldn’t be enough for us so– but it’s– they’re a great community. So you just kind of want to help support them.

Steve: You know again from the perspective of someone just starting out, if you had the opportunity to just focus on a single traffic source, what would it be, what would you recommend?

Erick: I would recommend YouTube.

Steve: Okay.

Erick: I think if you only had– well I mean for what we are selling and what we are doing?

Steve: Yeah, from your perspective.

Erick: Yeah, from my perspective it would be YouTube. I would put all my eggs in that basket.

Steve: Interesting.

Erick: And probably like my second one would be your own proprietary content source. So we are generating urbanbeardsman.com which is our own content and just curate it all on one page. Again you have less long-term risk with that, but more upfront cost and burdens to get that launch and get the traffic there.

Steve: I’m just curious, have you tried any YouTube advertising since you’re so heavily invested?

Erick: We tried a couple of things here and there, but it wasn’t anything. It’s a very time consuming thought process because what you have to do is create a video advertisement and then you know what is that advertisement? How is it going to work? Who are you following and what are you doing? There’s a lot of things that go into it.

Steve: I can imagine, I can imagine.

Erick: Yeah, you almost need an ad agency I’m sure. I’m sure there are some smart people out there who don’t need an ad agency, but I don’t know if I’m one of those smart people.

Steve: Whatever Erick. Hey so I want to be respectful of your time, we have already been talking for 45 minutes. You know that I was going to ask you this, but for me it takes me about seven days to grow a little bit of stubble on my face. So which one of your products would you recommend to help me grow a beard, and how long would it take?

Erick: Yeah, you’re asking me a tough question here.

Steve: I know.

Erick: You’ve got the Asian genetics. You’re up our wall a little bit. You know none of our products are snake oil. So we don’t do any miracle grows. What we do is just kind of products that will help take care of your beard once it grows.

Steve: So I just set Erick up with that one because at the conference I repeatedly threatened Erick to start the Asian beard brand line. So, just thought I would throw that out there. But…

Erick: You can do that, it might be a little bit tougher market, but we do have some Asian customers as well. So they are out there, maybe a little more rare, but for all Asian listeners out there, give it a shot. You don’t know what you have until you try.

Steve: So Erick for those people who might have questions for you, where can they find you online?

Erick: Reach out to me on my Twitter account. It’s @bandholz. I’m usually pretty good about tweeting back. And if you can’t find me on Twitter, just Google my name Erick Bandholz, I’m the only one out there. So that’s also preventing me from doing bad things because I can’t shift my blame to some other person.

Steve: All right Erick, cool, well thanks for coming on the show I learnt a lot, and I think it’s amazing what you have done with your brand. It’s really inspiring.

Erick: Pleasure is all mine. I’m happy to be part of it and hopefully some of the listeners will be able to find value from our chat.

Steve: Awesome, take care man.

Erick: Thanks Steve.

Steve: Here’s what I find amazing about Erick. He’s established a very powerful brand with beardbrand.com by primarily leveraging word of mouth and social media, and he did all this in little over a year. And in terms of ad spent, Erick invests his money primarily for branding purposes as opposed to grading his campaigns directly on direct response. And his results have simply been amazing. Now I don’t know if any of you guys watch Shark Tank, but Erick was also recently on the show and I plan on having him back to discuss his Shark Tank experiences.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode46 and if you enjoyed listening to this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information to find the show very easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

045: Corbett Barr On How To Create A Profitable Subscription Based Membership Site

Corbett Barr

I’ve known Corbett Barr for quite a while now and I’m continually impressed by the quality of content that he puts out. What’s interesting about Corbett is that he started out living the silicon valley startup scene by launching a VC funded company only to later realize that he wanted to leverage entrepreneurship to improve his lifestyle.

Today he runs Fizzle.co which is an incredibly awesome online business school program that you should all check out. And the nature of his business allows him to spend half of the year relaxing and working remotely in Mexico.

In this interview, Corbett reveals the process of how he created a successful membership site and how he maintains an engaged customer base.

What You’ll Learn

  • How to get initial traffic for your site through partnerships
  • What happened to Corbett in Mexico that caused him to quit his job
  • Corbett’s twitter strategy
  • How Corbett monetized his various blogs
  • How to have a successful launch of your info product
  • How to reduce churn for your subscription based product
  • How to create a engaging community.
  • How to constantly attract new customers for your course

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

If you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consultations every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, today I`m really happy to have Corbett Barr on the show. Now I`ve actually known Corbett for quite some time now, but we actually didn’t meet face to face until recently in San Francisco. Now with two kids and a full time job, it’s actually hard for me to make it up to SF, but I`m really glad that I did so that we could actually finally meet up. Now if you don’t know who Corbett Barr is, he is the incredibly sexy mastermind behind Fizzle.co, which is a subscription based online business school that covers a wide garment of online business models. Now prior to Fizzle, Corbett ran various blogs that were all extremely popular.

I think he started blogging at corbettbarr.com and then he started an incredibly popular site called thinktraffic.net, and then finally merged all those domains together and amassed all the material under Fizzle.co which is now his flagship. Now Corbett is an incredible entrepreneur and what I like about him, is that he decided to quit the whole Silicon Valley startup scene, to start a nice lifestyle business and today he travels back and forth to Mexico, and lives his life as a lifestyle entrepreneur, so without further ado welcome to the show Corbett.

Corbett: Thanks that was a great intro.

Steve: So give us a quick back ground story, I`m actually really curious myself, because I haven’t heard it. You used to work in Silicon Valley, you had your own start up at some point, and you decided to just quit that whole thing, so let’s talk about that.

Corbett: Yeah, it wasn’t so much a decision as I was kind of left with not a whole lot of options in 2008, you remember the financial world collapsed.

Steve: Yes.

Corbett: And I had raised I guess around close to three million dollars for my startup over a period of two and a half, three years, something like that. We started working on it in late 2005 and in 2008 you know we had been basically betting on trying to grow really big, and not really worrying about revenue until some later date, which is sort of a typical model here in Silicon Valley, and I think that might have turned out okay, except that in 2008 when the financial world collapsed. The venture capitalists and everybody that you would try to raise money from basically they were scrambling to figure out how to cut their losses. They weren’t sure about what was going to happen, and so they had to make a lot of really hard decisions about who to fund and who not to fund.

And basically we were just caught with our pants down in a bad position and you know, a number of other things were happening at the same time. I had a cofounder, and we were sort of arguing continuously for about a year or so about which direction to take the company. It was a little bit stressful, and you know despite having my own company, I guess I never really considered what I wanted entrepreneurship to be.

I guess I just jumped in thinking that hey! Being an entrepreneur is a great way to go, right. It’s a short path to riches and you are going to be your own boss and everything is going to turn out great, but in reality you know I ended up feeling– I guess like I had less control over my life than I did when I was a fortune 500 consultant. Because I had a cofounder, a board of directors, board of advisers, 10 employees of you know– physical office that I had to maintain and just a lot of weight on my shoulders, and so it’s kind of made the decision easier for me I guess. Aside from having to swallow my pride, it just seemed like we were kind of at the end of the road for that kind of startup, and so my wife and I took a sabbatical to Mexico.

Steve: And so just curios what was your decision making process for accepting funding for your start up?

Corbett: Well it was really the only decision, the only route that we decided to go at the time. This was in you know late 2005 as I said and I partnered up with someone I had worked with before as a consultant. He basically had built a company, sold it to the consulting firm that I worked for and he became a partner in that firm, and that’s how we met. And then five years later we hooked up to work on this start up and his idea was basically that we would shop around our idea, which was based around prioritization of email essentially.

Steve: Okay.

Corbett: And we would shop that idea around and raise venture capital for it and that proved to be a little more difficult than I think he initially thought, and I had no clue going into it because I had never pitched VCs before.

Steve: Right.

Corbett: But we ended up spending the next 11 months or so, first pitching VCs without any software, and then building a prototype, and then going out to pitch VCs again. And I would say we probably talked to 30 or so before we finally got funding from Draper Fisher Jurvetson based out of Palo Alto.

Steve: Okay, and so you ran out of money with your company, and then you head off to Mexico. So what happened in Mexico that kind of spurred this change?

Corbett: Yeah so, Mexico is this massive transformational experience for me. Basically up until that trip I guess I thought that either you climb the corporate ladder as fast as you could and try to retire you know somewhat early one day maybe in your 50s when you still had some good years ahead of you. Or you became an entrepreneur and swung for the fences and hoped that you hit a home run so that you would make a bunch of money and then be able to go on and do whatever you wanted to do with your life

Steve: Right.

Corbett: But when we went to Mexico, we kept meeting people who weren’t rich of retired, but somehow had figured out ways to live in a foreign country for many months every year. Some people lived there permanently, some people took their jobs with them, some people put their careers on hold. There is just this whole category of people that we were meeting in almost every town in Mexico who were just kind of putting their lives first, and figuring out ways to make their careers work around their lives instead of the other way around. And this totally blew my mental model of the way that you had to go about your career, and started to make me wonder if I could do that sort of thing.

And so I started a blog in 2009 on this trip about two and a half months into the trip, basically to chronicle the trip, to tell stories of these interesting people that we are meeting. To see if other people might be as flawed as I was to hear about these stories and then also to start asking myself questions in public about the nature of career and life and the balance between the two and what was possible. Basically because I was initially thinking that I would go down there and come up with another startup idea, raise venture capital, but this time pay more attention to how I built the company, so that I didn’t feel so trapped under all the different burdens. And instead I decided after I started that blog that this new lifestyle approach was probably worth giving a shot.

Steve: So which blog was this? Was this corbettbarr.com?

Corbett: It turned into corbettbarr.com, but it actually started out called Free Pursuits, and the idea was basically…

Steve: I remember that…

Corbett: Yeah, the idea was basically how do you live a really great life now before you are rich or retired, and how do you make your career work with your life.

Steve: Okay and then just– the chronology. So Free Pursuits– I remember that blog from long time ago and then it tuned into Corbettbarr and then you started think traffic, right?

Corbett: Exactly, yeah so basically about 11 months in or so, maybe about 9 months in actually, I realized that blogging was an incredible platform. I had about half a million visitors stop by my site in the first year. So…

Steve: Wow, okay.

Corbett: So I realized the power of reaching out and publishing content and building an audience around it, but I had been talking about how to build a lifestyle business, or just asking myself these questions. And then I started wondering like how am I going to turn this into a business because there was sort of a chicken and the egg problem. I was talking about life style business but I myself hadn’t built one yet, and so I started to just ask myself questions about well what skills do I have? What do I have experience with?

And you know I`d spent three years on a startup. We had built it to nearly a million registered users, and then I had built this blog to half a million people in the first year and I realized as I looked around that other people who were starting blogs and just trying to succeed in online business in general, that a lot of them had trouble building an audience. And this seemed to be my sweet spot of expertise. So I started think traffic basically to help people understand what it takes to build a highly trafficked website.

Steve: Yes you know, one thing I admire about you Corbett is that you are really awesome at building a large and loyal audience of followers, and we are going to talk about Fizzle a little bit later but by the time you had started Fizzle, you already had a large audience, right. And so what I was hoping that you could do is just kind of take us back to the old days. Maybe we can talk about Free Pursuits and how you generated half a million visitors in a year. But how did you get that traffic early on, and how did you kind of build up your name in the very beginning?

Corbett: So you know it`s– it was all a process of trial and error basically because I didn’t have any experience writing or blogging. And I remember those first like you know 10 or 12 posts or so. If you look back, some of them are still published in the archives at Fizzle or you know you can you the way back machine and look back any domain and see what people are up to way back. And I really didn’t have a clue and so it was a matter of starting out from scratch, publishing posts, asking big questions and then seeing if anyone will resonated with those questions.

And to jump start the audience you know, I just published on LinkedIn because I had a profile there with maybe you know 500 people or so. I would just post on my status like that I wrote a new blog post. I emailed everyone that I thought might be interested, which was probably 50 or so like former colleagues basically, that I thought might be interested, and really just tried to focus initially on sparking conversations to figure out what people are interested in. I was principally interested in seeing if people would comment on my stuff, because I figured that was a good sign that meant there was you know some interest there.

Steve: Mm-huh.

Corbett: And then a couple of months into it, you know I was asking these deep questions about career and life and I started to do a lot of research about what else was out there. And I stumbled into this whole genre basically in 2009 that involved lifestyle design, which was what Tim Ferriss, was talking about in the 4-Hour Workweek. And I wasn’t aware of that book until I started blogging, but somebody wrote me in a comment and said hey you should check out this book.

And so I checked it out I learnt about that. Then I learned about other concepts like location independence, meaning that you can live anywhere in the world and build a work from anywhere in the world. Digital nomading, you know meaning travelling around and working at the same time.

And there was just sort of this confluence of interest in these things because, a lot of people were– their foundations were shaken as well because they were laid off or friends that they knew well were laid off, where they thought maybe they had a stable career and all of a sudden because of the financial collapse things were really called into question. So a lot of people were interested in these things, and also just because of what was possible now because of the internet.

So I found myself, you know interested in those conversations and I just kept trying to push my little blog into that conversation going on. And the thing that really tipped the scales for me they were two things. One was I decided to run a survey, because we were asking these big questions about what do location independent people do for a living? How are some people able to live anywhere in the world and work from anywhere in the world?

And I decided to run a survey to find out answers to these questions, but my audience wasn’t big enough really to make a dent in that survey. So I reached out to the biggest blogger I knew at the time around these concepts. Not Tim Ferriss, but the biggest one was that accessible and that was a blog called Location Independent at the time run by Leo Woodward.

And I reached out to her and I said Leo, and I would be happy to handle all of the details, and I would like to get a lot of different blogs involved. I would like to reach out to the community of bloggers in general that are talking about location independence and digital nomading and all this stuff. But I would love you to cosponsor this survey, because your site has more credibility than mine and I will put your logo right up there, and you’ll be cosponsored and I will send you everything for review basically.

So I partnered with her, she said sure it sounds great because I was planning to do all the work. And basically the idea was, we run the survey and that gives us a bunch of really rich information that we can then blog about to our own audiences, and she and I got first pick of all the info and then we would give it to all the other bloggers that participated later.

So basically I was able to get about 30 some blogs to participate in the survey, and what they did was they sent all of their readers over to my sight to take the survey, and so then they became aware of Free Pursuits and Location Independence and others. So basically it was a just a great way to sort of jump start awareness of my site.

So that was really, you know how I got my start and started to figure out that blogging really is– the goal of blogging is two things. One is to figure out what people are interested in, but then the second goal is to figure out where people are already hanging out online, and how you can get in front of them there. And relationships are often the key to making that work.

Steve: So did you just cold email Leo or?

Corbett: I think I commented on her blog a number of times, and I may have at that point written a guest post for her as well just unsolicited to send her a post to write.

Steve: Okay.

Corbett: To run on her site because that was pretty common at the time.

Steve: So if we fast forward to 2014, how would your strategy have changed in building such a blog?

Corbett: Well you know that strategy in particular was based on running a survey to find out answers in a space that there wasn’t a whole lot known at the time you know this was learning new things.

Steve: Right.

Corbett: So I don’t know if that would work exactly, but the idea of reaching out to other bloggers first of all, I think a lot of people who are starting blogs or podcasts or whatever try to do it in isolation and they are scared to reach out to other people. But the fact is you know, whoever you think is fairly big on your radar, probably isn’t really that big and most people are really kind and will actually respond to you pretty easily. In fact you will find if you write even some of the bigger names like Seth Godin or Gary Vaynerchuk, Chris Guillebeau or anybody like that, they will probably respond to you today. I don’t think they’ll have time to partner with you on something, but it just goes to show you that people are listening and they will respond.

But if you reach out to people who are like B list players in your space, chances are they will be receptive to different ideas not only guest blogging, but perhaps partnering on something bigger like the survey that I talked about or whatever it is that you can come up with. The third element– so we talked about finding out what people are interested in and then you know finding out where people are hanging out and how to get in front of them and where relationships are important for that. But the third element that I was about to talk about…

Steve: Was the most important one.

Corbett: Oh men! There it goes. I was on a roll and there it goes. It must be this glass of wine that I’m sipping on over here.

Steve: Excellent, have a couple of more swigs and I will ask you the real questions.

Corbett: It will come back to me exactly. So, creativity and coming up with your own ideas. The issue with a podcast like this, or an interview like this is– I mentioned something like a survey or I had a course called start a blog that matters, and I gave some specific instructions about doing a round up post, where you would go out and interview a bunch of people and publish that on your blog. The trouble with giving specific advice like that is that then people use that advice and it becomes ineffective over time. Because enough use it and just the bloggers fear in general, especially the space that were sort of in you know in general becomes numb to these different tactics and techniques, and so one of the important things to realize is that you have to use your own creativity to come up with new ideas.

So I mentioned something about doing a survey, well think about in your own case in your own space, how you could do something similar that has the same goals of uniting your little corner of the blogger sphere towards one specific goal, where you take ownership of the project and therefore reap more the benefits in everybody else involved, but they also get benefits and they don’t have to do any work because you are doing all the work.

So take a blueprint like that and remove the specificity of having to do a survey or whatever it is, and just try to come up with something on your own that you know that satisfies some of those requirements. Same thing with doing a round up post, the goal there is like to publish something that your audience will be interested in because there are a lot of different experts opinions, and then you reach out to experts and gather those opinions without having to do the actual writing yourself. That format is– has been very useful, but again it’s been sort of beaten to death, enough people have done that.

Steve: Sure. Yes.

Corbett: So creativity and just coming up with your own ideas, and that’s important in general in business.

Steve: So you mentioned some of the traffic you got was through the survey and direct traffic. Were there any particular traffic sources that you kind of focused early on with that blog?

Corbett: Yeah, so at the time Twitter was sort of gaining steam and I was definitely spending a lot of time there. I didn’t focus on Facebook for some reason; I’ve always not been interested in Facebook. But the big one at the time was StumbleUpon. That site…

Steve: Yes, that’s how we met I think, right?

Corbett: Yeah, I think you are right. I think you are right. StumbleUpon just at the time if you knew a couple of people who were popular on there, and you could sort of seed a blog post with them to say, hey I just published this would you mind stumbling it or whatever it was you click the little thumbs up thing on there. If your content was interesting and had a lot of photos and some sort of you know buzz feed like headline, then you might be able to get a jump start on it. And I had a couple of posts really take off and drive tens of thousands of visitors to my site sometimes overnight which was interesting.

But then you found out quickly that StumbleUpon visitors were pretty flaky. So it was interesting from raw numbers stand point, but as far as like conversions into regular readers and email subscribers and things like that, you really weren’t able to net a whole lot of those people. So you know 95% of them might just click a little stumble button and move on from your site to the next site.

Steve: So let’s talk a little bit about Twitter for example. So what do you kind of do in Twitter in order to kind of gain a following that way. What’s your Twitter strategy?

Corbett: Well, for Twitter I use it for really more for engagement than driving direct you know clicks through to my website.

Steve: Okay.

Corbett: So the greatest value I’ve gotten from Twitter has been the relationships that I formed with other people who are in the blogger sphere or the podcast world or whatever it is you known just meeting people online. A lot of those relationships started via Twitter, and the other thing is that a lot of times you are able to engage directly one on one with readers or with potential customers who ask you know, maybe you ask the question on Twitter and they respond and then you are able to respond back.

And that goes a long way towards becoming or towards building people who become fans for life. You know because there’s this massive universe of people trying to be active online through blogs and podcasts and what not. And sometimes you know when you are just starting out, it really feels like you are anonymous and like nobody cares, and when you respond to someone on Twitter who seems to be like an A lister for some reason, and they respond back that really makes an impression on people. And so I try to spend much more time just relating to people on Twitter and responding to them, than I do trying to share my own stuff and generate clicks.

Steve: Okay and then is that the same– do you hold the same principle for the emails that you receive as well?

Corbett: I do although things have changed for me a little bit because I don’t run a personal blog anymore, and so people don’t reach out directly as much as they used to.

Steve: Okay.

Corbett: And that’s something to consider. You know when I ran a personal blog, when I ran Free Pursuits and then when I ran corbettbarr.com, I got a lot of email. Sometimes you know close to 100 unsolicited you know stranger emails a day, and some of those would basically spill their entire life story.

Steve: Yes.

Corbett: And you would get paragraph after paragraph, right. It would end up taking you minutes to read this unsolicited email from a stranger because they feel like they know you and that’s a great thing. But with podcasting, you don’t get that as much because people are listening, but there is no clear channel for them to reach out to you. And with just the way that I built Fizzle I get less of that. And I’m not saying it’s necessarily a bad thing, in the beginning it’s a great thing to get those emails, because you learn so much about people and you learn so much about how your work is affecting them.

But eventually you know it’s nice to have a trickle of those, but not a flood of them because the flood is hard to keep up with, and then you have to kind of make a decision. I’m I going to go ahead and seem like a dick to these people because I don’t respond to their emails, or I’m I going to spend hours after hours every day responding to every single email. And I still respond to everything I get, I’ve just made it so that I try to receive less overall because I am not as public.

Steve: I guess that’s what’s nice about Twitter right, it’s limited to 140 characters you are not to get life stories on Twitter.

Corbett: Totally, exactly.

Steve: Okay and so you got the traffic and how did you kind of monetize some of your earlier sites?

Corbett: So it took me a while to figure out and I kind of kicked myself for waiting so long because I didn’t release my first online course, until about 15 months into blogging. And prior to that basically all I did was consulting. And the consulting was good and I figured out ways to raise my rates and after reading the book– have you ever heard of Book Your Self Solid? It’s…

Steve: I have heard of that book, I haven’t read it yet.

Corbett: It’s by Michael Port. And about I don’t know, you know six to nine into blogging I opened some different services that I offered coaching and what not. And then when I launched Think Traffic I made a really big push to do some strategic consulting to help people figure out how to build a bigger audience for their site. And at first I got a little trickle of interest and it was pretty good, but then I read Book Your Self Solid and applied that stuff, and within like a week of applying his techniques, I mean honestly I was booked solid for months in the future and that went really well.

But I figured that I didn’t really want to be a service provider forever, and I didn’t want to just trade my time for money as they say. And so I started looking into other ways and I found that a lot of people sold eBooks or online courses as a way to produce something once and sell it many times over and scale your business up. And so I had some experience with affiliate marketing. I had sold a number of things from my site and had earned revenue from that. And just in talking to a lot of bloggers, they were really curious about how you do that, and so I decided to start a course or to build a course called Affiliate Marketing for Beginners.

And I hand and hot about it and started it and then delayed and delayed and delayed, and I think it took me about six months to finally get that course out. And once I finally did, I used you know whatever launch strategies I had heard about in order to launch a course successfully, and I ended up doing $11,000 in sales in the first 72 hours or so.

Steve: Nice.

Corbett: And it was– it felt great. It showed me that this online course thing might be possible, and it also made me realize that I probably shouldn’t have delayed for six months in creating that course.

Steve: So what were some of the tactics that you did for that launch, so I was just curious?

Corbett: Well the first one was that I spent a lot of time telling people on my site about the course that it was going to be coming out, instead of just one day saying hey I created this thing and here it is. I had followed a number of other people specifically Chris Guillebeau at the Art of Non-Conformity, and I’d watched his launch techniques and sort of head picked them apart. I noticed that people who seem to be successful spend a lot of time talking about the product sort of behind the scenes, about this is what I am working on, here’s what you can expect, here’s when it’s going to come out, to sort of try to build anticipation, but also to answer any objections that people might have before the product comes out so that on launch day they are ready to buy.

The other thing was I– to my email list spent even more time telling people about it, and then I offered a special discount ahead of time to say you know during the first 72 hours I’m going to launch this thing. I’m going to open the doors and the price will be half or whatever I think. Eventually I sold it for $79 and $99 depending on the package. But initially I said I’m going to offer it for $39 and $49 depending on the package. It’s going to be available for 72 hours, and I’m doing this because it’s my first course and I really want to get people’s feedback on it before opening it to a broader audience. So I offered that discount, opened the doors, sold 11k worth, closed the doors, got feedback from people, tweaked the product, and then reopened it about six weeks later.

Steve: Wow, so 11k this was just from your email subscribers?

Corbett: Yeah, exactly.

Steve: Okay.

Corbett: And you know I had been blogging for 15 months, so it’s been a lot of time focusing on that email list, but I am guessing at the time it probably wasn’t much more than maybe 1500 people or 2000 people.

Steve: Okay, and so that was kind of your beta launch so to speak. That’s a pretty big beta launch.

Corbett: Yeah, exactly yeah.

Steve: Okay and then you just got feedback. Did you tweak it before releasing it to the public or?

Corbett: A little bit but not much really. You know I think I learned that people liked what I had done. I think that there were a couple of modules that I hadn’t finished, so that was another reason for offering the discount you know, is that there were some things that post launch I still needed to finish. And so I finished that up before doing the full on you know whatever, public launch.

Steve: Okay and then you know I noticed later on you kind of merged Think Traffic and Corbett Barr, and all of your courses into Fizzle and I was just curious what the motivation for doing that was. So first of all give us an intro of what Fizzle is and then why you chose to do what you did.

Corbett: Yeah so you know after the course that I mentioned, I ended up starting up a bunch of other courses. I think I had four other things available for sale online at one point. And I also ended up starting a whole lot of different blogs, partly because I really loved writing and partly because I was exploring different ideas through blogging. So at one point I had three different blogs and four different online products, and you know I mentioned that a lot of people were writing me for personal advice and things.

And so my day was just really consumed by just maintaining all that I had, and just sort of thinking into the future. I’m not a young guy, I want to make sure that I focus on scaling my business to a point that you know will provide for my retirement and everything. And so I just started to think more strategically about where I was spending my time. And I decided that instead of having four different courses out there, that it would make more sense to bring everything under one roof because I could combine the value that I was providing throughout all this different courses, as well as the community aspects that I was duplicating for every course.

Every time I launched a course there would be a community aspect to it meaning forums or comments or whatever, some way for people to interact with me and with other students throughout the course. And that was difficult to duplicate in each case, and I also found that every time we launched a course the community would be something we’d focus on and build up. But then as that first group or that first wave sort of diminished, the conversations and the community would start to diminish as well.

So I wanted to house everything under one place, and I wanted to focus on the community aspects of it. And so we decided basically to merge all of those different ideas under one roof. And so Fizzle is a community and training library for entrepreneurs. And it’s not unlike the product that you have Steve, I think you know we’ve just decided to maintain this on a monthly basis. We put out new courses, new interviews, new perks for people and really just to spend as much time as we can in there working with the community, helping people make progress every day.

Steve: So a quick question about your other courses that you released, were they like kind of a launch and then you closed it off after that and you just kind of did a bunch of launches periodically through the year, or was it always open.

Corbett: I did both.

Steve: Okay.

Corbett: And I had experience with both and there were pros and cons. The launch model tends to I think maximize revenue. It seems that way anyway from my experience and from you know other entrepreneurs that I know, because you open this thing up, and there’s just a lot of little tricks that you can build into it, and a lot of pressure that you can place on people who stop by your site in order to make a decision because you are going to close the door in three days.

So it seems like that might be a good way to maximize revenue. But for me personally what I found was that gearing up for that launch took a lot of time and effort, and it just felt really stressful and a little bit in-genuine to open this thing up. This resource that really– you know it’s not like you are creating the resource new every time, it’s the kind of thing you know it’s videos and workbooks and things like that if it’s an online course.

And so it just kind of felt like I did the launch model because I heard a lot of people say that that was the right way to go, and in the end I decided to make Fizzle available on an ongoing basis. In fact you can get it and try it for a dollar and see if it’s right for you for 30 days basically. I decided to do a lower priced product and to make it available all the time because it just felt right to me, and it was the lowest stress option, it was the easiest way for us to go. And now you know Fizzle does far more in revenue than any of those other products that I had created in the past partly because my audience is bigger, and because we focused on it but also because you know it’s interesting the launch model despite all those different tricks you can build into it.

I think if you have something that is available on an ongoing basis for a very long time, you really get to optimize the entire flow from people learning about you on your blog, or your podcast to finding out about your product, to checking out your product to signing up for it, to becoming a member. Just that entire flow you can optimize so that people get a really great experience out of it. And with a launch model when something is available for 72 hours, you are so busy with the launch that you really don’t have time to sit back and do a bunch of split testing, and a bunch of user research to find out what’s working and what’s not with each launch.

Steve: Okay, interesting. And you took on two partners in this venture as well and what was the motivation for that.

Corbett: So for the longest time after I started blogging, I thought that I would be a lone wolf. You see people out there who are fairly well known. You know I mentioned before like Seth Golding and Chris Guillebeau or Danielle Laporte or whoever Marie Forleo. You see these people who are the brand themselves and they seem like, they do everything on their own, or Leo of about to behinds and habits who is a friend of mine. You see these people and it seems like they do everything on their own and I think that was the model I was going for. You know why not build a business where I don’t have to worry about any employees, and I don’t have to answer to anybody and I just do all the work myself. And I think that is possible, in fact you pretty much do that sort of thing right Steve, do you have…

Steve: Sure yes, that’s correct.

Corbett: Yeah exactly, and so I thought that would be a good way to go and I did it for at least the first couple of years. But then I realized you know I had this whole lifestyle business thing going on, and I had a lot of freedom in terms of where I could be, but I didn’t end up with a lot of freedom in terms when I could take time off. I wanted to just take a vacation for a couple of weeks, and I realized what a massive backlog I would end up with, and I also just realized that if I was in vacation and I really wanted to disconnect I would be so worried that you know the site would be down or the product would be down or whatever.

So I hired Caleb Wojcik to join me, first as an intern and then he ended up becoming a co-founder of Fizzle, basically to let me take time off. And then I kind of reconnected with how fun it is to work with a team especially a team that really shares your vision and you know your motivations. And so I you know I started out with Caleb. That went really well and then I brought on Chase Reeves because he was great with just creative endeavors and designing things like that that I didn’t necessarily have, and that worked out really well and now we’ve brought on another guy Barry Brooks.

And we are just having a blast as a team, and I have really built it in a way where we all feel like partners sort of working towards a common goal as opposed to me having to keep track of what everybody is working on, and you know being more of a managerial kind of role. I’m trying to build it as a company of equals.

Steve: So all these people are in different parts of the world, is that correct.

Corbett: Yeah that’s right, so Caleb is in San Diego, I’m in San-Francisco, Chase is in Portland Oregon, and Barrett is in Georgia. And then a lot of us travel fairly frequently and me in particular you know I tend to spend summers for a month or two in Europe, and then in Mexico in the winter for about three months.

Steve: Okay and then how does it all work out in terms of the coordination for working on the course and that sort of thing?

Corbett: So we’ve evolved over time, and we like to call it our company operating system. Basically the idea is you know just like when you turn your computer on; it has a bunch of rules for how it boots up and how it gets work done. We have an operating system for our company that spells out how we work together, how we interact, and I think it’s really important when you’re you know distributed like we are. So we have a bunch of different practices you know at the macro level, we operate on three month long themes, where we decide as a company that there is one particular goal that we want to work towards.

Our most recent theme was member success, meaning how do we measure and impact how successful our members actually are? And so we define a bunch of goals based on that, and then we break those up into three week long chunks of work, followed by one week of wrap up, three weeks, one week, three weeks, one week. So basically we just look at our overall year and sort of break it down.

We get together every three month as a team, all at the same time in the same place so that we get that physical you know contact and intimacy and whatever, so that we can do our strategy work then to define what the theme is. And then on a smaller basis, we define our weeks so that every Monday each of us checks in, which means that we review our task list and we send a note to everyone else to explain what we’re going to be working on over the following week. You know any time that we have off anything that we need from other people, and then on Friday we check out to say “this is what I was able to accomplish” “here’s what I’m waiting on” and “here’s what I am going to be pushing off till next week.”

And then the tools that we use are really important as well. So we use Asana for task management and we use Slack for internal company communications, which is– Slack is relatively new, but it’s sort of like hip chat or some others where essentially they are group chart rooms where you can reach people in real time, and you can also send notifications from different apps and other things that we use.

So really that has replaced email for us and email was starting to become a burden because it’s sort of a instead of like a hobbin spoke model, it’s really a kind of point to point thing, where each additional person that you add to your team grows your you know the amount of emails that you’re getting. Literally it seems like and it just wasn’t scalable beyond two or three people. So Slack has replaced email for us, I’d say 99% I’m not exaggerating here, I would say I probably send maybe one email to a team member every couple of weeks, and that’s just because I’m forwarding something that someone sent me, but otherwise all company communication happens through slack now.

Steve: Interesting. So you kind of pitch Fizzle as an online business school, but the term online business kind of encompasses so many different facades. So what does Fizzle kind of focus on and how do you tailor your content for your customer since there’s such a wide slot of stuff to cover?

Corbett: Yeah, and we don’t claim to try to cover things like ecommerce, which you do so well Steve, we don’t try to claim to cover that well. I don’t think you see any mention of that really on our site, because we know that there are other places that people can go to be better served in that way, but what we do know is that being an entrepreneur is a lonely emotionally charged road especially for people that are trying to start one person businesses. I’m not talking about venture capital backed businesses; these are people that are trying to become freelancers, online course producers, maybe writers, things like that, creative types.

Steve: Okay.

Corbett: And so that’s really what we focus on, and we find that the people who have the most success through our platform probably are building an audience first around a blog or a podcast or maybe videos that sort of thing, and then they’re connecting with that audience to learn what they need and then solving problems by creating eBooks and online courses and things like that.

Steve: Okay, okay that makes sense. So let’s talk a little bit about the nuts and bolts of Fizzle. So how does one go about starting a membership site with recurring billing? Are you guys using any standard platforms to do this?

Corbett: Yeah, we are we are, Fizzle is based on WordPress first of all.

Steve: Okay.

Corbett: And then to process payments we use Stripe, and at the time that we chose Stripe, we knew we wanted Stripe because it’s just– it was at the time– two years ago just you know leaps ahead of any other product that was out there. I had wrestled with Authorized.net and some other ancient garbage before, and we wanted to use Stripe, but in terms of WordPress plug-ins that handled memberships as well as allowed Stripe, there weren’t a whole lot of options. And we ended up with something called paid memberships pro, which is pretty good, but since then there have been just an explosion of different plug-ins on the market place like Member Mouse and…

Steve: Yes.

Corbett: And the classic ones like Wish List and Aweber, they all supports Stripe now as well.

Steve: Okay, and then I imagine the upfront investment was practically nothing, just the cost of the plug-in essentially and then WordPress.

Corbett: Yeah, I think so in our time of course.

Steve: Of course your time yeah. So let’s talk about like some of the intricacies involved in running a subscription based site. So what are some of the things that you do to kind of reduce churn, and ensure that people kind of stay on month after month?

Corbett: That’s a great question and you know first of all we measure churn on a weekly basis. We look at how many people left, and when someone does leave we send a survey asking them about their experience with Fizzle, and we try to you know take that feedback very seriously, and respond to it and categorize it and see what we can learn from it. That’s part of the feedback engine that’s important.

The other thing is a lot of churn happens very early on simply because someone signs up for your service with the intention of using it, but for some reason they get distracted, they move on, life gets in the way whatever. And they kind of forget why they signed up, or why it felt important enough to sign up for it in the first place. And so the member on boarding process becomes very critical.

Basically the idea is you know within the first couple of weeks that’s when you know the problem is intense for people, for us in particular people are trying to build an online business and they feel like they don’t have the knowledge or they don’t have the connections, or just the support and accountability that they are looking for as an entrepreneur. And so they sign up for Fizzle under those premises, and then if life gets in the way, our job is to sort of coax them back into the fold and remind them of all the different things that we offer, and to show them how easy it can be to plug in to the community, to take a course, to make progress in their businesses. So that member on boarding process becomes really critical.

Steve: So you give away you said the first month is only a dollar? Is that right?

Corbett: Exactly, we’re actually testing we’re doing a free trial right now as well, but the idea is to put the burden on us to prove that it’s worth people staying.

Steve: Yeah, so that actually puts even more pressure on this whole on boarding process, right? So can we go into a little more detail on what’s kind of involved when someone signs up for that first month?

Corbett: Absolutely. So we stumbled on a really interesting new category of tool about 18 months ago. We use something called intercom to communicate with our members, and there are a couple of others as well, but the idea here is that intercom basically helps us keep track of all our members. It allows us to feed any data that we can capture from the app to intercom, so we can know for example how long someone has been a member, which courses they’ve taken, how many courses they’ve taken, how often they’ve logged in, how many posts they’ve published within the forums, whether or not they’ve communicated one on one with other members.

All these different things that we’ve identified as being important characteristics of members who end up sticking around for the long term and getting a lot of value out of what we do. We’re able to measure those and monitor those, and then intercom allows us to send communications to our members based on time, based on events, based on actions, based on anything that we want to keep track of basically.

So for example you can say if someone has been a member for three days and they have watched a course, but they have not yet published anything in the forums, then send them a reminder or send them an email that says “hey we noticed you haven’t published anything in the forums. Did you know that 80% of the people who publish in the forums make X progress on their business,” or whatever stats that we can give them, and you can send that via email or with intercom you can also send that via an in app notification. So that next time somebody logs in they see a little pop up that basically communicates the same thing or whatever it is that you want to send within that message.

Steve: Interesting.

Corbett: So intercom also allows you to A-B these messages and to see what you can say that will be most effective in that situation, and then to measure what actions people take after receiving that message. So it’s fairly sophisticated and then it becomes our job to constantly measure and try to improve that overall process for member on boarding. And then later on as well, we have messages that go out if we notice that somebody hasn’t logged in, in seven days or 14 days or whatever it is at the time that we’re testing or running with, and that helps us to get people back into the fold and to again try to demonstrate and to deliver the value that we can.

Steve: So is this intercom, is that a WordPress plug in, or does it just integrate nicely with wordpress?

Corbett: No, it’s not a WordPress plug in it’s a just a JavaScript code that you will add to…

Steve: Okay.

Corbett: All the pages on your website and you can use it for any kind of app.

Steve: Okay, okay and then the JavaScript would only keep track of visitor behavior, but it wouldn’t actually necessarily keep track of posts, right? So I imagine you have to pass it some additional information?

Corbett: Yeah, so you can pass it…

Steve: Okay.

Corbett: Any information that you want to, it knows a few things automatically like how often people log in, what part of the world they’re in, which is just great to see where all of your members are around the world. And then if you want specific data like for example if you have different pricing tiers and you want to know which tier someone is in, then within that JavaScript you just pass that data, you know when someone logs in you pass it to them.

Steve: I see. Interesting I have to go check that out myself.

Corbett: Great.

Steve: So just curious and I think we talked about this before in a private conversation, but you probably have a good idea of how much a member pays you know through the lifetime of a typical customer. So why did you chose to go the subscription based route as opposed to like a lump sum payment upfront?

Corbett: Yeah, we had a good convo about that when you were in San Francisco. Basically the idea is any sort of subscription product, you have a lifetime value of the customer, and so in some ways let’s say your lifetime value is $200 meaning on average people stay for X months and they pay X dollars per month, so you know that equals to $200. Then effectively it’s kind of like you’re paying or you’re selling a $200 product. The thing that we like about a membership based model is that it again puts the owners on us to prove every month that we’re worth sticking around for, and prevents us from playing games you know.

I’ve seen people launch products where let’s say it costs X dollars and maybe they are on a three month payment plan and they have some bonuses they don’t kick in until month four or whatever until you’ve made all the payments. This you know just kind of requires us to earn the customer’s trust and business every month. The other thing that allows us to do is, if you are selling you $200 product you are only going to earn $200 maximum for many customer and customers who don’t necessarily get $200 worth of value are still forced to pay $200.

But with a monthly membership, customers who come in and they try us for a dollar and figure out that we are not right for them, they are only out a dollar. Customers who come in and they decide that this is the greatest place they’ve ever found as far as community goes, and they stick around with us for two years as many customers have since we first opened the doors to our alpha version back in September of 2012. Those people have now paid us $35 a month for the past 24 months, so you can do the math on that, but it’s far more than $200.

Steve: Right.

Corbett: So in a way it’s almost like having different tears of your product that people get to self select into based on the value that they are getting.

Steve: Interesting and when they sign up they get access to everything, right?

Corbett: They get access to everything right away.

Steve: Okay, and one thing that we kind of did not touch on yet was how you kind of get new customers for Fizzle. Are you running any sort of PPC ads or is it just straight podcast, blog sort of engagement.

Corbett: Yeah, it’s all based on you know publishing content, owner blog and owner podcast and people you know listen to our podcast and we have people who sign up and say I’ve been listening to your podcast for the past year and finally something clicked and I decided to sign up. So you never know how long that sale cycle is, but people read our content and listen to our podcast and sign up through that.

And then we do a little bit of affiliate marketing meeting. We have some people who send us customers, and we pay them on a commission based on that. And we also have a pretty strong referral program where members can refer other members. And about 10% of our new members come from that referral program.

Steve: Wow, that’s pretty amazing.

Corbett: Yeah.

Steve: Cool, hey Corbett we’ve already been talking for like 50 minutes. I don’t want to take up too much of your time, but if anyone has any questions for you regarding Fizzle, where can they get a hold of you?

Corbett: They can write me directly Corbett@fizzle.co, they can check fizzle.co and find our podcast or a blog. We have tones and tones of episodes and articles and all kinds of really great stuff for free. They can also try Fizzle as I said for either a dollar, or maybe free, kind of depends on what we are testing at the time, but we always have an offer up at fizzle.co.

Steve: That’s an amazing offer to be able to get access to such a wealth of business information for just a dollar or free, it’s pretty amazing. So I’ll be sure to link all that stuff up in the show notes, and hey Corbett thanks a lot for coming on the show, really appreciate you coming on.

Corbett: Thanks Steve, thanks so much for having me.

Steve: All right man, take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. I have known Corbett for quite some time now, and what I like about him is that we both have similar philosophies about entrepreneurship. Now entrepreneurship doesn’t mean that you have to hit the ball out of the park. You can use entrepreneurship as a way to improve your lifestyle. Whether that means hanging out more with your family, travelling or pursuing your true passions.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode45 and if you enjoyed listening to this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information to find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information about this contest go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

044: Drew Sanocki On What It Takes To Start A Successful Ecommerce Store Today

Drew Sanocki

Drew Sanocki randomly reached out to me one day and I’m glad that he did. Drew is a seasoned veteran when it comes to ecommerce. He started and sold a successful dropship furniture company DesignPublic.com. And today, he blogs at DrewSanocki.com and offers ecommerce consulting at Mineral.io.

What’s also cool about Drew is that we have a bunch of common friends that went to Stanford together. Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • How to find a profitable niche for your online store
  • How to validate your niche before investing a large amount of money
  • How Drew feels about dropshipping today
  • How to get your first customers in the door
  • What is working and what isn’t working in ecommerce today
  • What are the major pain points for ecommerce companies
  • How to market your online store
  • How to run effective email campaigns

Other Resources And Books

  • Powerhouse Campaigns – Drew’s ecommerce marketing course
  • The Lean Startup – Eric Ries
  • Market Samurai
  • Transcript

    Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

    If you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consultations every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now on to the show.

    Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

    Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today we are excited to have Drew Sanocki on the show. Now Drew is actually a hard man to track down and we`ve actually rescheduled this interview like four times. So I`m actually really thrilled to actually have him physically here. Now here is a little bit about his background. Drew founded his first company Design Public right after getting his MBA from Stanford, and he grew it into a premier online design retailer and back when no one was doing it, he negotiated drop shipping deals with his vendors so he didn’t have to carry any inventory.

    Now eventually he sold his company in 2011 and then he founded Mineral.io which is an agency focused on delivering outsourced marketing services to ecommerce store owners. Bottom line Drew knows a lot about ecommerce and he helps companies both large and small with their marketing as well. And with that welcome to the show Drew, how are doing today man?

    Drew: I`m doing great. I`m excited to be here.

    Steve: Yeah you know originally I had all these plans of asking about Design Public…

    Drew: It was like in 2012.

    Steve: Yeah that was– it was a while ago so…

    Drew: The interview was originally scheduled.

    Steve: Yeah, right exactly. Well I was going to ask you about Design Public, you know since you spend a lot of your time consulting companies now, kind of all across the board I thought it would be kind of more interesting to get your take on how to kind of get started as a brand new ecommerce entrepreneur today. You know a lot of the stuff that you did back in the day of design public, has probably changed over time, right? So I want to kind of focus on getting started today. So before you start any sort of online store you have got to pick your niche, so let`s talk a little bit about niche selection. Let’s say you were to start all over again, what would be your process for finding a niche to pursue.

    Drew: You know Steve, I think I do everything that everybody else has talked about online, if you search for niche selection and I do all the same things. I use the Google keyword tool, I look at the Google trends, I look at my own passion and I do all those things, but I think the one thing that I would add in there, the one wrinkle would be just testing the niche earlier in the process like before you go about building a store around it. You know, say you have identified what you think is a great niche and all lights are green, and this one looks good like you should get a lot of traffic and very little completion. I still think we are missing a step between that and okay build yourself a fine store with that product.

    Steve: Okay, but in regards to the actual niche selection process, do you have any sort of guidelines that you go by when selecting something– you mentioned you know if something is good, then you go into the validation process, but what are the guidelines for what is good?

    Drew: Okay so that would me more– I look back at Design Public and I really think I timed that really well, and I was lucky it was a nice drop ship retailer where our traffic could be acquired very cheaply through SEO, and just think that those niches are a few and far between today. So today I would look for a couple of other things. Number one would be kind of a relatively high price point. I like 50 preferably higher than 100 dollar price point. And that’s because it gives you some extra margin on the purchase to put some money back into marketing, in particular paid search. You know from working with our paid search clients we very rarely see paid working for a price point below 50 dollars. So higher price points– and what I`m getting at there is number two it`s like a higher life time value. How can you get the life time value of the customer up?

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: And in that case it would be nice to have some recurring revenue too. So is this a product that could be a subscription product, or is there a natural life cycle I think I could sell to customers on where they are buying several products from me? Because again higher life time value that just enables me to enter a market and have a really high– afford a higher cost of customer acquisition. So those are two things, I mean and obviously one would be passionate about the product…

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: I do want to be able to you know to market it via email because email is sort of near and dear to my heart. So that’s kind of what to look for.

    Steve: Okay and then in terms of you mentioned recurring revenue, what kind of products kind of fall in that space when it comes to ecommerce that you can think of?

    Drew: That exists now?

    Steve: Yeah like what are some likely candidates?

    Drew: Without giving away trade secrets.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: I`m working on one right now, but…

    Steve: Oh are you, okay you don’t have to reveal then?

    Drew: I think anything that– automatic replenishment, things like supplements and protein powders and those– I really like those spaces where you can send somebody a product every month. I get my coffee from Craft Coffee over Brooklyn where they send me a different selection of coffees every month, I get my razors from Harry`s which was started by one of the warbe [phonetic] guys and they you know send me razors every couple of months, so..

    Steve: Because they are kind of consumables.

    Drew: Yeah looking around for these consumables. If you can get a consumable, but also one that has a be to be angle I think you are golden, and there you are in the realm of sort of business supply companies.

    Steve: Okay and then when you are looking at competition, what are some things that you are looking for?

    Drew: I typically– when I`m looking at a niche I will do the same thing that you probably would. I`ll crack open a Google key word tool, I look at organic traffic searches for that product. I like to look at affiliate programs to see if there are any robust affiliate programs in the niche, that’s usually an indication that that’s a pretty mature niche. I look at– I use a tool called Market Samurai which gives me a read into what competitors might be paying on the ads.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: For that niche and the higher they are paying I can assume that it’s a– you know be a harder niche to enter, and harder to drive traffic too.

    Steve: So let`s say hypothetically that you are doing your research and on the front page of search you see a bunch of big buck stores, Amazon.com, Target and that sort of thing, is that a deal breaker?

    Drew: No, because I think you know if it were a deal breaker then any number of those retailers that I named earlier probably wouldn’t exist. I think there also has to be something where you can add some value personally, and I really believe in small retailers creating great lifestyle businesses in trying to differentiate that value, so one example is whippingpost.com. Ryan Berg I have worked with before, he is sort of the signature Shopify store and he creates these great leather bags in his apartment in Brooklyn, sorry in New York.

    And he is just you know if you Google leather bags there are a million leather bag companies on the first page of Google, but he has been able to carve out a niche and tell his story through great branding, great use of video. I encourage you go to check– to go and check out his site and watch some of the videos. He’s just a really good job and it`s just him. So I think he kind of shows how you can compete with the big guys just by niching down your audience enough, and in really telling a good story.

    Steve: Okay, so leather bags so that is really common place. I mean that’s like a pretty common good. So let`s go something’s along those lines, let`s say you have a potential niche, we talked about validation a little bit. So what would be your next steps to kind of validate a niche before you actually start investing serious cash in it?

    Drew: Yeah, this is actually– I mean I go right to validation so quickly, I don’t– I think everything up until validation is sort of hypothetical, right? Like we could pump a million niches into Google keyword tool and come up with our top picks, but at the end of the day, I do want to test them. And Eric Ries wrote this book called The Lean Startup, it just– it really resonated with me, and I thought you know well he is usually talking about software businesses, but I think that should be applied to ecommerce and we`ll call it the lean ecommerce start up or lean commerce whatever you want to call it, but the idea is can we get a sense of what the cost of acquisition is? Can we get a sense of how hard it is to drive customers before we go through the work of building out our ecommerce platform and lining up our products and being able to fulfill. So…

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: I think that’s where any new entrepreneur should spend the most time.

    Steve: Okay, so let`s go into a little more detail. So let’s say you want to sell leather bags since you brought that up, how would you go about validating your bag?

    Drew: You know you could read The Lean Startup, but the essence of it is you come up with this– what`s called a minimum viable product, an MVP.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: So, what’s the minimum amount of work you can do to achieve some learning? And in our case the learning is going to be about whether it’s a good niche or not, right?

    Steve: Mm-huh.

    Drew: What we are driving towards is, what is the cost effective way to drive traffic to my site, to drive customers to my site you know, preferably at a price that allows me to make a profit?

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: So, that’s what we are looking for, that’s the learning we are looking for. So the best way I`ve seen is a really incremental way where you just start initially with something as simple as the Adwords campaigns and just maybe you know where you are driving some– you are just creating the Ads, you may be may not even– you might not even have a landing page for the traffic, but you start taking out some Ads for leather bags, men’s leather bags and just see what the cost per click is, maybe you are driving the traffic to a competitor for a while.

    Steve: Interesting, okay.

    Drew: Yeah, so that’s just a very quick way to get a sense of the cost per click, and then you move quickly to okay if I know how much a click is worth, what is a conversion going to be worth to me, and that’s where in the realm of building up landing pages.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: This is getting easier and easier to do. I did it a couple of years ago when I looked at selling a certain kind of desk, and I set up a simple word press installation bottle– a landing page theme of which there are like 1000 now. Had a one page landing page which featured a couple of desks and a little op-tin button which said hey! Sign up here when we launch, like here is a little more information on what we are going to launch.

    Steve: Okay, so sorry go on.

    Drew: No I got a good sense of how hard it was to drive conversions there, now there are services like leadpages and ClickFunnels and Instapage and lander to name a few, that allow you to do that without even quicker without using WordPress.

    Steve: Okay, so let me just summarize what you just said. So if you have a bag that you want to see, before you even create the prototype that you could put down the prominent features of that bag on a landing page and then collect email addresses by driving ads to that landing page. Is that right?

    Drew: Think in terms of kick starter, right. I mean these aren’t really ecommerce companies but those guys are all doing MVPs. So any time you come up with a new product concept, like they make a video, they put some information on it, they throw it up on kick starter and they get a read on demand you know, and it`s not quite the same for an ecommerce retailer, but I would follow their lead and I think that is what you want to do. And that initial test would be followed very quickly by an actual sort of page that you know, looks like store that has like a buy button and even then I wouldn’t recommend allowing that person to check out and give you money.

    But you can do things like put a price on that page, so here is my new desk; it’s going to retail for 100 dollars, click here to buy. They click that button and they will go to another page where it`s like hey we are launching, and thanks for your interest we are launching in the fall, you know sign up and we will let you know something like that. But the important thing is you could count that as a conversion, you know you set your goal in Google analytics that that click was a conversion, which you then if you look back at your adwords and how you’re driving traffic will allow you to get a cost per acquisition. And once you`ve found that and if you can determine that you can drive traffic cost effectively, then it’s like you`ve got the green light.

    Steve: Okay and then– So that’s assuming that you are creating your own product, let`s say you wanted to white label some products, or sell your own products or drop ship– so first of all actually since you did drop shipping a long time ago, do you recommend drop shipping today as your primary revenue source?

    Drew: It`s sort of hard to answer because I think drop shipping is just a techniques you know and it may work in some markets and it may not work in other markets. Where people might get tripped up is when they make that technique or that tactic into a strategy. Like I`m going to be a drop shipper no matter what you know, but I think that is sort of putting the cart before the horse, like it applies to some categories and it doesn’t apply to others.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: But I would say it`s hard to– it`s much harder to do now than it was ten years ago, and although it allows you to get up and running quickly, I don’t see as many retailers sort of you know blowing the doors off with drop shipping.

    Steve: I guess what I’m trying to say is, would you go the landing page route, if you already have products ready to go, would you skip that step and maybe go straight to the shopping cart at that point?

    Drew: I would say you know there’s still the danger like of getting orders that you cannot fulfill.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: If you realize that it’s not an issue you want to be in.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: So I would just be worried of that.

    Steve: Okay, and then so were gathering emails on this landing page, what do we do with these email addresses that we’ve gathered?

    Drew: You know I think if you decide that you’re going to go ahead with that launch, you want to– that’s your initial presale list you know. I think what you’re probably getting towards is building up– the ideal case scenario is something like Fab or Gilt. Fab went from zero to two million subscribers in eight months, right? Before they launched and you look at Gilt and they are above three million subscribers you know and they’ve get 70% of their new members come from email, email to email referrals, right? So those emails have value and I think building up a prelaunch list is a great idea for anybody who’s considering launching a new business whether it’s ecommerce or not.

    Steve: Okay, so let’s jump ahead a little– so you would do all this stuff before you would even look at product sourcing or any of that sort of thing, right. One you’ve felt comfortable about your niche, then you would actually start proceeding further, right?

    Drew: I would yeah.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: It kills me because I think like any entrepreneur you want to get this site up you know you want to start taking orders and work on tweaking the designs, but you know that stuff takes a lot of time and you feel like you’ve got to think in terms of the time value of money. And extra week or two spent validating the idea really-really will save you months down the line.

    Steve: Okay, and assuming the validation all goes well and you launch, how do you get your first customers in the door, what’s your initial launch strategy?

    Drew: You know what, I can talk about what I’ve seen working really well.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: And that is it’s really like a bottom up approach where you become part of the conversation for a while, right? Like you decide you want to sell to get back to our example desks…

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: All that stuff modern design desks. So you don’t just throw up your store, initially you start with the landing pages, and you maybe come up with your brand, and you can just get involved in Twitter and get involved online in the conversation about modern design, right? And maybe you start rolling out some blog posts and just interacting with users and I think out of that you want to build up a little bit of an opt-in asset like a permission marketing asset. People who might be interested in your product that you’ll ultimately launch too, so that you know I think you want to have a little bit of pizzas behind your launch, right? Like you want to hype it up, you want to have a bit of an audience there and make it into an event. So if you’ve gone the route of– the companies that have done well, like Fab is probably one of the better companies that has done this. If you’ve got a million people on your list before you launch, you sort of can’t loose at that point.

    Steve: Sure absolutely. So what do you find– okay let’s talk about desks as an example, where so you find people that would be interested in desks, where would you go to?

    Drew: You know I think it’s easy to market, whenever you choose a market; you want to think in terms of where do people congregate, right? And I think the markets are better when they congregate in the same place. So the questions you should be asking yourself are you know do all these people read the same blogs? Like if I’m going– if I’m going to sell gold do they read survivalism blogs, or if I’m going to sell modern designs are they all hanging out on apartment therapy and designs bunch. And if you can narrow it down to a handful of blogs that are sort of read by the industry, then I think that’s a great sign because it really simplifies your initial outreach in marketing.

    Steve: Okay, and then once you’ve identified these places, what is the next step, do you kind of ingratiate yourself into the community?

    Drew: Yeah, you do and you know I think that, I think it’s like starting a blog actually I think ecommerce people could take a lot of lessons from starting a blog and just the amount of legwork that it takes to do that kind of outreach. I know people want to just set up the store and kind of watch orders come in, but in my experience it works much better if you’re Ryan Barr or running Whipping Post, I mean that guy developed a relationship with all the bloggers in his niche you know, all the fashion bloggers.

    He was just on their radar and he didn’t outsource it, you know he did it on a very unscalable way, like personal emails, figuring out what every blog was about and personalizing the email to that writer. And I think that’s the way you do it in the early days, you do things that don’t scale and you kind of poke around and really push until you find one or two things that potentially could scale, and ultimately you build your business around that.

    Steve: It almost sounds like you’re recommending that you go like the blogging community route before you actually even launch your online store, is that…?

    Drew: You know it’s– I’ve seen both things happen, I think it’s sort of– it’s figuring out what your acquisition channel is going to be.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: Right? So you know the landing page route is more of if paid it’s going to be a primary acquisition channel earlier on than you know the landing page route works, like lets drive traffic to a landing page.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: But that might not work. If you’re in a different niche that might call– may be the design niche for example, maybe it is more, I’m going to start with blogging and then ultimately roll out a product. So it’s you know it just– I think it depends on the product and what success you find trying these different acquisition channels.

    Steve: Okay, and so let’s go into a little bit more in-depth in regards to acquisition channels. So you’ve consulted for a lot of companies, what have been some acquisition channels that have worked for some companies and not others, and which one do you actually recommend trying when you first start out?

    Drew: Okay.

    Steve: Is that too loaded of a question?

    Drew: I’ve seen hundred million dollar companies built entirely off of adwords, and I’ve seen other niches where they can’t get a single sale off adwords. So you know the adwords product is much more like a promotional product, promotional product retailing, drive people to a product page, they’re buying products that are more sensory or kind of maybe more bid to see. I see them a little bit more effective with a more complicated and a more complex funnel where you’re driving traffic to a site, a landing page, you get that person to opt-in to your list, and then you build up trust and you build up your brand over time and ultimately sell.

    So you know one thing that is kind of working now for several of the fashion retailers I work with is Facebook ads. Driving people to you know your blog or content page where you opt-in to get educated about the product you know to find for example what are 10 ways that I can use this product to decorate my house? Or what are some inspirational ways that I can wear this scarf? And ultimately that email sequence would end with a call to action. So it’s not direct response you know it’s not taking out an adwords ad and driving someone to the product page.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: If you can get that to work do it, but for more and more niches I think that’s harder to do.

    Steve: That has– yeah your exact strategy is how I eventually got my Facebook ads to convert. I drove them to an info essentially a blog post that taught people you know unique ways to make their wedding special, and in that article I had links to my products and then opt-in forms all over the place, and I’ve kind of market them on the back end. It’s a lot– you really got to track that customer; you don’t get conversions right away which is kind of a problem.

    Drew: It’s a lot of work you know I think, but its work that your competitors may not be doing, right? And if you’ve got the time, do it. I have an article on adwords I think on my blog.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: That talks about this you know this– a technique I call it the beast mode, adwords beast mode, right?

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: Which is a technique that I see working for retailer after retailer, and it’s essentially what you describe. It’s spending the time to be more relevant with your funnel, and it’s not just– don’t just mail it in, don’t just throw up the adword ads, or the Facebook ads. You’ve got to think about the personas that are buying from you, what kind of ads they would click on, what kind of content they would find interesting, and how to build a relationship with them over time usually through email. The downside is, all those things take a lot of time, but the upside is the big retailers aren’t doing them.

    Steve: Okay, good point and that’s actually a great segway to my next set of questions for you involving the email marketing sequence specifically for ecommerce. So we got their email address through some opt-in, through some ad that we’ve driven to it, and it’s going to be so sort of info sequence. How do you kind of structure that to prepare yourself for the final sell at the end?

    Drew: You know I take a lead, I’ve always taken a lead from the affiliate marketing community, going back to 03 that’s how I learned marketing online. Not from Stanford, not from business school you know and it’s because that’s like the street you know these guys are out there testing new techniques and anything that is sort of innovative in marketing comes from online marketers, or like information marketers.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: So, what is hot now in information marketing is this concept of a sales funnel, right? So the sales funnel being you know not just the typical ecommerce sales funnel where you– everybody’s heard that you drive 100 people to your site one buy, one of them buys, right.

    Steve: Right.

    Drew: But the sales funnel by which I mean you’re driving people to your site, they are– they see a lead magnet. Something that gets them to give you a little bit of value you give them in exchange for them giving you their email, right?

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: That’s step one, now you have your email, then there’s step two would be this gradual engagement sequence, which is a welcome campaign, three to five days where you’re highlighting various products on your site, building up trust with them at the end of which is a call to action to purchase. Then there’s the offer which in the case of ecommerce is you know product page offer. Something you know typical product page, they purchase and then there’s a whole sequence that happens after the purchase, like there a post purchase sequence. There’s a– an MVP sequence, something where you can identify certain buyers and say like “what’s the next product that they probably will buy?” Like how do I market it to them? Which products– sorry which customers are more valuable than others, and how do I treat them a little bit differently.

    And at the very tail end there is the win back sequence or the win back campaign, where you figure out that some of your best customers are no longer buying from you. How do I pull them back to the site? So a long answer to your question, but I would say you take that funnel approach of how a typical visitor first becomes a subscriber, and then becomes a customer, you automate the whole thing just like you would Steve in your case for selling your…

    Steve: I was about to say everything you said…

    Drew: Information product.

    Steve: Everything you said so far like sounds like my funnel for my info product. I wouldn’t, I haven’t implemented anything close to that for my ecommerce store just yet because I didn’t think it really applied as much, but it sounds like from talking to you that it’s very applicable to ecommerce.

    Drew: It is, yeah I mean you look at– when I started at Design Public in 03, no retailers were collecting email. It was rare to go to an email– to go to an ecommerce retailer and see a pop up or something, but the information marketers were like on their sites, like they knew it and I started collecting email. I had the pop up on our site even though everybody in 03 said pop ups were annoying, and still annoying, but now when you visit nine– probably nine out of ten retail sites when you visit them you are going to see a pop up. So like they get it now, they get that email is valuable. Email an email subscriber is worth something like three times the regular subscriber that you drive to your site verses the regular visitor in just total sales.

    So, I think they understand that getting the email, but most retailers still aren’t really doing anything with that you know they may just dump you into their regular promo sequence, and you’re going to get you know the bed bath beyond 20% off coupon every week. I think how a small retailer can excel is by putting their information marketing hat on, and building that funnel you know treating customers differently based on where they are in the funnel.

    Steve: So, I think I already know the answer to this question, but what’s your take on giving coupons out in this sequence?

    Drew: I think there’s a use for coupons, I wouldn’t say never give them out. I think too many retailers give them out too readily. I go to my inbox and I search for J. Crew or something because I’m on their list, and it’s like bum-bum-bum, I can see in my Google history like a million coupons, so it’s…

    Steve: Yeah, same here.

    Drew: Yeah and the issue there is subsidy cost, right? So subsidy cost is a hidden cost, but it’s a cost you bare nonetheless, and it’s basically you are giving coupons to customers who would’ve bought at full price anyway. So it’s that lost margin that’s called the subsidy cost, and that’s the danger with couponing. So the way you want to use coupons is in a way that reduces the subsidy cost, you give the coupon to the customer who requires that coupon to comeback and buy not to the customer who would’ve bought anyway.

    Steve: How do you figure that out?

    Drew: A great way to do that is if you look at a standard win back email marketing campaign, this is the campaign designed to pull customers back, they’re usually structured to look at the average, what’s it called intra purchase latency, so the average time between a purchase for customers. And when a customer crosses that threshold, say you know my typical pillow buyer buys a pillow every 60 days or a pillow and then 60 days later they’re buying sheets. If it gets to 70 days or 80 days or 90 days, they’ve crossed over that threshold, they’re probably not going to buy again, like that’s when I give them the coupon, so that’s one thing.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: Is looking at that latency between purchases.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: The second thing would be increasing the coupon amount with the time it’s been since that customer has purchased. So initially you give them the 10% off coupon, maybe 30 days later they get a 15% off coupon and 180 days later that customer probably ain’t coming back you can give them a 20% coupon, right? So that’s called a promotion ladder, and it and it gives away promotion dollars in proportion to the likelihood that a customer is going to defect. It’s just a supper efficient way to pull people back to your cart.

    Steve: Okay, and then what services do you recommend to implement this sequence.

    Drew: Unfortunately with ecommerce you are in the realm of like pretty sophisticated email marketing systems usually if you want to implement something like this.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: However you can compute these things with a spread sheet with just your transactional table and you can set them up in MailChimp. You know you can set then up in MailChimp or AWeber or any of the other more common email marketing softwares. It’s usually easier to do it in something like a Dot Mailer or Exact Target, because they are built for it, but yeah if you are on a budget, you could do the same thing with Mail Chimp.

    Steve: But you would have to have some sort of trigger based on when they bought and feed that information to your sequence somehow, right?

    Drew: Right, and so there are a couple ways to do that. This might be a good time to mention my class.

    Steve: Yeah you can. Feel free. Peg away.

    Drew: So I’m teaching this in a class called power house campaigns, and I talk about the seven email marketing campaigns that pretty much work for every retailer I’ve ever come across. And one campaign in particular is this win back campaign. So yes there’s the deluxe way of setting it up where you have this automated campaign using something like Exact Target. But if you were to do it with something like Mail Chimp it could be as simple as you know– you might not be able to automate the whole thing, but if you have got their ecommerce 360 tracking set up, login once a month and send the email to a certain segment. So it doesn’t have to be completely automated, but I think you could still get a lot of results.

    Steve: Okay, and so Drew what are this seven email marketing things that all the top retailers are using. You want to give an overview?

    Drew: Yeah, I like lay it all out right now.

    Steve: And then I’ll charge for this interview.

    Drew: Well, I think you know right now we are recording this and it will probably go live at a different time, but it’s what October, right? So first campaign is going to be holiday, and I am talking a lot about how to automate, best email marketing campaigns over the holidays. Like one of the best practices to get your customers to buy, to get your highest value customers to buy more. The second would be you know an early engagement sequence, or a welcome campaign. So you get somebody to sign up for your newsletter, what’s the exact sequence that you send them in order to increase their likelihood of purchase?

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: Third, ascension campaigns. These are your ongoing email campaigns that go every month or every other month. But they can be sent in a way that’s pretty highly automated and there are certain best practices around how to do that.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: Third, one you have talked about a lot abandon cart campaigns, and ways to optimize the purchase. Fifth would be post purchase campaigns. So how do you treat somebody who has just bought from your store in a way that increases their likelihood that they will buy again? So there’s a certain sequence there, a certain data you look for in your transactional record to set up that campaign. The IP campaigns, that’s another favorite one. I’m a big fan of treating your VIPs better than the rest of your customers. And then the last one would be the win back campaigns.

    Steve: So win back is different from abandonment, right?

    Drew: Yeah the– good question though. The abandonment is somebody leaves an item in the cart and you know they go to let the dog out and forgets to come back and purchase, so you would want to use an abandon-cart campaign to pull that person back. The win back campaign is, somebody has been purchasing from your store for a long time, or for an extended period of time and they are at the end of their customer life cycle, it looks like they are not going to purchase from you again, how do you pull them back?

    So win backs are pretty much the highest return use of your marketing dollars. And it’s because you have already acquired this customer, you’ve figured out that he or she is a high value customer, in other words they have order from you quite a bit. And yet for some reason they are not ordering from you again. So one of the highest underlined things you can do is spend the time and money to bring that customer back.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: And I’m talking like 500% all the way on your dollar.

    Steve: Wow, okay and so you really need to– so you start one of these campaigns I would imagine by funneling out your best customers, and then you put them through this panel that you present in your class.

    Drew: Yeah, first step is identifying who they are if you don’t know based on order history. Second step is profiling that activity, and third step is designing an automated email campaign to bring them back. And it’s just– you know I think with retailers there’s a hole, like you get in this– you have this ego about your site, and you just think that you are always top of mind for your customers, and you know fact of the matter is you are not. They buy from you, they buy from your competitors, like customers have very little long term loyalty to one brand, right.

    And the typical life cycle, you and I probably experienced this side, and I’m sure a lot of your listeners have. You get into a brand like right now I’m really into Bonobos, I like how their pants fit, I love them. You know I’m ordering from them every couple of weeks, I’m ordering something. I’m building up my wardrobe, but you know that activity will stop probably, and it stopped in a shorter period of time than most retailers realize. I mean it stops in like a couple of months, right so that’s typically how a customer engages with a brand. And the trick is like what if you could make that couple months into six months, or what if you could make it into a year. And that’s where win back campaigns come in.

    Steve: So I was just curious, what is your take on frequency of email sending?

    Drew: You know this is something that really is something I would want to test on a case by case basis. I was reading today that the average retailer sends out seven emails a week.

    Steve: Yeah.

    Drew: In October through December. So you know that seems high to me, but…

    Steve: It seems high to me too yeah.

    Drew: In the early days like I have the opposite problems with a lot of my clients, like they come to me. Especially the startup saying, we don’t want to spare more customers, you know we only want to send every month or every other month. And I think those are usually living money on the table because they– there is a disconnect between what they feel like the customer wants and what the customer actually wants. You know when the customer wants to hear from your brand, when they are into Bonobos and they like your pants, like you have got to show them more pants.

    Steve: I agree and so what is your– similar question I have is what is your take on pop ups as they are actually shopping on your store?

    Drew: Oh, I’m a big fan.

    Steve: Big fan, okay.

    Drew: Yeah again you want to do them in a way that– I think the key to a lot of this is latency. And you can look at data that says the average person in my you know leather bags category buys within– you know buys this specific product within say two minutes of being on the page. And so if I’m going to show them a pop up with an offer to buy, like don’t make the coupon on leather bags show up initially when they first go to that page, because there’s still a high likelihood they are going to buy. Make it show up at minute three or minute four you know and then you are sort of engaging based on past behavior of similar customers, and it’s just a supper effective way to do it.

    Steve: Okay, and you know along those same lines of implementation, are there any services that you recommend to do this pop up just as how you mentioned it.

    Drew: Yeah you know Justuno and Padiact are two that I have used. Are you familiar with either of them?

    Steve: I have heard of Padiact before.

    Drew: Justuno is I think like Padiact on steroids. It’s got– it also does offers. Padiact is a little bit more about leads. In the early days I was using Colorue [phonetic] to do this, like nobody built a tool that allowed me to do it, so I kind of bastardized my own. But I think there are services out there now. Padiact, Justuno are two of them.

    Steve: Okay, and in terms of implementing the more complicated sequence, what were the tools that you recommended before?

    Drew: For email marketing sequences?

    Steve: That’s correct, yes.

    Drew: You know I think you can implement them on pretty much anything. MailChimp, AWeber, Drip are three good ones, at sort of the lower end. At the higher end you have got Exact Target, and Clivo one out of Boston, DotMailer is another. So I think more and more the email marketing companies are getting savvy about automation and rolling out functionality that you can use.

    Steve: Okay, and then what is your take on social media and how much time you know typical retailers should focus on that versus email in your experience?

    Drew: I haven’t seen that many retailers build on the back of social media.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: And I’m thinking of let’s see, PetFlow here in New York has done a great job at building up a massive following. The other one that comes to mind is, Diamond Candles. Right that…

    Steve: Yeah I remember that.

    Drew: Yeah, still I think they didn’t– it’s not their primary customer acquisition channel, but they use it to sort of hack growth a little bit by getting their users to do the opening ceremonies through their Facebook. But I don’t– I certainly wouldn’t start there, I never was able to get it to work for us and I’m excluding Facebook advertising from this. I mean more…

    Steve: You are just talking more of a straight fan page and engagement.

    Drew: Yeah.

    Steve: Got it, okay.

    Drew: You know Shopify just rolled out their Shopify stores on for Facebook, I’m not sure how that will change things. What about you, I’m curious what are you using.

    Steve: Well, we have just started running Facebook ads and primarily using just Facebook retargeting to gain the conversions, but like you mentioned before, we drive people coming from Facebook ads to a landing page which is essentially an info site, a blog post. And then from there they can either choose to purchase, or we get them to signup for our newsletter where we have like a sequence of 12 emails that we send them to actually eventually get the purchase. And during this whole period we are retargeting them on Facebook as well, so…

    Drew: That’s a power house campaign right there Steve.

    Steve: It’s a pain in the butt, so let me tell you.

    Drew: You didn’t take the course. Make it easy for you.

    Steve: On the flip side though, the adwords ads just the search versions work much easier, right. I don’t have to update the creative, they just point straight to category pages or product pages and they just convert at a very high level on their own. So…

    Drew: But they’re getting expensive.

    Steve: You know they are not that bad for my niche for some reason, and then Google shopping is actually– converts extremely well for everything, so…

    Drew: Yeah in the realm of paid, you are talking about your wife’s site, now not your information product, right?

    Steve: That’s correct yes. Yeah.

    Drew: Yeah. The realm of paid I think I always tell people like get on Google shopping you know it’s worth a try. It’s usually pretty easy to set up, I mean take– it might take you an afternoon, but the clicks are cheap. Facebook and Google retargeting are probably second as far as lowest hanging fruit go, you know and those aren’t really acquisition strategies per say, they are more retention and conversion, but still worth it. And then now Facebook is rolling up like custom audiences and look alike audiences, do you know what those are?

    Steve: Yeah absolutely, so we only use look alike audiences now because whenever I try to target myself, it ends up not going well.

    Drew: Yeah it’s not yeah, like they know better than you, you know and that is something almost across the board even for the really big guys is working super well. Upload their email file, run ads against that, and then create similar audiences to that.

    Steve: Yeah, and then what’s your take on Google display ads. Have you ever been able to get that to work, because I have not?

    Drew: No so far.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: That’s in the hierarchy of where I would spend my ad dollars, or where I would at least try, I would put that sort of towards the bottom.

    Steve: Okay, what’s attractive about it though is once you find something that works, it seems like you could just up the spans to like infinity and make a lot of money, right?

    Drew: Yeah, you could make an infinite amount of dollars.

    Steve: That’s why it sounds attractive to me right, because there is so much traffic going through there, but…

    Drew: You know you really got to dial it by– this gets back to what we talked about at the very early part of the podcast. When you can find an audience that is congregating on one or two sites, it’s a great way to like get your ads in front of that audience.

    Steve: What’s your take on like banner ads and blogs and that sort of thing, have you tried that?

    Drew: In the early days, I don’t think I have ever gotten it to work. Usually it wasn’t that price effective.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: Blogs, there was this disconnect where at least blogs and my niche were selling to big you know big retailers like apartment therapy selling to Target for example. Target thinks the banner ads are supper cheap, so they buy out all the inventory and apartment therapy could charge a rate where target doesn’t really care you know, but for a smaller company like me their rate didn’t make sense.

    Steve: And hey Drew looks like we have already been talking for like 45 minutes, are there any sort of– you have been doing this clearly for a long time, are there any good books on just marketing and SEM that you would recommend? And then you could feel free to plug your course again if you have the URL up.

    Drew: Yeah, it’s powerhousecampaigns.com is the course. As far books, I don’t know about books on SEM, but I’m just, I’m a big fan of blogs you know.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: Yours, Youderian’s, that’s like the place I would learn marketing.

    Steve: Okay, and then in terms of if people want to ever get hold of you, or ask you questions or see one of your email sequences in action, where can they find you?

    Drew: I blog at drewsanocki.com that’s S-A-N-O-C-K-I. And I talk a lot about ecommerce marketing there. And I’m at tweeter @drewsanocki.

    Steve: Awesome Drew. Hey I really appreciate your insights on the show, and thanks for coming on.

    Drew: Thanks Steve, thanks for having me; I’m glad we finally got this.

    Steve: Yeah, after years and years of trying to get you on the show.

    Drew: Yeah.

    Steve: All right man, take care.

    Drew: Take care.

    Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode, one of the biggest requests I get from my podcast listeners is that they want to know what strategies are working today. After all many of my guests got started many years ago and some of the strategies that used to work back then may not be as effective in the present. Now I like Drew because he works with a lot of different companies and he has a unique perspective on what is working and what is not. And hopefully Drew’s perspectives today will help you rethink how you choose to run your business. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode43.

    And if you enjoyed listening to this podcast, please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from my guests. It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

    Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to signup for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100 k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

    Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

  • Whipping Post
  • Aweber
  • MailChimp
  • Exact Target

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

043: Eric Siu On How To Run Profitable You Tube And Facebook Ads For Your Business

Eric Siu

Eric Siu is a pay per click marketing expert and the CEO of SingleGrain.com, a successful digital marketing agency. Eric first caught my eye when I read his incredible post on YouTube advertising

In fact, YouTube advertising is one of the only mediums that I haven’t yet tried so I’m eager to have Eric on the show to talk about what’s working and what’s not in the world of advertising. Enjoy the show!

What You’ll Learn

  • How to launch an effective Facebook campaign
  • How to launch a high converting YouTube campaign
  • How much money you should be willing to invest when launching your first campaigns
  • Which types of Facebook ads work the best
  • Which types of YouTube ads work the best
  • How to create an effective funnel and why funnel based marketing works
  • Eric’s take on mobile advertising

Sponsors

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consultations every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting our own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

Now before I begin, I just want to give a quick shout out to this episode’s sponsor 99designs. Now originally I wasn’t going to take any sponsors at all, but 99designs caught my eye because I suck at design. And in fact when I first started my online store back in 2007, the design for my website was terrible and I had absolutely no idea who to turn to. Now fast forward to today, 99designs is a site where you can provide a description of anything that you want designed whether it be as logo, a web page, a t-shirt, pretty much anything and have dozens of designers compete to deliver you the best design possible. And by best I mean that you get to choose your favorite design among dozens of submissions from a pool of over 315,000 designers. So if you are design challenged like I am, I highly recommend that you go over to 99designs.com/mywifequit.

And if you use that link and tell them that Steve from mywifequitherjob.com referred you, your design listing will be bolded, highlighted, given a prominent back ground, and featured before all regular listings so that your request stands out among all of the designers. And in fact this special offer is worth 99 dollars. So if you need a logo, website, t-shirt, business card or anything designed, go to www.99designs.com/mywifequit. Now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, today we have Eric Siu on the show. Now, Eric is the CEO of the digital marketing agency singlegrain.com where he helps companies grow their revenues online. He also runs an excellent podcast and blog at growtheverywhere.com which you should definitely check out and prior to Single Grain Eric has consulted with a bunch of fortune 500 companies, and he is known for running the growth team for the online education company Tree house. He also contributes regularly to Fast Company, Entrepreneur magazine, Forbes and other online publications and in fact the only weakness in Eric has as far as I could tell is that he is a big USC football fan, which Stanford has owned these past few seasons. But without further ado welcome to the show Eric, how are you doing man?

Eric: I`m doing great thanks for having me.

Steve: Yeah, so give us the quick back ground story and tell us about SingleGrain.com and how you kind of got there.

Eric: Yeah I`d love to. So you know Single Grain has been around since 2009 as a digital marketing agency and we originally started out as a search engine optimization shop, well known in San Francisco for doing that. I work with companies like Sales Forest, Yahoo, Intuit, and a lot of ecommerce companies as well. And since then we have expanded into doing things like YouTube advertising, Facebook ads, you know typical Google adwords and then we do also conversion rate optimization as well.

I– you know as you mentioned, I worked for Tree House and you know– after my stint there one of my friends reached out to me and said hey maybe you could come and join Single Grain and you know kind of expand what they are doing there. So I joined Single Grain almost three years ago and actually ended up taking over the company less than a year ago. And since then we have expanded our services, we`ve added a lot of new structure and we`ve also added an LA office as well. So that’s kind of the back story of Single Grain.

Steve: Okay and so when you were at Tree House, so first of all why did you leave Tree House to go to Single Grain?

Eric: Yeah, I actually didn’t have any intentions on leaving Tree house in the first place, but you know director of [inaudible 00:04:45] his cousin reached out to me and said, hey there is an opportunity here that– to really do some damage in the marketing space, and you know I used to work for an agency, digital marketing agency and I`m sure a lot of your listeners have been burned by agencies in the past. I`ve been burned as a VP of marketing and I`ve seen it first hand while working for an agency, and it just left a really bad taste in mouth and it seemed like a really interesting challenge to change the perception of how marketing agencies are seen. So that’s how I ended up making the jump over to Single Grain and actually I was like do I really want to do a digital marketing agency? And you know after I thought about it some more I thought the challenge was interesting, so here I am.

Steve: That’s interesting, so what set Single grain apart from some of the other digital marketing agencies that you have encountered.

Eric: Yeah, great question so I think one of the things is that we are super revenue focused. There is not a lot of smoke in the mirrors. When you just go work for a technology start up, it’s just like you know the numbers are there, you are either making it happen, or you are not. When you are with an agency it’s just like, and I`ve seen this first hand it’s like hey but we`ve helped you increase you ranking for X key word that brings no traffic, but you know we are clearly doing our job, but in reality it’s just smoke in mirrors. We are very focused on the bottom line, and what’s so particular in clients or even say hey, we will front the adverting spent and we’ll go all in, you just pay us for sales, so we work on our CPA basis with some of our clients.

Steve: Really, okay.

Eric: Yeah, it’s all performance marketing for some of them if it makes sense for us. So we throw it all out there, it’s like dude if we are as good as we say we are, you know we`ll go out and put our money where our mouth is.

Steve: Okay, yeah that’s actually pretty interesting, so you work on a CPA basis. So how does it work for like SEO work that you do?

Eric: Yeah great question, so I wanted to really emphasis that the CPA stuff it’s– we are really selective about who we work with, it’s not like every client. We do still have people on retainers as well.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: For SEO stuff it’s really– you know we found it in the past to work on a CPA basis is really difficult just because it takes so much time to get going, and there is a lot of investments. It`s not as quick– we`ll just put it this way, it’s not as quickly as running a paid advertising campaign where you see if there is traction or not. With SEO it’s like you might bet a bunch of money and then you are not going to know if it’s working or not for a few months, and that can be really nerve racking. So, but that’s our experience with that.

Steve: Okay and so that’s probably one of the reasons why you kind of transitioned over to new services with CPA because the gratification is more or less. It’s a lot faster certainly, right.

Eric: That’s correct.

Steve: It’s a lot more measurable as well.

Eric: Right.

Steve: Cool, so I was really excited to have you on the show today because I was hoping that you`d be able to share some insights with the audience from the perspective of a smaller shop. So I know you probably deal with a lot of larger companies but the majority of listeners in my audience actually run businesses that kind of have– make under 5,000,000 dollars in revenue, and so let me set the stage real quick. So let’s say you just started a brand new ecommerce store selling a certain type of widgets, and let’s say you re the one running the store. So what would be you first plan of action with PPC, SEO, you know what not, your entire arsenal?

Eric: Yeah. So great question, so I think my first question to that would be, is this widget something that has never been– you know there is no demand for it right now or is it something that people are actively searching for like red shoes?

Steve: Good question, so let’s take like both scenarios, so first of all let’s say it’s like a new product that might not be well known but it’s a product that people buy, but you have some sort of unique aspect or your own unique spin on this particular widget that you are trying to sell.

Eric: Yeah, so what I would do is I think there is a lot of different channels we can talk about, but I`m going to focus on Facebook advertising for this example you know. I think with Facebook advertising we are talking about demand generation verses Google you know Google search where you are actually fulfilling demand. So, with Facebook ads you have a few different targeting options, some are fairly obvious where you are targeting competitors, then there is also– you can also target people by interest as well, so let’s say if I`m teaching HTML courses or if I`m teaching people how to code and do web design you know, I might target people that interested in HTML, I might target people that are interested in WordPress. That part is fairly obvious, right?

Steve: Right.

Eric: But I might get a little more complex and say, how do we– what are some websites I can target, you know Smashing Magazine, Web Designer Depot, those some popular ones. And then I can get even further recruitment even more granular than that and say hey maybe we can target people that are uninterested in specific groups as well. You might be you know doing a specific medium group that is very vague, so you do research on that side too. And then you can get a little cuter and say hey let’s say Steve you are teaching people how to do web design and you say “hey I have this list of 100,000 people on my email list,” or let’s just say you have a list of 1000 people on your email list that are very highly qualified, and you said “hey I would really like to find more people like the people on my email list.”

So what you can do on Facebook is you create what they call a look alike audience, and you can upload that email list and what Facebook will do is look for people that have similar interests to the people on your email list, and I’ll create what you call a look alike audience list that can be you know 2,000,000 people or higher, and then that way you have a list of people that are extremely similar. So that’s another thing you could do, it`s called a look alike audience, and then– go ahead you have a question?

Steve: Yeah, I was going to ask typically what would you expect for some sort of adspen [phonetic]– so let’s put an actual product to this, like a physical product. So let’s say you have, let’s say you are trying to sell golf clubs and let’s say you have some sort of brand new type of golf clubs that’s you know guaranteed to improve your drive distance by 100 yards, something like that…

Eric: I`d love that.

Steve: Yes. Okay so how would I get that– so what would be your first plan of action? Let’s say I have a very small email list, maybe only like 1000 people or something like that, and then you are starting your first Facebook campaign. So what is your first goal, like what is the audience size that you are targeting, what would be kind of like your introductory adspen and that sort of thing, so let’s kind of dig deeper into the specifics of what you might do.

Eric: Yeas, so I was saying like typically we recommend to our clients when they are starting out five thousand dollars is a good test amount.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: You probably don’t want to create too many different targeting groups because you are going to be spreading yourself too thin. I might say three or four is a good amount to start with you know obviously your mileage might vary, but three or four is a general good rule of thumb for at least for our clients, and then you know the target groups that I mentioned you can definitely test us out. I think if you are looking for– if you are a little more risk averse, I think starting with the look alike audience would be good to go with because you are targeting people that are immediately very similar, because the other targeting groups you are not sure if they are going to work or not, you are really throwing a Hail Mary out there and see if everyone is going to catch it.

So you know I would start with that first and you can also do something called a website custom audience, and basically what this means is you could pretty much retarget people, like you can through Goggle. I`m sure your audience is familiar with you know the banners that follow you around. You could the same thing with Facebook as well, where we target them on a new speed; we target them through the side bar as well. I think that is a good place to start to see if you start to get some conversion through Facebook. And then once you start see some traction you are hitting like a good CPA number or you are seeing the CPA number decrease fairly quickly, I would say you know it’s time to perhaps shut down the ones that are underperforming first and then kind of go all in on the ones that are working.

Steve: Okay, so just to summarize what you just said. So you recommend taking your email list and then creating a look like audience to start, because that is going to be an audience that is going to be very targeted to what you trying to sell, is that right.

Eric: That’s correct, and I would also say when we start for our clients too we– competitor targeting is fairly easy too. So you want to target people that like your competitors too, I think that one is fairly obvious, just make sure you are– for those we can see the CPAs in to cost preposition number sometimes it can get absurdly high and our clients we know might get a little turned off by that, but over time we tend to see those working out.

Steve: Okay and then do you have any comments about the actual ad in the landing page?

Eric: Yeah, so I think if for the ad itself I mean the rule of Facebook is you can’t have more than 20% text in the ad. So you know I would have something that is enticing you know. You might have someone show like a really nice design and say hey just click here or something like that, or you know a really nice picture of your product, and then you know obviously the copy matters too just like it would in like Google search ad. And then as for the landing page itself, a lot of people like to collect emails I think for ecommerce, I`m not sure if that’s– you know that’s probably isn’t the case, most of the time you send them to like a landing page, just make sure the landing page– and I could try to get an example after this call.

The landing page is usually something that really stands outs to explain the product well, it explains all the features and benefits obviously and that isn’t just like clearly we`ve just been thrown on a typical product page, because that’s a bad experience. I think if you can find a way to capture their email that’s probably the best bet.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: Not everyone operates that way.

Steve: I can kind of share with you some experiences with my ecommerce store. I ran an ad for a couple of weeks where I just sent them straight to a product, not a product page but a listing of products and that converted very poorly. And then I tried sending it straight to a landing page with an email sign up form giving away something, and that actually worked out really well, but then you know there is kind of this long site sales cycle where I`m just selling to the email subscribers, and I think overall it’s been profitable. So can you kind of address the fact about sending someone to a landing page with content as opposed to products, and what’s been your experience with the clients that you work with?

Eric: Yeah, so the clients that have like an email funnel where like I said it’s a longer sales cycle and it can be nerve wrecking, but you know those are the guys that once you start building a funnel and you are really well aware of how much you should be spending to acquire an email, and you know your numbers, the numbers are really down packed in your head, I think that’s when you could really expand on your revenue with like up sales and cross sales through the email funnel. I think every ecommerce site needs to be doing that. I think if you go to digital marketer.com I think you know Ryan Dyce has some good lessons on how you can learn how to create a funnel, it’s something that’s very tedious, it does take a lot of time, but I think overall it’s going to pay off for you in the long run.

Steve: Yeah I mean on the flip side doing that method to sell my online store course has done really well, right. So you’re– exactly what you said, you create a little funnel that kind of gives an intro to what you want to sell, it’s an info product and then later on you sell them on the full blown thing, and that’s actually worked really well. Ecommerce I actually haven’t had as much luck so…

Eric: I have– actually you know what? You actually bring up a really good point. If you go to survival life.com they do an incredible job with their funnel, like that’s the only reason I signed up for their list is because they keep hitting you with emails and it’s always like a different product. So if you have an ecommerce site and I`m assuming you have like a million of skills, that might be something that works out.

Steve: Okay, cool I will have to go and check that out, and I’ll be sure to link it up in the show notes. So what’s your take on showing the ads on mobile as opposed to just desktop?

Eric: You know the only time and this is– I`m just sharing my personal experience here, the only time I ever convert on mobile is when I go through the Amazon app. I don’t think I`ve ever converted through mobile like Facebook, like I will see the ads like yeah, they are getting impressions and all of that, but I don’t think I’ve ever even put in an email though mobile. But you know granted– I`m saying that we do see data that shows that people are actually converting, it’s just it’s not as well as we do see through desktop. I will say obviously if you have a mobile app, it will always do really-really well on Facebook.

Steve: Okay are these when you are looking at mobile, do you see a lot of direct conversions or assisted conversions, like what’s been kind of like the spread.

Eric: Yeah, so I would say I don’t have the numbers off the top of my head, but I would say when it comes to– there are a lot of direct conversions that we are talking about like app installs. There are a lot for conversions when it comes to email. Yeah, so I would say more or less it’s more direct conversions which is a good thing because I don’t like to count assistance too much.

Steve: Right, okay so in general from what you’ve seen it sounds like email sign ups and then app installs have been working really well with mobile.

Eric: That`s correct.

Steve: Okay, and then you mentioned earlier like five minutes ago, you talked about retargeting. So what’s your strategy– so first of all what company do you use for retargeting and what’s kind of your strategy involved?

Eric: My recommendation is that if you can do it, if you can have your PPC manager do it or if you can do it yourself, just do it yourself, because when you go through like another– when you go through another platform like I don’t know like a re-targeter or android, obviously they are the middle man, so they take the chunk of that money as well. And they like to count, they really like to count through conversions, they are like all about that, but you know when it comes down to it you know all I really care about are direct conversions.

You know sometimes when I was at the company Tree House they are saying you know, you are getting a CPA of three dollars, that’s amazing, but it was all view through conversions you know. There is a lot of smoking mirrors there, I would say if you play with it yourself you are going to get a little more ad budget and then the cool thing is you get to learn the ropes as yourself too, and it’s really not that difficult to be able to retarget people through Facebook, you know you could even do Twitter retargeting, You Tube retargeting, it’s really not that difficult and once you get a hang of it, like if you have someone else to manage it and they are clearly mismanaging it, you can call BS on them.

Steve: So can you just for the listeners, can you define a view through conversion verses a direct conversion.

Eric: So view through conversion would be like, if let’s say you see a banner right, but you don’t directly click on it, so you go the impression but later like you go through like search or something and you convert through there. So view through for you looking at that banner they would count that as a view through conversion. But a direct conversion would be if I click on the actual banner itself and I convert, that’s a direct conversion. Does that make sense?

Steve: Okay, yes-yes, so in fact you don’t know for sure that it was because of the ad in a view through conversion as opposed to a direct conversion where there is a click intent.

Eric: That’s correct.

Steve: Okay. And so in terms of retargeting, I know you can run Facebook retargeting by yourself through the Facebook interface, so is there some sort of service that you use to do it?

Eric: Actually with Facebook now they have something called website custom axis and you are actually able to run retargeting by yourself now. That wasn’t the case before maybe a year or two you know you had to go through somebody else like an adroc [phonetic]. But yeah they have rolled that out to people to be able to do that on their own.

Steve: Okay and in terms of targeting your audience, what are some common ways to segment your audience for retargeting?

Eric: Yeah, so I think you can segment people by let’s say for example you have people that have visited a product page, but didn’t convert you know those people are a little further down the funnel, you can target those people. You could target people that just hit the home page, you know typically that is you can run that, but you are probably not going to get the most conversions, maybe you are just trying to do it for branding purposes. And then even further down the funnel people that have visited a shopping cart but abandoned, you can retarget those people too.

And you can get really creative with it too, like let’s say they hit the shopping cart they abandoned, you can hit them with a retargeting ad through You Tube saying hey, why didn’t you buy or something like that, or hey we are running this deal, you can do some creative stuff like that. And you could also even retarget people though email too. You know people that are open to email or people that have opted into a specific list. So you know you can get very creative with it.

Steve: Okay and then so typically for your retargeting ad, do you generally use a different creative than your regular ad? Like how do you structure your retargeting add as opposed to a regular ad.

Eric: Yeah good question. So I think you know what I see with a lot of different people, you know when I’m looking through Facebook. Pretty much it’s, a lot of people just use their regular ads. You can– I mean if you do have more resources available I would say you know, just like test out other possibilities as well you know really hyper targeting people you know. I think that the more granular you get the more specific you get, you are going to get a higher conversion rate. But you know in general what I see is people are just kind of using what they have already.

Steve: Okay, yeah because I haven’t tried this out yet myself, but I’ve heard that dynamic retargeting works really well. So if they were looking at a certain product, then you hit them up with an ad with that exact product, and it’s something I want to try but it sounds like it’s a little more work to set up do…

Eric: Yeah, dynamic retargeting is still fairly new. You know you see it with like the Amazon; you see it with Zapples [phonetic], you know. I would say yeah, those– that’s a perfect example. You know we actually haven’t set up a lot of dynamic retargeting ads for our clients yet because it’s still you know it’s still a fairly new thing. And we are kind of still going all in on what’s working right now, but you know in the near future we are definitely going to be you know testing it pretty thoroughly.

Steve: Okay and then what is your– I just thought I’d get your take on the Google display network versus Facebook ads. What are some of the differences?

Eric: Yeah so you know they are actually– there are some good similarities there. I mean when it comes to Google display network, you are really looking to make a theme of key words. So when I say that– you know a theme would be like you would enter in and we’ll go back to the web design example. Let’s say you want to target people that are interested in HTML right, so you’d say, I want to target people on the Google display network you know websites that are talking about HTML, learn HTML, HTML file, things like that. So what I do is make a list of 10 to 20 keywords that I think are fairly similar, and what Google will do is Google will say, okay I get what the theme is here and then it’s going to start targeting websites based on that theme.

What you need to do there however, is you still need to prune down the ones that aren’t working. You know they’ll put you on; sometimes they’ll put you on a totally irrelevant website and you need to prune them down on that. With Facebook however, you know once you make a targeting group, you know they don’t let you get as granular as you can with Google. From there you just need to figure out like is the campaign working or not? And then you know perhaps you need you know to reset the campaign and change targeting options there.

But when it comes to– for Facebook at least you have to at least– you have to think about you know who are the competitors and things like that. Who are the competitors, what different groups can I target. With Google it’s a little less granular when it comes to targeting; you need to let Google make the decision for you. So Facebook, a little more control when it comes to targeting and Google not so much. You have to kind of let them decide and then you always get the prune down.

Steve: Okay and then so for at least for your e-commerce based customers, have you seen more success with Facebook or have you had success at all with the display network?

Eric: Yeah, so I mean for Google I mean for Google display network we have seen great success with it, same thing with Facebook. I think it really depends though, like you know some of our clients are more– like I said more demand generation and it’s something that people have never seen before, Facebook is perfect for them. But if your e-commerce store, like if you are drop shipping like you are drop shipping or just shipping stuff that you know people are typically searching for already. You know Google display network is probably better bet for you because there’s so many websites out there on the Google display network that are you know talking about things that are relevant to what you are selling.

Steve: Okay, and so do you have any tips on actually improving your conversion rates with the display networks and just some best practices.

Eric: Yeah, so I a mean you know with Google search I mean you know people talk about negative keywords all the time. You know you are going to have to do negative– you are going to have to do negative targeting. You know that’s definitely one of the things. With Google display as well another thing is you can use the– there’s you know there’s a website called similar web or similar sites. You know you can find websites that are similar and you can target those websites as well. So let’s say you find a really good blog that you think you know you think the audience will be very receptive to your product, you can just you know type that site into like similar web, similar sites and see what else pops up. You know they are actually a very well funded company and they are growing very quickly. I think that’s– that would be you know very helpful too.

And then yeah I mean other than that I think– I mean it’s the same optimization game that you are playing with Google search. Though you have to you know, you are constantly monitoring what’s going on every day and then I would recommend, highly recommend actually reading “Advanced adwords’ with Brad Gets. He has a video training course too where you can just watch all the screen cast and he’s just basically going through how adwords or– then the Google display network works. I think he does the best explanation I have ever seen with Google display, because a lot of people think Google display is this really complicated beast. But if you just go through that you know it will take you probably a day or two to really get through it. You now watch it on two XP [phonetic] or whatever. I think you can be in a really good spot and you’ll understand how you know, what to do next.

Steve: And is the creative– when you are generating the creative in the landing page for the display network, is that going to be someone or something you would do with Facebook like send them to a landing page and try to gather an email, or do you send them over to a listing of products. What works better?

Eric: Yeah absolutely. I would definitely recommend sending them to something that you are looking to collect an email instead. I think what is merely missing with a lot of e-commerce firms that we see nowadays is the final thing I was talking about. You know really not just you know sending them promotional deals all the time. But actually you know putting more thought into it and saying hey, maybe we can have like a seven dollar product first and 29 dollar product while we have all this promotions later in between. And really try to add as much value as we can, I think that way you can generate a lot more backing revenue and you have something a lot more focused in terms of numbers.

Steve: Okay that’s good advice. So hey Eric switching gears a little bit. So the reason that I really wanted to talk to you is because I wanted to talk about You Tube advertising and from what I understand you utilize YouTube advertising really well when you were at Tree House, right.

Eric: That’s correct.

Steve: So can we just talk– so I’m sure a lot of people listening don’t even know how to create a You Tube campaign and all and what’s involved. So you can just give a brief intro and then I’ll just start asking you more specific questions.

Eric: Yeah, so YouTube has been really huge, I mean you know I’ll give you kind of a back story. When I was a VP in marketing there I earned a good healthy five figure amount. And you know looked like a total idiot the first month, but we started seeing traction. So I said hey guys just like so my job is pretty much on the line. So second and third month it really started to take off and since then it’s been their number one user acquisition channel. You know grew their annual revenue by you know a few million dollars and it took you know about eight months to do it. And I will say you know– I’ll give you like you know as action as it gets here; with You Tube advertising it’s the in-stream ads that perform the best base on what we have seen.

Steve: So can you define the different types actually for everybody.

Eric: Yeah absolutely. So in-stream would be– in-stream is the five second you know, the five second video that you get to skip initially.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: Those are the ones that convert the best. Then you have in display as well. In-display is– in-display I believe is actually in the– it’s one of the sidebar ads that you see on the side. And then you also have in-search which is just like Google adwords or in You Tube you type something, you see like an ad that pops up. It’s almost as if it was like a search engine result page. So those are the main ones that are out there.

You could also do mid-row ads you know where if you are watching the [Inaudible] [00:27:38] or something you see like an ad pop in the middle of the video. You could also do, you could force a pre-row too where it’s like a you know a 30 day 60 second video where they cannot skip it you know some people do that as well. And then you could also have– there’s also you could have a call to action over lay which is just like if you are running an ad, you could have the little burner that pops up in the middle.

Steve: Right.

Eric: And then you can also have a companion burner which you know when your ad is running you can have a little box pop up like a 300 by 250 pop up on the right side. So those are kind of the ads that they have available right now.

Steve: Okay, so that’s a lot of choices. Okay so let’s talk about the ones that you recommend. So you mentioned the mid-stream one?

Eric: Yeah, so all I recommend really recommend is the in-stream ads if you are going to start out first. And if you want to– if you have some other budget you know you could try retargeting as well.

Steve: Okay, so let’s talk about what you did at Tree House then, so first of all what type of ad works? I mean in general to create video requires a lot more work than just a regular ad right.

Eric: That’s correct. Yeah so a lot of people– I mean the cool thing is the video is a barrier to entry. You can’t produce crap out there. So you know there are a lot of different video vendors out there that won’t like you know they won’t cost an arm in a lake. And I’ll tell you right now you know what we’ve seen with videos is that we’ve tried the animated videos, we’ve tried the more apple type videos as well. You know we have also tried the “hot girl” type videos. We really tested it out. So what we found is the interview/apple types of videos tend to convert the best where you know you have a white background, you have the guy talking, and it’s just like a motivational video almost. Granted this is not going to work for everyone. I mean if you sell plungers its not– it’s probably not going to work out for you.

You know I think that’s a– what we’ve seen from most of our clients is that the interview ads you know tend to work really well and those don’t cost too much money to make either. So if you do need a list of vendors I’m happy to provide them you know we work with a few video partners ourselves.

Steve: Cool so let’s talk about– since you know you did this for Tree House, so what does Tree House do again? They do online education.

Eric: Yeah so what they do is they teach people how to do coding and web design online. You know there are like a monthly subscription service.

Steve: Okay, and so what were some of the things that you tried and what worked and what didn’t. So you mentioned the interview base, so is that just some dude sitting on a stool answering questions about Tree House or?

Eric: Yeah so the audience can also Google this if they want and they can type in a Tree House video ad, and what you’ll see is, you’ll see the CEO talking about how you know education is changing and you know how you know someone that signed up ended up getting a job, or ended up paying off his mortgage after he made like iPhone app. So it’s things like and yeah, I mean pretty much if they just search for a Tree House video ad, they’re going to see that stuff.

Steve: Okay yeah I’ll definitely link up one of those. So what does it take– so first of all how is the billing work, you mentioned they are quite cheap, so what is inexpensive in your eyes?

Eric: Yeah so you know they– you too would try view per view and what we’ve seen is the views can go as low as two cents all the way up to like 15 cents. You know also if you are targeting international, like in Asia you know you could get super cheap views. And what we’ve seen is even though the, you know overall like your conversions divided by your number of views is terrible, what we see is people actually click through your website and convert you know the CPAs that you are getting are actually you know very acceptable. So I’ll tell you the cost for acquisition numbers that we are getting you know range anywhere from you know all the way down from five dollars and you know can go you know up, and it’s a super skill we’ll channel once you have it working for you and it took about two to three months to get it working for us.

Steve: Okay so what, you were paying five dollars per– is that a low end or is that on a…

Eric: Five dollars is on the low end. We were paying a little higher than that when I was at Tree House.

Steve: Okay and how do you target people on You Tube?

Eric: Yeah, so the good thing is if you understand Google display you are going to understand how to target on You Tube ads as well. The one thing I will point out is that if you– and you probably want to link to Noah Kagan’s article on– the one I wrote about You Tube advertising really pretty much getting started with it.

Steve: Okay

Eric: It’ll tell you really there’s one thing that was burning a lot of our cash, but once we changed the setting, it pretty much made it easy for us to– a lot easier for us to you know target the people that we wanted to target.

Steve: What was the setting Eric. Don’t make me read the article.

Eric: Yeah so the setting– I mean basically you have, you have to set your bidding for you know you are going to have options for like in-stream, in-display and things like that. What you have to do is you have to set your bidding for like — let’s say I want to target in-stream ads more.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: Then I would set my bidding a little higher for that and then set my bidding a little lower for in display. And you know once I change the setting because I had you know– I’ll just give you an example here. Let’s say I was trying to bid you know 15 cents per view, what happens is Google by default will say hey you’ve to bid 15 cents across the board for all these different ad formats.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: Which is not a good thing, because you want to get more impressions for in-stream because you know that converts well. So you bid you know a little like 15 cents for in-stream, but you bid less for the other add formats like in-display. And that way you could get a lot more impressions for in-stream and that was kind of the game changer for us.

Steve: Okay, and so that implies that you can’t turn off everything else. You have to do all or nothing.

Eric: Yeah.

Steve: Okay, great so do you have any e-commerce clients that you run You Tube ads for?

Eric: Yeah so– yeah there has been a few e-commerce clients actually that we have running You Tube ads for.

Steve: And can you just kind of– are you allowed to talk about them at all or?

Eric: Unfortunately they don’t want us to– it’s been working out so well for them so.

Steve: Well, okay so maybe you can talk in more broad terms, so what– has it been a question and answer format as well for the video?

Eric: Yeah so for the– okay in– that’s a really good question and I think for your audience because they are mostly e-commerce. I think– you know what we’ve seen is a lot of the product we are targeting. So let’s say you visited a page and it’s like a high value product you know they actually, you know we actually got one of our clients to make videos for those products and they actually got retargeted and they ended up converting really well. And then a lot of our clients would use general like you know come back to our site or like general just, “hey you know we sell this type of stuff just as– more like a branding thing and you know we’ve seen– because it’s a branding thing we’ve seen a good amount of views through conversions from it. Not allowed direct conversions, but you know they are like hey let’s keep rolling with this. So we are like okay.

Steve: Hey, so let’s talk about that actually real quick. So when it comes to branding what are some ways that you can measure that your branding campaign is actually working?

Eric: What I look at when we are running branding campaigns through Google display network, we are really looking at– we are looking at the clip through rate, we are looking at the engagement rate. You know is this really– are people really resonating with it. Are they really getting interested? and we are also looking at the, obviously you know we are going to get more impression share we have a good clip through right so we are looking at the impression shares as well. Those are kind of the few things that we do look at. And then obviously if we are getting some view through conversions you know great. Direct conversions we don’t really look at as much when it comes to a branding campaign.

Steve: I see, so views through conversions. So what’s ironic about this is you mentioned like the retargeting guys you know look at views through a conversions, but then here for branding purposes you are using that as one of your metrics for success.

Eric: Exactly.

Steve: Okay, so let’s go back to that original example where you’re just starting out and we just talked about a bunch of stuff right, we talked about Facebook, GDN; we talked about You Tube advertising how would you start?

Eric: Yes so with You Tube advertising…

Steve: So let’s say you have– you said you need five grand to start right?

Eric: Yeah.

Steve: Was that for just one channel or for all of them?

Eric: Yeah.

Steve: Like what would be your budget?

Eric: So 5k would be really big for one channel and when it comes to You Tube advertising we recommending at least 10 to 15k to start with you know obviously the more the better. And then if you have video resources great. But typically we can see a video, you know they start anywhere from 3,000 dollars it can range all the way up to 100,000 dollars depending on what you are looking for. Three thousand you are talking more like an animated type of video. And then you know probably the 10,000 dollar range you know you can talk about adding you know having you know professionals come and shoot it for you, have a more professionally done commercial.

So you know there’s that cost you know it’s called a sum cost first, and then after that if we are talking pure ad budget you know still 10 to 15 k to go with, because what is going to happen is you are going to go through a lot of different views and a lot of stuff isn’t going to work. A lot of targeting– a lot of the targeting campaigns that you make that you think are going to work well are probably going to suck. So it’s really about patience and I think a lot of the reasons why other companies aren’t really like jumping on You Tube yet exactly because of this.

There’s– first of all there’s a barrier to entry. There’s not a lot of validation for it yet either. And then it takes a lot of time too. So it’s like when people started investing in SEO in the first place, it’s like God why does this take so long? You know people just can’t wait, it’s human nature. So you know as long as you have a little patience, you know you set aside this budget and you are like I’m okay with loosing this you know I think you are going to find something that works and you can go all in on it.

Steve: Okay so what I’m hearing from you is You Tube is probably not the best thing to try when you are first starting out, right? Because when people are just starting out they want to see kind of instant returns, right.

Eric: Yeah exactly.

Steve: So You Tube is kind of more like a long term play, you invest some money in to it, you try to gradually figure out what’s working and what’s not and once you strike the gold, then you can just go all in on that particular platform.

Eric: Yeah, I think maybe you know perhaps a good place to start is saying hey if you are doing more than 1.5 million a year in revenue and you have some budget to spend, yeah you know let’s give You Tube a shot. I think you put it perfectly it’s not for when you are first starting out for sure, if you are going to burn a lot of money doing it. It’s more like when you have traction.

Steve: Okay, and then in terms of Facebook, that’s definitely still something that you can just start out doing right.

Eric: Yeah, I think if there’s demand already– you know Google search obviously and then also you know Facebook is a great place to start too because it’s not super expensive depending on what CPA you are aiming for.

Steve: Okay I want to talk briefly about Tweeter. Do you have any experience with Tweeter advertising?

Eric: Yeah so what we’ve seen– I mean we’ve had limited testing with Tweeter, I will say that Tweeter cards are actually really interesting if you are trying to collect more emails from it. if you have a good Tweeter following, I would recommend, make a little design for the Tweeter card and then you know just sending out a few tweets saying hey if you guys want a lot more product updates you know or like coupons or whatever, go ahead and tweet it out and you’re actually going to get these email subscribers and you don’t have to spend like money. And if you do see that working out well you know you can start to run a campaign for it.

I will say Tweeter– the options that you have are very similar to Facebook. They have video advertising coming out. They have the targeting, you could target very specific groups of people which is– for me specifically you know if– because I run a blog where you know I’m really targeting tech entrepreneurs and tech people. I can target those people through Tweeter, which is– it’s really good for me because I know a lot of tech people use Tweeter. Yeah so it’s still fairly new. Some people have said– I have talked to some people and they said Tweeter ads are actually working out really well for them in terms of collecting emails. I haven’t heard a lot about the e-commerce side of things yet, so this is more of a testament to hey you know, start thinking about building a funnel.

Steve: Yeah so quick question while on Tweeter. If you go into a little bit depth– now I had just kind of read recently that you could have a Tweeter card and then someone would just tweet out their email and they would be instantly added to their list. Can you kind of talk about how that works?

Eric: Yeah so actually I don’t have direct experience with that part yet, so unfortunately yeah.

Steve: That’s okay. Okay, but your company as a whole has kind of run Tweeter campaigns for certain companies right.

Eric: That’s correct.

Steve: Okay and so in terms of just the whole legion, it sounds like it’s more ideal for some sort of info based product where you have a nice, or anything where you have a nice email funnel. Tweeter advertising seems to be working for your clients.

Eric: Correct.

Steve: Is that kind of accurate? Okay cool man, I feel like I have just been grilling you for the last 40 minutes.

Eric: It’s okay, that’s good.

Steve: I appreciate your patience and your willingness to reveal some of your strategies, so can we just take a little bit of time and talk about growth everywhere and what that’s all about.

Eric: Yeah absolutely so growth everywhere you know coming from the– after I was exposed to the start up world I was like wow, you know and here’s so much that I’ve learned. And there’s so many experiences I want to share with people because you know there’s– the one thing that kills most people and I actually interviewed someone that wrote this book. His book is called Traction. The one thing that kills most companies isn’t like a bad product its traction right. And a lot of people don’t understand how to get traction. So you know we talk a lot about marketing, we talk a lot about personal growth as well, we talk a lot about productivity because all of these things actually kind of go hand in hand.

So you know I brought in a lot of you know a lot of great guests and we just talk about how they’ve grown their businesses, the struggles they faced you know, what advice to give to their 25 year old selves. And you know there’s people that have joined us that have been like you know mossy or run fiction. One guy that sold his company for a billion dollars, there’s another guy that sold Ecko sign to a Dobie for you know a couple of hundred million. So there’s a lot of really qualified people that can provide actionable piece of advice.

There’s actually a former sales force director that pretty much you watch our interview and he’s like hey this is how you start building a sales team. Here’s the logic behind it, you know here’s the cost, here’s what you should be doing. It’s very actionable and I was like hey you know I’m going to give this stuff away for free. You know give back to the– kind of give back to the community and you know it’s been growing ever since. It’s been less than a year actually. It started in November of 2013.

Steve: Hey so you say you’ve interviewed a bunch of successful entrepreneurs as well, so if you could pick out one common trait that you’ve kind of noticed through interviewing all those people, what would that be?

Eric: Yeah I’m sure you are going to hear this all the time, it’s pretty much you know you– one common trait is that they are never going to give up, right. Like they are always going to– you know when you are first starting out especially you know the one question I always ask is like how did you get your first 100 or 1000 customers and they say hey, you know hand to hand combat. You have got to be willing to suck it up you know.

Every– you know I have had seven entrepreneurs on the show recommend this book called, ‘The Hard Thing about Hard Things.’ And it’s by– it’s one of Andreessen Horowitz, founders of Ben Holowitz School. It’s part of NetScape. And you know he talks about this one chapter called the struggle, and I’m sure you face this too where sometimes you don’t know what food tastes like any more, you start to question yourself, you start to question your business. You know are you qualified enough to run this business, it’s just like you know shits really hitting the fan and you don’t know what to do. And every single entrepreneur on the show has experienced that and seven of– you know I always asked them at the end you know, what book do you recommend? Seven of them have recommended that book, and you know I couldn’t recommend it enough.

Steve: Wow, okay I’ll definitely– I haven’t read that one yet, but definitely I’ll have to check that out. So cool Eric. Hey I don’t want to take up too much of your time since we have all ready been talking for 40 minutes. If anyone has any questions for you about PPC or if there’s a company out there that’s looking for services, how can people reach out and contact you.

Eric: Yeah, my email is Eric@singlegrain.com and then our website is Single Grain. And you can also reach me on Tweeter, it’s Eric E-R-I-C ‘O’ as in orange S-I-U.

Steve: Awesome Eric well, thanks a lot for coming on the show. I had a really good time and I learned a lot.

Eric: Thanks so much Steve.

Steve: Alright man thanks. Eric really knows his stuff when it comes to internet advertising. And I’m glad that I have a go to guy to ask for all of my questions. Because there’s just so many nuances to paper click advertising that I have yet to master, and I look forward to giving You Tube ads a try in the near future. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode43. And once again I just wanted to thank 99designs for sponsoring this episode. I know a lot of you listening are waiting on the sidelines and trying to get the courage to start your own online business.

I also know that a lot of you out there run your own businesses already and know that your website design could be better. Now designing a website or a logo or a cover is not intimidating anymore thanks to 99designs, where you can get over 300,000 designers to compete for your design. All you have got to do is list your design on their website and within 48 hours you’ll get dozens of design submissions to choose from. And from there you can ask for slight tweaks and changes until you are 100% satisfied with the results. And the best part is that the price is very reasonable and that there’s 100% satisfaction guarantee.

Plus by using the 99design.com/mywifequit link, and tell them that Steve from mywifequitherjob.com referred you, your design listing will be bolded, highlighted and given a prominent background, featured before all regular listing so your request stands out among the rest. So head over to 99designs.com/mywifequit and get something designed right now.

Now finally if you enjoyed listening to this podcast, please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this info, find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from guests. It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now as an added incentive, I always give away free business consults every single month and for more information about this go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100 k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

042: How Jordan Guiterrez Started A Million Dollar Medical Equipment Business At Age 17

Jordan Gutierrez

When I was 17 years old, I was more worried about getting good grades and meeting girls than starting a business. But Jordan started Laleo.com at the young age of 17 and turned it into a 7 figure business.

What’s even more impressive is that Jordan is now the COO of Wishpond.com which is a very successful Internet marketing company that competes directly with businesses like LeadPages.

He’s a really sharp guy and there’s lots to be learned from both his attitude and his experiences. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Jordan guided customers from EBay back to his site in the beginning
  • How to compete against Amazon
  • How Jordan got people to buy books even after Google launched Google books
  • Jordan’s strategy for expanding word of mouth
  • Jordan’s Alibaba strategy
  • How to use gamification to grow a business
  • Jordan’s Facebook strategy
  • Jordan’s philosophy on going to college and working a day job versus starting a business

Sponsors

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I’ll have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consultations every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest, and if you are interested in starting our own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

Now before I begin, I just want to give a quick shout out to this episodes sponsor 99designs. Now originally I wasn’t going to take any sponsors at all, but 99designs caught my eye because I suck at design. And in fact when I first started my online store back in 2007, the design for my website was terrible and I had absolutely no idea who to turn to. Now fast forward to today, 99designs is a site where you can provide a description of anything that you want designed whether it be as logo, a web page, a t-shirt pretty much anything and have dozens of designers compete to deliver you the best design possible. And by best I mean that you get to choose your favorite design among dozens of submissions from a pool of over 315,000 designers. So if you are design challenged like I am, I highly recommend that you go over to 99designs.com/mywifequit.

And if you use that link and tell them that Steve from mywifequitherjob.com referred you, your design listing will be bolded, highlighted, given a prominent back ground, and featured before all regular listings so that your request stands out among all of the designers. And in fact this special offer is worth 99 dollars. So if you need a logo, website, t-shirt, business card or anything designed, go to www.99designs.com/mywifequit. Now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today we are going to be talking to Jordan Gutierrez who is one of the younger entrepreneurs that I’ve actually ever heard on the show. Now Jordan started his business at the age of 17 that grew into a million dollar plus business. Now Jordan exports medical books and supplies throughout Mexico and other parts of Latin America. His company is called Laleo.com and is the Amazon.com for medical equipment in Latin America, and in fact his path has a lot of parallels to the way Amazon.com got started. And today his company is the largest distributor for medical books and medical equipment in Latin America.

Now what’s cool about Jordan is that he ran this company while still being a full time student, and today actually he is the COO of Wishpond.com which helps customers create high converting landing pages, contests and promotions, and you know Jordan`s really got an interesting story because I know when I was 17 I was more worried about girls and getting into college than starting a business, but Jordan is clearly a special guy and with that welcome to the show Jordan. How are you doing today man?

Jordan: Good. I`m good how are you?

Steve: Good, I`m doing really good. So, let`s talk about Laleo.com first you know, how did you come up with this idea and what exactly do you sell?

Jordan: Well, everything started back in 2007. I was 17 at the time, I actually went back to– I moved to Canada when I was 15, so every summer, every break I would go back to Mexico and just try to do something. I was three or four years old, I always got involved in businesses. My first business was– I start selling candies to my friends and then I actually hire my friends to sell candies for me. And then they actually got together and because I was paying them like nothing like two cents per hour, or something like that, they asked for a raise so I have to fire them.

So even since I was like three years old, I have had to be able to strikes and unions and you know fighting with your friends you know. At the end everything ended up really well because, they forgave me and you know they are still my friends, but I’ve always been interested in business and you know making money. Since the moment I moved to Canada I always wanted to do, you know online business because in a way it was the only job I was allowed to do when I was in Canada.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: So, I tried a lot of things; affiliate markets, selling stuff on eBay. I`m actually a You Tube partner; I teach chess on You Tube and I get like $5 everyday or something like that.

Steve: I`m sorry you pitch what?

Jordan: I teach chess.

Steve: Chess, okay got it. Okay.

Jordan: So I just show you how to play chess and I– good moves and stuff like that. So I try everything and in that specific day I was in Mexico. It was summer and I bought a coffee machine, like a big coffee machine, and then I went to a sub way, I plugged the coffee machine into the public electricity and start selling coffee in the streets. Just you know it was kind of weird because, you wouldn’t see that in the states or Canada, but in Mexico you are just like you know right now it makes sense.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: And then I was selling coffee and I noticed that I was in an area that was full of builders and they had a different accent, like they speak Spanish, but they have a different accents from different cities. And I asked them why are you doing– what are you doing here? Why are you here? And they were saying that they would come all over Mexico just to get medical books and medical equipment and then they would go back to their home community. I was like why don’t you buy them online? This is 2007, so it wasn’t as easy to buy stuff online as now.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: And they were like– well there is no way to buy them online. There was something called MercadoLibre, which is Mexican eBay. So that’s the only thing around. I was like okay this is cool, so I actually exited my coffee business making and I sold my coffee machine for like 400 bucks. And with that money actually went to a book store and I bought a couple of books you know I asked for what are the most popular books. I bought them and I put them on eBay. You know to…

Steve: On the real eBay, or on the Mexican eBay?

Jordan: Mexican eBay like…

Steve: Okay got it. Okay.

Jordan: And I actually sold them relatively fast. So, I was like okay this is interesting, this is good business. I bought a couple of more books, I sold them online and I’m like this is cool. So then after that I decided to learn a little bit of html to actually create my own website.

Steve: Okay.

Steve: But, learning html and creating a full website ecommerce is a huge– is completely different, right?

Steve: Right, yeah.

Jordan: In 2007 to 2009 well yeah, the beginning of 2009 I was actually learning how to do everything, how to you know ship books, how to you know do the business. I was also a full time student. In 2009, I actually hired a guy to create my website in osCommerce.

Steve: Okay yeah. That’s actually what I started out with yeah.

Jordan: Yeah, like osCommerce back then was huge. And that was the only you know, the only software that I actually knew back then. So I hired this guy who was a police officer, he decided that he didn’t want to be a police officer, so he started making websites.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: He didn’t know any coding like he just– he is always [inaudible 07:44] and then there you go.

Steve: Sure.

Jordan: So we got him. I set of the books. I start selling online. I`m sorry I didn’t start selling online; I just set up the website in 2008 and then just start building trust. So it’s like I start telling all my MercadoLibre and eBay customers that I was actually selling directly now. So I started sending them there, I start putting the prices. I start selling some eBooks– some books and little by little I start growing.

Steve: This is your eBay business?

Jordan: Yeah. The eBay business because now we had a website right?

Steve: Okay, right.

Jordan: So I started sending people to the website, when we started growing, I started doing a lot of online marketing. I started reinvesting all the money on adwords, then Facebook, you know all the social media, all the newsletters like optimize everything. I would literally go everyday to the website and look at the website, and just keep optimizing, keep optimizing, keep optimizing and then after a while it`s like it started getting real.

Steve: Let`s take a step back real quick actually. Let`s go into each one of those points. So, while you were selling on eBay, how you did actually get people back to your online store?

Jordan: Well I had to cheat, right?

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: Back then it was really– they didn’t want to give you information.

Steve: Right.

Jordan: Every the time I would ship a book I would put a, you know a label with the eBook. I would put actually the name of the bookstore and I would try to email them. Most of the email that I used was the name of my book store– sorry of the website. So it was like Libreleo.com.mx@gmail.com. So they would actually see the full domain. So– it was kind of like not in the– not the approved way to send the users from eBay, because they want them to keep– buying from eBay.

Steve: Sure.

Jordan: But you know a kind of a sneaky way.

Steve: Well actually because when you communicate over eBay, actually the email addresses don’t get shared at all right?

Jordan: Yeah, and also like Mexican eBay is worse, like they would hide. If you put numbers they would hide the numbers. So it`s kind of like– it was hard, but at the end of the day I find ways to actually do it. Like again when you ship the book…

Steve: Mm-huh.

Jordan: A lot of advertising and I would say, hey you know if you buy on eBay it’s like 700 dollars– sorry 70 dollars. If you buy it on my website it`s like 60 dollars, and so I start pushing people from eBay and you know the thing I didn’t like it about eBay is like, I was really-really careful with my reputation and then, I think one day it was something stupid. Like I sent an email and it went to spam and then I got a zero star review, and I was like crying and like I`m never going to sell on eBay again. So it`s like after that I just said, okay let’s do this and just I`m going to go full time on my website…

Steve: So you got one negative review and you decided not to sell on eBay again?

Jordan: Well not one negative review like, I was actually taking care of everything. Like okay everything has to be able to support. We have to have the best support ever. We have to be really-really-really 100% like extremely good at support. You see in a Facebook review you see like ranking is like 4.9, so it`s got like 99% positive reviews at the start. So we were like super-super crazy with support, and then like all of a sudden you get a negative review you go sound like really bad mistake or something. It`s like– I was like literally crying. I was like super obsessed with my website. And when I got a bad review, I was like it`s not possible like, it`s not possible.

Steve: I have been there before, but yeah go on.

Jordan: It`s really-really frustrating, so after that I was like no more eBay. Everything is going to be in our own environment with our own terms, and we have to optimize everything and just make it really really nice and easy for users to buy from us, right?

Steve: Okay, yeah.

Jordan: So after that it was like keep optimizing, when we get start getting sales, then keep trying, trying, trying…

Steve: So how did you get your early sales actually, was that– was it from adwords?

Jordan: We started getting– you know we have a small user base report from Mexican eBay.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: What we did is we started not sell– like we didn’t sell directly from the website at the start.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: At first we actually– you actually had to call us to place the order, right?

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: So that actually started building a little bit of more traction, more traction and we actually took– the website was up in 2008 I believe. It took us to 2009, like May 2009 to start selling. So during that time I was actually looking for ways to make money and to actually start getting traffic, right?

Steve: Mm-huh, okay.

Jordan: I really had no idea how to do it. I tried like a lot of things from buying traffic to start paying doctors to put our banner in their website…

Steve: What are some of the things that you tried and tell me whether they succeeded or failed?

Jordan: Facebook, Google ads back worked really-really well. Right now it’s getting super expensive and is not as profitable as before. One of the things we did is– there were a lot of websites that offer free eBooks– free eBooks, right?

Steve: Mm-huh.

Jordan: Those are like shady web sites right. So, what I actually did is actually talked to those guys and offered them some money if they put our banners there.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: So you know, we understood that piracy was going to be there forever. So like okay instead of trying to just defeat them and like send them nasty letters, let`s just work with them and you know hopefully people who go there, they go there because they don’t have access to the physical book. If we give them access, then they are going to start buying directly from us right? And we optimize a lot for SEO and the other thing that helped us a lot was Facebook.

Steve: Okay, how did you run your Facebook campaigns?

Jordan: Everything started in– we actually started doing ads in 2009– Facebook, but you know again back then it was huge. Nobody knew Facebook as a business, everybody knew Facebook as a user platform not as a business platform.

Steve: Okay

Jordan: The CPC was extremely cheap. One of the things we did is– what I see Facebook is if your community in the case of doctors, the community of doctors, right?

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: Your lifestyle is around doctors. If you are a doctor your friends are going to be doctors, the friends of your friends are going to be doctors, so everything is around medicine right.

Steve: Sure.

Jordan: There is one thing that keeps people together. So the idea is to find these people, these communities exist and bring them to it to the website. The one of the things we did is– you know from Facebook, is I send them to the website was really easy, we need to give them incentive. So for instance one of the things we did is you know Google eBooks– Google books, back then like my business partner was super scared because of Goggle books, he was like Goggle is already offering the books for free, we are going to be like completely screwed and it`s like…

Steve: Right.

Jordan: If Goggle is already offering the books for free that’s great for us, like let`s get the book and put it directly in our website. So every doctor would come and will actually read the product base and actually he has the entire Goggle books there.

Steve: So, I`m sorry, so you listed the Goggle books on your own website, is that what you did?

Jordan: Yeah.

Steve: Got it.

Jordan: Back then it was like why would you give them free eBook of the book you are trying to sell for hundreds of dollars on your website? But for me it’s like we actually want to bring everybody to our website, and then if you want to buy, then they are going to buy right. We even put a lot of publishers, small publishers to actually put their books on Google books because you know like we wanted all the traffic to go our website.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: So, that was the first one. The other one that we did is we worked really-really hard on targeting. Like our email subscription newsletter.

Steve: Okay, how did you run that, can you give us some more details on that?

Jordan: Yeah so when you subscribe, instead of saying hey you can actually– like all these things are kind of like standard right now. Back then was like impressive. One of the things we did is when you signed up for our website; we would ask you okay you want to subscribe to the newsletter.

Steve: Sure.

Jordan: And then when you subscribe, we would ask you what is your medical field of interest? So we had like 36 different medical fields of interest, right. So if you are pediatrician or a dentist or a general doctor or anesthesiologist or whatever you are, you would actually have your own news letter. And every time we have a book or a new cluster of new books or products related to medicine or anesthesiology or pediatrics or anything…

Steve: Mm-huh.

Jordan: We would send you an email. So the emails were like completely extremely tailored for you. So it`s kind of like if you– if study with [inaudible 15:53] you don’t care what a dentist reads right. So we actually try to be as specific as possible?

Steve: Okay, so how did you do that? Did you use an email provider or was this something home grown?

Jordan: Yeah we started doing– I tried to go there myself, but I couldn’t.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: When I had I used MailChimp.

Steve: MailChimp okay. So how did you segment everything, did you use the API or because the standard interphase is a little clunky, right?

Jordan: Yeah I just asked him, so it`s like [Inaudible] [00:16:17] and they say at first they would have to write like I don’t know, I`m a student but then at the end I just create a form and then they put their students and then I just exported the list to MailChimp, right.

Steve: Got it. I see, so as part of the sign up form that are pulled down, so then that’s how you segmented your list, is that…

Jordan: Yeah, yeah.

Steve: Okay got it. Okay.

Jordan: Little by little we sell like– download an Excel spreadsheet and just offload it to MailChimp and then– because they could type whatever they want; I have to actually clean all the database. So it`s kind of like a database of 500 people and I have to clean it.

Steve: Got it okay, I understand so you segmented it manually, so you created a different list then– okay got it, all right.

Jordan: Right now it’s a little different because we have engineers and everything. Everything is [inaudible 17:05] automation, right.

Steve: Mm-huh.

Jordan: So based on what you read, based on the books visit, then it’s like okay this guy is interested in these books and then we actually send emails automatically.

Steve: Okay and how do you send emails today, what platforms do you use today?

Jordan: We have our own platform.

Steve: Okay, its custom, home grown.

Jordan: Yeah.

Steve: Okay got it. How did you run you Facebook campaigns, I`m just a little curios?

Jordan: In the Facebook campaign the first thing we did is– I don’t know if you remember a company called Woot?

Steve: Woot, yes off course, they are still around I think.

Jordan: Yeah but they are not– back then they were like a little bit larger. Before we had like deal of the days we had this company that offer you one day, they would give you a really good price on one product. So what we did is we set up something called a special Thursday, so every Thursday we would have a price of a really popular book at our cost, like we would not make any money, like we would actually lose money on that product that day.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: And basically we would get all the emails and we would send a blast email and then on Facebook we would put adds everywhere on Facebook and a lot of ads on our normal website. So it’s like everywhere you are going to see this is special day. Like this product is like 40% off like it’s a price, like you need to buy it. And it is like super implosive; I’m based on going viral. So that’s like we use Facebook to attract people to actually see the special Thursday, and then people will start buying and start sharing like crazy.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: Like yeah. Usually we would– one example there is one book. Normally we would sell like 500 in one year. If we do it this way we would sell 100 in one day.

Steve: Okay. And then did you get their information because they purchased something or did you gather the emails and leads of the people that didn’t buy anything as well?

Jordan: Well mostly people who sign up right. Like even if they don’t buy it on that day we will actually– next time were going to have a larger list. Right, next time we’re going to have a larger list. The only thing that we started doing is we started, like again this is 2010, so people didn’t understand how this worked. We had on the special Thursday what we did with Facebook was, you click on the ad, we started putting Facebook ads and the ad would say hey this is special promotion that is like crazy, it’s only available for fans. And then you have to like to like it, right.

Steve: Oh yeah. They recently took that away right, I think it’s ending soon.

Jordan: They are going to take it away in like three months. But like back then and I wrote, like which one is going like based on like sweepstakes and stuff like that. Sweepstake for Facebook is a lot of that. Like you are going to enter the sweepstake you have to like us.

Steve: Right.

Jordan: I run back then normally, tabs on Facebook were used for starting and ligating and stuff like that, it wasn’t even HTML, it was Facebook marco. So it was like people were like impressed by that and you know we started growing our fans like crazy. You know back then, fans mattered way more than now.

Steve: Right, I guess.

Jordan: Most of the fans put senior posts right?

Steve: Right.

Jordan: So that was the first one. The other one that we did is we started doing a lot of things that were– again like a little bit cliché now, but like back then was like super crazy. Like a lot of viral things right. Like we would say okay during the welcome, first welcome, every time Mexico scores, we would give free shipping for the next four hours.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: One of the things we did is like okay Mexico wins the world cup, we’re going to give 50% of the entire you know the entire book store, for a week or something.

Steve: That’s pretty safe bet though, right.

Jordan: Well it was– we actually have to buy insurance for that one. Like…

Steve: Oh you did, okay.

Jordan: It’s like okay Mexico wins the world cup your company goes out of business so. You are like okay, it’s pretty safe bet, but like it’s better safe than sorry, right.

Steve: Sure.

Jordan: So you know things like that. We also have the– what’s the name of this, the fan of the week. So you go to a website or Facebook and you take a picture with a– we started selling like USBs, like doctor USBs. If you go to our website, to our fan page right now, you are going to see the header is going to be a USB of a doctor.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: So we started selling those, like people love them. And then we would say okay if you are the fan of the week, you take a picture of that doctor in a nice, you know in a nice picture, or like a nice setting or something and the picture that has the most votes is going to win like 50 bucks of which compray [phonetic] of leLaleo credit every week.

Steve: Okay. So in a way your strategy was kind of based on contests and promotions to kind of make the company go viral, is that essential.

Jordan: Not just on promotions, but the key here is because doctors are really a cluster segment. In like okay if you get one and you are one, then he’s going to tell all his friends. So he’s going to be– really-really-really flood the market. Right, like if you get in you are going to get the entire– all the doctors, all their friends and stuff like that.

Steve: Got it, got it.

Jordan: So our idea is not about contest. Yeah contest play a big part on it, but our main idea is like okay we need to impress them. We need to show them we have a super fast product, the best service, like a service that is never seen in Mexico before. Like Mexico is not a country that is you know, all it done the tourist destination is not like a country where service is super important but it’s like okay, there’s this company, this new company these days called Sapples [phonetic].

Steve: Yes.

Jordan: We need to copy everything they do. So you can’t like- I was also super obsessed with Sapple so the service, the customer’s service. Like it’s not new anymore, but like back then again it was going like oh Sapples. So we have to do like everything to make it like super fast. Like sometimes we just upgrade them for free, sometimes we put– you know upgrade the shipping cost for free. Sometimes we just put like free doctor stuff. Or like sometimes we say hey you know today is your birthday here free shipping, or like get some credit just today because of your birthday, happy birthday.

So more than contest it’s just to impress them, to make them feel like well this company, it’s amazing. Right, to start building a link, and once the link is built, it’s going to be really easy for them to go out and start telling their friends that we are great, right. Facebook allows– and Facebook and tweeter allows to actually do that you know. Another example we do is, we have the designers and our designers do is take hike raids [phonetic], timeline photos. Timeline images are amazing. And you know one of them is like you know not all super heroes need a costume right. And there is like a picture of a doctor, a superhero doctor.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: and we’re like hey guys do you want to put these as your timeline image? You know feel free to put it. A lot of people like a lot of people use that and put them as their profile picture. And the profile picture has the Laleo logo.

Steve: Got it. Okay.

Jordan: This time they like are getting really-really in touch, really-really built that, really link strongly with them. That was the main goal, my main goal.

Steve: Okay. So if we can take a step back, how did you actually source the products to be sold, like where did you get them from?

Jordan: Well at first I actually, I would– you know people would buy them, then I would buy it. Well I have someone in Mexico who would buy it for me and then ship it. By then leo-Laleo was still growing-growing-growing and there was a part that we would actually be like we have to find a buyer that will supply us with the books. So we find these books, so I say okay.

We have the technology like it was really– relatively all book stores they didn’t have websites or anything. So we actually partnered together and say okay, you are going to supply me the books and costs and I’m going to give you equity, and there were like sure. Like we already have no idea, we are not going to get into the online marketing or anything like that, so that’s fine. So we give you the books and cost, we ship them for you and then you know we are partners. And then at the end of the day they actually– we grew together a lot and we became one.

Steve: So this book store is in Mexico?

Jordan: Yeah, it’s in Mexico.

Steve: So where did they get the books from? Are these American books or are these…

Jordan: Well we have– you know the publishers are American, Spanish, Europeans. They actually buy them, like they were established, relatively established book stores, right.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: We could buy them directly to them from the source. And then– they are like drop shipping, right.

Steve: Yeah that was the model that you took right. So you partner with the book store, you handle the entire online component, and whenever you got an order you told the book store to ship it and then you guys gave them profit sharing or some sort of equity arrangement.

Jordan: Yeah.

Steve: Right, okay.

Jordan: But you know little by little we actually start merging more, so then we have the same offices and then we– right now we are the same.

Steve: Okay, so you merged together, got it.

Jordan: Yeah and it’s actually pretty good because you know there was a point that I need someone I could trust to be in Mexico. And if we have a partner– well if I had a partner in Mexico I could actually– all the bills there they could do it right.

Steve: Right.

Jordan: That would be just carry each other’s technology, marketing, no recharge. So like you know finding good books, finding new books, finding new products, finding all that other stuff right. The thing that I dint know about is books right. So like I didn’t know you know which is a good book, or which one is not going to sell and stuff like that.

Steve: Right.

Jordan: So I needed the help there. So I think having a partner that actually knows the product and you actually know the business side, it was a really good idea.

Steve: So is– with Amazon in the picture and other companies, how has that affected your company over the years. So you sell books as well as medical equipment is that correct.

Jordan: Boos, medical equipment then we have our own eBook platform, so we developed our own new platform.

Steve: Like a Kindle type of thing you mean, like a platform meaning?

Jordan: More like a bling flick. More like the eBook platform right.

Steve: Like a file format?

Jordan: Yeah file format and you can– it’s online all these, so you down load the eBook, it’s in your computer; it’s in your iPhone, it’s…

Steve: Okay right, but its encrypted in your own encryption format basically.

Jordan: Yeah, but it’s more for– it’s not for reading, because our books aren’t for doctor’s right. Everything is more about like studying and like– it’s more around– like if you read a novel, you just read a novel then you toss it away.

Steve: Right.

Jordan: It’s more consulting book. So it’s…

Steve: Like a reference book?

Jordan: Yeah it’s more as a reference platform than a normal platform.

Steve: So search is very important.

Jordan: Search is very important yeah. We have to index the entire book, we have to index our cluster books, so yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: So it’s actually important yeah.

Steve: Okay. So does Amazon offer these books as well?

Jordan: No.

Steve: They do not, okay.

Jordan: Well they offer the Kindle versions right, but this is more– it’s not about nature, it’s more about education, right, so it’s a little different. In case of Amazon, like we realize that the only way we can beat Amazon and all these big companies is if we actually– well right now we are like the– by far the larger distributor of medical books and medical equipment in Mexico. But it’s like you find a segment of the market that Amazon wouldn’t– won’t be able to compete. And then just focus 100% in that segment and then impress them. Like we want to make it really-really clear that we are the best option by far.

Like there’s– we love them, there’s a link with them, we stand behind them right. Like one of the examples is like, there was some political problem with doctors in Mexico. There were– you know they are like some case of negligence and stuff like that and you know, doctors were complaining and like fighting and stuff like that. So of course we have to stand behind the doctors and like completely be– you know be with them, and started supporting the course. You know they go to, you know to a protest we have to go to a protest, and like be 100% with them.

Steve: Got it.

Jordan: And like actually you are part of their life style right. Being a doctor means that you are actually going to buy books from Laleo and make a little bit from Laleo. It’s part of being a doctor. And at the same time we have to be part of the doctor’s community. So…

Steve: Okay, but in terms of just the product itself, your books have an advantage over the Amazon versions because your format allows for very quick searching of certain medical aspects that a doctor might want to look at, is that correct?

Jordan: Well the platform– platform wise we are more– again like Kindle is black and white, it’s more for reading novels and stuff like that. The platform allows you to highlight like more highlighting.

Steve: Got it, like for studying based features as well, okay.

Jordan: In the physical books we have way larger collection of books than anybody else, better price, yeah. Like you don’t– doctors don’t go to Amazon to buy medical equipment, they go directly to us.

Steve: So does that imply that you have to scan in all the books into your format before you listen.

Jordan: We actually get them directly from the source.

Steve: Okay, so they have– is your format proprietary?

Jordan: No.

Steve: It’s not okay, all right.

Jordan: It’s using a lot of open source.

Steve: Got it. Okay I understand now okay. So will this model work in the US then. Are you planning on expanding?

Jordan: The goal of our business is to provide medical professionals in the third world, access to technologies and tools only available in the first world right. So having said that, if we expand we would actually use the same model to Latin America and then to developing countries, right. We don’t want to expand it to Canada. Like Canada and the states in the very self, we’d rather actually– you know the beauty of what we offer is like we offer– we are a company that, I think we would be able to compete against any ecommerce in the states like in technology and innovation and all that other stuff.

But we are only focusing on the market that is completely neglected by everybody else, right. So our goal is to keep our sales in the you know developing countries and help those communities and help those doctors and give them tools. And the other day if you fix access to helker [phonetic] tools in the developing countries, you are going to make money right.

Steve: Right, okay. And then Amazon probably won’t even bother because the market is too small to begin with, is that accurate?

Jordan: The market is too small and then…

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: Yeah like I never– I really, honestly don’t care about the competitors, like yeah of course it’s good to have around you know to look at them, but everything is about your client.

Steve: Okay. And in terms of distance inventory, because you carry physical goods too. So how do you kind of manage, how much, how many books to actually carry and stuff. Do you guys have a warehouse?

Jordan: Yeah, right now we have a lot. Like yeah a big warehouse yeah.

Steve: Okay, and so the inventory management, all of that. Are you kind of actively involved in managing that, or how does it work? I’m just curious.

Jordan: The physical goods, that’s actually the partner I have in Mexico right. So down like the shipping part and the managing of the books, I don’t manage that.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: I actually– the only thing I’m actually involved is buying and selling stuff. I’m importing stuff from china and the states.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: There’s like special maker equipment or makers who we want to bring.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: From china and states, then I would have to do all the retail.

Steve: So can we just talk about that process briefly. So how do you find vendors in china?

Jordan: There’s a website called Alibaba.

Steve: Okay, so you use Alibaba, okay.

Jordan: Alibaba, and the states I just Google them. And you know.

Steve: And how has your luck been using Alibaba, so what is your strategy.

Jordan: Find a good price, ask for a small sample and then if the sample is good, you start buying more and then just build a long relationship.

Steve: Okay and do you ever go over there to visit or is it just all over Skype or email.

Jordan: Everything is Skype.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: Honestly it can turn out even dangerous, like– but again first you ask for a sample, you get the sample and then you start asking for more and more and then you start getting like large orders right. So if you do something it’s like okay it’s going to be really hard. Like it’s– I kind of like propose I make it a long sale cycle, so you know they just want to skawer [phonetic] or something, they just want something quick right. They would never bother to actually you know have a long sale cycle for like five…

Steve: Sure. I’m just curious, since you sell medical equipment; doesn’t that make things a lot more complicated?

Jordan: Yeah. The medical equipment part is like super-super hard to bring anywhere. You know shipping medical equipment to other countries is also really-really complex, you have to you know, follow different countries laws and like different countries– yeah it’s really complicated.

Steve: Okay, and then that’s kind of some of the things that you deal with.

Jordan: Yeah.

Steve: Do you have any stories where things went bad while you were trying to import.

Jordan: On the import side no, but like mostly the technology side, yeah.

Steve: Okay. Give me an example.

Jordan: I’m not a medical right, I have to code. So I remember when I was I school I went in for some drinks, I went back home. I started coding and there’s like I’m super tired, super drunk, so like okay finished coding, closed my computer and go to sleep. Like I’m sleeping and like 5a.m. I start getting calls. Now what do you want, calls-calls-calls. I see my phone is like ten you know missed calls and it’s like what do you want, it’s like well the entire website is down. What happened? It’s like; oh I go to my website and then like completely braking because of my code right.

Then like I finally actually realized that okay that is actually more important than just me trying to– you know it’s not a project. Like there’s a lot of people that depend on me, so I kind of like stop drinking and stop partying and like that day I got like way more mature for my age. Like I was like 20 or something that day. I said okay I should really focus on this.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: The other one is I was actually super efficient with my grades right. I wanted to get my GPA in Canada is from zero to 4.5.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: So I said I want to get three, which is kind of like decent, it’s kind of like 80%. So I did all the math and like okay this semester I need to get this-this-this. I was kind of like, it’s going to be perfect for a three. My last final exam, everything is set up, I just need to get like 70% on this exam and then you know everything is going to be fine. I’m going to be done with the school and like to focus on something else. So two days before the exam I was like okay, let’s just start preparing for the exam. I don’t want to focus on Laleo right now. And then all of a sudden I have a call. Like they call me from Mexico and they say, hey Jordan why do we have a picture of Shakira on the home page? And it’s like– you know Shakira, right.

Steve: Yeah of course, yes.

Jordan: I don’t have a picture of Shakira on the home page. And then I go to the website and there’s a picture of Shakira on the home page. And it’s not even my home page. Like someone actually got into the website, hacked the website and started redirecting all the traffic to a picture of Shakira.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: So I was like for the next day I just code and like try to find the problem. I had no idea what’s going on. I was like crying. I was yelling calling people like I’m super desperate. And then I finally fixed the bug, fixed the error like you now bash the product. And then the day of my exam I was like completely dead, I just like write the exam, you know hand it out and I failed the exam. So my GPA ended up being like 2.999.

Steve: Okay if we can just sag-way back to Leleo for a little bit. Today what are all the different traffic sources that come to your website and what are like the top three sources?

Jordan: Well kind of like every business, Facebook, Google, and SEO.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: As I mentioned before we actually have– we connect through either social media or doctors in Mexico.

Steve: Right, okay.

Jordan: And that’s also a good one, a good source of traffic.

Steve: So do you have your own Facebook group or is it just a fan page?

Jordan: Well we have our own fan page group that we actually coded, right. It’s a make sure I have Reddit it. It’s like education website. So I can give you the website. It’s AN…

Steve: You can tag– you can give it to me afterwards and I’ll just post a link to it. So you created a Reddit group as well?

Jordan: It’s not a Reddit. It’s kind of like a place where people just upload on medical cases.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: People discuss medical cases and if you upload a lot of medical cases you get points and stuff like that.

Steve: Okay, so this is like gamefication of your website.

Jordan: Gamefication of a permanent website, yeah.

Steve: Okay and this is all custom coded I would imagine right?

Jordan: Yeah. So basically again our idea is to actually get the medical community into a website and to use our product for free, and then if they are interested they can actually buy from us, right. One of the things we actually do is, and this is one — it plays a significance source of referral traffic. But it’s also pretty cool like the things that they do there– we have a case of a doctor that have a patient and they didn’t know what’s the problem with the patient, like the patient had a lot of little dots on his arm and he had no idea what was going on. And the reason and they actually found the reason through my website…

Steve: I see.

Jordan: Another doctor come and say okay the problem is he’s a farmer like the problem with being a farmer is you have to carry grains with your arm, right? He was actually carrying the grains with his arms and the pesticides were actually affecting his arm. He actually saved the– cured the doctor because of– cured the patient because of the…

Steve: So your site is also like kind of like a Web MD type thing then.

Jordan: It’s a little more informal because it’s for you know…

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: Doctors giving– it’s a little less informal.

Steve: Sure, sure, right.

Jordan: It’s not a patient asking for a doctor opinion; it’s more like community of doctors just talking to each other…

Steve: Like a forum kind of, right?

Jordan: Yeah like a forum yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: Like a forum based on you know usually the algorithm for body…

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: And the questions that’s really popular is going to go up, then you can actually send private messages and like you get points if you are– you know you can follow people, you get points if you responded.

Steve: Got it.

Jordan: One actually tried to do it best and you know answer the questions like it’s kind of like educational website or doctor.

Steve: So at what point in the lifestyle– life cycle of your store can you actually pull something like this off, right? So for example in order to create a forum of some sort you need to have the traffic to back it up, right.

Jordan: We didn’t have the traffic, we actually used– for that one to get that up, we actually used Facebook.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: We didn’t our traffic, so we didn’t use– well again back then it was super impressive, 2011.

Steve: It’s still pretty impressive Jordan come on.

Jordan: Well, it’s not you know, it’s not like right now let’s say we have 100,000 likes on Facebook and it’s gone yeah, okay that’s good but it’s not like wow. Like back then I remember in 2009 we have like 15000 plants and people were like that’s crazy, like that’s insane.

Steve: In the doctor community 100,000 likes is still a lot right? Because the doctor…

Jordan: You know you can– it’s not that hard to see how a website has you know 15,000 likes anymore.

Steve: Sure.

Jordan: So it’s good, but not that good but like we did in 2011 is we fully integrated with Facebook, right?

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: So, if you wanted to log in to product, then you have to connect to Facebook.

Steve: I see.

Jordan: And you know it goes to your feed and you can actually start sharing with Facebook and every time you put a question, they would actually share in your wall, and then every time you get a reward you would share on your wall. And then we started doing a lot of advertising on Facebook. So the way we would advertise on Facebook is we put the question and then if you want to answer the question then you have to go to the website. And people– there are ads that we actually run that are not sales heap, but they are actually based on engagement and you know engaging. And during engaging they actually do much better than Google ads, right? What I see the difference with Facebook and Google ads is like Google ads is you have the intend, you want something, like just sell me something.

Steve: Right.

Jordan: Facebook what you do is like an introduction through your products. So it’s kind of “hey guys, check this out this is cool,” and you don’t try to sell them anything, you just put it there and then they see you, they see your brand, they see what you’re doing, they see what you represent and then they’re going to go back and buy. So basically what we notice is the revenue from Facebook wasn’t that strong.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: But what Facebook did was, when we used to run a lot of ads from Facebook, the searches on Google for our website would increase.

Steve: Interesting so was there was this just a co-relation or did you have evidence?

Jordan: Yeah yeah, there was very strong co-relation, right?

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: Basically what happened is like people who see you there, they would play with you, they would go through websites you know check you out and then you would go on Google then search for you.

Steve: I see, so did you try to grab their email address at all with your Facebook ads, or was it purely informational?

Jordan: We actually try to get them to sign up right? Because of the nature of the business right now, you know I would really encourage people to enter the email address, but because it’s an e-commerce, and then really specialized ecommerce, we need way more information than email address, right? We would need to ask for the– the email address by its own is useless because we actually need to know who you are, what products you want.

Steve: Right right, okay for you yes. Okay.

Jordan: But if I wasn’t more general, I would totally use that Facebook, I would totally go for the email. We actually tried to implement the log in and sign up with email only, and then based on what you search, we will actually create a profile, but that’s still in the making.

Steve: Okay and one other question that I had for you which is kind of unique to you. I get this question a lot on my blog, and the question is what advice would you give for young people? What’s your take on going to college versus taking a year off and starting a business?

Jordan: It really depends, like if you get a job like if you go to college there’s two ways you can actually do it. If you study something that is going to get you a job then you are going to end up with a job and that’s about it, right? Maybe you should go to college if you want to study like to become an accountant or something that, go university get a degree and then get a normal job. But you actually want to go into entrepreneurship a job– education like college education is not going to help you that much. Like if you’re going to go into entrepreneurship and you still want to go to college, go and do something that you enjoy doing rather than you know something that is going to get you a job. Like the moment you get a job that is like nice and high paying and you know professional is the moment you’re going to kill then entrepreneurship spirit.

Steve: Okay I would tend to agree yeah okay. So you’re basically saying that if you really want to start a business and you want to go to college you pick a major that you really want to study as opposed to picking a major that is just for the purpose of finding a high paying job?

Jordan: Yeah.

Steve: Is that accurate? Okay

Jordan: Computer science is always good.

Steve: Yes computer science is always very good.

Jordan: Yeah but like the only thing is like the cool thing– well probably the bad thing of starting like something that is not going to get you a job is that after you get your degree you won’t get a job, right?

Steve: Yes.

Jordan: So you’re going to like force yourself to actually go on you know become an entrepreneur or get a really crappy job, so you better– you’re like super motivated and you start a business or you just end up on star bucks, right?

Steve: Yes.

Jordan: So you know one of the main problems I have which well honestly I don’t think is a problem, but I’m not employable unless you actually employ me kind of like a start up that is moving really first and is doing everything, you won’t be able to get a job, right. Like I’m an entrepreneur, I know how to code, I have a label that is kind of like I know how to really code but I wouldn’t get a job as an engineer.

Steve: Sure.

Jordan: Same with design, probably marketing I’m a little bit better, but you know basically as an entrepreneur you have to know everything about everything, right?

Steve: Right, jack of all trades.

Jordan: Yeah, yeah you have to know it as a level that is well my threshold is say okay, you have to know everything about everything and you can actually know who’s good and who’s bad you know at that.

Steve: Right, yes I agree with that, okay. And so you mentioned that you are an entrepreneur, so how did you end up at Wish pond as the COO.

Jordan: Well, I told you I needed to get a job.

Steve: But the listeners did not hear that story, so…

Jordan: Oh yeah. So basically I finished my degree in economics and then I actually in Canada and the main problem was I needed to get a job to stay in Canada. So I had like a lot of awards, I won to Canadian grove throughout the year and you know a bunch of rewards, but then I have to get a job in Canada. So that was like [inaudible 00:44:46] I was like applying for like really crappy jobs in Star bucks, and like stuff like that that actually you know just have a job and say that I’m working and I could stay in Canada.

But then I went to this company that I have an interview, a chat with the CEO and she actually just hired me on the spot, because I was like super driven and super excited, and like I was showing him all the stuff that I did from the website and all these that I did for my company, and you know he hired me and I was really clear and say you know his name is Ali. You know Ali I’m probably going to spend 70% of my time on my website and 30% of my time you know on the job. And so yeey sure whatever, and then he like little by little in a sneaky way he started like pushing me, pushing me and then like from 37 it went up to like 35% on Wish pond and 75 on Laleo and then like 60-40 and then 50-50 and right now most of my time is on Wish pond.

Steve: Okay, but Laleo is still doing very well, right?

Jordan: yeah, yeah it still but it doesn’t grow as first as the startup anymore.

Steve: Sure.

Jordan: We’ve got you know wish upon growth is you know 20% month over month. Laleo is kind of like [Inaudible] [00:45:57] now is like 12% yearly, so it’s like Marco. Marco itself is like a normal business kind of growth.

Steve: Right.

Jordan: But still, it’s pretty solid right now.

Steve: Yeah okay cool, so any advice for would be entrepreneurs out there who want to just actually sell goods online?

Jordan: Don’t raise money.

Steve: That’s what this podcast is all about, not raising money.

Jordan: Yeah raising money is– find partners you know try to star gain profit, but yeah don’t raise money. The most important thing that for some reason businesses and technology companies tend to forget is that profit is important; it’s really really-really-really weird that people think that you don’t need to be profitable to actually be successful. A lot of people go with the Instagram model, like yeah you know we can become the next Facebook, the next school, we shouldn’t worry about money, we just have to grow a real base. For me that’s kind of like betting, right like you are actually not building a business, you’re putting everything on the rent…

Steve: Sure.

Jordan: One bet, right? Like even if you actually make it, it’s going to be based on luck right? My suggestion is you shouldn’t try to aim for a business that is going to make you know a million dollar business like 100,000 dollar business. And then once you get there, once you’re profitable, what you should do is just get profit, invest everything on the money and the scale, and then more profit scale-scale-scale-scale, right? So you shouldn’t try to scale a product that is not even highly value based right? Be profitable first and then expand, pretty simple, but you know in this crazy world people seem to forget you need profit.

Steve: Yeah, and based on your story you kind of validated your product earlier on eBay, right?

Jordan: Yeah and I didn’t know what MBP was back then, but yeah I did a lot of MBps. I’m like oh this makes money, it’s like sure just do it. And I never thought, oh let’s bring all the doctors here and let’s give them free– I don’t know, free stethoscopes, and then hopefully one day they will find a way to make money out of them no-no-no. It’s like since day one we were actually making money.

Steve: And so today let’s say you want to sell another product, what would be some avenues where you would try to validate your product?

Jordan: I would create a landing page.

Steve: Using Wish pond?

Jordan: Using Wish pond? I mean the cool thing about businesses right now is that it’s really cheap to start a business, right?

Steve: Aha.

Jordan: If you want to start an ecommerce back then I would have to hire someone to do it. I would’ve spent like even in Mexico standards, it was like $800 which is like a little money, maybe US would be way more, but right now you can just go to like I don’t know what platform you usually use like [inaudible 00:48:38].

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: I would probably use Shopify and just you know set up a test business for $19 a month, see if the market is there, spend like two three 400 dollars to see whether there is some sales based on interest and…

Steve: What would you do, would you drive traffic with adwords, Facebook, what would you do?

Jordan: I would try to do a lot of things like a little bit of adwords, a little bit of Facebook. I would try to write a quick eBook and do some market automation to see where they come back, look at Reddix [phonetic], look at monetization all that stuff. At the end of the day I think it’s more– it’s kind of like a mixture of a blessing and a curse. They’re sometimes driven and sometimes they’re blindly driven, so if a product is not working don’t say “oh maybe it’s not working,” because of you know you spend over $100 and you have no sales, no traction, no nothing. Maybe try to get another one like there is no shame of failing, you try something it doesn’t work, I don’t think there’s a problem, you move on and you keep trying, right?

Steve: Sure.

Jordan: It doesn’t work okay, it doesn’t matter, I’m going to try to keep pushing it, I keep pushing it and still it doesn’t work, and keep pushing it and put more money on it and then like just slippery slope. Just find something, spend a little time and do sort of promising, try to be impartial and just keep doing it, right? Don’t get like– it’s not very– you shouldn’t be a scared of like making mistakes and taking the wrong decisions and make wrong businesses, right?

Steve: Sure.

Jordan: The problem is like when you make a mistake and you don’t want to admit it and use want to keep pushing, that’s when you’re going to have a lot of issues.

Steve: Okay and so in terms of your own personal limit, how do you know when to stop?

Jordan: Well I told you before Laleo I had like a lot of different small businesses, and most of them failed. And you know I actually learnt a lot about them, like I have a gaming website like flash games and make like 50 cents a day, I spend a lot of money on that, well a lot of money as a 17 year old kid, right?

Steve: Sure.

Jordan: Like $200 or $300, I felt like okay no shame; I actually learnt how to code with that. I also have a website if you visit Mexico City we would actually give you like a personalized tour for you– super cheap for like $100 or something like that. You put some money on it, make some money without adsence– again it didn’t work. I bought a lot of his clips from eBay just you know You Tube website, affiliate marketing, pyramid schemes like everything, right?

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: Like try for a few months if it doesn’t work, then okay whatever. I didn’t even say oh I feel like it just it doesn’t work, same thing at Wish pond, right? Like when we started Wish pond we went like a local search product, so we have an app that you can search for an iPad, and it will tell you where you can buy an iPad around you.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: Which kind of it was a little backwards because everything is moving online, and we say oh no-no you can actually do it, you should actually search on your phone go buy an iPad instead of buying a normal phone. So it’s kind of a little backwards, so it’s kind of like we quickly decided that that doesn’t work and we moved. Then Facebook stores, Facebook stores are like super lame, and people don’t buy on Facebook and we just say okay this isn’t working, let’s move. And you know keep moving, keep moving, keep moving like there’s no shame and your recent approach doesn’t work. And then we actually did well with contest and just again this is good but like what else can we do? I mean contests are like super strong, but like we keep trying, keep trying, keep trying and I think we actually have problem that is bidding a lot of value to a lot of users right?

Steve: Absolutely.

Jordan: That’s when you say okay, let’s keep pushing here, say with Laleo, when I started selling books and started making money and you know started diversifying and people liking and like there is some connection and people kind of like we love what you are and you are changing something, it’s like okay maybe there is something here and I should actually put more time and effort here, right?

Steve: Right.

Jordan: It’s really obvious, like you actually see it when it happens.

Steve: Okay.

Jordan: Yeah I think my biggest advice is if you fail just drop it, don’t be scared of failing just be scared of failing and not admitting that you failed, like just keep trying to do something if it doesn’t work.

Steve: Okay, hey Jordan I want to be respectful of your time here, we’ve already been talking for quite a while. If any of the listeners out there want to get a hold of you or ask you some questions, where can they find you?

Jordan: Well my Twitter handle is Jordantk; you can make a follow me there.

Steve: Okay, great all right Jordan, well thanks a lot for your time. I learned a lot and I still find it really amazing that you started all this at age 17, so thanks for coming on the show.

Jordan: No problem.

Steve: All right take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode, guys like Jordan really make me feel like a slacker to be quite frank. After all I didn’t start my online business until I was well into my 30’s and here is Jordan starting his at age 17. Now I find his story truly amazing and it’s incredible that he’s now the COO of an incredible internet marketing software company called Wish pond.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode42. Once again I just wanted to thank 99designs for sponsoring this episode, I know a lot of you listening are waiting on the sidelines and trying to get the courage to start your own online business. I also know a lot of you out there run your own business already and know that your website design could be better. Designing a website or a logo is not intimidating anymore thanks to 99 designs, where you can get over 300,000 designers to compete for your design. All you’ve got to do is list your project on their site and within 48 hours you’ll get dozens of design submissions to choose from and from there you can ask for slight tweaks and changes until you are a 100% satisfied with the results. And the best part is that the price is very reasonable and there’s a 100% satisfaction guarantee.

Plus by using the 99designs.com/mywifequit link and telling them that Steve from mywifequitherjob.com referred you, your design listing will be bolded, highlighted, and given a prominent background and featured before all regular listings so your request stands out among all of the designers. So head over to 99designs.com/mywifequit and get something designed right now. Finally if you enjoyed listening to this podcast please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. And as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

041: How To Make Money With Every Online Business Model Out There With Pat Flynn

Pat Flynn

I’ve known Pat Flynn for 4 years now and he continues to impress me everyday. He’s one of those guys who always has an open mind and is constantly trying out new business models to see if they work.

That is why I’m thrilled to have him on the show today to talk about all of his successful online business “experiments”. In just under an hour, we’ll cover almost everything from starting a niche site to affiliate marketing to writing software etc… You name it and we’ll pretty much cover it in this interview. Definitely a must listen!

BTW, in case you don’t know who Pat is, he runs the popular blog Smart Passive Income and he’s a huge Stanford fan. Make sure you check it out after the interview.

What You’ll Learn

  • How getting laid off from his day job forced him to create an online empire
  • A deep dive into the pros and cons of the various online business models
  • How to succeed in affiliate marketing
  • How to create niche sites effectively today
  • How to create your own software applications
  • The best way to create ebooks and ecourses
  • How podcasting changed Pat’s life forever

Sponsors

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of these podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and enter my podcast contest where I am giving away free one-on-one business consultations every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100,000 k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

Now before I begin, I just want to give a quick shout out to this episodes sponsor 99 designs. Now originally I wasn’t going to take on any sponsors at all, but 99 designs caught my eye because I suck at design. And in fact when I first started my online store back in 2007, the design for my website was terrible and I had absolutely no idea who to turn to. Now fast forward to today 99 designs is a site where you can provide a description of anything that you want designed whether it be a logo, a webpage, a t-shirt, pretty much anything and have dozens of designers compete to deliver you the best design possible. And by best I mean that you get to choose your favorite design among dozens of submissions from a pool of over 315,000 designers.

So if you are design challenged like I am, I highly recommend that you go over to 99designs.com/mywifequit and if you use that link and tell them that Steve from mywifequitherjob.com referred you, your design listing will be bolded, highlighted, given a prominent background, and featured before all regular listings so that your request stands out among all of the designers. And in fact this special offer is worth 99 dollars. So if you need a logo, website, t-shirt, business card, or anything designed go to www.99designs.com/mywifequit. Now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chiu.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have my buddy Pat Flynn on the show. Now if you don’t know who Pat Flynn is, you’ve probably been hiding under a rock. Either that or you went to Stanford and you don’t associate yourself with people that went to CAL. Now I know that for myself I tried my hardest to dislike Pat, but you know what the guy is just so damn likeable that I couldn’t help myself. Anyway Pat runs the popular blog, smartpassiveincome.com. And what’s interesting about Pat is that he’s done many different things when it comes to making money online.

Now last month he brought in almost 84,000 dollars from various sources such as affiliate marketing, iPhone apps, eBook sales software sales, and podcast, sponsorships, you name it and he’s done it. And I especially like about the guy, is that he is a family man. He is the proud father of two very cute kids and he’s actually got some great child care tips. Now did you know that if your child has the hiccups, all you have to do is take a piece of a napkin, lick it and then stick it on your child’s fore head. Yeah I didn’t know that either and I can’t wait to use that tip. Anyway pat is someone who I truly respect and we can all learn a whole lot from him so with that welcome to the show Pat.

Pat: Thank you for having me and go bears and the– you know I drank coffee right before this out of my CAL mug to just you know, celebrate this awesome moment. But no, like staying with you Steve like you know you being from Stanford, I was like ah ah, but you know I got to know you I think on last year and you are awesome. So you know colleges aside you know we are good friends, I’m happy to be here. Now the whole napkin thing people are probably like, what! What does that mean and…

Steve: It’s random.

Pat: Like quick story, when my son was born, you know we were at grandma’s house one time and grandma and grandpa were there and my son got the hiccups. And we were like “Oh it’s okay you know he has the– kids get the hiccups you know we read all about it, we heard from our friends.” And then grandpa was like “No, take a piece of napkin, wet it and put it on the fore head.” And we were like “what!” And then he did it, and then like after ten minutes he stopped hiccupping. And he’s like see it worked, and I’m like no he just stopped hiccupping.

And then the morph on his story was one time he got the hiccups again, so it’s like a month later. And then grandma put a napkin on his fore head and– because he was hiccupping. And he wouldn’t stop. He just kept going. And then grandpa comes down the stairs and he’s like. Well he said “what’s wrong?” “Keoni is hiccupping.” “You have it on wrong.” He moved it, seriously like a centimeter to the right and then he stopped hiccupping. We were like, man that’s just whatever. But you know they are old school Filipino traditional people and that’s kind of a big deal, and we let them have those little moments. So it’s kind of fun, but yeah I’m a family man at heart for sure, I know you are as well and happy to be here to talk about business with everybody.

Steve: Yeah you know, I know a lot of people in the audience probably know who you are already. But if you wouldn’t mind jus giving a very-very brief intro about how you got all started with the whole online thing, what your blog is all about, that would be awesome.

Pat: Yeah I mean I didn’t know that I was going to be here, like you know 10 years ago if you asked me what I was going to be doing, I would have say I would be a project manager at an architectural firm. I went to CAL and got a BA in architecture and things were going really well. I got a job coming out of college and it was probably my– it was like my dream job. Everything was going well, I was climbing the corporate ladder, I was the youngest person to be promoted to job captain in my firm. You know making decent salary at the time and then all of a sudden summer of 2008 comes along, and I get notice that I’m going to get laid off in a few months.

The economy was bad at that time and I just hoped that they would keep me because I was trying so hard, and I was doing a lot more things than I was asked of. But you know I got called into the office and told that I was going to get let go which was a really tough moment in my life. You know I had worked so hard, I went to school for five years and you know done all this stuff, dedicated and really committed to this industry and it was kicking me out.

Luckily, and what got me online was actually to help me pass an exam called the LEAD exam which stands for leadership and energy in environmental designs, a very niched exam that architects and designers and people in that industry take. I was having trouble passing that exam, so I created a website to help myself pass, so I could keep track of my notes and you know study my notes online while travelling, and also share with a couple of co-workers who were also studying for the exam. And so I passed before I got notice I was going to get laid off, then I got notice that I was getting laid off and then I discovered podcasts.

I listened to one podcast called ‘internet business mastery’ hosted by Jeremy and Jason. And on that show I heard one particular episode from a guy named Cornelius who was one of the guests who was talking about how he was making six figures a year teaching people how to pass the project management exam, the PM exam. And that’s when the light bulb went off for me and I said, hey I have this website that has helped a few of my co-workers and it’s helped me pass this exam. Maybe there is a way that I can turn this into a resource that can help people. May be there’s some way I could get paid for it too.

Well the first thing I did was I put a tool on the site, an analytical tool on the site to see how much traffic I was eventually going to get, or to see if there’s any at all and to my surprise there was literally thousands of people visiting that site every single day, and I had absolutely no idea. I still don’t even know how long it’s going for because I didn’t need an analytical tool before this point. And so I took a lot of action at that point. I ended up writing a study guide, an eBook and selling that on the site. I then launched an audio guide to go along with it. And I sort of became known as the quote expert in this space.

And even though I didn’t get 100% on the exam, and even though I didn’t consider myself an expert, I was considered an expert by everybody else out there who was studying because I had all this material on the site. And Google was pushing it up to the top of keywords that people were searching. So I launched my book in October of 2008, and this is again a study guide. An e-book completely all electronic including the delivery process was all automated. And that was something that I picked up from Tim Ferriss in “The 4 Hour Work Week.”. That first month I had made almost $8000, 7908.55 that I did and it looked big.

And that was just incredibly life changing. That was like three months worth– well you know three or four months worth of architecture income in just a month. And it was– the most incredible part about it was you know like I would wake up the next morning and there’d be sales. That was just so eye opening for me, that’s when I created smartpassiveincome.com. Just to– I just wanted to share with the world all the amazing stuff that has happened. All the stuff I discovered after getting laid off, so that people wouldn’t have to go through that sort of– so I could just share a thing and people could discover it before having to go you know through something like a lay off.

And ever since then, beginning October 2008 I’ve just been blogging and I started podcasting, I have a YouTube channel as well. Just showing as much information as I can to help people create a side income, quit their jobs, whatever it is they want to do online. I give them the sort of load down on how that happens in a very authentic, transparent way because I not only talk about what works, I talk a lot about what doesn’t work and I try everything. I sort of consider myself the crash test. I mean I’m in a very unique and blessed position to be able to try things out and report on how it works and how it doesn’t. And even if it doesn’t work, it’s always a good lesson and learning experience for everybody else who is following along.

And that’s why now, now I’m doing public speaking and getting on stage talking about this stuff. I’ve been approached by publishers and you know it’s just insane, the journey I’ve been on. I’m so-so blessed and thankful. And you know I found that the- you know if we’re going to be talking about business today the best business model I found in this sort of– I just stumbled upon the art by accident was just, give as much as you can and provide solutions for people who need it. And when you can do that, when you can serve your audience, I feel like your earnings are a byproduct of how well you do that.

Steve: Absolutely and were going to get into all of that and you know like I mentioned in your intro, you’ve tried a ton of different business ideas when it comes to making money online, and that’s actually something I really admire about you. You’ve got an open mind, you’re creative as hell, well you know for a cow guy and you take action. Now my audience is primarily composed of people who are kind of very interested in making money online. My personal specialty is ecommerce, blogging, and info products. And you have experience in just about everything else, so I think between the two of us we should have almost everything covered I would imagine.

Pat: I think so.

Steve: Yeah.

Pat: Yeah.

Steve: Yeah. So here’s what I thought we would do today. You know I often get asked what the best business model is in terms of making money. And that’s actually a very broad and far reaching statement, there’s a lot of primaries involved, but I think it would be very interesting to get your personal take in all the various business models today. So sound good?

Pat: Sounds good and you are right. That question is definitely you know far reaching. I mean what is best to you. I think what is best is going to be different for everybody, so that’s why it’s cool; we’re going to be talking about all these different things. For those of you listening you might be able to discover one that sort of fits you. And what fits one person might not fit another, so you know the cool thing is there are all these options available. So just listen, see what sort of resonates with you and then you could sort of go from there and learn about that.

Steve: And keep in mind that Pat has hands on experience with all of these different business models. So you know it’s not like he is teaching based on something that he’s read. He’s actually gone and done these things. So let’s start with affiliate marketing. Now last month you made over 55,000 affiliate marketing alone. Now for me I do okay with affiliate marketing, but your marketing skills are incredible, so here’s my question. Let’s say you had to start over from complete scratch. You just got laid off from your architecture firm. Would affiliate marketing be a go to strategy in the beginning and if so, how would you have gone up building this revenue stream?

Pat: I think it would be part of a go to strategy at the beginning. I mean the cool thing about affiliate marketing is that you are able to provide solutions for people without having to create those solutions yourself. Because you get you know the way it works is you get a commission every time you sell somebody else’s product. And the cool thing is there are people out there who have problems, there are people out there who are building solutions that you could be the person to connect those two you and you could generate an income.

The most important part about this, the reason why it works so well for me is because you know I work on primarily building a key and real relationship with those in my audience. So I know exactly what their problems, pains, and issues are. So I know exactly what solutions to provide whether I create those solutions myself or use affiliate marketing to provide the solutions from other people. But also you know in affiliate marketing, it’s easy technically to do.

Right it’s easy to find a product, you can go on Amazon right now and find a product and become an Amazon associate which is their fancy name for an affiliate. And then you can just send people through a particular link and every time people purchase you get 5-8% or whatever the case may be. Some industries they pay higher depending on what the product is, some 50, sometimes 100% actually. They give you 100% commission because they know you are going to get that lead in and then they are going to be able to sell even more things down the road. So you know you can make good money that way. It’s good and easy technically, but to do it right and have it become a part of a long term business model is very difficult.

And that’s why I focus primarily on the relationships because when you can focus on the relationship, the ability to recommend something and actually have people take action on it is much easier. You know it’s like if you– anybody you have a great relationship with, a friend or a family member, if you have a great relationship with them, if you tell them about something that’s cool, they are going to take your recommendation. There’s very little selling involved.

But if you don’t have a relationship and you’ve probably you know those of you listening, you might be subscribed to some e-mail lists for example where they are not focused on building a relationship, they are focusing on the best copy writers, all the incredible sales tactics out there, stuff that I don’t know or I don’t do those things very well. So I let the relationship take control of where the transactions happen. And I also let the results from these products work as well. So another big thing that I do is make sure that any product that I recommend to my audience is a product that I have used, and a product that I know is going to help. And I also treat that product as if it were my own. I talk about it like it was my own; I provide support for it like it was my own.

Steve: I did not know that aspect; you actually answer questions about the products that you refer?

Pat: Absolutely, like why wouldn’t you do that because people who have questions, like if you open up the fact that you could answer questions; A it shows that you care about this product and you know that it’s helpful. But B the people who actually email you or ask questions about it, they are hot leads, they are thinking about getting it. And if you can provide them the answers and show them that A you know, and B that it’s the right fit for them, then of course they are going to get it.

Steve: Okay.

Pat: And also you’ve given them something as far as value and they are going to give you something back in return, and you know the cool thing about affiliate marketing is it doesn’t cost any extra for the customer to get, you know for you to get a commission too. So you know in terms of overall strategy, it’s a great strategy because it’s rather you know it can be done rather quickly as far as finding the right products. But building the audience is going to take a little bit of time, but if you do build the audience, even if the audience is small, you know I would implement affiliate marketing in your business right from the start if possible.

Steve: So let’s talk about the building audience part. So would you just start a blog, if you want to start affiliate marketing?

Pat: I think the first thing I would start doing is researching a market and trying to find a niche with a problem that I can solve. Whether I know the solutions for that audience already like I did with smart passive income, you know I started building an audience over time with my own experience. Or something like green exam county, which is just basically a resource of information that’s there to help people pass a certain exam, or you know be able to you know really knock out a certain pain that people have. I think that’s the best thing to do is if there’s a pain out there, if you know people need help with something, and if you can provide that solution for them and make it easy and convenient, then they’re going to like who you are, they are going to resonate with you, and take your recommendations and potentially buy products from you.

Blogging is a great way to do that. It’s a great platform for building an audience, but there are other ways of doing it too. For example a podcast, a lot of businesses have started on iTunes, the internet. There’s this mastery guys, they didn’t start with a blog, they started with a podcast. They had a blog to sort of become the place where the RSS feed lives and you know all that stuff, but they weren’t focused on creating blog content or getting subscribers for their blog. They are focused on their podcast meeting me. And that’s one way to do it. People like [Inaudible] [00:16:59].

You know they have primarily a video strategy and they are sort of bloggers, and that’s how you know– whatever the platform may be pick one that resonates with you the most, and makes it sort of comfortable for you to work on. For me it was blogging because I wasn’t comfortable with my voice, I wasn’t comfortable with putting my face on camera at first, so it made sense to start with that. But I since brunched out and sort of tried all the different ways, and actually they’ve all combined to become this big brand that I have now which is really cool.

But in terms of building an audience you know the most important thing to realize is you don’t have to serve everybody. You know I was on [Inaudible] [00:17:33] and he asked me a great question. Kind of threw me of a little bit, but it was a great question. And I was quite proud of my answer too because it was off the cuff, but he had asked me you know because he knows I have all of these different sites and little niches like Food Truckr niche, security guards site and Green Exam Academy, lead exam site. He’s like “pat, those are all great, but how are you helping the most people, you know why won’t you do something like you know– why don’t you create the next excel something that everybody uses, why don’t you change the world that way.” And I was like, well you know what, like I might not be able to change the entire world, but I am changing some people’s worlds. And those worlds are those little niches that I am targeting.

And the real thing to think about and the saying that I say over and over again is you know the riches are in the niches. And if you can become an expert at one thing, when people talk about that one topic in a conversation, you want to be the person, the ultimate resource that always pops up in conversation. And you don’t actually have to have that big of an audience to make a huge difference in your life. I’d recommend everybody to read an article by Kevin Kelly called 1000 true fans. The idea behind that is you only need a 1000 people. A 1000 people out of this world of six point how many billion to just become a true fan of you and what you do and what you provide. A 1000, Imagine a 1000 people paying you a 100 dollars a year for something. That’s six figures right there.

Steve: Yeah that’s– you know when you break things down like that, it makes it much more obtainable. So what sort of strategies would you suggest just to get that first thousand subscribers?

Pat: Well I mean I think you know the research is really important. It’s like that saying by George Washington,” if you give him six hours to cut down a tree, he’ll spend the first four hours sharpening his axe. Like the research is really-really key there. And so trying to find that market you know actually going out and not just– you don’t want to create a blog about a topic that you think is something that’s going to be useful to people. You want to know that it’s going to be useful for people, so you want to validate it. If there’s competition out there, that’s good.

Don’t start a blog because nobody else is doing it. Start a blog that you know you’re going to be able to provide better information that people who are out there are already providing. Because the fact that there’s competition means that there’s a market out there. And you’ll be able to discover by looking at all the competition where the holes are.

Find out what people are talking about on those blogs or for those products or whatever it is that you at are selling. What’s missing, what is missing from the customer experience? Become a customer yourself or be a reader yourself and see what is lacking and then come in and provide everything else that’s missing. And that is your advantage of coming in late in the game. Quite a people feel like they are behind, but you actually have an advantage because a lot of people are stuck in their own ways or the old ways of doing things. And you can come in with a fresh look and you might think that you have a disadvantage, but you have an advantage coming in late.

Steve: Okay, so let’s say the content is all there. Let’s say you’ve done your research, you’re writing about stuff that isn’t covered in any another blog, and you are standing out. So how do you get that initial burst of traffic?

Pat: Well you want to connect with other key members. Like I have just talked about you know discovering who your competitors are. They aren’t actually your competitors; they are people that you want to become friends with. That you want to network with and just try and help as much as possible, and have them help you as well. Because I think the idea here, if you are going to come in here fresh with all this information, but you want other people to know that you have a different take, a different angle on it, something to add to what they already have that allows you to do things like guest posts or guest video posts, or to record guest posts on interviews for those particular people who have and share the same target audience as you, that’s a great strategy.

You know the more you write of course and the more you publish and at least if you are conscious about that basic SEO, Search Engine Optimization, overtime those articles are going to be found in Google as well. And you know just making sure that they are great articles that when people come across, they can’t help but share it. You know those types of things, but I think the most important thing you know people always ask me, what’s the 80-20 of traffic building? It’s honestly getting to know everybody else out there who has your target audience too, and building a real true relationship. Just like you and I Steve, like you are sharing my stuff now and I’m sharing– I’ve shared your stuff before on online blog and you know Derrick Hopper from Social Triggers.

He got really big really quickly by providing value for people like myself and Chris Brogan and other huge names, by actually coming on and sharing convergence advice for us. Actually things that worked and actually we saw results from. I couldn’t help but share that, and actually promote him, and you know he and I have been best friends ever since. And so, you know, things like that will go on a very-very-very long way.

Steve: So how do you know when to approach these people, and how do you actually approach people who are just so much higher on you in terms of the hierarchy?

Pat: Well you can do what you can to just get on their radar at first. You don’t want to obviously send a cold in and then be like “hey what’s up I am a new guy in your niche, and I’m going to beat you,” like you don’t want to say things like that obviously. So the cool thing to do is to just hit them up on twitter, say that you are a fan, that you like what they do and you are also talking about and are interested in the same topics. You know don’t act or ask for anything, at least not at first and do what you can. If there’s anything that’s missing on their site or something that’s wrong or like an error or you know a page is broken or something. Those small things will go a long way in people– just sorts of understanding who you are and to remember you.

You might even you know mention them every once in a while on your own site, see those track back links, re-tweet their stuff every once in a while. Like the people that I know who follow my blog, I’ve gotten to know them very well through what they have done for me, and I can’t help but do things back for them as well. A video is also good too. Anybody who sends me a video I can’t help but watch that, like I feel bad if I don’t watch it, because people have taken the time. And even though it’s probably quicker than actually sending an email, there’s just something about the video that you know I know it makes an impact on me now but I say that and everybody is going to probably send me a video.

Steve: I was just thinking the same thing.

Pat: But no I’m just being honest though, it works, and that’s how you can sort of build a relationship with people out there, and I think you know, and you and I know this, going to conferences. There’s just something about meeting people in person that really makes a big difference. I mean I have met a lot of colleagues, people who have become you know JB partners with me at conferences. You know when in between sessions in the hallways or even at the networking events at night. You know you just get to know each other and you know you never know who you might click with until you go out there and you know just start talking to people. So I think that’s really cool.

One thing I forgot to mention as far as traffic I think this– and this was a big mistake I made in the beginning was I didn’t focus on building my email list. I didn’t start with Green Exam Academy, my lead exam site until about a year after I started selling my book. I didn’t even create a list of customers, which sucked because when I started to create new products I had– I didn’t have anybody but that day’s blog readers to sell to. I could have made much more money, and actually provided more value and serve my audience better by collecting a list and being able to share these new things that would help people if I had built that list. Same thing for Smart Passive Income, my blog started in October 2008; I didn’t start an email list until January 2010, almost a year and a half later, because I didn’t realize exactly how important it was, and it was such huge mistake.

And the reason I bring it up in terms of traffic building is because even if you have like a hundred people on your list, I mean imagine getting a room with a hundred people in it. That’s actually a lot of people you know and you might not think that 100 people is a lot, but that is actually a lot of people. And if you were to provide value for them and that gives you an opportunity to connect with each and every one of them. Again another advantage of being small and starting out and they are going to become big fans. They are going to notice that they are going to get more attention from you than some of the bigger guys because you don’t have a big audience yet. And they’ll be fans for life at that point if you could provide value for them.

And not only that when you come up with a new post or some new resources, something you share it with your email list. What happens is people come to that post not because of how easy it is to implement sharing, or to sort of encourage sharing through social sharing buttons and things like that. People who come from your email list to your blog; nothing gives you more traffic than your email list seriously.

This is something that I have recently found out too because I haven’t been using my email list as much. But when you come out with a new post, send an email about it, people come over and they share it. And what happens when people share it, new people discover it, new people come on your list, and the next time you come up with a post, more people are coming back to your post. And then you are sharing it more. And then it just becomes this growing sort of cycle that just takes off. And you know at first you are not going to see huge numbers coming from that particular strategy, but it just rows exponentially, especially if you continue to provide great value and awesome epic content.

Steve: So you’ve given us a lot of tips just now so– but you know what I found that happens is a lot of people just get overwhelmed with the whole bunch of different things coming at them all at once. So let’s say you were just to start from scratch. What are like two things that you would just focus on from the very beginning?

Pat: Okay, two things I would focus on and try to do is I would say okay if I’m just starting out completely from scratch before anything in terms of research, I want to talk to 25 people in one industry. Pick an industry whatever it is; get on the phone with those people if you can. Pick something in small business. The reason I say start with that is because those people you know obviously have things that they do every day that they can potentially find– they potentially need a solution for. Those are people that have money of course and there are several instances of that type of business around the US as well. So you’d be able to get more and gather more data from those people.

But I would just try to discover, you know have a real conversations with them. Say “Hey I’m this person, I’m looking at providing solutions for people in your industry, I’m just curious like what are some of things that you have to do every day that you hate.” You know and just start to sort of– it’s called like idea hunting, or data mining, try idea mining. Try to get deep into really what the pains, problems, and issues of these people are. And once you talk to a few people, at the end of the talk like it could be hard to get on the phone. I mean where is the phone; we don’t even use the phone any more. Which is why I think it’s cool to do it now. Because now a lot of people are getting these types of calls, so you give them a stand out.

And then once you start to find these sorts of patterns and these things that you could create a solution for, pick one. Pick one problem and see what you can do to provide a solution for it. Whether that’s a piece of software and typically in small business it would be a piece of software that would help them. Just pick one, one problem. Again, focus on one thing and create a minimum viable product for it, the MVP.

This is sort of startup lingo now we are talking about. And this is something that is just the first iteration that solves that one problem in a very simple way. But because it solves that problem the people who you have spoken to and the people in that niche are going to be really thankful for it. But then you could work with those people to make it even better, to add features to it, and work with them. And you know I actually had a guy named Danni Maxwell in episode 46 of the Smart passive income podcast. He talked about this very topic and even gave us examples of people doing these kinds of things. And I even had a person come on later, I forget what episode but a guy called Carol Mendiola who talked about actually listening to that episode. Putting this into action he quit his job at Tesla to do work full time now online as a result of this sort of strategy.

And the reason I mention this is because software to me is really interesting now. It’s something I’m doing right now; I just came up with my first software product. And it’s really fun. It’s really cool. And I like the idea of you know the cool thing about software too, even though it’s a little bit more difficult because you are going to have to spend a little more money upfront to find a developer and to do all this research and stuff. The cool thing is you know when people buy your solution, they get it right then and there, and they are able to use it. And if it’s something that they need over and over again, you can potentially– you have people pay a recurring income for it every month you know.

Steve: Yeah you know I was actually going to get to that. I mean we are still talking about affiliate marketing, but you know since you started talking about software. I know in the past and you know I have a technical background, so creating an iPhone app or a piece of software has kind of always been on the back of my mind. So let’s talk about iPhone apps first because you haven’t actually talked about that in quite a while.

Pat: Yeah it’s been a while because the markets been pretty crazy. So I have an app company actually, an iPhone app company that was started actually right after I started my blog. I was just so like stopped about doing things online; I’m like let’s do everything. And so my buddy and I we heard a story about a guy called Joe Comb [phonetic] who had made like 40 million dollars with this one application.

Steve: Iphone or is it something like that.

Pat: Yes exactly, and you’re like what! That’s like so dumb but awesome at the same time like maybe we could just experiment with this and see what happens. So we ended up creating a company for iPhone specifically, and we hired out all the development which was an interesting process. I mean we wouldn’t have been able to do it any other way, but we got really excited and ended up hiring the first developer at the lowest price possible, which ended up costing us a lot more money and a lot more time. So it was a big learning experience later down the road, we decided to actually spend time screening the people who wanted to work on our projects and things like that. We had used elands.com at the time, the company did really well, I mean we were making upwards of 20-25000 dollars a month with about 10 applications when we first started, but when we first started there was only about 50-100,000 apps in iTunes. Now there’s…

Steve: Yeah.

Pat: Quite more and the app environment has changed. All of our apps that were very successful before sort of just fallen down and out of the radar and you know it’s a lot harder now. And I think, if you want to succeed in apps now, especially on the iPhone you build a niched app, build an app for a particular community that like I said earlier consumer fashion just completely solves a particular problem, or because what we were doing is we were creating similar apps to iPhone. Not forwarding apps, but entertainment apps that we would hope go viral and people would pick up.

And some of them went sort of semi viral, but when you can be the number one app for a specific type of group of people, that’s when you’re in the money especially for a long run, because then sell more apps or create more apps for that same group and you’ll be able to get feedback from the people who are already customers, and you know serve them just completely serve them. I had a guy who I interviewed– his name is Mike Dunin. He is the one who built an app called speech with Milo, Milo is a mouse character, and their apps would do speech therapy for kids essentially.

Steve: Wow, okay.

Pat: And they were making 30,000 dollars a month from that.

Steve: Right, well that actually solves a real problem; it’s not an entertainment app.

Pat: Right.

Steve: So I can, can kind of see how that would work, but overall how do you feel about the viability of kind of this business model, and I’m just curious how come you haven’t created any more apps since then?

Pat: You know to be honest I’ve just had more things to focus on, so many other things to focus on.

Steve: Okay.

Pat: You know that’s why. My business partner as well he has another company that he works with, and we just haven’t had the time to really go deep into the market research and try to find the niche and that whole thing. And we were just kind of– it was built experimentally and we have other things going on. So that’s why we haven’t really put much focus into it, but currently I’m putting a lot of focus into software specifically a word press plug in that is actually a podcast player as well.

Steve: Yes, let’s talk about that, so let’s talk about this podcast player. I actually took a look at it and it’s actually pretty incredible. So let’s talk about the effort and the monetary investment, and everything that it took to get launched.

Pat: Yeah, so it’s interesting because I came up with another podcast about five months ago called ask Pat, and this was a five day a week podcast where I take a voicemail question from the audience and answer it five days a week– a different question five days a week. And I asked my team, we need a player or something that can make it easier to find new episodes, because these are sort of shorter episodes and I wanted people to be able to quickly scroll through all the episodes to see which ones might be relevant to them at the time. All those like cue type situation, and so we developed– we actually have a UX guy named Dustin who is awesome. He is our user experience guy, and we asked him to create a sort of a podcast player that would accomplish these goals for us and look good and integrate well on the site for me.

And if you go to ask Pat.com right now, you’ll see it right there being used right now and it’s great. It’s the fanciest player out there, does a lot more things than just play, and after all that came out, I had about 50 or 100 emails come in and say Pat like I want that player, where can I get it? I’m like sorry guys, it’s custom, sorry guys it’s custom, custom. I was like wow this is cool, like people want my thing, but it’s mine nobody can have it. And then I was like wait, people were telling me essentially that they would pay for this. So you know a light bulb went off, and so we decided to put some effort into taking this sort of custom code, and turning it into a WordPress plug-in for easy distribution.

And we just launched it last month finally after about two months of development. And you know putting all, making it easy to customize and things like that and making it easy to use, you know use a short code and just make it real easy for people who pick it up. We also had to do extensive testing on different themes and things like that. So monetary speaking in terms of investment you know a little bit of money was put into just creating that thing in the first place, I would say about 5000 dollars.

Steve: Okay.

Pat: Before turning it into a plug in. That was just for me, and then turning it into a plug in I would say maybe another $10,000 of time.

Steve: Okay.

Pat: Because I wanted– I have a developer and he’s spent a lot of time on it in the testing of it. Actually it’s took most time because I knew, and I talked to a lot of people when getting into this software thing especially WordPress plug-in. I had talked to people like Michael Dunlop who did– not mountain monster, that site…

Steve: No, he’s got something domination, purpose domination.

Pat: Purpose domination, thank you. And then I talked to Glenn Alsop who did opt-in skin. And a bunch of people, and they were like Pat, make sure your customer service team is on par because you’re going to get people who have compatibility issues and all these stuff, and I was like how bad can it be really and they were like it’s bad, just be ready for it. And so we spent even more time making sure the customer service experience was good. We had talked to other people while it was being developed to see what their initial thoughts were about it, and which was great for validation and making quick little changes of things that were not obvious to us, but obvious to other people who were outside which was good.

And we launched it last month, we decided to launch with a beta team or beta group meaning we’re going to limit the numbers of licenses for it. And the reason for that was because we wanted to make sure that again our customer service team could handle it. Because even though we tested it extensively, we knew there were going to be bugs and there were, but we are also very honest upfront with the people “hey you guys are going to join a beta group, 250 licenses only,” which does create some sort of scarcity which is good. People– if there’s scarcity involved there are going to be inclined to make a quicker decision and buy, but we were also very honest “hey guys there might be bugs,” and there were and that sort of sassy expectation upfront.

And I think what’s cool about it is it makes people feel like they are part of the process too. When people become part of the beta group, they know that they have an influence on the direction of where this particular piece of software is going, and actually where it is now based on where it was last month, it’s just– it’s not completely overhaul, but a lot of new features were added, a lot of compatibility issues were taken care of, a lot of bugs squashed, and it’s so much better now because we just launched to 250 people. And we are about to re-launch it again, actually we launched it again today exclusively for Johnny Dumas’s community, paradise you know his…

Steve: Podcast in paradise, yeah.

Pat: It went really-really well, and so it’s selling extremely well. I keep getting emails from people saying when are you going to open this to the public, it’s great. So we are sort of working with people to add new features, and it’s really cool because there’s nothing like it out there in the market which is great, but more than that I think people who are a part of it now feel like they have influence. Which is the whole part of– this is the whole theme strutted model. I’m actually “The lean startup” by Eric which is a fantastic book to read whether you are doing software or not, it’s a great strategy.

I mean that same lean strategy when creating info products and things like that, membership sites you know working with a small beta group to do group consulting or group coaching. Those– validating it with a small group, but then having that small group influence where it goes. You can then reopen it and it’s much better, is so much better than just putting everything into it at first, having them not use all those things, and having spent money to put it out there. Plus you can get out there now instead of waiting till later.

Steve: You know I had a quick question, when you were talking about iPhone apps you mentioned that you picked the cheapest developer and everything and everything was a disaster. How did you change– how did you find a developer for the software project and was that whole development cycle smooth?

Pat: The development cycle was fairly smooth or relatively smooth.

Steve: Okay.

Pat: There is always going to be hiccups and things like that, and I think you just have to expect that. I mean it’s good to have a date– you know a launch date and then sort of rewind from there again. This is when you want the task force to come out before that when we want to be able to see the Photoshop version of it, like all that stuff is really important. But it’s not going to always be on schedule, it’s just good to expect that, but you know if you work with somebody for like I think we paid 1000 dollars for an app that was the first one. And they said it was going to be done in three weeks, it actually ended up taking 4000 dollars and three months.

Steve: Okay.

Pat: That as opposed to working with a great developer you know there was only a week or two delay in the actual time of everything, and just the quality of it is much better.

Steve: And so this particular developer, so you’re not a technical guy right Pat?

Pat: Not really, no.

Steve: So how do you convey how you want it to work to a developer being non technical?

Pat: Yeah, great question. Whether you’re doing iPhone apps, creating a membership site or putting themes on your site, or work on a piece of software, fantastic question, wire frame it. That means actually draw it out, and you don’t have to be an artist, you can just sketch it out. But actually have it drawn out in every single part of it sort of, and then that was another mistake and probably partly our fault in the beginning, why my first iPhone apps did poorly as far as that experience of developer because we were just like, hey in an email we are like we want to do this, this and this and it should be like this,” and then we got the first version and we are like this isn’t what we were thinking about. But then we looked at it, we’re like “oh, okay it actually does what we said, but that’s not how we meant it,” let’s get more detailed this time. And then even then the next iteration was like oh no, no, no that’s not what we meant, but you know they did it, they just misinterpreted it.

And so the best thing to do is draw it out you know what does every part of that screen look like? And then where does that button go? What does it look when people land on that? What does the action look like? Get really detailed with it and it’s going to take time, but what is going to happen when you that, when you wire frame whatever that piece of software is that you want or whatever the design of your website looks like, when you begin to wire frame it, you get to understand exactly what happens, and what the user experiences is like. And you get to think about all the different pieces that you might not have thought about when you were just explaining it to somebody in an email. It’s going to save you so much time down the road even though there’s that time investment upfront, because the developer will have no questions, there will be no issues as far as what things you will do when a person does what.

Steve: That is very good advice. I was just curious what you were going to say because as a kind of like a developer, kind of a hardware designer myself, like we always spend an enormous amount on specifications. And I was just curious what it was from a non technical perspective on how that works, and yeah absolutely everything you said makes perfect sense. You want to specifically specify every single aspect of your app, so that’s there is no misunderstandings about what you wanted it to do.

Pat: Right.

Steve: So..

Pat: Right, right.

Steve: So you know we still have another couple of business models to cover here. I want to talk about your niche sites.

Pat: Sure.

Steve: A while back you kind of became famous for your Niche Site Duel and that’s when you created security guard training. And then today you started foodtruckr.com, a niche site about catering to the food trucking community. Can you talk a little bit about the business model there, and what kind of the end goal is with that site, and how are you going to make money with that?

Pat: Yeah, I mean niche sites are similar to what we are talking about, but they are created in a more scientific way I guess you can say, based mostly primarily of off keyword research. So the idea is to build the site that you know is going to serve people based on what people are looking for in Google. And you can use tools like the Google keyword planner just free if you set up for adwords, you won’t have to pay for anything, you can just use that keyword on adwords. There are other tools like long tail pro, there’s another one called market samurai.

There’s a bunch of other ones out there, but they will essentially tell you know how many people are searching for different keywords, and then you can discover from there which keywords are more competitive or not, meaning is there room for some new site to come on the first 10 spots of the first page of Google, or do you feel like you would be able to create something better than what exists. And if so, then you have the potential to create a site about that. Now that’s just one component, that’s just the research part of it and a scientific way of approaching that research, but there’s also the idea of building the site and creating content for that site.

So you know it’s interesting because you could find a great keyword, but it may not be something that you’re very interested in. So for a while my strategy was to just build sites based off of these keywords, and even though it might not be a topic I know much about, I’d go and find out what that information is to help. Some people hire writers and just don’t even care about what content is on there. They just hire writers that seem to know what they are talking about. That’s not what I did, I found out what the added information was. So the first experiment which was done in 2010, I did keyword research and I found a keyword security guard training, which was relatively highly searched for in Google. It was searched for per month I think it’s 6400 times per month.

Steve: Okay.

Pat: And then the keyword competitiveness, it wasn’t very competitive and doing more research I found that there wasn’t very many sites talking about security guard training, or doing it in a very organized way. So I knew that there was sort of this hole that I could fill, but in terms of what content to put on the site, and doing even more research I found that every state in the US has a different set of requirements, or sort of things that a person has to do to become an official security guard in that state. It’s different in every state, and at first I was like “oh man this sucks, like this is going to take me forever,” but then I realized “wow maybe this is why there isn’t a site out there because it’s actually a little bit of work.” And what I ended up doing was was calling security guard companies in each of those states. Actually I did like the first 20 and just asking, “Hey I’m interested in becoming a security guard. What do I need to do in your state in order to do that?”

And so I was just getting that information directly from who I would normally need to go to if I was actually going to become a security guard in that state. And so I got the exact right information. I just easily organized it online, shared some links to you know government sites for those states if they were relevant, and then moved on to the next one. And when I got to about 20 my site ended up becoming number one in Google for that particular keyword security guard training, and then the traffic started coming in, and people started finding me not just on the home page, but all the content that I wrote for those 20 states, people ended up finding me through just a long tail keywords that I had written in those particular articles.

And again, I think I had an advantage not knowing anything about it, because I put myself in the shoes of somebody who would actually use this site, somebody who is a complete beginner, and I can talk in beginner terms. You know there is this whole idea of the curse of knowledge, if you know something it’s hard to know what it’s not like to know that thing anymore. So it’s hard to teach sometimes because of that, but because I was coming in fresh, it was easy for me to sort of know what it was like to come in fresh, because I was coming in fresh, and just reporting on everything that I was learning along the way. And then when I got to 20, I actually made a mistake of just stopping. I was like yeah, I got to number one in Google, I’m done. And the site started to make money through adsense actually. I had ad sense on there the moment I had traffic coming in which is some code…

Steve: Okay.

Pat: You can put on your site serves as ads for Google and companies you pay auctions to get served on sites that are rolling to that keyword, and I was making about 800-2000 dollars a month at that point and it was great. And then I was like “wow maybe I should finish the rest of the states.” So that’s when I actually hired somebody, and I was like “hey you need to call these states, and then write articles that look like this one,” the ones I had already written. And I paid somebody an evening it was about 1000 bucks to do that. So talking about 1000 dollars or one month worth of that sites income already and re-investing in my business, and then they filled out the rest of the articles. So I had all 50 states, and then I had that same person actually call all 50 states again to discover what it would take to become an armed security guard, so someone who actually carries a firearm.

Steve: Sure.

Pat: Because that was sort of the second highest search for keyword was armed security guard training. So I wanted articles for every state, so then now I have over 100 articles on the site, and the site has been number one in Google for almost four years now, and it’s making about 2500-3500 dollars a month purely on auto pilot, I don’t touch it at all.

Steve: And so in regards– I remember that Niche Site Duel, and a lot of the tactics that you use to get that to rank kind of no longer apply, and so how do you feel about– do you feel that Google is kind of effectively making niche sites a little bit less desirable to start today?

Pat: I think– you know that’s a great question sort of talks about the part I left out is to help it gets to number one on Google, it’s just not the content I wrote which did help because it was good unique content– stuff people were searching for, but I implemented a lot of back linking strategies. So back linking is a way for Google to understand what sites are important linking to particular keywords. So Steve if you were to link to my site that would be a back link from you to me and vice versa if I link to you, you would have a back link from my site, and that sort of counts as a vote in Google’s eyes, sort of like somebody vouching for your site. So I was using strategies like creating articles and putting them up on articles directories and linking back to my site. Google was very-very young in terms of how that worked and what actually counted as a vote.

Now it’s only links that come from relevant sites and you know those strategies actually do still work, but they are also more easily found by Google, and I wouldn’t risk that anymore. That’s why foodtruckr.com is sort of my new experiment that I started last year, where I am serving the food truck industry, again based of off keyword. And then I’m doing all I can to research and create content for this industry, and I actually fell in love with this industry ever since doing research because they are amazing people. People on food trucks– they work like 18 hours a day to serve food, and it’s amazing you know they have such– like they have an amazing entrepreneurial spirit. So anyway the strategy here though is just to stay connected with everybody in my audience, and to have them you know subscribe you know I have an email list now about 3500 food truck owners…

Steve: Okay.

Pat: Who are following the blog which is cool. I also have a podcast that goes along with it. And again creating an extremely high quality content that is relevant to them now that they are also asking for information about, and doing what I can to find and research that information as well so…

Steve: Okay.

Pat: Focusing mostly on that and not doing any sort of forced back linking and you know it took a little bit longer, but I am sitting number one or number two for Google for a lot of relevant keywords like how to start a food truck, how awesome is that.

Steve: Nice, okay.

Pat: Food truck business plan and actually in terms of my fixation, I just experimented. I just put out on some site a couple months ago to see what would happen. That’s not the primary strategy here, but I was able to generate 100 bucks just in 10 minutes of putting quote up there which is pretty cool. So 100 bucks a month now, but we are actually launching a book this month.

Steve: Wow.

Pat: We’re launching a book, so we spent a lot of time putting the book together and that has actually a sort of supped up version of a combination of posts that have been written for food truck and that’s going to be sold on the site, and we’ll see how it goes, but we already have an interest list of people who are interested in the book of 150 people.

Steve: Nice, that is very important.

Pat: Yeah, it’s definitely getting to email list, we start from the beginning this time. And it should be pretty cool, the book is not going to be on Amazon, it’s going to be one that we’re selling directly from the site, because we have already built that audience and we’re going for profitability. Amazon is great for you know getting exposure and taking advantage of their ranking system and things like that, but we built an audience already which is great. We have about 3000 Facebook fans. The site’s doing really good, it has become what I want it to be which is sort of the ultimate resource for food truck owners, it just– it’s just taking more time.

Steve: Sure.

Pat: But it is reflecting exactly what smart passive income did, and what [inaudible 00:50:10] did. Both of those sites took about a year and a half until it really started to make a dent in terms of income, and this one we’re at about almost an year now. And so we’ll take some time, and I really do believe in it, and the content is great, so I know it’s going to work in the end.

Steve: You know I was just about to comment that it seems like you’ve taken kind of the authority blog approach to your food trucker site, whereas security guard info, or security guard HQ was more like kind of more like the– you know you target a niche, try to just get to rank. It sounds like you’re going the more traditional route with content– really great content, building an audience, and then selling to that audience. Is that accurate?

Pat: Yes, yes absolutely, and because of the research we did, I mean this book is only one of several like several dozen business opportunities in this particular niche from software. I mean imagine creating a software that would allow food truck owners to discover you know what their inventory is like, or where to go to get the best produce, or what’s the most fresh, and what’s in season, or the nearest mechanic. Because one thing we found out was actually food truck owners– their food trucks break down all the time. That was one thing that almost every food truck owner we had talked to said, and we were like wow what if we could make your life easier in terms of what if your truck breaks down, whether it’s like a– maybe it’s an iPad app that goes over the most common issues for trucks, or you know connecting people with the nearest mechanic or something like that, they would pay for that. And it is just a matter of me and my team you know…

Steve: Right, putting it together.

Pat: Putting it together, yeah.

Steve: Hey, so Pat I want to be respectful of your time. We’ve already been talking for 50 minutes, but I did want to just kind of go through everything we’ve talked about here. And what I want you to comment about specifically is revenue velocity, meaning how much time you think it would take if you follow all the steps that you just outlined to make significant income to perhaps replace someone’s fulltime income you know for all the different aspects. And what you would actually do if you were to start all over, you just got laid off, and you kind of want to replace your income right away, what would you kind of go for?

Pat: Sure let me answer your last question first…

Steve: Okay.

Pat: Which is if I got laid off what would I do to make income the fastest? And what would I do first? I believe the best answer is some sort of consultation or freelancing. Freelancing is the best way to go, and even though that’s not necessarily creating online business where you’re creating a product that can be sold while you’re sleeping. It’s the best way to get online, it’s the best way to meet and connect people in a particular niche and serve them and get paid for your services upfront. I mean the people you meet through sharing your skills and selling your skills out there, I mean there are people out there who know that they can’t do everything, and if there is something that you have that they don’t want to do or can’t do you know they are willing to pay you for that.

And then that might help you start to build your audience in terms of you know the specialty skill that you have, and potentially create products or help other people who want to freelance in this particular situation as well. I mean there is a lot of possibilities that come on with freelancing, but it takes time to create an audience, it takes time to create these products, and that’s what’s cool about affiliate marketing is you don’t have to create the products, but you have to know about them at least which takes time. But consulting or freelancing is definitely a great way to go especially– you know it’s something you could do on the side too while you have a job as well.

Steve: Absolutely.

Pat: And then your other question in terms of revenue velocity and how long it would take, again it depends on what business model you have. The freelancing route would be the quickest I think, but in terms of building on that business using maybe software or something, I say that might take up to six months in terms of actually doing the proper research, and you know that’s something that’s going to take a little bit of investment. So you want to make sure you do it right and have the proper research and development team and that’s going to take some money as well.

In terms of building an audience, the blog or podcast or a YouTube channel for example and then serving that audience, that can take some time as well, I mean months perhaps. The niche site authority site route will take months, perhaps years. Well, I mean it’s not going to happen overnight, I think that’s key thing to realize. As long as you work at it, you chip away; put an hour in everyday, that’s what’s going to get you there for sure. And again what’s going to help you get your revenue even faster is more quickly understanding what those issues are, and more quickly understanding how to provide solutions for those problems in your particular niche.

Steve: Okay, you know I just wanted to comment on your answer. I would say that probably out of all the things we talked about, building an audience whether it be through a podcast or a blog will take you know more than a couple of months I would say right, at least a year or a year and a half maybe.

Pat: Yeah, it depends on how much time you have, how much you hustle, what the niche you chose to work in you know and there is a little bit of luck involved there as well. But I think in terms of what can give you the most long term success, once you build that audience say for example you have an email list of 1000 people all interested in deep sea fishing. You know they’ve subscribed to you because you give the best deep sea fishing advice; you have that list forever, right? You could take it anywhere with you, you can provide them with products or if your site breaks down you’ll be able to start a new site anywhere else and you have that group of 1000 people to you know who you’ve specialized to serve. And once you have that, you’re in for the long haul for sure.

Steve: You know when you started Green Exam Academy, was that a pretty quick process to get your stuff out there or?

Pat: You know I had created the site while I was still working, and I was studying for that exam, that took about a year.

Steve: Okay.

Pat: So I had that set for a year, but during that time I was getting found in Google, and again I didn’t even know because I had talked to people who purchased my e-book, and they are like “hey I’ve been reading you for like over a year,” and some people actually bought the book even though they didn’t need to, they already passed the exam and they were like Pat I just wanted to buy the book because you helped me out so much a year ago when I passed exam. I was like really, I didn’t even know people were using this a year ago. So like and that was just me not knowing what I was doing exactly, but I was very-very fortunate to get laid off, so I can then put my attention into this and see what the possibilities were. But it did take about a year and a half from the moment I created that site and started producing content for it, to the moment I started making money from it, about a year and a half.

Steve: Okay, yeah I just don’t want to spread kind of this misconception that you can get started up and in just a couple of months in any of these respective areas of online businesses, so everything takes time, you’ve got to put in the effort, it’s a gradual process with a lot of long term gain potential. You know my last question for you, I noticed that you haven’t tried selling physical products, and that’s probably the only thing that you haven’t tried yet, is that correct?

Pat: That is correct although it is something that is definitely on my mind. I believe and I’ve debated about this but once food trucker has sort of set and good and you know doing its thing, I might want to give ecommerce a try, and so definitely I’ll be contacting you and look to have you come on the show at some point to talk and get strategies about that.

Steve: Right, sounds good Pat. So hey if anyone wants to get a hold of you, what’s the best way besides sending you a video.

Pat: Wish you didn’t remind me that one.

Steve: Yeah my bet.

Pat: No, that’s cool. Smartpassiveincome.com is where you should go, and you can also find me on Twitter @Patflynn, and then everything else I have going on is sort of connected to that response.

Steve: All right, it sounds good Pat. Well, it was a pleasure having you on the show, and thanks a lot for coming on.

Pat: Thanks for having me, and thanks everybody.

Steve: All right take care.

Well there you have it and I hope you enjoyed that episode. Now Pat’s been on many different podcasts prior to this one, but I think this is the first time that he has compared and contrasted all the different online business models, and hopefully out of all the ways to make money online that we discussed you can find one that really suits your personality. And remember there is really no right or wrong answer, you simply have to pick a business model and take action.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode41. And once again I just wanted to thank 99designs for sponsoring this episode. I know a lot of you listening are waiting on the sidelines and trying to get the courage to start your own online business. I also know a lot of you out there run your business already and know that your website design could be better. Now designing a website is not that intimidating anymore thanks to 99 designs, where you can get over 300,000 designers to compete for your design. All you’ve got to do is list your design on their site and within 48 hours you will get dozens of design submissions to choose from and from there you can ask for slight tweaks and changes until you are a 100% satisfied with the results. And the best part is that the price is very reasonable and there’s a 100% satisfaction guarantee.

Plus by using the 99designs.com/mywifequit link and telling them that Steve from mywifequitherjob.com referred you, your design listing will be bolded, highlighted, and given a prominent background and featured before all regular listings, so that your request stands out among all the designers. So head over to 99designs.com/mywifequit and get something designed right now. And finally if you enjoyed listening to this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this info and find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice. It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

And as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information, go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

040: How Keith Walker Disrupted The Movie Theater Industry With an iPad And Raspberry Pi

Keith Walker Matt Sconce

As a big movie buff, I’ve always wondered how the movie industry works and how movie theaters manage stay in business. As it turns out, movie theaters have been on the decline for the past several years thanks to DVDs and services like Netflix.

That is why Keith Walker and his partner Matt Sconce decided to completely disrupt the entire industry with their site MovieHeroes.com. Their technology allows movie theaters to instantly adopt an all you can eat Netflix type of business model to maximize profit.

And their results have been staggering. The theaters that have adopted MovieHeroes.com technology generate many times the revenue of an average theater and their company is causing ripples across the entire movie theater industry.

The best part is that they are using cheap off the shelf technology to do so. Don’t miss this interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Keith got the idea to completely disrupt the movie theater industry
  • How the movie theater industry works
  • The economics behind running a movie theater
  • Why the Netflix model for a physical movie theater works amazingly well
  • What is a raspberry pi and what you can do with it
  • Why the movie studios were unhappy with the Netflix all you can eat model in the beginning
  • The inexpensive technology that Keith used to create a subscription based theater with RF id technology

Sponsors

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the my wife quit her job podcast where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I’ll have them take us back to the beginning, and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consultations every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting our own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

Now before I begin, I just want to give a quick shout out to this episodes sponsor 99designs. Now originally I wasn’t going to take on any sponsors at all, but 99designs caught my eye because I suck at design. And in fact when I first started my online store back in 2007, the design for my website was terrible, and I had absolutely no idea who to turn to. Now fast forward to the day, 99designs is a site where you can provide a description of anything that you want designed whether it be as logo, a web page a t-shirt, pretty much anything and have dozens of designers compete to deliver you the best design possible. And by best I mean that you get to choose your favorite design among dozens of submissions from a pool of over 315,000 designers.

So if you are design challenged like I am, I highly recommend that you go over to 99designs.com/mywifequit. And if you use that job and you tell them that Steve from mywifequitherjob.com referred you, your design listing will be bolded, highlighted, given a prominent back ground and featured before all regular listings so that your request stands out among all of the designers. And in fact this special offer is worth 99 dollars. So if you need a logo, website, t-shirt, business card or anything designed go to www.99designs.com/mywifequit. Now on to the show.

Welcome to the ‘My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family, and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the my wife quit her job podcast. Today I have Keith walker on the show. Now Keith is the cousin of one of my co-workers at my day job, and he’s got a great story. And I don’t know about you, but where I live, the movie theatres close by to where I live are pretty much a shell of their former selves. Now once upon a time, you had to get to a movie theatre almost two hours early on opening night for a very popular movie, but these days you can kind off just waltz right in at show time.

And what I’m trying to say here is the theatres where I live are pretty much not crowded anymore, and the movie theatre industry in my opinion in itself at least where I live is kind of slowly dying in my opinion. Now Keith actually noticed the exact same thing with the movie theatres in his area, so he started movieheroes.com, came up with a noble plan to save them all, and he invented a nice piece of technology to go along with it in the process that is now actually licensing to other movie theatres. And with that very cryptic intro, I want to welcome to the show Keith. How’s the going Keith?

Keith: It’s going great.

Steve: So give us a quick background story. I purposely didn’t reveal your technology or what you did in the intro, but tell us about your business, how you got started with movie heroes, how you turn this into both a technology and an ecommerce business on the side.

Keith: Cool, yeah absolutely. So the story– there’s definitely a couple of sides to the story, but basically what happened is I’m a software engineer. I was living in San Francisco, working at clout, and I got word from some of my friends that the theatre in my home town had closed down. And this is a theatre that I loved going to as a kid, had all these great memories, and so did my friends who had contacted me. And we realized that you know the town was in mourning that we were losing this wonderful place that everybody enjoyed, but it just wasn’t making it, like you said the attendance wasn’t up, and the owners of the theatre had just decided that it was –they need to close their doors.

They were facing the need to upgrade to digital projectors, and some other costs. And so one of my high school friends had the idea. He was living in the town of Oakhurst where I grew up at the time, had the idea like hey, you know all these other entertainment based products have moved to a subscription model, and why hasn’t the movies theatre industry moved to that model. And so he called up myself and another friend, and he was like hey what do you guys think about this. We thought it was a great idea and we sort of launched into seeing if we could generate some interest in the town to pay a flat fee and watch among other movies.

Steve: And so with that I imagine it’s a lot more complicated than you just described, right. So let’s go into a little more of a broader sense. How does a movie theatre work exactly, how does the economics work?

Keith: Yeah that’s a really good question and you know I learned– I dint know much at all about how this space worked until starting into this, and it’s pretty interesting. So if you look at– well let’s see, so the relationship between a movie theatre and a movie studio is somehow interesting. When you walk into a theatre and you buy let’s say a 10 dollar ticket, the bulk of that money goes straight to the studio that made the movie, and the theatre keeps a percent. So on a– for a really popular movie on opening weekend it might be 80%, so.

Steve: Wow, okay.

Keith: Eight dollars go straight to Sony pictures or to Warner brothers or 20 Century Fox, and then you keep a couple dollars. And you know if you look at the 10K financial reports of large theatre chains where they really separate out their revenue from their expenses, they will show that on the actual movie exhibiting side, they are operating at a loss because you can imagine what that two you know that 20% of that ticket– you really can’t afford to operate the exhibit side of the business, so most movie theatres make their money off of concessions sales.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: I would say movie theatres make– that’s where they make their money

Steve: Okay. Wow, okay so just two dollars out of the ticket. So that’s– yeah everything is concessions, and you got to make rent, and then you have got to pay the people who run the projectors, then you got to pay for the capital equipment, right?

Keith: Absolutely, yeah.

Steve: Okay, so in going to a subscription based model then, what are the some of the things that you need to take care of in order just kind of satisfy the movie studios themselves.

Keith: Yeah, so you know one thing, we thought about this you know we are like, we talked to the party owners and you know one of the issues that they saw was the business isn’t very consistent. And another really interesting thing about the movie industry you know something that really surprised me to see is you know we looked at the finances from that theatre and we– I just swatted [phonetic] their ticket revenue for the year, and it was so insanely seasonal in bulk it was just amazing. So during the summer they were doing very well you know making a pretty good amount of money, and then September was about a quarter of what July was. So we are not taking about like a 10% variability or even like 50%. We are talking a factor of four…

Steve: Wow, okay.

Keith: Between months, and so we found that this theatre particular always operated at a loss for a number of months in through the year, and they made a decent profit during December, and so two times in a year during like the holidays and during the summer. And since then you know now that we still get into this later, but we’ve spoken at a number of theatre owner conferences and talked to hundreds of theatre owners, and this is the norm. Theatres operate at a loss for– through September and then through the spring and they make their money and bank it during the summer.

And so what we really thought was like hey with a membership model, we’re going to provide a lot more consistency, and that’s kind off what we are going for. A consistent bedrock income from your membership dues that are collected monthly in auto renewing and all that, and then that’s going to help with the expenses and then that was kind of the direction we are going. We– what we thought we would do just to kind of not create too many waves is we would still pay the studios in the same way, so basically we would be buying the ticket for the studios.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: For the members to give to the studio, so we thought the studios would just be like, oh cool this, you know from the interface between the theatre and the studio from our perspective didn’t change much, and we thought they’d all be like oh cool that’s fine, and we assumed that attendance would go up and we talked to the studio representatives. So we talked to them and said, hey we’re on to this thing, we think that attendance will go up and everybody wins. So I’m sort of yeah there’s definitely two sagas to the story at least two if not three. So one is before we wanted to take over and like kind of save this theater, we wanted to– we had a certain number of members that we needed to have before we’re going to take over operating the theatre, so we had a goal.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: But then…

Steve: How did you come up with that goal?

Keith: We came up with the goal just from looking at what the finances or what the expenses were and what the…

Steve: Breaking even point kind of.

Keith: Just the breaking even point. And we are going to share a little pass at breaking even point, just so we are somewhere comfortable.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: And yeah just projecting what we thought the attendance was going to be, so there’s a lot of questions, but yeah we came for members 3000.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: You know 3000 members, populous from the town is– the area is roughly 15,000 people so…

Steve: Okay, so that’s actually a significant percentage of the town, right.

Keith: Yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: Totally is.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: So you know we’ll totally– I’m sure we’ll get into you know how you went about doing that, but the second piece of it was after we signed up all those people, we didn’t realize this was going to happen, but an article ran at LA times about what we did and we hadn’t opened the doors yet, and we got a call from the senior vice president of distribution from Sony pictures and she had read about what we were doing and was like hey you know this is different than what we are used to. And anyhow they you know they were like we do ticket stuff. So basically what we found out is that the studios in general were not super happy about what we are doing, and at first they were not– they wouldn’t give us their product.

Steve: Okay. Why would they care as long as you are paying for the tickets of the people that are coming in?

Keith: They cared for a couple of reasons. One is I think that it’s just– it was very different.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: Just you know change is a little bit scary and just you know they’ve been doing the ticket mall for 100 years, and that’s what everybody has done. More specifically there also has been a long history of independent theatres misreporting the attendance since the biggest expense to a theatre is– the biggest expense to the theatre is that paying the studios you know if they’re struggling you know they kind of default or together would misreport a number. So that’s happened a lot in the past…

Steve: Okay.

Keith: There’s a history of that, and so from their perspective the incentives were different now because now you are not collecting money once someone walks in the door. So would lessen even now less incentivized to accurately track or report that information

Steve: Okay, so they were worried about fraud essentially?

Keith: That’s correct yeah.

Steve: Okay, all right and just to back up a little bit regarding the way that a movie theater actually gets the movies, do they have to pay an upfront cost and then the ticket prices, or is it just straight ticket price.

Keith: Yeah that’s a great question, so it varies a little bit between movies and between studios, it’s actually pretty complicated. You– for each movie you actually negotiate a percentage with the studios and we actually hire someone to do that for us– most of the others do. But by and large the deals are a percentage of ticket sales only, there’s not typically an upfront fee. There may be an upfront guarantee, but if you bring in like a block buster movie and only five people watch it, and let’s say your terms work out so you pay five dollars per person that views it, you’re only going to pay them 25 dollars, said and done.

Steve: Okay, all right. So there’s a strong incentive for them to get an accurate head count for people who actually buy tickets then?

Keith: Precisely, yes.

Steve: Okay, and then the other question that I had was what sort of – so I noticed that theatres always are playing some of the movies that aren’t as popular. So as a theatre can you always get the blockbusters or do you kind of have to pay the price and why would you– what’s the incentive for you to show a bad movie at your theatre?

Keith: Okay, yeah that’s a great question. Yeah you know when– before I got into this business I didn’t really realize how it works, but you know the studios do have, they have– they are the sole source of their product, and their products are– the consumers know exactly what they want and they’re going to want a product. And it’s extremely important that we can show every major block buster movie and the studios know this and they are not afraid to use that information to either actually pull products or to just require us to do certain things in order to get a blockbuster movie. So if The Hobbit– the next film of The Hobbit’s coming out and there’s– by the same studio there’s a less popular movie between now and then, they may say hey you know if you want to show The Hobbit on the opening night, we are going to need you to show this film for three weeks.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: Yeah and another thing that will happen is we often can’t necessarily– we have to for every single movie we open pretty much if it’s a blockbuster movie, we will require to keep it for a number of weeks. And even if it’s not doing as well and a brand new movie has come out by a different studio, we may be required to keep that movie for a third week or the like so.

Steve: I see, even though you know this other movie is going to make you a lot more money.

Keith: That’s correct yeah.

Steve: But you can, can’t you just move it to kind of like this little this teeny tiny theatre with like 20 seats in it?

Keith: Absolutely, yes you can do that. And so we’re– you know so we own and operate one location. We have five screens, so we’re pretty limited on the amount that we can do that, but one of our screens is definitely a lot smaller and that’s kind of– that’s where the movies go. It’s the last place that they end up showing yeah.

Steve: Okay, so okay let’s go back to what you were talking about before then. So how did you convince Sony that your business model was good, and that you weren’t going to commit fraud?

Keith: Oh yeah. So Sony was actually awesome. Sony worked with us, they weren’t– they didn’t just say hey we won’t work with you or hey this is different, we are not used to this so we don’t– we won’t just move forward with this. They were able to articulate the reasons why, and to work with us and to have ongoing conversation with us about what we were trying to do, which was amazing

Steve: Okay.

Keith: And we’re really appreciative of that. And so we added– we started adding a number of different auto mechanisms and as we did, more and more studios came on board. So well Sony was kind of the first one to say hey I don’t know about this, this is different. They were actually one of the latter studios to come on board so– but while they were kind of helping us and we were talking with the other studios, we actually had three studios come on board. So we actually opened our doors with just three studios. We have 23 now, there are seven major studios, but we opened with only a limited amount of product because we could only show from those three studios.

But the specific mechanisms are– well the biggest one that something different that hasn’t really been done before is we have infrared camera system in auditoriums that take a picture 20 minutes into the movie, and they take an infrared picture and it’s archived and associated with that exact showing and we keep it. It’s archived for 10 years and we make it accessible to the studio whose picture was playing at the time.

Steve: Okay, so that implies that at any point in time they can just do a quick audit of what’s going on in your theatre.

Keith: Absolutely yes, they can– so we set it up so they could actually see a live video feed while their picture is playing, and the industry is amazing. I mean I did not understand all this, but they– the studios all have auditors that come out, and they just travel around, they get some are local, some travel around and they go into a movie and some are anonymous, some aren’t, but they’ll just do a count. And it’s a way to really make sure and to keep the– all the theatres accountable and make sure that we are reporting properly, so we don’t know when that’s going to happen. So they do that. And so what we’re essentially doing is we’re allowing them to do that for every single show if they choose to, and they can go back in time if at some point in time you know something is suspicious, they can go back and say, okay over all time you know this…

Steve: So is this something they ask for, or did you just kind of come up with this because I would imagine most theatre owners are not tech savvy, they wouldn’t be able to come up with an infrared system, right?

Keith: Yeah, so you know it was– it definitely came about talking with Sony and we had– I don’t remember if it actually came up. If that was actually– that specific thing was brought up by Sony, but were contacted by someone who read the article in the LA times, and they said, hey I have worked in this industry for a very long time and I know how this works, and I know that this is going to be a sticking point for them. And it was actually like a gentle man who just sort of sent us an email and said hey you guys should really consider doing a camera audit system because it’s something that I know having been in the industry that the people– the studios had wanted forever, but nobody had really– no theatre wanted to do it, and so it had never been implemented. So it sort of came from an outside source, but we had internally we had the know how to kind of build out that system and so we did and that’s you know that was definitely one of the– that’s the biggest I think single block in getting the studios on board yeah.

Steve: Okay, and then so I want to get into all that in a little bit, but I just want to talk a little bit about how you got those first 3000 ticket sales. So what did it take? So this theater is out of business, you decide that you want to do kind of like a Netflix sort of model for your theatre, how do you actually convince one fifth of the population that they need to actually sign up for one of these subscriptions? How did you do that?

Keith: Okay, that’s a really good question and I do have to make a huge shout out to Matt Scorns who is my cofounder and this is really– he is the marketing genius behind all of this. So you know I definitely worked a lot on the technology side and we worked through a ton of really interesting things that we will talk about and…

Steve: Actually before you even go– talk about how you did it, can you talk about what the process is like for someone who is actually signing on first, and then let’s get into how you actually sold the tickets.

Keith: Yeah, okay so the process is, there’s a website movieheroes.com and they just go on to that website and fill out a little bit information and they sign up for the membership, basically provide their credit card information. We do require that you sign up with a credit card and it’s automatically renewing monthly, it’s 19.95 a month for an individual. For– to add another adult so do like a partner plan, it’s $15 to add someone else to the plan, and then children, 12 and under are $10. So you sign up online and then at that point we had made the promise that we weren’t going to charge anyone unless we open the doors and unless we hit the goal, so it’s a kind of zero risk thing. Now that we’re operating, someone signs up online, they can sign up in person or online, they come in and they get a membership card and that sort of thing so.

Steve: Okay, and so once they get to hear they just show the card and they can just go right in?

Keith: Yap, they swipe it over RFID sensor and they put a ticket and move on in and yeah.

Steve: So how do you, how did you come up with those prices I’m just curious. So 20 bucks the average ticket price these days is over 10 bucks right, so you just estimate that people would watch less than two times per month or this was…

Keith: Yeah, so our process was really around– it was an optimization problem where we were like really trying to look at– yeah I have an engineering background, but I’ve also done quite a bit of– I worked kind of in a finance position when I was at Lockingbird [phonetic] for a little while. I did a rotation there, so kind off in the spreadsheets too, so I built a little financial model that could take into account what our expected total costs were. So the overhead cost plus all the marginal costs at various levels of attendance.

So what we did is we had that model, but what we kind– we kind of independently did a kind of a little price elasticity estimation, so what we did is we said the three of us can work on the startup idea at the time all went off on our own and asked people, hey if it was $10 would you sign up for a month, if it was 30 dollars, if it was 40. So we built a little percentage of convergence, so we started with you know, if it was free we all want say– if it was free all the way up to I think we did $50, and then we sort of averaged all that.

Steve: How did you get the data, sorry did you send out surveys or…?

Keith: No we just– it was super simple, it’s just like our personal estimation plus like we went out and asked like 10 people or you know just like asked our family and friends who live in the town like hey what would you pay, what would you pay? How much would you pay? And then just flogged that in and really it’s like you know obviously the zero dollar won, we operate in a loss, but at you know some point less percentage of people signed up that they would pay more, so it was an optimization arrived you know all three of us separately and together we arrived at $20 was our estimation of the likely most profitable figure.

Steve: Okay and then you mentioned earlier and I’m sure this is– it varies across all movies, but you said in a blockbuster you know 80% of the ticket sales goes to the theatre, I mean not the theatre but to the movie studio.

Keith: Yeah.

Steve: And so given that a ticket price is 10, that’s like eight bucks right?

Keith: Yeah.

Steve: So 20 bucks, that’s something like two and a half tickets then?

Keith: Right.

Steve: Per person?

Keith: Yeah, so I used that number, you know that number actually it’s– it goes up to– I haven’t actually seen a movie that did this, but I hear movies that are 90% have been 90% in the past.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: Our average is a bit lower though because what happens that’s the first week and the second week is you know it might be– let’s say that a blockbuster opens at we’ll just say 70%, the next week is probably going to be 60% and then at 50% so…

Steve: I see.

Keith: As you know you can set up a contract for a movie like that or flat. We intend to do more flat, percentages one doesn’t vary week to week because we try to keep a movie for a short amount of time, so we try to keep them for two weeks, but anyhow it works out to be often closer to 60%.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: If you pick a movie a few weeks out like, three weeks out you can often get it for 35% so…

Steve: Got it, okay.

Keith: Yeah.

Steve: Okay, and so now you had this ecommerce side up where people could sign up, get their cards, how do you get the word out about that side?

Keith: Okay so there was– we had access to the theatre itself which is nice, and so what we did is we put on the mackee [phonetic] outside of the theatre and we said we really kind of taking cues from Apple and the way that they’ve got a lot of free marketing from being a little bit cryptic and letting the rumors– the rumor mill run and people just kind of, curiosity get peaked. So we posted on the side of the building– there is a way to save the theatre, you will find out soon and posted that all over Facebook, started a Facebook page called ‘save the met’ the Met is the name the name of the theatre.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: And this was Matt’s doing, Matt Scorns and so we really tried to not let anybody know what was going on, but really peak peoples curiosity. And so let that run for a while even while we were in the background kind of trying to build up all of this and…

Steve: I’m sorry, so this movie theatre is part of a plaza or a mall.

Keith: Yes it is part of a shopping centre.

Steve: Okay, so there foot traffic and then they’ll see these signs on how to save the theatre.

Keith: Yes and its right on [Inaudible] [00:25:39] little mountain town right at the entrance to Semi National Park. It’s on the corner of the two highways that come to the town, so there’s a lot of foot traffic and there’s a lot of you know it’s on the side of a building so people that drive buy can see it.

Steve: Okay, and in terms of your Facebook page, how did you actually get people to like it and become fans?

Keith: So that was really just– there was an existing Facebook page from the theatre, so..

Steve: Okay.

Keith: We put something there to direct people over to this other page to– it’s like, I think it was actually a group, a group to save the theatre.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: And also Matt’s very plugged in the community and really just spread it on through all channels. I wasn’t living in Oakers [phonetic] at the time. We all– it really spread, it’s kind of viral, people– the whole town was like in mourning. It was the cover of the newspaper that the theatre closed. You know it’s definitely one of the really big things to do up here. It’s a small town. You know the population that we marketed to is actually seven towns, they’re all around in the area. They are all pretty spread out, but…

Steve: Okay.

Keith: You know right here. Right in Oakers you know everyone was– it was the talk of the town.

Steve: Okay got it okay, so there was an active interest in these people that they were actually losing something that was very dear to them, like a major entertainment aspect of their town essentially.

Keith: Right.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: Because the closest theater is in Fresno which is like a 50 minute drive away and you know a lot of the people that live up here, they live up here because they like the mountains and they don’t really necessarily enjoy going to Fresno. So to them it was like oh! Man we’re kind of getting sort of cut off from the rest of the world in some ways by not having that content here.

Steve: Okay and so you did Facebook and then you had signs out in front of the theatre, what else did you do?

Keith: So we made a video, we recorded a video that sort of explained what we wanted to do, and pretty concisely and talked about who we were you know that we grew up in the town and that what our backgrounds were that sort of kind of as a way to educate that we were capable to pull out what we were trying to do.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: And a way to just say we were trustworthy because we are here, we are part of the community. My parents own a business in town, Matt’s dad is a teacher of a high school. We both grew up in the community and all that, so we had a nice concise video that…

Steve: Okay.

Keith: Would resonate well with people. Then the other two big things, we did a direct mail campaign.

Steve: Interesting, okay so how does that work out?

Keith: So we just did– we made a flier that we could do– we got a bulk mail permit and we just did drop mail the flier to every single household in actually all those seven towns. We did, it was 22000 homes I think that we sent that flier to.

Steve: How does that work? How much does it cost?

Keith: It was, I’m trying to remember. So it was the bulk mail and when I say a bulk mail there was no labeling. So it’s much less expensive than a stamp, I think it might be 11 cents or something for the mailing part.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: And then we had local– we had a printer here in town whose one of the friend that helped– we started this with his parents own a printing company, and so they helped us out with that. So I think all tolled was maybe $6000.

Steve: Okay, not too much actually.

Keith: Yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: And what was fun is I sold the car recently, and I had cash from selling that car and so I took you know sold the car started a company kind of thing. So that– two places; one went to I kind of got the guy and had a couple of cars lining up, went to two things; one is I took some of my cash and actually start the corporation like $800 of fees to do that, and then the other rest of the cash went to print and mail ads, so something good and symbolically but it was kind of.

Steve: Did you guys do any sort of paid advertising at all like Facebook or Google or anything like that?

Keith: So we did– we definitely did promote it, so when we posted things about what was going on, we promoted those posts on Facebook.

Steve: On Facebook, okay.

Keith: Correct yeah, we got a lot of traction on Facebook for sure.

Steve: Okay, and that was probably a large drive up to the sign up to your tickets. Did you actually have the break down or…?

Keith: Of like how many people came through Facebook?

Steve: Through Facebook, versus actually buying it at the theatre, versus the direct mail campaign. How do you measure direct mail campaign actually?

Keith: Yeah you know actually I– we– there’s probably, we thought of kind of ways of doing that where you have a different URL and that versus other things. And at this early phase we didn’t kind of do the hard work to be very good scientific about measuring things, we kind of just went all out on all of us.

Steve: Okay sure.

Keith: I don’t really– I could speculate what I think came from where…

Steve: yeah, that’s fine.

Keith: But I don’t have the hard numbers on that, it was definitely as we moved along and trying to get our 3000 member we definitely started measuring things a lot more.

Steve: I’m just trying to get an idea of the effectiveness of each style of marketing, so any ball park that you have or gut feel that you have.

Keith: Okay.

Steve: Would be helpful I think.

Keith: Okay, well I will say this, so we did we did a second direct mail campaign while we’re pretty far along. So we gave ourselves 30 days to– we’d negotiate with all the parties involved and we wanted– the current owners of the theatre we basically told them “hey can you hold off on closing theater and selling off things,” and if this works we’ll take over your liabilities and we’ll operate the theatre. So we gave ourselves just 30 days, and during that time you know the day– I’m really going to have trouble picking up a good number because we had…

Steve: It’s okay.

Keith: We had the front page of the news paper plus we released some Facebook plus the direct mail, but what I will say is we did another direct mail campaign probably 20 days in because we were– we still had 1000 to go you know and we only had 10 more days and things were slowing. And we saw almost zero, it was like 50 more sign ups, then it was like a very small bump from hitting all the households a second time. So whether we were saturated or what, we really felt like we didn’t get a ton out of that, but you know having the multiple touch points I think showed that we were serious, and kind of ensured that the tech savvy versus and the non tech savvy gap.

Steve: Okay, and so did you guys do any Google stuff or Bing or anything like that, just mainly Facebook and direct mail?

Keith: Yeah, Facebook, direct mail, cover of the newspaper in town definitely helped. We did a lot of– and again this is something that really only works when you have a single geographical location be applicable. We did– the youth in the town was greatly mobilized and that organized all this, so we had a lot of junior high and high school kids dress up like super heroes, and like stand on the corners of the streets with signs that say like save the theatre and you know that got a lot of coverage too because of that, and we also set up tables at the grocery stores and we had laptops there and iPads and people could sign up as they walked in.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: Yeah.

Steve: That’s cool.

Keith: There was definitely a ground campaign.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: That went on too.

Steve: Okay, so let’s switch gears a little bit because I want to talk about what I think is really cool about your business which is everything that you put together to enable this sort of Netflix style of movie theater viewing. You’ve taken that and you’ve actually created a technology that you can actually license out to other theaters, so how did you go about doing that, and what did you get actually? How does it work?

Keith: Okay, yeah well, so from the start you know I mentioned before this kind of like two perspectives to the story, and one is definitely we really wanted to save our hometown theater and it was something that was a huge motivation. We also from the start saw as an opportunity to test out a new business model and we didn’t really know how successful this new business model would be or not. And it was– it’s been very successful in ways we didn’t anticipate and just to expand on that a little bit, our members watch movies at a rate six times of national average.

Steve: Wow.

Keith: And the attendance to this theatre is three times what it used to be.

Steve: Okay and then I would imagine that the concessions have gone up three Xs as a result of this too, right? Which is the bread and butter of the theatre.

Keith: Exactly and…

Steve: Okay.

Keith: Sort of this is something– it’s so interesting because the– it seems like a fairly trivial change, changing the nature the way I which a consumer pays for a product and so a change from pay per view to unlimited flap payment seems very trivial, but there’s so many things that follow from it. So one is that six times attendance, but also there’s people buy a lot more concessions. So not only are we selling three times as much, we are selling more than three times as much because people buy– each individual person that comes in buys more than they used to, and we believe that that’s because people are used to spending a decent amount of money when they come to the theater, and they didn’t pay for the ticket at that time you know it’s a suncky kind as it cost in the past, and so they feel like they didn’t buy anything so they might as well buy something. So the people that used to buy popcorn now buy popcorn and a soda, and the people that used to not buy anything now buy popcorn.

Steve: I can see that because you’ve already– you’re not paying any money at some cash, you probably forgot about it.

Keith: Yeah.

Steve: And it’s like you’re going for free, you may as well buy something.

Keith: Yeah.

Steve: Okay, cool.

Keith: And so you know the end and total version of the six times the national average is people tell us that they used to have this conversation in their head and say, okay what are the movies I’m going to actually experience properly in the movie theatre and right when it comes out, and what are those three movies for the summer? Or two movies for the summer, or four movies for the year, and the rest they just have this assumption that “oh I’m just going to wait and I’m just going to watch it on my small screen at home,” and they tell us that they now no longer ask themselves that question. And now every single movie that comes out if they think it might be interesting, they think they might like it, they come and try it, and if they don’t like it they can walk out and they don’t feel guilty because they didn’t spend any money.

Steve: I would think the same way. I always wait for stuff to go out on video actually, but if I had this membership I would probably go to the movies a lot more. Yeah totally, I can totally relate to that.

Keith: Yeah, so it’s been pretty profound, the benefits have definitely been profound.

Steve: Okay, so let’s talk about the stuff that you’re licensing to other theatres. How do you reach out to other theatres, and how do you advertise that part of your business?

Keith: Yeah, so I said that because what we realize is it’s such a benefit. So it worked out so well that we realized that this is definitely something that could work well at other locations.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: And so we were– we got noticed a bit because there’s this service called the rain track which is this site that theatres report their ticket revenues– their ticket revenue to, and other theatres have access to this. So this is somewhat public knowledge how well a theatre is doing, and our theatre tripling its attendance is a really big deal for theatres in the California, in this region, we’re the highest growth.

Steve: Wow, okay in all of California?

Keith: Yeah in the region, it’s called– we’re not actually considering the San Francisco region all of the way over so if somebody, so yeah…

Steve: Okay.

Keith: But it’s a vast region.

Steve: Wow, awesome.

Keith: Yeah, and so we got noticed by you know studios were very happy about that, but we were asked to speak at a conference, National Association of Theatre Owners Conference about what we were doing because we were doing something different and it has proven to be successful. And that was a regional conference and then later we were– we spoke at a much larger conference, which is the same association’s national, actually it’s an international conference. So we’ve been speaking about what we’re doing, and that’s the main way that we’ve gotten in contact with other theatres. And so what we have is we have packaged basically a complete system from what we’ve learned that we’ll convert a theater from a ticket theatre to a membership model theatre.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: And that system includes the technology we have, so there’s a new point of sale system supports all of RFID cards and has the system we talked about before.

Steve: Is that a piece of hardware then?

Keith: Yeah, so there’s….

Steve: Okay.

Keith: There’s– it’s actually come to two components to each point of sales station, there’s an iPad the employee operates, and then there’s– we do still take cash so everybody’s credit card is linked to their little nifty movie heroes RFID card, so they can just you know just buy the concessions, and if they have friends with them they can buy tickets for their friends, that’s another privilege of being a member. But that’s…

Steve: Very clever.

Keith: Yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: It’s kind of like you’re in a cruise or something where you sort of you know.

Steve: Yes.

Keith: That payment method just go up and get more popcorn, walk up there, you don’t have to bring out– you actually don’t have to get your wallet– get the card out of your wallet because it’s RFID, so we can actually read it by proximity if you’re within.

Steve: That’s dangerous.

Keith: Yeah, it is.

Steve: Nice, clever okay.

Keith: Yeah so that is how that we also– so it’s a complete like just point of sale station or cash draw and all that, so we have actually developed that sort of from the ground up, we have a piece of hardware that, that hardware plugs in to an iPad, comes together and makes a specific station.

Steve: So basically it’s just an iPad with a sensor and you probably coded something, an app to handle all this stuff, is that accurate?

Keith: That’s correct.

Steve: Okay and then did they get the website component also?

Keith: Yeah, so they get sort of a theatre management tool that has a lot of back office stuff for doing reporting for your– it reports to all these, the studios and to the screen track service I talked about. So just some of the things that theatre need to maintain, to manage a theatre and also the financial side, so reports to go to your book keeping software, that sort of thing.

Steve: Was that written from the ground up, or is it based on a platform?

Keith: That was actually for better or worse all this has been written from the ground up.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: And the reasons behind that are really because we wanted something very specific and sort of it’s kind of funny because looking back it’s like because of the software background– because of my software background it was something that we could do. And so that’s the approach that we did, and we sort of looked briefly into other systems and they didn’t have the membership component, they didn’t have the RFID component and some of the things we had, so instead of trying to modify– getting and modifying one of those platforms, we sort of…

Steve: Okay.

Keith: Started from the ground up, but so we also get that camera auto system that I talked about and they get some really awesome marketing material that they run on screen that helps them through the transition from a ticket model to a membership model because it is a rather large conceptual shift.

Steve: Yes.

Keith: That you need to get people warmed up to a little bit.

Steve: So do you actually sell the hardware or do you tell them to buy the hardware component and you supply the software that runs.

Keith: So we actually, we provide the hardware.

Steve: Okay you provide the hardware, okay.

Keith: And so it’s a revenue share because what we’re doing would typically be classified as a franchise, so learned a lot about franchise law and all that, but we actually didn’t want to be classified as a franchise. So you know for various reasons, but– so what we are is– it’s kind of a franchise, so we do programming. So the theatres that are operating with our systems, it’s they maintain their name, but they’re powered by movie heroes is sort of the co-branding.

Steve: Nice, okay.

Keith: And it’s like a– basically it’s kind of like a credit card processing feed. So we actually– the membership dues and actually all the concession sales– that money flows kind of through us, so we orchestrate that and we take a fee off the top of their gross revenue for the theatre and we remit to them the remainder.

Steve: Wow.

Keith: So there’s no like accounts receivable and they just get you know after we take our fee off the top which is in the same way that a lot of credit card processing companies work.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: That’s how we operate, and we charge nothing upfront and we don’t charge them for the hardware. So they are basically licensing the entire system from us including the hardware.

Steve: I see, okay wait, so all the money flows through you and then you pay them?

Keith: Yeah.

Steve: That’s how– wow that’s incredible, okay.

Keith: The reason why– that’s actually the reason why I’m missing some technicalities, but so in order to be classified as a franchise you need just like a three prompt test, and one is that there is a trade mark involved that either is required to be used or can be used if you offer a system and that system is super easy to find and lastly if you charge a fee. If you do all three of those things and you are a franchise and you have to go through a pretty lengthy registration process with the federal government and with each state to be registered as a franchise.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: So we actually don’t charge a fee because it’s not technically a fee because there’s never the payment never flows from the theatre operator to us.

Steve: I see, okay.

Keith: The bureau collects money from the customers, and then remits a portion to the theatre operator.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: And so their money never flows in the direction towards us, it flows from customers to them.

Steve: Well that’s kind of dangerous. If I were to own a theatre and then all the money from all concessions– I imagine you don’t pay out right away either, right? Maybe at the end of the month or something?

Keith: We pay– it’s a rolling– we pay every day. It’s like a two day loaning window.

Steve: Okay, that’s not too bad.

Keith: So they’re getting it right away, yeah.

Steve: Okay, I was going to say because then you could actually invest that money on the float also.

Keith: Oh yeah, it’s actually so we use stripe as…

Steve: Okay.

Keith: Our processor and they allow us– we’re using them as a clearing house, so the money basically goes to stripe, it never hits our bank accounts either. The bulk of money because we actually orchestrate through stripe. The software says, oh go charge the member this much, oh take this portion of that money and give it to the theatre operator or take this portion and give it to media heroes. So it never lands on our books, it never lands on– the whole doesn’t land on their books, it’s actually kind of split payment from the customer.

Steve: Right, this is all very cool and what I really like about it is it’s all from like off the shelf component so to speak, right?

Keith: Yeah.

Steve: Straight to handle all the pre-payment processing, you have iPads and then sensors and that sort of thing to handle the RFID. Everything is much more doable today, like if this is like 10 years ago, this was a lot harder.

Keith: Oh man if it was 10 years ago this would be so much harder. The other amazing piece of technology that we’re using, and we’re using actually all over the place, I know I could rave about this forever, but we use Raspberry Pis.

Steve: Really, that’s incre– yes I am, that’s incredible. I’m sure my audience isn’t, but Raspberry Pi is– how much is it, like 25 bucks, 35 bucks?

Keith: 35, yeah.

Steve: 35 bucks and it’s essentially like a computer on this tiny board that has an arm on it, right? I think.

Keith: Yeah.

Steve: And it just– you can do a lot of stuff with it, program it, tell it to do whatever you want.

Keith: Right.

Steve: So what do you do with Raspberry Pis?

Keith: So, yeah I like to think of Raspberry Pi as being– it’s kind of like an iPhone with a similar process with an iPhone. It’s a complete computer for $35, and so it’s almost standalone entity. And so all of our register stations have a Raspberry Pi, and that’s the piece that all the sensors plug into. So there’s a credit card reader that plugs into it, there’s RFID reader that plugs into it, the cash drawer plugs into it, ticket printer, receipt printer, all these plug in to Raspberry Pi and that what services that little hardware that’s right there. And then the Raspberry Pi and iPad talk to each other.

Steve: That’s awesome.

Keith: And it’s $35, I mean it’s amazing. So the original version of the software that I wrote when we first opened was written on a PC, and so we had this big clunky PC sitting at each register station, and this was like expensive for on one, two it was hard to maintain because windows– we were running on windows and we were constantly having some issues with that and updating it and all that.

So it was like hey an iPad plus a Raspberry Pi is an extremely inexpensive solution and it is way more maintainable because it was Linux, I mean I can update all these Raspberry Pis, we have all these locations from my laptop sitting at a coffee shop you know in a second, it’s amazing. So absolutely love the Raspberry Pi, and it is such an important component and you know you mentioned that all these are kind off the shelve things and so true, and I was thinking about that before we got a call here, it’s about like there is– so many things are accessible to the individual person that didn’t use to be including like yeah stripe and all of our stuff runs on Amazon servers, and it’s like stuff that there was no upfront investment, it’s like all pay you go kind of stuff.

Steve: That is awesome, that yeah. I’ve always wanted to play with one of those Raspberry Pis, I don’t want to bore the listeners, but may be afterwards I…

Keith: I’ll say one of the places we are using them, we are also using them for the cameras. So the cameras are actually a Raspberry Pi, it’s sitting up there in the auditorium and we have– there’s a Raspberry Pi, [Inaudible] [00:47:11] camera allows you to pick up infrared light, there’s no infrared filter on any of them. So our cameras as well– our original version again wasn’t Raspberry Pi, but we have a second version of our audit system that runs on Raspberry Pi. So we run the theatre basically show up like you know the last theatre we did there’s– it’s a six range, so we show up with 12 Raspberry Pis.

Steve: That’s awesome.

Keith: We just start installing.

Steve: I imagine you built a case for them too; it’s just a bare board when it comes, right?

Keith: Yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: So we had a couple off the shelve cases, but even that it’s like we found a case that you know for the ones that’s register station ones we don’t need the camera. So there’s a case for without camera, it’s five dollars I think, and then one with the camera there’s a different case that supports the pi and the camera in one enclosure, so pick those up. So it’s been amazing how we just piece together these components and it’s like hey we have something important.

Steve: That’s awesome and it’s really super cheap too, that’s amazing.

Keith: Yeah.

Steve: So how do you guys plan on expanding, is this going to go nationwide or are you just focusing on California at the present time?

Keith: This is actually we– Monday, just this week we launched a campaign to save a theatre that’s in Maryland.

Steve: That’s my hometown.

Keith: Oh no way, this is…

Steve: My homestead actually, yeah.

Keith: Frostburg, Maryland.

Steve: Okay yeah, I’m not from there.

Keith: That’d be cool.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: So we’re in the process right now, we just launched the campaign and there in the same exact situation that we were in– that Matt was in, so we have, we only operate the Max cinema, the other locations we have three other locations that are using our system. They– we don’t own and operate those, we have licensing our systems to them.

Steve: Okay.

Keith: But this one, it closed and the owners walked away. So if this campaign is successful we’re trying to get 2000 people to sign up in a town of 10,000, in a county of 70,000 trying to get 2000 people to sign up. If they do we’re going to take over, we’re going to actually own and operate. So the second location that we own and operate, so from expansion perspective there’s really a kind of too prompt approach here. One is by licensing the system; two is by owning and operating.

Steve: That’s incredible and then since you’re taking over distressed theatres, there’s really no upfront cost, right. You just kind of assume the liabilities and then run it.

Keith: That’s correct, yep.

Steve: Awesome, hey so how did you get into all this entrepreneurship, are you really into like business, do you read a lot of business books, did you have a favorite book or anything like that or…?

Keith: Oh man, let’s see. So I worked in aerospace for a long time, I loved the product, it was awesome. There was a couple of things that I sort of got frustrated with working in that industry, one is sort of the rigidity of it and the bureaucracy, and it’s like systems are just complicated such that they required that. And I just sort of realized that I really wanted to do something a little more free and where my individual contribution had a more significance on the outcome. And so I really started looking at hey I think I would be happier and enjoy doing entrepreneurial things more, and so I started sort of developing a skill set that I thought would help me out with that, and started learning web stuff because I was doing more scientific computing at the time.

And then I thought that it would be kind of good to go experience the startup world a little bit and I joined Clout, and that was an amazing experience, I had a great-great time there and learned a lot and was able to contribute a lot there, it was really fun. But yeah I definitely, I do read a number of books. I was thinking about business books, The Lean Startup is one that I think was quite influential in this space here because we really wanted– you know before we actually assumed any liabilities at all, we were able to just– you know I spent a few nights building up this little website where people could sign up, and it was super low risk initially.

Steve: Were you just gathering emails at this point, or there was money exchanging hands at that point?

Keith: At that point it was– we wanted to make sure that it was a real offering and not just a yeah. So it was more the real offering, no– we were getting credit cards, but we weren’t getting any– we weren’t charging anyone, because we were pretty…

Steve: Got it, so you were just collecting them on– customers on stripe essentially, right?

Keith: Precisely. We promised that if we reached our goal we would charge everyone, so in some ways this is like a variant of like an Indiegogo or you know a site like that works like hey if we reach this goal…

Steve: Yeah, like a kick starter.

Keith: It’s a kick starter, but with a brick and mortar component and with a– you’re signing up for a recurring monthly charge not a one time charge variant.

Steve: Got it. Okay, awesome Keith, I don’t want to take up too much of your time. We’ve been talking for like 50 minutes already. Where can people find you online if they have questions, and how can people get a hold of you if they own a theatre or they want to figure out or learn more about movie heroes and what you guys are all about.

Keith: Yeah, you can definitely go check us out at movieheroes.com and you can email me directly at kieth@movieheroes.com.

Steve: Well, awesome Keith. I for one learned a lot, I had no idea how movie theatres worked and the economics behind it all. So I sincerely thank you for coming on the show, and I think the listeners will find this very interesting.

Keith: Cool, well thank you.

Steve: All right, then thanks.

Keith: All right.

Steve: Here are my key take away points in this episode. The cost of building hardware and software these days is practically zero, and with just an iPad and a $35 board called a Raspberry Pi, Keith and his partner Matt have truly disrupted an entire industry. Now granted Keith and Matt are exceptionally intelligent people, but this just goes to show that starting a business today is really about initiative and drive, and there’s real no excuse not to try. It doesn’t cost a whole lot of money to get started, and you can begin immediately.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode40 and once again I just want to thank 99designs for sponsoring this episode. I know a lot of you listening are waiting on the sidelines and trying to get the courage to start your own online business. And I also know a lot of you guys out there are already running your business and know that your website design could be better. Now designing a website or getting any sort of graphical design help is not intimidating anymore thanks to 99 designs, where you can get over 300,000 designers to compete for your design. All you’ve got to do is list your design on their site, and within 48 hours you will get dozens of design submissions to choose from and from there you can ask for slight tweaks and changes until you are a 100% satisfied with the results. And the best part is that the price is very reasonable and there’s a 100% satisfaction guarantee.

Plus by using the 99designs.com/mywifequit link and telling them that Steve from mywifequitherjob.com referred you, your design listing will be bolded, highlighted, given a prominent background and featured before all regular listings, so that your request stands out among all the designers. So head over to 99designs.com/mywifequit and get something designed right now. And then finally if you enjoyed listening to this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests. It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

And as an added incentive, I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

039: How To Run A 6 Figure Mommy Blog While Homeschooling 7 Kids With Toni Anderson

Toni Anderson

Today I’m thrilled to have Toni Anderson on the show. Toni and I met at the World Domination Summit last year and she’s one of my favorite mommy bloggers of all time. I always love talking to Toni because every time I talk to her, I realize how much of a cake walk my life really is.

Toni runs the ridiculously popular blog, TheHappyHousewife.com, where she blogs about how to better manage your household. And here’s the kicker. The woman has 7 kids and she homeschools all of them. In addition to the blog, she also runs a conference and she consults on the side.

In short, her time management skills and drive are amazing and we can learn a lot about how she manages her time. Enjoy the show!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Toni got the attention of Oliver North
  • How Toni convinces you to sign up for her newsletter
  • How to start a blog while homeschooling 7 kids
  • Tips on time management
  • Toni’s early strategy to gain traffic
  • How to use Google Groups to boost your blog
  • How Toni pitches other bloggers for guest posts
  • How to use Pinterest effectively
  • The importance of having an email list
  • How Toni makes money with her site
  • The right way to run sponsored campaigns
  • How to get sponsored campaigns for your blog
  • How long it took to make money with her blog
  • CPM networks vs Adsense and why you need to use DFP

Sponsors

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the my wife quit her job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consultations every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

Now before I begin, I just wanted to give a quick shout out to this episodes sponsor 99 designs. Now originally I wasn’t going to take any sponsors at all but 99 designs caught my eye, because I suck at design. And in fact when I first started my online store back in 2007 the design for my website was terrible, and I had absolutely no idea who to turn to. Now fast forward to today 99 designs is a site where you can provide a description of anything that you want designed whether it be a logo, a webpage, a t-shirt, pretty much anything, and have dozens of designers compete to deliver you the best design possible. And by best I mean you get to choose your favorite design among dozens of submissions from a pool of over 315,000 designers.

So if you are design challenged like I am, I highly recommend that you go over to 99designs.com/mywifequit, and if you use that link and tell them that Steve from mywifequitherjob.com referred you, your design listing will be bolded, highlighted given a prominent background, and featured before all regular listings so that your request stands out among all of the designers, and in fact this special offer is worth 99 dollars. So if you need a logo, website, t-shirt, business card, or anything designed go to www.99designs.com/mywifequit now onto the show.

Welcome to the my wife quit her job podcast where. We will teach you how to create a business that suites your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here’s your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the my wife quit her job podcast. Today I have a very special guest on the show Toni Anderson. Now Toni runs a popular blog thehappyhousewife.com where she’s created an incredible resource that teachers others how to better manage their homes. She also runs Digital CoLab which is a conference that caters to web professionals who want to expand their online businesses. But here’s the kicker, the woman has seven kids, her husband is in the military and he’s not around all that often and she home schools all of her kids.

Now is that ridiculous or what, and she does all of this while running a six figure blog, a conference and she also consults on the side. Now I had the pleasure of meeting Toni in person at the World domination summit a couple of months ago, and I’ve got a couple of confessions to make. So when I first met her, I half expected to meet a frazzled, beaten down, disheveled and ungroomed woman who is a little out of shape. Now that’s actually how I picture someone who has been worn down over the years from the rigors of taking care of seven kids.

Now my wife and I have problems with just two, so I can’t even imagine having seven. But much to my surprise, Toni looked great and she was in shape too and she was down to earth, calm, composed, and very easy to talk to. And in fact I randomly went up to her when she was in the middle of talking to someone else, rudely interrupted her conversation and said “hey are you Toni Anderson?” And at the time I didn’t think anything of it, but she was probably thinking to herself “who is this crazy Chinese guy coming up to me?” So anyways I’m looking at my inbox right now and I’m seeing a couple of emails from people complaining that they don’t have enough time to start their own businesses. So after listening to this interview you will never ever be able to complain that you don’t have enough time ever again, and with that welcome to the show Toni, how’s it going today?

Toni: It’s great, how are you?

Steve: I’m very good. So give us the quick background story and tell us how you came up with the idea the happy house wife.

Toni: All right, so I started blogging in 2006. My husband was deployed to Iraq and because of the computer systems there he couldn’t get like the Yahoo and the AOL account emails. So because we couldn’t communicate via email, I started a blog just to basically write him a letter every day. And it was you know, it was a public site but of course no one was reading it but ham or so I thought, and one day I got an email from someone who claimed to be Oliver North’s publicists, and I had written a post, it was around 4th of July and I had written a post sort of a letter to my husband thanking him for his military service.

Somehow, someone in Oliver North’s team stumbled upon it, read it, loved it and wanted to re-publish it in his newsletter and of course having not a lot of experience in this area I kind of deleted the email, it was like “yeah whatever” I’ll also send you my social security number, my bank account, move on. And a couple of days later, I got another email and I think on the third email I realized this was legitimate and they did want to republish my article. So that was my first realization that it wasn’t just my husband reading this site, and perhaps this was a little bigger than you know what I thought it was. I was a reader of blogs– actually I was J.D. Roth that would get registered in front of the first blogs that I read. I read a couple you know mom type blogs, and so I knew that they were out there, but I didn’t really understand that this could be something about a business.

So I kept up with this first blog for– well my husband was deployed and then once he came back he was actually injured during deployment and we spent about 18 months with him in rehab kind of wondering if he was able to work again. He wasn’t able to drive or get himself to therapy, and so I started doing all that. And realizing that we were just one income family that we were like what are we going to do if he can’t work anymore? And he didn’t have enough seniority in the military to retire. So they were talking about like a medical discharge, which is basically where they try not to give you a lot of money, and I realized that I needed to figure out what I could do to start working, but yeah we still had six kids you know. So I thought I can’t really like put them all in day care because that’s too expensive.

So my blog had kind of just be going along, it was very personal and I realized I needed to stop that and start something that was less personal, and more just about life and how to manage your home, because when I got married I couldn’t cook a hotdog. So I kind of learned it all as I went along, and I thought hey if I didn’t know there’s probably a lot of people like me out there that go through the same struggles, and being a military family you know not living close to my own family. So I had to kind of learn it without the help of parent’s, grandparent’s kind of thing.

So I launched the happy housewife in 2008 fully expecting it to be a business. I thought you know dreaming that it would support our family one day– not really knowing how to get there or having any idea how to monetize the blog, but realizing that I thought at some point I could get there. And so I launched in 2008– he actually ended up getting better and going back on full duty, and you know so the pressure was off to sort of make it a business right away, but over the years obviously it has grown into being its own little online empire, but yeah that’s where we started

Steve: The happy housewife– was this your original blog where you were writing personal messages to your husband?

Toni: No…

Steve: Oh, okay.

Toni: I had my kids’ names on the first blog and I knew enough about the internet to know that I didn’t want my kids’ names or real specific information about our family…

Steve: Okay.

Toni: On a blog that I was intending for a lot of people to read. So I pulled most of the old content, and I think there were a few posts that I kept on there and changed the name and everything and launched on a WordPress site.

Steve: Okay. And the reason why I ask this is because I’ve been on your site and there’s actually this really long 30 page article I would say which I spent you know 30 minutes reading a couple of weeks ago, and it’s really personal and it’s got a lot of juicy stuff. It’s was almost like reading a romance novel. Not that I read those by the way for those listening…

Toni: Right.

Steve: But very interesting stuff. So is the rest of your– like I haven’t gone through your blog you know over the years, but is a lot of that that personal, or?

Toni: No, that would be the most personal. I actually wrote that story– I went to a blog conference– I think it was 2009 and when I started my site the whole goal was to make it personal and not like I’m your friend and I want to help you, but not personal and that you’re going to hear stories about how my kid takes off the diaper and eats the poop kind of thing, right?

Steve: Right.

Toni: So I wanted it to be relatable but not personable. But I went to this blog conference and someone talked about the importance of sharing your story, and of course I bought into it because who doesn’t buy into those talks right? I thought I actually have a pretty interesting story. And so I sat on the plane and wrote for two and a half hours of just starting from the very beginning– well when I met my husband and…

Steve: Okay.

Toni: You know kind of hit publish and went to bed sort of thing and of course woke up the next day to people flipping out. I can’t believe you did this or I did the same thing or I did it, it didn’t work, or people that are like, hey I think I know your husband from high school because that sounds a lot like him, and I’ve been reading your blog for a year. So it sort of just got a life of its own and I don’t do a very good job of updating it because it’s it is hard for me to put a lot of personal stuff out there, and obviously my goal in writing that is the only person I ever want to look like a dog is myself. I don’t want anyone, my family or people that I care about to feel that I’m saying anything about them that won’t be well received. So it’s– and you know– but of course your life isn’t really like that, so it’s hard to write it and make everybody else look really good, because then not always but you know.

Steve: I’ll have to link that story up because as soon as I read it, I was reading it and I was like “oh, my God this is really juicy.” And so I pulled my wife over, and what’s hilarious is at the very end you had this little nugget like, if you want to hear the rest of this story you better sign up for my newsletter, I’m like “oh! Man, this is like…”

Toni: And that’s how I grew my subscriber base.

Steve: Yes, very clever and that is how I became a member of the happyhousewife.com.

Toni: That’s right, that’s right and I get hate mail regularly because it’s not finished. You know I get like the email with like the title of that email is in all caps and it’s like, “YOU NEED TO FINISH!!!!” I’m like you want to come babysit for me so that I can finish it. So yeah, it’s a work In progress, plus I’m not dead yet, so the story can’t end, so come on.

Steve: Yeah, but you’re a lot more successful now. So maybe it’s a little less interesting I guess. But, so let’s talk about, okay when you first started happy house– this is 2008, how many kids did you have at the time?

Toni: Six, only six.

Steve: Only six? All right, so how does one find the time to blog with six kids?

Toni: You know it’s something and this is what I tell a lot of people because obviously I work in a space where we help bloggers, but if you’re not passionate about it, you’re not willing to put in those you know 2a.m. sessions to get it done…

Steve: Okay.

Toni: And so you know for me it was about– this was an outlet. This is where I could put all my recipes fun online and my laundry tips and all these things that, it’s like being a housewife I’m just going to say it it’s pretty monotonous, like it’s not fun to do. I don’t care what anybody tells you, it’s not fun to do laundry, it’s not fun to fold sheets, I don’t care how good you are at it. But to me it was fun to find out clever ways of doing it, and then sharing it with other people. So for me it really helped to break up what I felt like it was sort of a boring job at– with it day to day. Like obviously raising kids is far from boring, but things like you know cleaning your house and all that stuff you know not super exciting, and so I felt like it was a way for me to get it all out there, and talk about it you know exchange ideas with people.

Steve: What about the home school part of it, didn’t that take up most of the day?

Toni: Yes it did, and it should– shouldn’t it? Yeah so home schooling and you know when I started I always say my kids were little; they weren’t really little, I think my oldest was 13 when I started.

Steve: Okay.

Toni: You know home schooling doesn’t take up 9 and 10 hours of your day, if you’re doing it well. So you know we would home school in the morning, and then you know until the early afternoon, and then the kids would just play and do things. It’s one of those things that I would– while they’re reading lunch, I would sign on and check things and approve comments and do all that stuff, and then– and you know blogging has gotten a lot different from when I started. When I started you basically had a blog, and I think Twitter had just started, but you know people weren’t on it like they’re today and there wasn’t a Pinterest that you had to focus on you know Facebook wasn’t really used by brands. So as the internet social networking has grown, I think people’s time online has grown a lot too, because you didn’t have to do all this stuff that I think when I started in 2008, you know you weren’t spending five hours a day on a Pinterest strategy.

Steve: Okay.

Toni: You were just writing content you know.

Steve: Right, actually you know that’s a good segway to the next topic that I want to talk about. So, let’s start with the very beginning first of all, what was your early strategy to kind of obtain traffic?

Toni: So I was in the old school approach, probably you were in this too; I don’t know when you started.

Steve: 2009 actually, so around the same time.

Toni: Yeah, so commenting on other sites, doing– getting links you know, so either submitting guest posts to bigger bloggers, participating in like the linking parties. I did a lot of guest blogging, so that was a big one for me was you know hitting up some of the bigger bloggers in sort of the home management, lifestyle type space and then I created a blogging network. I think I’m not sure when I did this, I think it was about six months in, and I just realized that there were several bloggers that we seem to always be commenting on each other’s post and that sort of thing. And I think we’re at that point, I think Facebook, and I basically emailed ten bloggers and I said “hey would you like to start a group?” And you know kind of like a mastermind group, but I didn’t know that’s what it was at the time and you know basically share ideas, promote each other, and work to grow each other’s sites together. And you know almost everybody that started in that group is now a full time income blogger.

Steve: Wow, so can you just talk about how this group was run?

Toni: Yeah, so we used– I think it was Google groups– was that what it was called?

Steve: Yeah, I think so yeah, basically that’s email based right?

Toni: Yeah, so you get a digest, you could get it– you can get like single emails or get it through digest. So we basically used that as set up and we just– I think when we started it was pretty formal and I actually would– since I was probably the most experienced blogger in the group, I would send out little like weekly lessons, like challenges like “hey let’s this week, let’s try to like work on back linking, or this week let’s try to work on email marketing” or something like that. And so probably for the first like nine months, it was pretty formal like each week being a lesson or a challenge, and then after that my site grew pretty significantly after my first year, and I just didn’t have time to look– because this was a big chunk of our time was participating in this group, and I didn’t have time to be as formal.

So then it became of more you know “hey can you all share this post for me?” Or “can you comment or can you go do this” and you know hey back when linkings were really big you know, and you wanted to be the first person to link up at 9a.m. if someone was like in the west coast. You know the east coast would link up the west coasters blog form and things like that. So that’s when it became, as we got farther on and now we don’t really do it at all, we’ve all kind of gone different directions, but we’re still friends. So it worked out pretty well.

Steve: That’s pretty cool, so would that be a good strategy today if you’re starting all over again?

Toni: I definitely think getting in a group is a great strategy. I don’t– you know I feel like the guest posting– I think it still has value, I don’t think it has value like it used to you know, obviously commentings– I think commenting is a great way to get someone’s attention if you’re a frequent reader. I know I know my frequent readers, I know the people that comment on my site. I interact with them usually on every platform. So if they were a growing blogger, I would probably put them on my radar to promote them you know…

Steve: Okay.

Toni: Based on opportunities. So I think there’s still that, but it takes a lot of time. So I don’t know if the time verses value is as good as it used to be.

Steve: Okay.

Toni: But I definitely feel like getting in a group, honestly if it’s just to bounce ideas of each other, I think it’s worth it as long as you give as much as you’re getting.

Steve: Okay and then what was your strategy for approaching some of the larger blogs in the beginning to guest post on?

Toni: You know I just– I would– obviously there are blogs that I would read or were familiar with, and so I would usually pitch them an idea of something that was really relevant to what they were already talking about. So if it was a frugal site you know, I was like “hey, can I write a post about how clock saved us all this money?” You know something like that, so it would be something that they maybe hadn’t talked about to the depth that I could write about it.

Steve: Okay.

Toni: So, you know I did some research and I think that’s really important is I think we all get these pitches from who knows India whatever, trying to submit guest posts for links and you know obviously as bloggers we tend to delete almost everything like that when it comes in. So I think when you’re crafting a pitch to a bigger blog or that you make sure that you’ve really done your research on their site, you know what they talk about and you can add a lot of value to what they’re doing. Because I mean even people like Problogger will take guest posts from people that do a good job in pitching him right, and are creating that relevant content for a site.

Steve: Yeah sure of course. And then today you know you mentioned Pinterest, but are there any particular traffic sources that you kind of focus on today, with all the different social media that’s out there?

Toni: Yes, so I actually have an assistant that does Pinterest for me, that’s one of her main jobs, and so she’s become my Pinterest expert. And when we started I was on Pinterest and I actually– when I started I had an idea that it would be really cool to create these home school boards based on themes, and so you know a theme of like oceans and a theme of pirates or whatever you know, and then basically create unit studies which is something you do on homeschooling around those themes and basically use Pinterest to create a curriculum to put on my site, but then drive back to Pinterest and then drive back to my site. So sort of this circular traffic plan which actually worked pretty well, but it became overwhelming to keep creating sort of these themed studies because we weren’t actually doing them all.

Steve: Okay.

Toni: And so, I had a I had a girl that actually worked for me last year who really worked on honing those boards down and creating that content for me, and then she ended up leaving in the Christmas time not for any reason, that then she just didn’t want to work anymore, and so my other VA now manages my Pinterest exclusively. And from doing things like ransom groups where you know your growing depends so much on content from other people every week and they are pinning your content…

Steve: I see.

Toni: You know really studying like going back on old posts and making them more Pinterest friendly either by changing the images or you know I’ll get an email from her telling me to retake a picture on a recipe because it was made in 2008 and that’s when you didn’t put in pictures with the recipes, right? So you know just creating– taking out that old content because I have so much on my site and really repurposing it so it can’t be pinned on Pinterest and get a lot of new eyeballs on it.

Steve: So how did you become a part of these groups, like how do you find them?

Toni: You know a lot of them from Digital CoLab.

Steve: Okay your conference, okay.

Toni: Yeah.

Steve: We’ll talk about that later

Toni: Yeah, so I think it’s really all about networking and connecting with people and not being afraid to sort of hop in and build those relationships. I think a lot of bloggers are really introverted, and so they’re very-very comfortable behind their computer, but don’t put them in a conference, don’t have them socialize, because they’re not great at really like the networking skills that I feel like are important like in any business that you would own. So for me it’s important, like if I’m in an event I’m not around hanging out with the people that I know, but most of the time I want to meet people that I don’t know to figure out if there’s a way we can work together, because the internet’s huge, right so..

Steve: Right.

Toni: To me it’s like why would I spend half as much money it takes to get to an event if I’m not going to– just to see my friends. I mean we could just meet somewhere in the middle. So to me it’s really about getting out of your comfort zone, meeting new people and then finding people that are similar enough to you to where you’ll be able to share their content authentically like your readers wouldn’t be turned off, but different enough to where– because I mean a lot of us have similar readership you know bases. So it’s the same people that are always sharing, then it’s the same readers that are always seeing everything. So trying to find a few people that you might not know very well, and maybe just slightly outside of your niche, but same type of demographic to work with is really helpful too.

Steve: Like kind of random Chinese people at conferences, that sort of thing?

Toni: That’s my goal.

Steve: Okay, that’s what I thought.

Toni: Yeah, I’m too [Inaudible] [00:21:19] too now, so…

Steve: Yeah we all know who that other Asian is.

Toni: We won’t say his name.

Steve: We won’t say his name.

Toni: Right.

Steve: So that’s cool then, so okay so you’re starting to get all this traffic from Pinterest, what else you got– so there’s search, there’s Pinterest– are you do a lot with Facebook at all?

Toni: You know Facebook for me was really big a couple of years ago, and then I was in the group where Facebook just fell of the map. So which you know to me that’s one of the biggest– never put all your eggs in one basket, right? So I feel like one of the reasons why– I mean I think the reasons why I’ve had a more successful site, in my niche I got in early, I was one of the first people in. Whoever tells you that getting in early doesn’t matter is a liar, it does. There’s a real advantage to that because you have more experience in the space and then I think two is like every year we kind of on something different with the sites. So I think our first or second year, we really focused on our email list which nobody was really focusing on email list…

Steve: Okay.

Toni: In my niche early on. So we did that and then the next year I think it was 2010 was our big year to focus on Facebook. I think I started the year with like 2,000 Facebook fans and ended the year with like 22,000 fans.

Steve: Okay, nice.

Toni: And did things like you know free eBook for fans and you know better content and really like spend a lot of time figuring out what my Facebook folks wanted. And so it did drive a lot of traffic to my site, but at the same time we were still working on SEO, we were still building our email list and we were still doing these other things to grow traffic from other sources, and obviously just that the traffic of people coming back to your site everyday because they like you and they want to read what you have to say, that’s really important too.

Steve: So, with Facebook you did what sounds like just giveaways– a bunch of giveaways and that sort of thing to build your fan base.

Toni: I didn’t really– well I did freebies, so I would…

Steve: Freebies, sure?

Toni: Write an e-book and then give it– you had to be– like my page and then once you liked the page it unlocked the book, and you could download it.

Steve: Is there a plug in that you use for that?

Toni: You know I haven’t done it in several years. What I remember we coded it into Facebook, it was just a code you dropped in.

Steve: Okay and then when you mention that you were doing email marketing, could you be a little more specific. So let’s say you get someone sign up, what do you do after that?

Toni: So I’m not– well I don’t do it anymore, so that’s why we’re having you.

Steve: Oh me, oh okay, right on, okay just curious, okay

Toni: We’ve done lots of things. We’ve experimented with, if you’re an email subscriber then we did a monthly newsletter with completely premium content. So nothing will appear on the site, so we did that for about an year and a half. We saw really great results initially, but then it sort of– it was almost like the excitement wore off and I don’t know if maybe they didn’t feel like the content was up to par, or if they were just they didn’t want that other email in their inbox.

Steve: Okay.

Toni: So initially it helped and then we felt like it kind of stagnated. So we stopped doing it at the beginning of this year mainly because it took a lot of time and it cost me a lot of money to do it, and I wasn’t getting the investment back, yeah. So we’ve done that, we’ve done– for me it’s more like the email subscribers get premium content, they would get coupons or discounts that I wouldn’t put on the site so…

Steve: Okay.

Toni: We would work with advertisers too, they would actually pay for placement in the newsletter but then they would also be able to get like an exclusive deal. And usually that worked well with the home school part of thing, because it’s not super expensive for those companies and most of those companies are like you know mom and pop type of stores. So we’ve done things like that, you know things like– one of the things that we did early on was that since my site has like six different kind of sub topics, we allowed people to subscribe only to the subtopics that they wanted to hear about.

So if they didn’t home school they would never have to hear anything about home schooling because they not choose to subscribe to that section. So that was something we did before and a lot of people do that now. We did that pretty early on and that was something I felt like was important because my site did cover a pretty big variety of things, and I knew that I had– my home school base is not very big, and so I felt those people out there that never ever want to hear about home schooling, they don’t want to feel like that’s important to them you know whatever it’s fine, but they want my recipes, so they can only get my recipes and that’s fine too. And that was a big– that was actually a big boost for me is segmenting those email lists because you know I find that and also it’s great to research to find out what my readers really wanted because I realized people were really coming to my site for the food.

Steve: So curious are you on Aweber, what do you use for your email list?

Toni: I use Feedlets.

Steve: Feedlets okay, so is it really easy to segment with that tool, I’ve actually never used it?

Toni: It didn’t seem easy.

Steve: Okay.

Toni: I have to be honest, it didn’t seem easy.

Steve: So did you have someone like in the beginning for your first email you just say “hey are you interested in these categories?” And then that instantly just segments them to different lists, is that how it works kind of?

Toni: Actually when they go to subscribe page they choose there.

Steve: Got it, okay that makes sense that makes sense, yeah. And I was going to ask you also because it all kind of ties together, what is the business model and how does the happy housewife make money exactly? So you got all this traffic, how do you convert to dollars?

Toni: So part of my biggest source of revenue is either like influencer marketing, brand spokesman, sponsored campaigns.

Steve: Okay.

Toni: So I work a lot with brands either doing things– and one of the things that’s nice about a site like mine is that it actually puts you in that expert category. So I’ve become like an expert home economic person whatever, so I’ve done a lot of work with brands where I don’t even write anything about them on my own site, but I do things for them on their sites which pays really well. So things like interviews for magazines or TV, quote the brands. So you basically get paid to do these articles and then you actually– it’s kind of cool because you’re not even marking the waters of your own brand because it’s completely off your site, but then I have done things…

Steve: Interesting, okay.

Toni: And so I’ve done that with like the [Inaudible] [00:26:45] board and OxiClean and Arm and Hammer and several like pretty big craft.

Steve: As the model for the– like OxiClean for example is it like a commercial or…

Toni: Yeah, they just put all my kids… so I worked for their print last year. So I did– I think I did one or two posts on my own site, but I most– So I did interview I think with Women’s day ladies home journal. And it was all about stain tips and things like that, so I would create articles for OxiClean and then they would pitch those out to you know the different publications and I was the expert. So they could use my brand as being the expert mom, expert cleaning tip lady to then leverage their products in these articles.

Steve: Okay, so they were leveraging your audience right, because your audience knows you and as a result they`ll follow that brand that you are pitching kind off, okay. And then they find you just naturally through the blog. Is that how they…

Toni: Yeah, yeah and you know a lot of it is just– a lot of it is definitely having traffic and being out there in social media and being at events and meeting the right people, you know meeting those marketing and PR folks that go to a lot of the blogging conferences. And then a lot of it is just creating really great content. So one of the things for me that I think is really important is that when you do work on a brand campaign, a lot of bloggers I know you know they write a pretty crappy post and then burry it, right. So they put it up– they are kind of embarrassed if they did the sponsored campaign for a brand that they weren’t really sure about, and then they bury it under like seven posts, which to me that says that you don’t really want to work with the brand and so for me I`ve really tried when I work with brands is to do the– make the pictures phenomenal, like those pictures are Pinterest worthy and you know I`m going to give them a little extra promotion on social media.

One of the girls I was talking with last weekend and was talking about– she actually allocates part of her budget on sponsored post to actually boost Facebook posts for the brand when she puts them on the site. So she is doing some paid marketing for them as part of her compensation. So, I think that’s big, it’s just doing really quality work when you get into it, so that the brands– because the brands know if you do things on time and you submit everything you are supposed to and you are easy to work with, they will come back to you over and over and over again. And it`s actually like in the food space, they pay pretty well, so you can easily just have a full time income off of working with the brands.

Steve: So can you just give us an idea, so it sounds like a lot of work actually what you just kind of described, and so can you give us an idea what the compensation looks like for one of your sponsored gigs for example and what is– what do you have to do as part of that gig?

Toni: So if you were just doing a simple sponsored post, so it’s one post let`s just say it was a recipe creation. So they are going to say, hey we have this and actually I`m doing one in the next couple of weeks with something called [Jeep weeps] [phonetic], and it`s like they are small, small flavor.

Steve: Okay.

Toni: So creating a recipe with that, with the jeep weeps and then put up the post, you’ll promote on social media and that’s basically all you have to do.

Steve: Okay.

Toni: So the compensation for something like that and I obviously can’t say what this compensation is because I`m under non disclosure, but you know would be anywhere for a decent size blog you are looking at between 500 and 1000 dollars.

Steve: Okay and what about something much more involved where you are like the spokesperson on that other person’s site or something like that?

Toni: Yeah, so that’s between like five and ten grand.

Steve: Wow, okay.

Toni: So I mean it definitely works, and I try to break it up into like an hourly wage. So for me personally I don’t want to make less than 100 dollars an hour in anything that I do.

Steve: Okay.

Toni: So, or it’s not worth it for me because I can pass and figure out another way to make 100 dollars an hour.

Steve: Mm-huh.

Toni: So I usually take you know if a brand approaches me or really anyone approaches me and says “hey I have a project for you,” I really kind of factor in how much time it’s going to take, and if I can’t hit that 100 dollars an hour unless it– I mean if it`s Walt Disney world, I will work for free. I`ve said that many times I will work for free for Disney tickets, but for most other things you know obviously being a yoghurt doesn’t pay your mortgage. So you know getting fairly compensated is pretty important, and so for me and you know for me 100 dollars an hour is what I feel I`m earning that at this point and where I am. For some people it’s a lot more and for some people if you are just starting out– I mean, I think even if you just a brand new blogger, your time is still worth something. So even if you have a very small readership, don’t do things for free for people because all these companies have budgets to pay you.

Steve: Okay.

Toni: So even if it`s 25 bucks because you know three months into blogging, charge 25 bucks, charge something because you`ve got to start setting your worth at some level. So I think that’s really important, and I think most of the bloggers that are about my age in blogging years, we all did really stupid free stuff initially. Right, we would blog for…

Steve: Absolutely.

Toni: You know you are looking back and you are like, oh my Gosh I can’t believe I was excited when they sent me a lunch box you know. So we`ve all done it, so you know I`m not sitting here and saying, oh you guys shouldn’t do this. I just think about your time and your time is valuable and your time is valuable, and if you think yourself , if I`m going to do this post and it`s going to take me two hours and they are going to pay me 50 bucks can I make 50 bucks in an hour doing something else?

Steve: Mm-huh.

Toni: So maybe it’s like working on Facebook strategy or doing something on Pinterest or you are networking or writing a guest posts, maybe you can, maybe you can’t. And so consider that whenever you are– to me you need to consider that whenever you are deciding what you need to take because obviously everyone’s time is limited, and so you have to make decisions. To me I make decisions based on what my time is worth and what I think I`m going to get in return.

Steve: So let say you are really small, how do you actually get on the radar of some of these brands? Do you approach them or do you wait for them to approach you? How do you go about getting these sponsorships?

Toni: Honestly I know a lot of people don’t– they are not on twitter any more, but twitter is a great place to connect with the brands. They are all on twitter.

Steve: Okay.

Toni: You know several campaigns that I`ve had are because I absolutely organically not trying to get anything you know, one time– we’re a big family– we love butter, and so I`m all about butter.

Steve: Who doesn’t like butter?

Toni: Who doesn’t like butter, butter and bacon– those are my two favorite brands, right?

Steve: Nice, yes.

Toni: It’s a win-win. So I tweeted out something about butter one day like I think I went to the– I think I was at the commissary and of course when I go to the commissary, I`m going to buy like 25 pounds of butter because we got a big family. So I think I tweeted a picture of like all this butter or something like that and the challenge butter people were like, we love you, you are so awesome, you are tweeting out pictures of our butter. Well, ended up that I got a couple opportunities with them down the road because I was on their radar, and I wasn’t trying to get a challenge butter contract. I just– we love the butter. And so I think that those brands that you authentically like and you know I would say engage them on twitter, connect with PR people on LinkedIn.

I mean if you meet people at a conference, think old school like get a business card, write something that you remember about them on the back of the card and then get on their LinkedIn, send them a request and add that little fact like great to meet you, so happy that we both love pinnacolada you know whatever it is, do some networking like that because in the brand space because as a consultant I work as a brand, and I find bloggers and you are dealing with thousands of bloggers that all look exactly the same to you, right? From an aerial perspective, so if you are the pinnacolada blogger, I remember you, you know.

Steve: I see.

Toni: Yeah.

Steve: Okay, if you are the Chinese blogger, then you remember me.

Toni: Exactly, exactly.

Steve: So what is the approximate time line, like obviously you didn’t start making money and getting sponsorships when you first started? How long did it take actually for your blog to kind of gain some traction?

Toni: I think I actually found when I was cleaning out my desk a couple of months ago, I found my first cheque from Blogger the ad network.

Steve: Mm-huh.

Toni: It was about 11 months in, so that was probably my first you know I think it was like 97 dollars or something. So it was probably a full year before I made any money and then I probably made like 15 bucks here and there, but nothing significant.

Steve: Right.

Toni: And then it was really probably about 18 months when I realized that it was definitely like a part time you know if I had a job I probably could have quit it sort of income.

Steve: So you mentioned sponsorships, I forgot to ask you about some of the other income sources. So you just mentioned bloggers, so that’s CPM advertising, right?

Toni: Yep and that you know those are great obviously all these studies are showing that CPM ad networks are kind of, they are sinking because people are just blind to those adds now on the side line, and they don’t click and they don’t have very effective, but that being said all those networks still exist and you can still– especially if you have something like DFP set up where your adds are rotating based on your CPM model, you are still going to– if you have significant traffic, that’s a great way to earn pretty big chunk of change.

Steve: So just for the benefit of the listeners DFP is Goggles platform which allows a whole bunch of different advertisers to kind of bid for that slot on your site, and usually it will only display whichever advertiser is bidding the most, so you make the most amount of money.

Toni: Yes and I would say if your traffic is anywhere between like 150 plus thousand page views a month, I would get that set up because you can make some significant– you`ll see everyone that I have talked to– and I`m actually getting it set up on my site this month. Everyone that I have talked too is, I`ve heard my income has tripled, my income has doubled from just CPM network income has doubled or tripled just within a month or two of getting it set up.

Steve: Wow! So what CPMs could you expect to see in your space?

Toni: You know it really depends on who– obviously like if you are with federated media that’s really sort of elite network, and so you are going to see three to five dollar CPMs. Some of the other ones like burst and I think it`s called server, it used to be legit, but they changed their name. They are still in the dollar, dollar fifty range. You know most of the time you can set up floor, so when you set up floor they are going to show an add that’s not less than a certain CPM and that’s– I recommend that because you can always back that with adsense– most of these networks. So that’s important too because you don’t want to have them– because they are going to sell as much of remnants space on your site as they can if you don’t have that set. So they are going to be selling the 20 cents CPMs.

Steve: Okay. And so the fact that you have just mentioned that you back those with adsense, does that imply that adsense is the lowest paying?

Toni: For my site it is. For people in other niches that’s not the case, but I have found for my site adsense has not performed terribly well. So I would say you just have to test your own site to know what is performing.

Steve: Okay, and then have you tried any of the other ones. Any of the other CPC type of ad networks like media net and trying to think– I don’t run CPM adds anymore, so I actually kind of out of that space.

Toni: I think we tried them a couple of years ago. We did use media net I think for a very short period of time. It just– I think if you don’t have something automated set up, unless you have and also time manage that and track it, it’s probably not worth it.

Steve: Okay, what does it take to get on federated media’s radar screen?

Toni: I don’t know, talk to Erin.

Steve: Oh, Erin yes. Just had her on the show the podcast will be published shortly.

Toni: Yeah so, Yeah I think you have there’s definitely a traffic, but they are really looking for diverse, they are trying– they really pride themselves in having like we have all these different bloggers from all these different niches and these high end people and these home decor and DIY folks, so I think it’s just a matter of getting lucky and then you know having the right site with the right traffic at the right time.

Steve: Okay, and then today if you look at your blog at a very high level, where does most of your traffic come from, like what are the primary traffic sources?

Toni: So the primary traffic sources for my site today would be Pinterest and SEO.

Steve: Okay, and then Facebook and twitter are on there, but not quite a large percentage?

Toni: No, yeah Facebook has definitely dwindled, I still get a lot of links so I get a lot of referrals from other sites you know and that’s another reason– you know honestly I think it really boils down to for most people it`s just creating really great content, because the better your content the more likely people with link to you, write about you, talk about you, talk to you, share your stuff and really everyone says content is king, content is king, but it`s really true. Anyone can just slop, put slop up there, I mean it’s just– anyone can buy post and you know I have writers that write for my site too, and we actually sometimes we’ll buy articles as well if we need to fill certain topics, but the most part putting that great content out there is really invaluable for readers, and that’s what they want. They are used to you and whatever your voice is, and it`s all these like cliché terms and stuff, but it’s actually pretty true.

Steve: So you know one thing about your blog that is pretty unique in my mind is that you have kind of completely outsourced the entire operation, right?

Toni: Yes. As I say you got be you, but I outsource everything.

Steve: So yeah, my question is your personality in my opinion is a large part of your blog after spending 30 minutes reading your life story. So how do you kind of manage to outsource the writing and still kind of remain kind of personal with your site?

Toni: You know, I try to still write occasionally.

Steve: Okay.

Toni: For me it was actually all based on a conversation I had with Jay Ross several years ago about when do you know when it`s is time to sell your site, and I just– I wasn’t burned out, but I felt like I could get there pretty quickly and because I mean when you start blogging and when you start– you have to be willing to put in 12 hours a day unpaid. And honestly I say it`s a great business. It’s a very hard business to start, but it`s great because it doesn’t require any capital upfront. So if you don’t have any money, blogging is good way to start, but you have to have a business plan and everything else. But you have to be willing to do that, and for me I was tired of doing that, I was tired of outing in you know I was tired of every waking moment being about my site.

And so for me I talked to J.D. I felt like I think I need to figure out how to stop this and we had this conversation and then I realized that I didn’t really have to stop, I just needed to replace me. And so I actually picked my writers from my readers. So people that knew me well and knew my voice, and so people that wanted to be a part of the same theme that I had. And so that’s one of the reasons why I think it worked really well, because I didn’t just go, put an ad on the internet and get writers. I actually got writers from my readers, and I think that made a big difference for my site.

Steve: So are they paid or do they kind of write articles so that they can kind of get some exposure to their own sites?

Toni: They are paid.

Steve: Okay they are paid, okay. And how many writers do you have?

Toni: I think we have about 10 now. We used to have 24, but we scaled down at beginning of this year, just because I felt like there is too much content on the internet right now. So I felt like I didn’t want to be part of that anymore, so I thought how much can one person even if I’m a super fan, how much can I read of one site? And I felt we were just churning out a lot of content, and it didn’t feel– it didn’t have the right feel anymore for me. So we cut back at the beginning of the year, so I think we are down to about 10 writers.

Steve: Which is still quite a bit actually in my opinion?

Toni: Yes it is, when you basically go in half I mean it was a big change.

Steve: So you know for my blog at least I used to have two writers and I actually got rid of them because I kind of felt like goggle was kind of rewarding those posts with a lot more engagement and exposure, and so what I found was my guest writers weren’t getting as much social love I guess, and as a result those articles weren’t doing as well so I just got rid of everyone, I just write once a week now. So my question to you is you post still a lot of content on your site, so what kind of your take on just post quantity in general? Do you need to be posting as often as you do, and what advice would you give someone who is blogging today in terms of quantity?

Toni: I think sometimes it depends on the topic, so obviously if you are a deal blogger you have to be putting out a ton of content.

Steve: Okay.

Toni: Like if you are a home décor or DIY blogger, if you are a food blogger, I think if you’re in your space as sort of the business blogging type thing, you can absolutely get away with one post a week. As long as it’s a nice meaty content type post, right. Where there is actionable items because really if you are teaching people how to refurnish a dining room table in a post and you actually expect people to refurnish the dining room table, they are not going to back the next day to then figure out how to install a window, right? They are going to spend three weeks refurnishing the dining room table before they are ready for more of you.

And same thing with like a business site, if you are teaching them how to you know do some– like the email finals I watched your FinCon talk. If you want people to actually implement some of those things that you are telling them, that’s going to take them a while. They are not going to be able to like sit down in their computer and in an hour and half, have everything finished and tomorrow they want their next job. So I think, when you are writing that kind of stuff recipes, I think you can go once or twice in a week and be absolutely fine, and still drive a lot of content based on everything else that is on your site.

Steve: Okay, and so given what you`ve just said then, with your ten writers what are they writing– like how are they split up to write on write on different topics?

Toni: So each writer is assigned in a niche, so I have writers that only write home school for me. So I have a couple– like Coleen my 740 square foot bungalow house lady, she only writes home school topics for me.

Steve: Okay.

Toni: So she writes once a month, one home school article. I have bloggers that only do recipes and so I have a girl right now, I think she is paleo vegan– I don’t know she is something, but writes– it’s very-very popular whatever it is, but she writes one recipe a month, and for me I found that by keeping the writers in these niches, they become very popular. So my recipe writer who does these paleo recipes, every one of her recipes goes viral, I mean it gets pinned 800 times and gets shared 500 times on Facebook because people have become her fan on the site. So I`ve actually noticed the opposite but I think that’s partially because they stay very focused on topic and she only puts out one recipe a month for me.

Steve: And does she have her own blog as well?

Toni: She does.

Steve: She does, okay. And is she allowed to link back to her blog from your blog?

Toni: Yes.

Steve: Okay.

Toni: With limits.

Steve: With limits.

Toni: Yeah.

Steve: Okay, now that you have kind of freed up your time since you are not running your blog full time anymore, what do you spend your time– what are you working on these days? Do you get to read at all, do you read business books and that sort of thing, what do you do for fun?

Toni: I don’t have any fun.

Steve: Besides going to conferences and just hanging out.

Toni: I buy and sell houses for fun in my free time– no I actually I`m a big remodeler. I do love to destroy houses and build them back up, so that is kind of what I do for fun and then I actually for the past two and a half years I’ve worked for a company called savings.com. And at first I worked with them really closely on their grocery initiative. They did a big grocery– they developed a grocery app and…

Steve: Great name by the way. That app has an awesome name.

Toni: So can I say it?

Steve: Yeah go ahead.

Toni: Favado, I know I can’t say anything else about that. So I helped him with that and then last year I was asked to help them develop like an influencing marketing network. So for the past year I’ve worked pretty exclusively running their sponsored campaign program, which for me I love because that means that I– that’s really been my bread and butter as a blogger. I love working with brands and it’s been really fun to work on the opposite side, and actually we do everything from doing the creative elements to the campaigns to creating the marketing and creative ideas from graphics to twitter parties and everything else, to then you know actually executing the campaign through the blogger networks, which is you know I`m going to have to brag just a little tiny bit, but you know we started from nothing and we`ve got 700 bloggers in our network. I think we`ve done 38 campaigns so far in nine months, so it’s you know it’s definitely growing, but it`s been really fun to me.

And someone asked the other day why would you want to work for a company when you’ve been an entrepreneur your whole career, and I said honestly one of the coolest things about working on this is that I get to use other people’s money to execute my ideas. So for me it`s been really fun because I don’t– it doesn’t feel like work because it`s something I`ve doing for years and I love it, and so to be able to build something from the ground up is pretty fun.

Steve: So you are just a consultant, you are not an employee there.

Toni: I`m just a consultant yep.

Steve: That’s great, do ever take your own blog and you know use your money to buy sponsor campaign for happy house wife or…

Toni: I have not, but I have thought about it, I actually have thought about it. No and I actually don’t participate in their sponsored campaign just because it will be a little bit of a conflict of interest. But yeah that’s what I’ve worked on for the past couple of years and that’s been– to me that has been something fun and different, and I’ve never worked in a corporate setting all those all those are just startups really, but it`s been a fun learning experience. For me I feel like I’ve learned a lot about business in the process which to me has been an asset for my own site and just making decisions for my own site as well.

Steve: Cool and then I also wanted you to mention what Digital CoLab is all about. Unfortunately I was not able to make it this past year, but what it that conference all about that you run.

Toni: So this is a conference that we run for people who work in the digital space. So obviously geared towards people who have websites or blogs, but we’ve worked with people who have online stores, people who just you know have a brick and mortar store and they want to figure out how to work online and increase their social presence. So basically we talk about everything from social strategies, Pinterest, to contract negotiation, to you know taxes and accounting to time management. So basically we try to cover a lot of the things that I think as entrepreneurs we all struggle with.

So I think taxes is always one that people have questions about, because you never know what you have to claim, what’s okay, who is this person going to be an employer or contractor, how does that work? You know things like that to you know Chris Tucker was at our event and he gave some great talks just on like time management and you know sort of blending the business family life, and how to make that work and how do you keep your– how do you prevent your business from taking over your life and finding that like great spot where you can be very successful, but also still have a life outside of your job, which I think is something entrepreneurs really struggle with and you know you it`s really– it`s sad you see marriages fall apart over this and all sorts of things, and families disintegrate and that’s not I think anybody’s goal when they start out.

But you just become consumed with your business, and so it think it`s important to talk about and it`s cool to get in a space with a bunch of people that are kind of doing the same thing even though we are all talking about different stuff. Because we all face a lot of the same challenges everyday as far as our business goes, and someone who is probably in a corporate setting doesn’t really understand exactly what we are doing. So it`s kind of a neat thing to just get it together and you know talk about AV testing you know, things like that.

Steve: You know if people want to find out more about this conference and kind of get in touch with you, where can they find more information?

Toni: So they can go to digitalcolab.com, and you can contact us through the site. We haven’t figured out exactly what we are doing next year. This year we had a pretty small event, it was 100 people and we loved the smallness of it, we felt like it allowed for a lot of like one on one sessions and very like eight on one type small group settings which we feel like in this business is the most effective.

You know those key notes are great for like encouraging you and getting you all exited, but at the end of the day it`s when you can sit down with two or three people and learn. Have your computer there and like open the computer and set it up right then and there you know, get out your Goggle analytics and set up your tracking and do all those things that most people aren’t going to take the time to do after they live an event. So we`ll do something next year, but we don’t know the scale of it, it`s probably going to be small like this year where people can get a lot of that one on one time and actually we don’t want people to go home with a long list, we want them to actually get it done at the event.

Steve: Cool, that’s pretty awesome. I tend to like smaller events as well yeah in my opinion. But hey Toni thanks a lot for coming on the show. I want to be respectful of your time and we’ve already been talking for 50 minutes. So thanks a lot for coming on the show, and it was really great meeting you on the conference.

Toni: Yeah, thanks for coming up to me.

Steve: Thanks for not shooing me away. All right, take care Toni.

Toni: Thank you.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode, so here is my take away. The next time I feel like I have no time to do anything, the next time I feel like my kids are uncontrollable, the next time I feel like my life is just too hectic, I`m going to think about Toni because the fact that she is able to home school seven kids while running a six figure business, a conference and a consulting gig on the side is just ridiculously amazing. And after listening to this episode you have no more excuses ever. I don’t want to hear any more excuses coming out of anyone’s mouth.

For more information about this episode go to my wife quit her job.com/episode38, and once again I just want to thank 99designs for sponsoring this episode. I know a lot of you listening are waiting on the sidelines and trying to get the courage to start your own online business. I also know a lot of you out there run your own businesses already and know you website design could be better.

Designing a website is not that intimidating anymore thanks to 99 designs where you can get over 300,000 designers to compete for your design. All you got to do is list your design on their site and within 48 hours you will get dozens of designs submissions to chose from, and from there you can ask for slight tweaks and changes until you are 100% satisfied with the results. And the best part is that the price is very reasonable and there’s 100% satisfaction guarantee. Plus by using the 99designs.com/mywifequit link and telling them that Steve from mywifequitherjob.com referred you, your design listing will be bolded, highlighted, given a prominent background and featured before all the regular listings, so your request stands out among all the rest of the designers. So head over to 99designs.com/mywifequit and get something designed right now.

And finally if you enjoyed listening to this episode please got to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this info, find the show more easily and get awesome business advice. It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest complement that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. And as an added incentive, I`m also giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information about the contest go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the my wife quit her job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information, visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

038: How Sam Franklin Created A 7 Figure Digital Stationery Company From His College Dorm

Sam Franklin

Today I have the honor of interviewing Sam Franklin, the founder of Greenvelope.com. What’s cool about Sam is that he started his digital stationery company while still in college and he bootstrapped his entire business by working odd jobs.

And here’s the thing. When he first started out, he did not know a thing about graphic design. He did not know a thing about websites or ecommerce. In fact, he learned most of his skills through sheer hustle and by taking online training classes on Lynda.com.

Sam’s story just goes to show that if you have the desire, you can learn how to do anything and start a seven figure business when you have no money or experience. Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Sam came up with the idea for his business
  • How Sam bootstrapped his business early on
  • Why Sam decided not to use a standard platform for his site
  • How Sam developed a site without any technical knowledge
  • How Sam found the time to start his business while in school
  • How Sam found designers for his virtual stationery early on
  • How Sam designed his early cards by himself without any prior knowledge
  • How Sam generated sales early on with his site
  • How Sam leveraged Facebook to drive traffic back to his site
  • How Sam minimizes customer support with his small staff of people
  • How long it took for Greenvelope to start making money
  • The most efficient way to design a website as a non-designer

Sponsors

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the my wife quit her job pod cast where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes and enter my podcast contest where I`m giving free one on one business consultations every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

Now before I begin I just want to give a quick shout out to this episode’s sponsor 99 designs. Now originally I wasn`t going to take any sponsors at all, but 99 designs caught my eye because I suck at design. And in fact when I first started my online store back in 2007, the design for my website was terrible, and I had absolutely no idea who to turn to. Now fast forward to today, 99 designs is a site where you can provide a description of anything that you want designed whether it be a logo, a web page, a T shirt, pretty much anything and have dozens of designers compete to deliver you the best design possible. And by best I mean that you get to choose your favorite design among a dozen of submissions from a pool of over 315,000 designers.

So if you are design challenged like I am, I highly recommend that you over to 99designs.com/mywifequit. And if you use that link and tell them that Steve from mywifequitherjob.com referred you, your design listing will be bolded, highlighted, given a prominent background and featured before all regular listings so that your request stands out among all of the designers. And in fact this special offer is worth 99 dollars. So if you need a logo, website, T-shirt, business card, or anything designed go to www.99designs.com/mywifequit. Now on to the show.

Welcome to the my wife quite her job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Welcome to the My wife quit her job podcast. Today I`m honored to have Sam Franklin with me on the pod cast. Now Sam is actually someone I met through Austin Brawner who runs the e- commerce influence podcast, which incidentally is another podcast you should check out? Now Sam runs Greenvelop.com, which is a business that sells digital stationery for weddings, special events, you name it. Now Sam may or may not be aware of this, but sending digital card is actually very popular with first generation agents. So for example my in laws and my mom send digital cards all the time, like it`s all the rage for them.

And you know I`m not sure that my last statement kind of applies to everyone, but clearly these digital invitations are popular because Greenvelope is doing very well. Now, what I really like about Greenvelope.com is the ingenious business model. They don’t have to ship anything physical and as a result his business can truly scale. And what`s even cooler is that Sam totally bootstrapped Greenvelop.com from his college dorm room. Sam is truly an inspiration to us all, so welcome to the show Sam, how are you doing today?

Sam: Hi Steve, I`m well thank you and thanks for having me on the show, I`m excited.

Steve: Yeah, so can you just give us a quick background story. Tell us about the early days and how it all got started in your dorm room.

Sam: Okay, So I guess it actually goes back to just before going to college at Washington University in Saint Luis. I had taken a gap year before school to travel and kind of explore some different business ideas. I knew I always wanted to start my own business and growing up in the Seattle area in the pacific North West, I`ve always been outside on the weekends enjoying kind of the beauty of the Pacific northwest, hiking and rock climbing and fishing. And so I knew that whatever business it was that I was going to start, it had to be something that related to the outdoors or preserving the outdoors. And so fast forward a couple of months later, my family received a wedding invitation in the mail on thick-thick card stock and that’s when it kind of clicked.

We received this invitation, went to the event and shortly afterwards recycled the invitation and it seemed like there was an opportunity for my generation, the younger generation to send a nice correspondence via email. And at the time I had researched it. There was really one player in the space which was eBay that had advertisements across the invitations. And I thought for weddings well this might– people might want to pay a little bit, not have a free service, but in exchange for paying for the service not have any advertisements, and have really traditional templates that look and felt like a real paper invitation.

Steve: Mm-huh.

Sam: So with that I started drawing up specs on big piece of construction paper and then shortly after I went to Wash U where I started developing, and hired my first developer and started putting the idea into motion.

Steve: So I was going to ask you about that specifically, so are you technical in any way?

Sam: Not especially, I’ve always liked technology and computers, but I have done more of the business side of Greenvelope and hired developers from day one to help build my vision.

Steve: So I know for– like when I was in college, I didn’t really have any money. So how did you actually– did you get seed money somehow from your parents either that or from your credit card, how did you kind of afforded a developer early on?

Sam: So it was a combination of I had started a business actually in high school which was pressure washing driveways, and so I was skipping some classes and going out and pressure washing three or four driveways a day, and then delivering Pizza at night and being in high school and living with my folks it was pretty easy to save that money. So– and that was the initial funding, and definitely I didn’t have anyone full time to start and made some project based things that weren`t really expensive to that kind of start building up the initial ideas, and did as much of the design work, on my own.

Initial marketing– I didn’t really have a marketing budget so I relied on press and experimented a little bit with Google ads. So it really– they weren’t a ton of cost. Getting started I was doing everything I could to keep it as efficient as possible.

Steve: So did you use a standard platform like an open source platform or was everything like coded from scratch?

Sam: I looked into using standard platform, but it was– became clear pretty quickly that this was a custom product. That there wasn’t a system in place for where we were sending thousands of emails that were customized, and this whole idea of this spinning envelope animation that would spin around, and open and people could track our SPPs. So it was really a custom experience. So I had to go with– I took it to different firms in the area and it seemed like it wasn’t really a fit for our firm, it was much too expensive. So I went with the approach of just hiring a single contracting to build up the initial version.

Steve: Okay, and if– I don’t know if you remember but how much did you invest early on just to get started with this?

Sam: Yeah, the initial investment was 25,000 dollars and that carried me through, almost the first year of the business.

Steve: Okay. That’s actually not a whole lot of money. Okay. So what are some of the challenges that you were kind of faced, kind of growing this business out of your dorm room? Obviously you were still going to classes and that sort of thing. So how did you kind of just juggle all of these things, I mean it’s almost like a full time job in addition to going to school full time.

Sam: It was really challenging while I was at school. So between classes I was on the phone. After class until midnight, one o’clock I was doing stuff. Up early doing customer support– not much work life balance for the first year or two of the business, and then I eventually took some time off to focus solely on the business when I had hired a few full time people and it was showing a lot of potential.

Steve: Okay, so you were doing all the customer support and everything early on when you first started?

Sam: Yep.

Steve: Wow! That’s crazy. So I noticed on your site that all of your cards look amazing. So would you consider yourself a designer, or did you actually hire designers to design those cards?

Sam: So I actually started doing all the design work as well…

Steve: Wow!

Sam: And I have to admit the collection wasn’t as strong when we were relying on my design skills, but about a year and a half ago I hired a lady full time, Lauren, whose main role was kind of get our design collection spiffed up by going to different designers in the space and having them create designs for us that we could select and then sell on our site and then they would get commission if their design sold. So it was a way to get a variety of designers and a bunch of designs without too much capital upfront.

And for the designers that are selling a lot of their designs, it`s worked out really well for them. So now we have– I think we have about 35 designers now that we go to for designs and every month we`ll have different collections that we will ask them for. So we`ll do destination weddings this month and we`ll do holiday cards pretty soon here. So we kind of have that network of designers that we have built to create those designs and since it`s– we have all the stats on which designs do well, and I`m a big believer in kind of just relying on what– not what I got things, but what people are actually purchasing and what the stats say. And the stats have shown that a lot of my designs now have become obsolete. It’s always a little bit sad but…

Steve: Really, okay.

Sam: A lot of my early designs that I have made, there is all these like new designers that we have. So we are like Sam we go to take down another one of your designs and then, I`m understanding of it.

Steve: Isn’t that kind of a function of how much exposure a certain design gets though, whether it`s actually popular?

Sam: Well certainly but we do different things to randomize certain collections of designs and if – when – if you go into the site now and then I go later on the day it’s going to be a different order. So randomizing and trying to get as accurate data as possible.

Steve: Okay. So early on, so can you go into a little bit more depth about this arrangement you have with your designers. First of all how did you find them? And then exactly how does the arrangement work? Is it there upfront cost or they just give you the designs for free and it`s purely commission based, how does it work exactly?

Sam: So it’s purely commission based. They give us the designs, so we actually require designers to apply with at least five designs. And we need to– I think our limit is now– we have to have at least three designs from a designer that have been selected for them to become part of the site. We have kind of a call to, a call for designers now on the site. So we are getting emails from designers that want to apply. A lot of designers will tell their friends about Greenvelope and then they all apply. But it was definitely a lot more outreach and we are continuing to outreach to new designers. We you know look at different blog posts like top ten designers of the year or for 2014, and then different searching on Google, finding out kind of what designers people are talking about and then just send them an email and reach out to them and see if they are interested.

Steve: Okay, so back when you were small though, what was the incentive for one of these designers to want to join for free?

Sam: We didn’t start the designer program till about a year and a half ago when…

Steve: Okay.

Sam: So at that point there was already enough volume to make it somewhat worthwhile for them.

Steve: Okay, I see. And so I`m just trying to judge whether you’re just like some superman like you did all your own designs. Did that imply that you had like adobe illustrator experience and that you are kind of artistic in that you kind of know what people want in those cards and that sort of thing?

Sam: Yeah, so I watched tutorials online on a site called Linda.com, which is very reasonably priced and you can watch as many tutorials a month as you wanted, so I just watched one– I think it was like a ten hour one for illustrator and ten hour one for photo shop and that gives you really-really the basics of what you need to get going and design cards on your own, so…

Steve: Okay. Well that’s amazing. That takes a lot of initiative to go and just watch the videos, and just say hey I`m going to start designing some really great looking cards that people want to buy.

Sam: Mm-huh. Well I had no Idea of people who would want to buy them, but it was fun and I tried it out in the early stages, but definitely there is people that do this all day and specialize in it that are going to be better than myself there.

Steve: So just curious how many designs did you launch with, like what was your kind of philosophy? Just get the site out there see if you can make some sales at first or did you kind of build up a reasonable size portfolio before you launched?

Sam: I launched probably like 25 designs, they had nice calligraphies, they looked nice, there was really no competitors in the space at the time. So on day one there was– what we did is we had to save the dates for free and the idea was if people kind of had a good experience with save the dates, invested the time making the guest lists in our system, then they would upgrade free invitations. So that was kind of a nice way to get traffic initially and then also a lot of those people we would send them promotions to upgrade to the invitations after they send out their save the dates. So that was a good way to get some initial customers using the product.

Steve: Okay. And so if we could just go back to just when you first launched. How did you get people to your site, actually how did you generate sales early on? Now you just mentioned this sales strategy of giving them free save the dates, but how did you even just get the word out by you site Period?

Sam: Yeah, there is a couple of ways. One is I actually before we did the podcast, I listened to your podcast– the recent one, I think it was Andrea, she had talked about her clothing company that she has done all the press for and gotten 200 or something magazines and that reminded me a lot of how I started and that same process of just finding people’s contact info, using those media databases, blasting a ton of emails out and seeing if people would be interested in covering the story. So we got a ton of press when we launched. It helped to be in college and the dorm room.

Steve: Yes that’s a great story.

Sam: Story– and a little bit controversial too when we first started and I think I have seen the industry change and become more accepting of electronic invitations for weddings since I started. We launched in 2010 but– yeah a lot of people would be like is this really– you know it was kind of a conversational controversial piece as well– the emailing wedding invitations and the etiquette around that. So that was another thing that helped us get press early on.

Steve: So just curious which databases did you use, were they some of the same ones that Andrea mentioned in the previous podcast? Or could you just shed some light on the specific tools that you used to do the outreach.

Sam: Yeah the– my media info was one that she mentioned. I think that was the one she found very helpful as well and that was one that I’ve used in the past and a lot of it is just Googling articles and seeing who wrote them, and then kind of maybe finding them on LinkedIn and trying to find their contact information. So a culmination of kind of organic, what could be uncovered in a Google search and the databases.

Steve: And what did you write in these outreach emails since you weren’t established at all, how did you kind of structure your email or your cold email?

Sam: They were pretty much plain text emails. I had experimented with more kind of graphic based emails and that was never as effective, just something relatively casual in tone and definitely short and it would just be like, “Hi I`m Sam, I just launched this website and we are trying to change how people view electronic invitations by creating really beautiful online experience, here is a link to a sample.” And so it was really that link to the sample and to our website that people would go to and be like oh! I have never seen an envelope spin like this with my name personalized on the front of it. So really showing off that product was something new that the people hadn’t seen.

Steve: Cool so I– you know so my wife and I run an online store, and we’ve been featured in a bunch of magazines, but those magazines actually, some of them rarely– not rarely I should say, but some of them just don’t lead to any sales. So were there particular publications that actually sent you a flood of traffic, and was it just primarily through these publications that you got your early traffic?

Sam: So it was primarily through publications we got traffic. Like you said it`s not necessarily a ton of sales. It depends how targeted– if it was more kind of like a human interest story in the local news, or if it was a story on a wedding blog with a promotion. So the wedding blogs and the very targeted things would lead to sales, but more human interest stories– I think were great to be able to put on the website, interviews and kind of build the brand out, but weren’t as effective for sales. And so another thing we did for sales is Google ad words, which was a great way to get started on day one, be able to get traffic to your site. It was a lot less expensive to bid for ads back then. So we`d pay ten cents per click or something to get someone to view your site and search for email wedding invitations– very targeted, very cheap relatively. It’s not at all the same now, but that was a way to get a bunch of people to our site early on.

Steve: Yeah, I was about to say because adwords for wedding invitations would probably be like an order of a dollar a click today. So do you still use adwords today for your business?

Sam: Yeah, it’s still definitely part of our acquisition channel and just because of the competitive nature to it and the high cost per click like you said a dollar or more, it’s not something that we can rely on as our sole distribution or acquisition channel.

Steve: Okay.

Sam: So we are looking and that’s part of what we have been doing recently is looking into these other acquisition channels, refer a friend program. We have an event planner program now where we actually go and partner with the event planners.

Steve: Okay. How does that work? That’s very interesting because we are in the wedding industry also. So I`m just curious how– and we reach out to wedding planners all the time and these people just buy in bulk from us consistently. I imagine it works the same way for you. So how do you run your program and how do you reach out to event planners?

Sam: So we’ve just started. We have about probably 30 or 40 event planners now that have signed up. They get– when they sign up for our program, we give them a training on the product so that they can share it with their appropriate clients. And we`ve just– since we’ve recently started a lot of them already booked out their clients for quite a while, so we haven’t really seen it really turn into a huge distribution channel yet. But it’s a lot of people that know about it and hopefully when they are kind of next round of clients come in for the next season, that will be kind of on the forefront of their minds. So it`s kind of a new channel that we are exploring, we don’t know a lot about that channel yet. So…

Steve: And it’s just plain outreach, you just went through a list of planners and you just kind of cold called them to see if they would be interested. Is that kind of how you just found them?

Sam: Yeah, so we just looked through the different directories of planners…

Steve: Yeah, okay.

Sam: And we don’t really do as much cold calling or send emails out, kind of mass emails out to these planners. We do the research and find their emails and contact them, and again a simple casual pretty short, shortest key plain text email. Just kind of letting, almost approaching it as here is something that you know we think you should know about. We`re– this is kind of informational tool to add to your tools. It`s not really like you need to sign up for our program this week or anything, it`s more just informational email.

Steve: The reason why I`m kind of emphasizing all these things on this podcast is, you know a lot of people kind of launch their online business and they are kind of a little bit averse to doing the leg work, and they are just kind of waiting for their site to kind of get indexed in the search engines. And what I want people to realize is there is a lot of leg work involved. There is a lot of cold emailing, sometimes there is cold calling involved and it just sounds like you`ve really hustled your way to the top with this business.

So one thing I did want to ask you is what are some of your primary marketing channels? Like the primary drivers of business to your site?

Sam: So the channels that we talked about SCM, Adwords is big, Google search. So we are always working on our search engine optimization. And really referral business and word of mouth has been so big for us, and the reason that most every month we’ve grown is because the viral nature of our product when people send out 1000 or 100 invitations and have a good experience opening it and RSVPing it, that is advertising the product in itself to all the guests of these invitations. And also customer service has always been super important. From the beginning I realized we are working with people’s wedding invitations. You don’t want something to go wrong or if something does go wrong…

Steve: Right.

Sam: You want to able to fix it quickly. And so that’s definitely something that people aren’t used to working with other electronic invitation sites, being able to call someone or be able to get someone an urgent email to someone on a Sunday. The day they send out their wedding invitations if something goes wrong, and so that’s something that we are always kind overly I guess pleasing people in the quickness of response and quality of customer support. And in turn they write good reviews for us on the wedding websites, and they also tell their friends that they had such a good experience with Greenvelope.

So I think that is something a lot of people might not focus on or realize right away, and it’s something you don’t really get instant gratification on. But if you’re building a sustainable business over the long run, customer support is definitely helpful.

Steve: So does that mean that you have people answering phones everyday of the week, or do you have support people?

Sam: We do, now we have full time support, during business hours here in Seattle.

Steve: Okay.

Sam: But if someone– our support philosophy is always like you know we are a small company, we can`t have 24 hours customer support, but we have it during the day if something happens emerging after hours, send us an email, someone will see it and if we need to, we can call you back. But most of the time everything gets handled during the day.

Steve: Mm-huh. Yeah I would imagine it’s not– people probably plan their invitations out way-way in advance right?

Sam: Yeah.

Steve: So, it’s probably not urgent most of the time. So have you tried facebook advertising at all?

Sam: We’ve done a little bit and we haven’t had a ton of success with it. Not to say that it isn’t a good channel and it couldn’t be successful, but we just haven’t I guess really figured out for our purposes how to do that effectively. And it’s something that you know we will continue to try and I know there is opportunity there, but it’s something that we are still in the process of figuring out. I think the promoted poster Facebook kind of forces you now if you want your following to see your post to promote it, so you can promote it for not too much cost. So we do that just that we invest a lot time making a nice blog post, we want our following to see that. So we do a little bit of that but just blanket Facebook banner ads hasn’t – we haven’t found too effective.

Steve: Okay, and then so that implies that you kind of built up a facebook following over time that you market to actively then?

Sam: Yeah, so we put all of our– we have a blog post, so we’ll do things like feature some of our couples, show their maybe custom invitation they designed and photos from their wedding and make it a board that we end up pinning up on our Pinterest. So really like our whole new rebrand of our site that we launched earlier this year was very image focused, and very– we actually, we did the logo, so it’s very simple and clean out kind of going for that more modern aesthetic.

Steve: Site looks great by the way; I was just on it earlier.

Sam: Thank you.

Steve: So what was I going to ask you. Oh yes, so usually the traditional way to design a wedding invitation is– at least when we got married you know you kind of pick an overall design that you like, and then usually there’s someone on the other end who kind of arranges things for you to make it kind of look nice. For your business is that all done on the website meaning like the customer actually designs their invitation directly on the website?

Sam: Yes so…

Steve: Okay.

Sam: Everything can be done without interacting with anyone on our end, there’s no approval process there’s no– the only reason that we talk with the customers is if for some reason they get stuck at some point in the process, or have a question on pricing, they can give us a call but everything can be done on their end. So for example you pick a flower design– we’ll have a pre made one, and template on that design with a matching fonts and colors for that design that you can go in and just add your name in instead of a name– the sample name on the cards. So we give people a foundation to work with and just enter in their details and if they want to go above and beyond and add their own customization they can do that, but we give them a starting point.

Steve: Okay and this is just all graphical, you can just do it directly on the website to modify your invitation?

Sam: Correct.

Steve: Okay. Wow, okay that’s, that’s pretty nice. So do you have people who require a little bit more technical support like, so I was just thinking of my mum, she likes sending out these digital invitations and usually what she does she– I don’t know what she uses actually, but it’s pretty much pre-made and it’s kind of brainless. Do you find yourself answering a lot of technical questions about your site, or is everything pretty straight forward and smooth for the most part?

Sam: It’s definitely a combination. Some people will go through the process, they’ll be our most high paying customers and we’ll never hear from them once, or if someone buying our smallest account like you know every single time they want to change a little font they call you.

Steve: Okay.

Sam: And so that’s just I think the challenge probably that every business has, we want to give everyone great support, and I kind of see it as we have the people on staff to do support, and it all kind of comes down the wash I think giving everyone the same level support. If some people need to call in more, that’s okay and hopefully they’ll have a great experience and tell three friends about it.

Steve: Okay.

Sam: So we have now about three people doing customer support.

Steve: Okay. And that’s their primary role, right? Just supporting customers?

Sam: Yeah, I kind of to keep it a little bit more varied in terms of daily work there’s normally a combination of other projects. If there’s a down time where there are not calls, the customer support agents can work on other projects as well.

Steve: Okay.

Sam: In combination with the support, so kind of a combination and one thing that I was going to mention that’s really helped us reduce the amount of support is we have a knowledge base of these all these frequently asked questions that we make people look through before submitting a ticket.

Steve: Nice.

Sam: So when we implemented that it was– cut support down tremendously and our supports remained relatively constant even though we’ve grown and part of that is that if we keep getting the– I’m still involved in lot of the support too, and overseeing that and so if we keep getting the same question over and over, we’ll put something in the pipeline to make that more clear or put a little like a little notification cue tip describing that color or that font, so people can find out information before having to contact us. So it’s always this balance of we’re growing but were also making the site easier to use, so everybody has less questions.

Steve: Okay and so earlier on you know as soon as you launched kind of how long did it take you for your kind of business to gain traction? I know a lot of people kind of like instant gratification you know get sales right away, but just if you can remember what it was like when you first launched and kind of just describe you know the early days before your business had any traction, how long did it take for things to start picking up, or you became optimistic about your business altogether?

Sam: Definitely it took quite a while, so I’ve been doing this five years now, and I think part of what was helpful for me is I didn’t really have any expectations at first. I remember I was interning at a PR company that was kind of helping me launch this, and I was telling the owner there, sitting down with him as you know we’re launching this week, I mean I’ll be so excited if I’m getting one sale a week, and he was like “one sale a week?” You need to be getting 100 sales a week, that will justify the amount of time and everything you put in this business. And I think as we’ve kind of you know we went from one sale a week to two sales to you know celebrating every time I got a sale. Now we’re at three sales a week to fifty sales a week and just growing from there.

So I think part of this good customer support and the viral nature of the product is that we’ve always seen the growth which is exciting and kind of keeps me kind of I guess raising my hopes and expectations for it. But also like never really being happy with where it’s at, I think that’s something that’s kind of helped me so far is never really being happy with the last sale, like there is so much more that can be done if you know I’m dedicating my life to doing this I’ve got to be doing it to my 100%. And I see so much potential that every day I want to be coming making you know work as many hours as possible, making the business better and growing as much as I can so.

Steve: So you know let’s say after a year, was it already making significant money in your opinion or did it take a little bit longer than that?

Sam: Well I started in 2008 and was kind of launched in 2010. So no money was being made those first couple of years.

Steve: Okay.

Sam: In 2010 the first year that we launched– I think we did and I can show this number because I think it was on entrepreneur article magazine but I think we had 70,000 of business our first year.

Steve: Okay, that’s pretty good. Yeah.

Sam: Which I was pretty excited about and obviously we had a lot of costs, so we weren’t really making– I wasn’t really making that much money but…

Steve: Sure.

Sam: But yeah, so it’s I guess going into it without a lot of expectations, I was constantly pleased but also constantly convinced by our– what could be done and the potential that’s on it to keep growing it.

Steve: Okay, that’s actually a pretty good attitude to have I think. That way it just– you don’t start making decisions strictly based on the money alone, you kind of are able to focus on the long term for your business. So speaking of which, so you mentioned that you know you tried to not remain satisfied with where you at and you’re always constantly trying new things. What are you currently focusing on now in the present date to grow your company?

Sam: Yeah, so we– what we’re really focusing on is going more and more into the business market. We have seen a lot of potential here, actually when we first launched for wedding invitations, businesses were creating wedding accounts and customizing wedding templates for their business events just because they were elegant and they wanted to sell something nice for their business events. They caught their– had good open rates and caught their audiences attention and that kind of sparked– I was like “oh maybe we should be offering business events as well.” So pretty early on we switched– we didn’t switch, but we added business designs and that’s grown to be over 50% of our business now.

Steve: Wow, okay.

Sam: So we’re building out a sales team now, just a couple of weeks ago hired a sales lady whose been in the event planning space for 15 years, and is excited and came onboard and we’re trying now to go and sell more of these kind of corporate accounts.

Steve: So these businesses probably just subscribe to your service altogether, they probably aren’t that price sensitive and then they continue to use your service right? Is that kind of more accurate as opposed to some of the individual customers that you have on the wedding site?

Sam: Exactly, so that’s the beauty of it. The problem with the wedding customers is you know they have a great experience, they use it once but maybe they use a baby announcement in a few years or maybe they’ll use for a birthday party, but there’s not a lot of recurring customer life time value where as these businesses higher price points renew and send out a lot more invitations.

Steve: So that, so you’re just– the way you’re growing is you’re kind of looking for new markets and then this business one is kind of what you’re focusing on, right? One thing I wanted to ask is and I wanted to ask you this earlier was back when my wife and I actually got married, we didn’t even think about sending out digital cards. It was paper, paper, paper from the start and that’s kind of being the tradition when it comes to special events and that sort of thing. So how did you kind of convince customers to go the digital route?

Sam: I think so far at the point that we interact with the customer, they are already convinced because they’re coming from searches like electronic invitations or email my wedding invitations, so at that point they are already looking and there’s no convincing that needs to be done.

Steve: Okay.

Sam: But I guess right now our marketing is pretty focused to, and the point that we are starting to interact with the customer they’ve already made their decision.

Steve: Okay, okay it’s just kind of gotten more accepted over time and people just know that they want to save the environment and just go digital, is essentially what you’re saying, right?

Sam: Yeah save the environment a lot of, it also saves a ton of time and tracking all of those RSVPs and now we have survey questions so you can track new options and it’s really as much of a data management system as it is way to send the invitations out.

Steve: Okay, and this is just kind of a question for me, it’s a little more on the technical side, but you know when you’re managing all these email addresses you know, there’s a lot of emails that never make it to the end users inbox whether it will be put in the spam folder and that sort of thing. How do you guys kind of manage that aspect of your business?

Sam: So that’s always been probably one of the most challenging things since day one is how do we look like we’re sending invitations from someone else and have that actually go into the inbox. And so that’s something that you know the first couple of years of the business we banged our head on a lot, it’s something that we’ve figured out a lot of different little techniques here and there.

Steve: Okay.

Sam: To you know make the content of our emails in a certain way that meets certain spam scores that we set up all these technical hosting things the right way.

Steve: Okay.

Sam: There’s a lot of little things that we do.

Steve: Okay, so what I was getting at was you manage your own emails still, right? You don’t use a third party to manage your emails.

Sam: No, we send them all out with our own servers.

Steve: Okay.

Sam: Which gives us more control and also gives us some advantages in that sense. So that’s a lot of kind of our technology is that emailing hundreds of thousands of emails at once and getting those delivered to now that were moving to corporate spam filters and stuff.

Steve: Let’s say someone wanted to start some sort of digital delivery system, you know maybe not necessarily cards, but if someone wanted to kind of emulate your business, what sort of advice would you give someone today? Would you tell them to go your route which was a fully custom platform, are there kind of other platforms that are already made out there to make this easier? How would things have changed if you were to start today?

Sam: I don’t, I think you have to go fully custom for this type of thing.

Steve: Okay.

Sam: And I think the most important thing that I’ve learned and that I didn’t do very well at the beginning is creating the specifications for the actual what you want your website to be. There are certain times where you want to be short when you might be emailing your press things and there are certain times that you want to be long and that’s creating specifications for developers that will be very clear and everybody’s expectations are the same on both sides; the developers and the person that’s getting this software developed. So I think that’s something that I could’ve done better earlier on is being very clear. If you want to forgot my password thing, put that in the specs, put everything that you can think of in the specs and don’t be afraid of being too detailed because you don’t make it easier throughout the process.

Steve: Actually can we talk about your specs a little bit back when you first designed the site. Was this just like a word document where you specified exactly kind of in a flow chart how things were to be designed, or did you actually lay out the graphics and then just have the developer implement what you want it to look like?

Sam: Sure, so I’ll tell you what I do now which I think…

Steve: Okay.

Sam: Will be helpful for people creating their site and what I did then which wasn’t at all a good way to do it.

Steve: Okay.

Sam: It was like pretty much like one of those big pieces of construction paper and drew like every single page on the site with little arrows on like one giant sheet, like roll that up and took it into a meeting. And then you know I kind of was like oh I didn’t really understand where the designer came in, where the front in developer and where the– I didn’t really understand how the whole process works. So kind of taking that whole thing to one developer, and kind of trusting that they’d make everything work– it didn’t work out so well. So now it’s a very clean process, so one tool that I’d recommend everybody uses that’s creating these specifications it’s called Balsamiq, and it’s a very quick easy way to wireframe up how you want each page of the website to look.

So instead of having to learn illustrator and you know create all these boxes, Balsamiq is a very stripped down version of that that has– you can drag a button on, you can drag a browser window, you can drag check boxes, and you can just lay– they have all the assets that go into creating a website and you can lay everything out and put it in a single page. And then you can create all those pages and save those out. So you have kind of a black and white– this is all the functionality of the site.

Steve: Okay.

Sam: And then find a designer who probably isn’t going to be a developer to make those look pretty, and get the design how you want it to look. And you’re not ready to talk to a developer until everything is designed. Once you have all the designs, then take that to your development team– a company with yeah Word document or Google document or something that has all the different details and how everything is going to function. But I think, I was just so eager to go to a developer before I even knew exactly how everything was going to work, and I think you don’t even need to get a developer involved until you have all the pages of the site specked out and designed. That’s just what I found, so I guess everybody might have different techniques but…

Steve: No, that’s actually pretty accurate. I mean you should know how everything is supposed to– the developer only comes in at the very end when it just comes time to implementation, right?

Sam: Correct.

Steve: Everything should be designed ahead of time, otherwise– because the developer is not a designer, all right?

Sam: And a lot of times the designer is going to be the one that’s going to give feedback that “oh your button might be better here,” and you can kind of work organically in that process before going to a developer, and having a developer develop something and the, the designer comes in and he’s like “oh this doesn’t make sense with the button here,” and then now the developer now you know, you’re paying the developer to go back and change it. It’s just last step of the process is the developer.

Steve: Okay, and then one thing I forgot to ask you about also was conversion optimization. Are you guys constantly running conversion tests in the background for your sites, and what do you kind of focus on testing?

Sam: Yes so something that we didn’t really do early on and it was just kind of just– it’s getting features as many features as we can, that people keep asking for, and staying on top of support. Now that we’ve got the product to kind of more of mature state, it’s how can we optimize and look at our conversion funnel. So it’s something that we started doing in the last six months, and it’s been really exciting because we have this tool called Mixpanel that you can actually look at each step of the funnel.

And the funnel would be someone signs up, they create their first event, they chose a design, they create their card, something like this and you can see where each step of the funnel people are falling off. And then go in and run tests of you know maybe you want to change the signup button to start now, or these little types of tests, and it’s amazing what a little button change or a putting a certified logo in a certain place can change your conversion and having the tools and the data there to see that is really helpful. So now we’re at a point where we’re just kind of trying to optimize our– we can grow our business a lot by just optimizing our current traffic.

Steve: Okay.

Sam: And getting people through that funnel, so Mixpanel has been a really cool great tool.

Steve: Okay, wow and so and that makes– I’ve never used Mixpanel before and that just kind of applicable to any person’s ecommerce websites, they can use this?

Sam: Yeah, so there’s two kind of big ones that are kissmetrics panel and for whatever reason we chose to us Mixpanel and we’ve been really happy with it, but I think kissmetrics is a good tool to look at too and it’s…

Steve: Okay.

Sam: It’s event based tracking which is different from something like Google analytics. Event based tracking is tied to like the life time of a user account. So if someone creates an account with Google analytics and then goes to a different browser, you’ve kind of lost them, because it’s cookie based tracking was my understanding. But then with Mixpanel if someone comes from a Google search, creates an account, then goes to a different account or logs in, every action for that entire account is tied now tied to your analytics. It doesn’t matter if they switch computers or if they come back a year later, it’s all tied to those events that that account takes.

Steve: But they have to be logged in to your server, is that how they track it?

Sam: Or if they’re logged into their account yeah.

Steve: To their account okay, and do you use any heap map tools or any sort of recording platforms to see how visitors are interacting on your site?

Sam: We’ve used Crazyegg for the heap map.

Steve: Okay.

Sam: Tracking before and that’s lead to some interesting insight. So that’s another thing that we’re looking at, and keep kind of checking out every now and then, but the reality is they’re just so many tools.

Steve: Yeah, there’s too many things.

Sam: You just kind of drive yourself crazy. So what I’ve done is kind of every week we have now kind of an optimization goal of the week. So every week I have a timeline of what were going to test that week and implement, and by the end of the week we’ll decide whether it worked. Some worked really great, some we thought would work didn’t work, but having the data is key. And so at the end– so the idea is every week we’re making the site a little bit better.

Steve: Okay, cool and you know I know you kind of started out really early on with your entrepreneurial endeavors. Were you kind of influenced by any mentor or any sort of book or whatever, what kind of put this ginormous entrepreneurial spirit inside of you in such an early age?

Sam: I don’t know, I don’t have– I don’t know, I guess…

Steve: Was it your dad? Was it any sort of book that you read? Anything?

Sam: Well my dad is a doctor and so…

Steve: Okay.

Sam: So, I don’t think it was right there, but he’s been kind of entrepreneurial on his own sense and I kind of I don’t know I like the adventure.

Steve: Okay.

Sam: And kind of the challenge. I don’t know I guess I kind of just fell into it and I like it.

Steve: So were there any books that you kind of read that kind of pushed you one way or another, like how did you learn how to run a business, or was it all just kind of trial and error?

Sam: It was all trial and error, and I read quite a few since I kind of started the business I’ve read books throughout the years. But a lot of it was just kind of learning from doing, which I think is– a lot of people are kind of just scared to take that initial jump, and you know feel it you need to read a ton of books before you try something, and I would kind of argue there are other ways– that give it a try and you’ll learn so much from doing, and you can start with not too much capital. I mean you can do a lot of the stuff yourself to begin with, or maybe partner with a friend that is a developer and you don’t really need a huge budget anymore to start or to try something out and to learn from it. But one book that I really like is called “Delivering Happiness” and written by the founder of Zappos, and it’s all about customer service and company kind of the importance of company culture.

One quote that really stood out is that in his book is that “your personal core values define who you are and the company’s core values ultimately define the company’s character and brand.” For individuals character is destiny, for organizations culture is destiny. And I think that’s so true if you’re creating a company for the long term is that that culture, the way you treat your employees and is so important, because it’s not something that you’re just going to be able to do everything by yourself. You kind of have to put a lot of trust in the people that work with you and create an environment that kind of encourages innovation, and that you know actually cares about what you’re doing and the customers. So those two kind of things customer service and building company culture have been really important to me from day one, and I would say those probably been the most important thing for getting the business to where it is today. And to where we want to go is that customer service to stand out, and different things that we do to create company culture.

Steve: Yeah I mean I completely agree with you especially in the wedding industry, I think since were in the same industry word of mouth is such a big deal. People just naturally talk, and if they have good experience, they tell their friends and before you know it, it kind of just multiplies exponentially. Yeah, so I’ll definitely have my listeners check out that book, I personally have not read it yet, but now it is on my list. So Sam we’ve been already talking for quite a while, I don’t want to take up too much more of your time, but if anyone who is listening has any questions for you or your business is there a place where they can contact you?

Sam: Yeah, absolutely they can send me an email at my work email which is Sam@greenvelope.com.

Steve: Okay, and awesome. I just wanted to thank you a lot for your time and you’ve given out a lot of good nuggets today about how your business works and I really appreciate that. So thanks a lot Sam.

Sam: Thanks so much Steve.

Steve: All right take care.

Sam: Bye, bye.

Steve: Here’s what I like about Sam. He’s got a tremendous drive and the fact that he started his business while in college is really impressive. Plus I really like the fact that he self taught himself adobe illustrator, so he could create his first designs, and in fact he kind of reminded me of how I self taught myself web design in order to create our first online store.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode38, and once again I just want to thank 99 designs for sponsoring this episode. I know a lot of you listening are waiting on the sidelines and trying to get the courage to start your own online business. I also know a lot of you there run your businesses already and know your website design could be better.

So designing a website is actually not that bad anymore thanks to 99 designs where you can get over 300,000 designers to compete for your design. All you got to do is list your design on their site and within 48 hours you will get dozens of designs submissions to chose from, and from there you can ask for slight tweaks and changes until you are 100% satisfied with the results, everything is 100% satisfaction guaranteed. So go to 99designs.com/mywifequit and get your logo, website, t-shirt, business card, basically whatever you need designed right now. And by using the 99designs.com/mywifequit link and telling them that Steve from mywifequitherjob.com referred you, your design listing will be bolded highlighted and given a prominent background and featured before all the regular listings so that your request stands out among all the designers.

And finally if you enjoyed listening to this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show easily and get awesome business advice. And it’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest complement that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

And as an added incentive, I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information about this contest go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the my wife quit her job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

037: How Erin Chase Attracts Millions Of Readers By Teaching People How To Eat Well On A Budget

Erin Chase

I’m super excited to have my friend Erin Chase on the show today. Erin runs the popular blog 5DollarDinners.com where she teaches others how to eat well on a budget.

What’s cool about Erin is that her site gets the most traffic out of any webmaster that I know. And in this interview, she details how she created her blog from the ground up. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Erin gets an insane amount of traffic to her website
  • How Erin earns money from her website
  • How Erin got 1000 visitors a day in her first month
  • How Erin got a book deal within the first 3 months of starting her blog
  • How Erin got 500K page views a month within 6 months
  • How to use Twitter parties to expand your reach
  • How to run giveaways to grow your blog
  • How Erin gets posts to go crazy viral
  • Why Erin thinks digital products is a more viable long term strategy than affiliate or advertising revenue
  • What traffic sources are working the best for Erin today
  • The secret to boosting your Pinterest account
  • How to get on national television

Sponsors

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now, this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used earlier on to gain traction for their business.

Now, if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I am giving away free one on one business consultations every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest and if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profits in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

Now, before I begin, I just want to give a quick shout out to these episodes sponsor 99 designs. Now, originally I wasn’t going to take any sponsors at all, but 99 designs caught my eye because I suck at designs, and in fact when I first started my online store back in 2007, the design from my website was terrible and I had absolutely no idea who to turn to. Now first forward to today, 99 designs is a site where you can provide a description of anything that you want designed whether it be a logo, a webpage, a t-shirt, pretty much anything and have dozens of designers compete to deliver you the best design possible. And by best I mean that you get to choose your favorite design among dozens of submissions from a pool of over 315,000 designers.

So, if you are design challenged like I am, I highly recommend that you go over to 99designers.com/mywifequit and if you use that link and tell them that Steve of mywifequitherjob.com referred you, your design listing will be bolded, highlighted, given a prominent background and featured before all regular listings so that your request stands out among all of the designers. And in fact, this special offer is worth 99 dollars. So, if you need a logo, website, t-shirt, business card or anything designed, go to www.99designs.com/mywifequit. Now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Welcome to the My wife quit her job podcast. Today I’m really happy to have my friend Erin Chase on the show today. Erin and I actually just met at the world domination summit in Portland, Oregon last month and I was thrilled to be able to spend some quality time hanging out with her at the conference. Now, Erin runs the very popular site 5dollardinners.com where she teaches others to how to dine in style on a very reasonable budget of five dollars.

And when I say that her site is popular, I mean that it’s crazy popular. She has over 120,000 Facebook fans, insane traffic to her site and she’s been on good morning America, The View and The Rachael Ray show. Now, I can totally relate to why her site is awesome. I have got two kids on my own, and now that they have kind of grown up a little bit, they are almost like real humans now and real humans actually eat a lot of food. And so, whenever we as a family go out, it costs us like 50 dollars a pop. So, naturally a site like Erin’s makes total sense to anyone that has a family. Now besides running her website, she’s also written several quick books which have sold over 150,000 copies.

Recently she started a new subscription base service called 5 Dollar Meal Plan which sends you daily recipes for meals that costs less than 5 dollars. And oh did I mention that she also has four kids as well, and she consults on the side and she also helps to run a conference called Digital Cool Lab [phonetic]. I have absolutely no idea how she gets everything done and still has time to attend conferences, but I know for a fact that you are going to find her story very inspirational and with that welcome to the show Erin. How are you doing today?

Erin: Wow! Thanks I’m doing awesome with that introduction [laughing]

Steve: You like that ha…

Erin: Yeah, yeah that’s pretty fantastic [laughing]

Steve: So, give us the quick background story and tell us how you came up with the idea for 5 Dollar Dinners in the first place. I kind of read your bio ahead of time and it’s a pretty interesting story actually.

Erin: Yeah, so back in 2008 I was this stay at home mom with two little boys and my husband is a teacher so everybody knows that teachers have you know lowlish salaries. And we were you know going into– going through the summer as everybody wants when all over sudden the gases prices spiked up. They went from what– I don’t know 229 a gallon to four dollars a gallon something crazy. My husband had a pretty decent commute at that time and so the gas– we were already spending quite a bit on gas and we were going– it basically doubled, and so we needed to notch. We were very– we’ve always been very smart with our money, but we didn’t want to run into the road every month because gas price had hiked. We were doing everything we could to save as much as we could at the time.

We had pay as you go cell phones and we had our mortgage, we had a small little ranch house. Our mortgage was finances at the lowest possible rate it could have been at the time. Anyway so we were being very smart but still we were feeling the pinch, you know like a lot of people were and so I challenged myself too since I wasn’t bringing home any money, to spend most of it at the grocery store because that was really the only line under our personal or family budget, that we had any real control over. And so, you know so a combination of meal planning and couponing and just really being smart with how– what I was purchasing, what we got less purchasing at you know things like stocking up on chicken breast, or pork chops or beef were our favorite types of meats when they were on sale, so I dint have to pay for prices in between.

So those kinds of things I started doing, and our grocery bill went from 500 dollars a month for the four of us to 250. So that whole like cut your grocery bill in half thing is totally possible. And so I started sharing just tips and recipes and ideas on my then family blog. And my sister said “Yeah I really could care less what you’re buying at the grocery store, I just going to see pictures of the kids at their swimming lessons, right.” So, I kind of had that at the back of my head and after dinner one night I had shared with Steve my husband that, you know I think I had made a pork chop meal and I cooked some rice to go with it and maybe we grilled it and you know the total of that meal was three dollars 95 cents, for the pork chops plus a little bit of rice, it’s good choice it’s very inexpensive and we probably had a block layer experience– something that would have been on sale. And so I was I doing the dishes after that meal, then this is one of my clearest memories of you know when you have children everything gets kind of fuzzy [laughing]

Steve: Yes, yes absolutely.

Erin: and you have more and it gets fuzzier and fuzzier, anyway another story for another day. And I so clearly remember doing the dishes and my– you know how like on the news sites or near scandal or ticker is running across the screen giving you all the latest updates of you know whatever has happened in the world. Well there was that, but the ticker in my brain was five dollar dinners. And then it was, stop the dishes go Google it and see if anyone else is doing it. Because I knew enough about blogging and websites and I had you know visited quite a few just in my own little personal family blog that we had, and so I knew enough to look around first before I did anything.

And so, there was cheapfamilydinners.blogs.com or something like that was the only thing that I could find in the array of keywords that I had searched, you know around this random subject. And so I started a blog spot and within– that was August 22nd 2008, so coming up on six years– that I think within a month we were seeing 1000 visitors a day and within two months I had earned enough in ad income after the first month I put ads on the site, thinking that I would earn about you know, 10 cents for the month [laughing]. Because you know I didn’t know very much at the time, I didn’t know you could monetize the website or how to do that.

And so, you know at the first month I had ads and the second month of the site I earned enough money to buy our groceries for that week. So, all that much, excuse me. So, it was very eye opening that oh my goodness! This is something here. I think I’ve hit something here, I don’t know what and I don’t know what I am doing [laughing], but I hit something. It’s clearly resonating with people and yeah, that’s how 5 dollar dinners came to be.

Steve: So, if we can go into a little bit more depth down on that first month, how the heck do you pull off 1000 visitors a day in just the first month? I know it took me a very long time with my own blog to achieve that number. Where was the traffic coming from and how did you get it? How did you get the word out?

Erin: I was a very strategic link party hopper [laughing]. I don’t do them anymore, I used to host one for a long time as well. I just was very strategic, I had the same content every week, I would post my meal plan on Sunday, I would post Monday through Friday, what we had for dinner that night. No matter how random it was [laughing] that’s what I would share. And I would share the price breakdown and I think people just thought it was really interesting that one I was doing something sort of crazy– not sort of crazy, it was, it is.

But it was a challenge at the same time, I think and people say “you know that’s actually doable.” So a story on that, I’ve been on The View twice. I was there in May of 2011, again in October 2011.When I went back the second time Elizabeth Hasselbeck when she was still a co-host on the show, walked out of her way to come to where I was and said I want you to know that my brother in-law saw you when you were here before and first of all I was like you remember “you remember that I was here before.”

Steve: Wow! That’s awesome.

Erin: And so she said he thought you were– started by saying crazy, he thought you were off your locker. Well then he started paying closer attention, I guess he was the grocery shopper in the family– paying closer attention to some of the things I had suggested on the show and some of the tips I had given, and then just general prices he was paying and watching sort of sales and cycles and things, and then he decided that I was the most genius person in Tailope [phonetic] to chase his luck. She came out of her way to do that and so I think that, that is you know, the combination of it being a dramatic number that doesn’t seem attainable but it really is if you’re just smart about how you shop and what you’re spending that I think it’s certainly not the recipes.

I didn’t even have photographs when I first started, I didn’t even know how to use my camera. So I think it was more of the oh my goodness, what is she was making, like what should I try to in just simple basics. From we have food allergies from scratch sort of cooking methods and concepts that I think just resonates with people especially when we were going through that. You know I heard word recessions in the news like two weeks after the site started, then everybody starts to panic and so I think just the combination of all those factors is what was driving people. I think I got a lot of word of mouths comments here and there. All my friends, all my cousins, and whoever told me about the site and that kind of thing.

Steve: So you mentioned the word link party, can you kind of describe how that works?

Erin: Yeah. So, a blog generally will host a link party a certain day of the week with a specific team and then you will take your blog posts and act as that name and link it up to it. And depending on the party and who is hosting it and the traffic coming from that website it would drive a lot to your own. So, the two that I participated in back then, I believe one of them is still going on– I don’t think the other one still is. One of them was ‘milk plan Monday’ which is perfect I would just “this is what is planning to make this week and this is what’s on sale this week” and that kind of thing. And then the other one was called ‘works for me Wednesday’ and that one was supposed to carry two different bloggers way back in 2008, 2009 you know John I haven’t seen that around lately. So it could still be going on, I’m not sure. And that one was just sort of tips and tricks on why use reusable dish towels instead of paper towels those kinds of things.

Steve: Okay. So you just basically made friends with these people and then started participating in link parties and that sort of thing and that gave your blog kind of an early jump in the very beginning.

Erin: Yeah, I would say that is what gave the blog that early jump is participating in those and just [Inaudible] [00:13:05] and instantly forming these little pocket of people.

Steve: Okay.

Erin: That I still chat with regularly. Even this week, I was chatting with someone I hadn’t talked to in a little while and all over sudden we’re chatting again. You know just these pocket of people that we sort of all rose together I guess.

Steve: Yeah it’s really awesome how the friends you make blogging kind of become your real friends even if they do not live nearby. At least that’s been my experience.

Erin: Absolutely, I chat daily with several people.

Steve: You are like on fire, like I send email I get a response like that. It’s like you’re on your email like constantly.

Erin: Well I’m not on it constant, I will tell you though that that it’s my to do list, I plod my conscience as my to do list and at present it has 22 emails in it, and I’m sort of freaking out of all that because I like to keep it under ten. So, I just send very quick and going and I rely a lot on my calendar where I get encouraged to do stuff, but if there is something I need to do but I don’t want it in my inbox like linking lights at me– you need to do me– you need to take care of me now, then I’ll throw it over into my calendar and then I’ll get a reminder when it’s time to take care of it. So..

Steve: Yeah, so I heard that you got a book deal within– was it like three months after starting your blog? How does a mere model accomplish this?

Erin: Getting a book deal within three months of starting your blog?

Steve: Yeah did you plan and seek that or did someone just come to you?

Erin: Well, somebody came to me and again my sister, it was like about– I think it was about the same week my sister was like you really should turn this whole blog thing of yours into a book. And I’m like yeah I don’t know anything about that. So I– within that same week got an email from a very small publishing house that I did not end working with, basically saying we would be interested in publishing this cook book, and I’m like I don’t know what that means. The only person at that time that I knew had a cook book deal or knew anything about cook book publishing was Stephanie O’Dea from the “Year of Slow Cooking” website and she was doing her Year of Slow Cooking in 2008 which is the same year I started.

So I sent her an email, I remember I was in Texas visiting my family and I sent her an email and literally, basically saying hey I have all these questions, I know you have a book deal, I’d love to talk to you, choose my sample and if you have time– if not we can chat via email and like within two minutes– talk about writing an email, she calls me you know and I’m like oh hi, okay we can chat about this now.

Steve: Wow.

Erin: So she gave me a rundown, like the whole rundown and she also connected me with her literary agent who obviously understood blogging and book deals and how that you know you have this on a platform and you have this book thing that publishers are happy because you already have some type of instant marketing you know two order here. And so yeah connected with her and she was able to land a book deal within like a week of signing on with her.

Steve: I’m sorry, how did you find this person again?

Erin: It was through– I was using the literary agent as another blogger friend.

Steve: Oh, okay got it, got it and then at that point your blog was nice, but it wasn’t like humongous like it is today, right, so…

Erin: Oh, I didn’t even have a Facebook page when I signed book deals. I think yeah, no.

Steve: But you had your blog, right?

Erin: I did, yeah.

Steve: Usually, traditionally the book publisher expects you to be able to be responsible for some of your sales, right? So how did you approach this when your audience wasn’t humongous or was it already pretty big at the time?

Erin: It was pretty big at the time. I mean I was seeing 400,000 to 500,000 page views a month.

Steve: Okay, yeah that’s pretty big.

Erin: Yeah, It was big enough and I did a fine job of selling them– still do so, it’s you know, it’s…
.
Steve: So within three months you were getting 500,000 page views.

Erin: No I didn’t sign, by the time I actually signed the book deal I was a pro so it had been about six months in this since then.

Steve: But still six months that is crazy. Okay so what was the– so you mentioned link parties, what were the some of your other early strategies to kind of obtain traffic.

Erin: You know honestly, I did a couple of guest posts for other people, but not very many. I did have a pretty decent twitter presence from the beginning back when people were actually using twitter and when twitter was actually growing traffic. So I participated in a lot of twitter parties, and yeah this was before Pinterest, and before my big Facebook page came about, I think it was just really a lot of word of mouth.

Steve: Was Google organic traffic as well or?

Erin: I do, I have always ranked very highly for a lot of search traffic, and the thing about 5 Dollar Dinners too was that it’s a very bouncy website, it always has been. I’ve actually had consultations with several people about why and how to fix it and I don’t think you can. I’ve tried all the right ways to fix it and people want a recipe, they want to know how to cut something, they want to watch a video and they’re gone which is totally fine with me, I am down with that concept. I’ve come to terms with it after six years of fiddling with helping make it stickier, but that is okay. I have an email list that is pretty big and other social media pages that are doing just fine so.

Steve: Yeah it sounds like you got a lot of different ways to get traffic to your site today, and I guess earlier on you focused on twitter link parties and regular link parties just kind of let nature take its course, right?

Erin: Yeah, I really do think the concept. I did work hard, I will not deny that. I did work my tail off getting great content out there, you know being very intentional with when the content went out and I did jump on Facebook page pretty early, and you know build that up through giveaways and other ways to drive traffic and making people engaged in your content…

Steve: Okay.

Erin: I did a lot of those in the beginning, but I really do think that the concept did a lot for us– does a lot for us still today.

Steve: Sure, Sure yeah I can totally see that. So, what are some of the giveaways that you actually did, to kind of boost your thing, boost your traffic a little bit. What were you giving away?

Erin: Any brands. I worked with different kind of brands and companies to give away their products. I did book giveaways for Christmas, I generally under my own pocket would do you know I’ve had many giveaways, and I did a series of a hundred cook book give away, and we’ve done blenders and kitchen aids and generally at the blog’s birthday and holidays I’ll do my own little thank you kind of thing. So that I think helps as well just bringing people to check out your contest and be enter to win, something that’s pretty valuable.

Steve: And they enter in by signing up your newsletter or Facebook like, how do you run the contest?

Erin: I generally offer a couple of options just because some people aren’t on Facebook, a lot of people aren’t on twitter. So I would generally say you can have up to five entries. One would be like the Facebook page, one follow me on Pinterest, another tweet about this give away, another one sign up for email updates. Just something that everybody can pick from.

Steve: Okay. And then do you use any tools to kind of keep track of these contests or you just kind of go through your list and just pick a winner arbitrarily.

Erin: I just do random.org in the comment numbers. I don’t use– I never used any numbers and widgets and different things that you can use, I never use those, I just didn’t know what the mistake.

Steve: Okay. And so, how does the blog actually make money? Like what is the business model and the strategy and how does everything work in terms of revenue?

Erin: So I’m actually in the middle of a big transition.

Steve: Okay.

Erin: So up until now it has been a large portion is at network revenue. So, I work with a third party ad network that runs several ads apart from the site. So, their ads– it’s a premium ad network as far as I know, they’ve the highest payouts of all the ones I’ve researched in right here from online. So, I’m really fortunate to have gotten to work with them.

Steve: Which ad network is that?

Erin: It’s called Federated Media.

Steve: Okay, yeah, okay.

Erin: And, then I have a couple of other ad networks set up as a kind of hassle kind of thing. They don’t serve in adwords, they serve about 70% of the time which is pretty good for the higher CPM as I’ll take that as being pretty good sell rate. And it depends as the holidays get closer it get a lot higher, but at the beginning of the year and certain parts of December it’s a little bad, it’s about 70% range. So, that is probably– it fluctuates by month.

Steve: Are you allowed to reveal the CPM numbers that you are getting approximately for this network.

Erin: No, it varies by month even two.

Steve: Okay, okay.

Erin: It isn’t steady and the company can go up, it can double and then it can back to regular and then it can– it just depends on what ads are running. And then– so that’s probably about 35% of my revenue. Another– it varies by month. I’m just going to throw some awkward numbers.

Steve: Sure.

Erin: Another 25% is probably with sponsored campaigns which is basically working directly with the company. I actually now I’m wrapped by an agency who does all of that for me which is fantastic.

Steve: Nice. I was about to say that can be a lot of work.

Erin: It is a lot of work. And so now they do all the heavy lifting and they just say here is the content, here is what we need for me to do. Here is where you put the photograph, and then we do it which is wonderful, and now actually they actually generally can get a higher payout for me which is also fantastic.

Steve: Did you start out doing it that way, or did you start out doing the sponsors yourself?

Erin: Oh, I did it for myself until last year.

Steve: Oh okay, okay.

Erin: Yeah, for a long time I did it myself. And, you know every sponsored campaign that I have done has been different even for the exact same brand it’s different campaign. So everybody is you know, everybody’s goals are different in what they are trying to achieve and I will you know if it makes sense for me to share, I’ve turned so many down if it’s just not the right fit, if it’s not the right time yeah, so.

Steve: Okay.

Erin: We have, that’s a good chunk of what I need to quite transfer 25%. And then, I do some affiliate marketing with coupons and certain special offers, restaurant coupons and those types of things, which probably brings in– I don’t know 10%. It’s a smaller pack. But I also have mobile ads that are small little portions. You add up all these little pieces and it becomes this little bigger-bigger bubble, so yeah it’s hard to say. And then, so I mentioned we’re in sort of a transition mode. I earlier this year had a post go viral that…

Steve: Is it the Costco post?

Erin: Yes.

Steve: Okay. Go ahead and talk about it.

Erin: Are you going to ask?

Steve: Well I was going to ask anyways, but yeah since you brought it up.

Erin: What I’ll do, I’ll tell the whole story. So the Costco, I am now famous in Costco and I should be in their magazine this coming month too. So in September of 2013, I posted these 20 meals from Costco that you can make for 150 dollars. So it has all the recipes, the Shopping list, how much I paid for everything, and it’s just this plan, you know bulk shopping, what to with all these chicken breasts and all this meat that you buy right, what do you do with all these? So I posted that and I guess it went viral the first week it had 100,000 shares on Facebook within seven days.

Steve: That’s the understatement of the century, go on. Sorry.

Erin: Is it not so but this is why I said that way. Because I went on with my married life, went with the holidays and oh my I should put together a second plan, I will get to it one day. They take a lot of time and energy to put together so I was like, I will get to it one day. So the first weekend of January this year the post saw1.5 million views in a weekend, okay.

Steve: It’s crazy, that is crazy.

Erin: So that’s why I say that 100,000 in a week is not that many, which I know sounds terrible but it’s all relative, right? So, because of that and the way that my hosting agreement– my site actually never went down during that time but I was going to owe them 1500 dollars for the extra traffic. And so, I’m like I can’t– like the ad revenue probably was pretty close to making up for that. It probably would have been if I checked it out, but I kind of went into this “Oh my goodness! How am I going to pay for this and like our personal since I’m bearing the chore with our business finances as well. Have everything planned out and this was not in the budget right, 1500 dollars is…

Steve: Sure.

Erin: Not a small chunk of change. So I panicked and up until then had all of the printibles that came along with the Costco plan negotiation less fees as a free download, probably one of the reasons I went viral anyways. But, I switched them to cost a dollar 49, which I probably should have had them pay from the very beginning, giving me amount of time, the concept of these things.

Steve: Yeah, now I looked at it. It’s beautiful.

Erin: Yeah, it’s in text. So I quickly switched them to a paid model, which went over very well, I didn’t get any complains, and put out the second plan shortly thereafter, maybe within the month of that happening. And then just in June, we put up with the free version of the plan and then in August we put out the slow cooker freezer pack where you everything and then you can toss in the freezer and then drop it in slow cooker and make it. So that will come out in a couple of weeks, I’m actually shopping for that this weekend. So…

Steve: And you only charge us a couple of bucks? You are buck 50 for…

Erin: Mm-huh, Yes.

Steve: I’m being curious, I bet you can charge more and people won’t even think twice, I don’t know.

Erin: I have talked about that with actually a number of different people who are in the online digital products space and currently the concerns system we’ve come up with is that because everybody is looking for the budget, family meal in the deal and I get stories all the time “Oh your site has helped me so much, I just bought the mom food stamps because this-this-this and this and my kid has this” I mean it’s like they’ve had you know very tough situations, and so I feel like if I charge too much then I’m going to alienate– this is probably not the right word, but alienate the people who need it most. And you know people I think can afford a dollar 50. So, I have gone back and forth with on that several times in my own head and with other people and just decided this is the number we are going to stick with, and actually with the set next plan that’s coming out I’m going to have an additional assembling instructions and printable labels and videos and that would be an additional charge. So, that would probably be a total of five dollars for all of that.

Steve: Okay.

Erin: So, I’m trying to mix it up, but since that experience I’ve been trying to be more strategic with digital products and increasing that revenue stream for the site because I think that’s sustainable long term process…

Steve: Okay.

Erin: Verses affiliate marketing and some of those sponsored clause. And ad network has been pretty consistent, I’m not worried about that, but you know just to kind of help offset things like hosting costs that comes out of nowhere [laughing].

Steve: Yeah, so are you going to be keeping all the existing content on your site free or you kind of going to go through…

Erin: Oh yes, absolutely.

Steve: Okay.

Erin: Yep. And then the other thing too is the cost of printables, it’s all there for you for free. You have to go popping around to get all the content, all you can pay a dollar 55 within one place. So it’s kind of this, it’s worked well for me so far, and so I am going to see how it works with these additional add-ons that will cost more and with this next plan that we are going to put out.

Steve: Okay, and you mentioned earlier that you know your traffic sources early on did not include Facebook and Pinterest and that sort of thing, but how’s that kind of changed over time. So what traffic sources actually work the best for you now and what are you putting into place to actually grow your traffic today?

Erin: So I think it’s the same rules and the same concepts of awesome content, now it’s awesome photography because of Pinterest and Facebook and some of our most popular shares on our Facebook page are just those solid photos you know and concept, and the concepts do make a difference as well. We had I think it was slow cooker baked potatoes, baked potatoes and slow cooker, I mean I’ve had this post on my site for years, we re-put it out there, regurgitated it and…

Steve: Sounds yummy regurgitated.

Erin: Regurgitated slow cooker baked potatoes, amazing you have to try them. So we– and it had like 2000 shares or something crazy and so you know it’s like it’s part content, it’s like a great photograph, its part content you know part photography. So now the traffic model or traffic sources are– Pinterest is actually number one over search.

Steve: I can see that.

Erin: I believe the reasons for that is because of the changes that Pinterest has made to its guided search, and the way that it serves searched posts. So that is one thing I think a lot of people now are using Pinterest as their search you know tool because they can see all the visuals instead of reading all the content on a search page. So I think that, that is probably the reasons that I’m seeing more Pinterest traffic than search traffic although that has been just in the last 6 months that that has switched…

Steve: Do you do anything special with Pinterest other than just putting a pin it button on top of all your photos?

Erin: I actually don’t have that on top of all my photos.

Steve: You don’t, okay.

Erin: Nope yeah I’m kind of a stickler for site load in times and whatnot and plug ins and such…

Steve: Okay.

Erin: So I just have a Pinterest share button at the bottom of every post, if you get to the bottom of the post and you like it you’ll share it if you get to the bottom of the post, right? So…

Steve: Right, wow. Okay that’s incredible.

Erin: We had a pretty aggressive Pinterest strategy, I guess it’s what we could call it. By ‘we’ I mean my assistant because she manages all of it.

Steve: Okay.

Erin: We purchase the page and a number of group boards, we reach out to other bloggers and say “hey this is one of our boards, would you like to join our board” you know “can we join yours” you know so were pretty strategic about the group board which is sufficient in pinning to those regularly and keeping our content in front of– some of these group boards have hundreds of thousands of followers so…

Steve: Okay.

Erin: You know keeping your content out there where it’s going to be found, pinning often…

Steve: So you need kind of a strong account to reach out…

Erin: You do.

Steve: Okay.

Erin: Yeah you have to kind of be– you probably need– I say get with people who are your same size basically.

Steve: Okay.

Erin: So if you’re at 8000 or you are at 2000 find other people and like kind of like how we did it in the beginning where were in this together like you find this people and all of a sudden you’re just like woo and you’re just kind of your numbers are growing pretty quickly. We kind of audit other people’s content as well probably close to 50-50, so you know we’re spreading the Pinterest love at the same time we’re…

Steve: Got it.

Erin: Big believer in you know giving back, so and helping. I’ve always been that way with five dollar dinners, any time someone or a blogger wants to guest post as long as it fits you know the content themes, bring it on, I’ll be happy to send as much traffic your way. I’ve always been you know generous in that sense as well too, so I think that helps.

Steve: Sure and your assistant takes care of all this?

Erin: My assistant does all of the Pinterest images, all over Pinterest yes.

Steve: Wow. And what is her name and email address?

Erin: She’s not, she’s not taking new clients yeah, right yeah right.

Steve: Let’s talk a bit about your media. So how does one get on Good Morning America, The View and Rachael Ray?

Erin: Okay you can’t just go do it unless something dramatic and crazy happens to you then you’ll just get thrown on there, right? So you have to practice a lot. I did local media in Dayton, Ohio for which is like you know probably 6000 people watching in the morning, it’s not a huge market.

Steve: Okay.

Erin: So I did that, I did cooking segments for them weekly for a year probably. I just called the news room and said “hey this is what I’m doing, I’d love to come and do a cooking segment,” they’re like “can you be here next week?” I’m like “sure” so how…

Steve: This is a local station?

Erin: Yeah this is the ABC Fox Station in Dayton, Ohio. I had a great relationship with their news director, we’re in the process of planning a number of different things and unfortunately he ended up being sick and doesn’t work there anymore. So still to this day I have a great relationship with BS Dennis, the assistant news director who’s now in Dallas. So I chat with him here and there you know whenever I’m in town I let him know if I’m there, if there’s a spot for me I’ll hop in there. So then the next piece that worked for me was when I– when my books came out, I did several city tours I guess you could call them part for book signings, and part for media. So I did news segments on multiple stations in Atlanta and Minneapolis you know kind of all Chicago, so just practicing you know getting here little sound bites that you know say over and over and how you introduce yourself, and how you do that in two and a half minutes.

Steve: How did you secure those opportunities? Did you have an agent book those for you or did you get those yourself?

Erin: Yeah, so everything that came through the publishing house– everything that came on my book tour was through my publishing house publicist.

Steve: Okay.

Erin: And then after my second book came out, I reached out to my publicist in the publishing house and just said “hey I would love to do more media outside of the books” like the book tours and the book media “do you know anybody who is you know could help me for a reasonable price?” Because PR agencies and publicists can be very expensive.

Steve: Very expensive, yes.

Erin: So I– she connected me with a woman who had just– she took a bi-op from, she was a food segment producer at Good Morning America. She took a biop to stay home with her kids, and went into freelance publicist mode. And so I’ve been working with her since probably 2011.

Steve: Okay.

Erin: And she’s the one who has secured all of these other non-cook book related segments.

Steve: Okay, that’s amazing wow. I want to kind of unroll the onion, so we talked about your book, how did you– I imagine the press that you got from Good Morning America, The View, and Rachael Ray, did those help you sell your book? Was it– did that come first or the book come first?

Erin: The book came first.

Steve: Okay.

Erin: The Good Morning America segment did wonders for the sales and just awareness. I was at– the first time I was on Rachael Ray came the same week that I signed my cook book contract, so that was very early on and that really just helped with audience growth you know hundreds of thousands of people hearing about me millions probably in that instant, right? So that experience…

Steve: So to get to Rachael Ray appearance did you or did the publicist get that too?

Erin: Oh actually I did that, so that’s a fun story. So I think it was within the first month of setting up the site yeah because it was September, so it would’ve been within the first month I heard about this segment with Whoopi Goldberg and Rachael Ray– the two of them talking about fat tax, where I think it was Arkansas or somewhere that was going to implement a tax, if you weighed so much and you didn’t lose so much within nine months– you lose so much weight you were going to get taxed for being fat.

Steve: Okay.

Erin: Right, so they were arguing about whether or not it was more expensive to eat healthy. So this was the segment that the two of them had, I think it was on Rachael Ray’s show. So I went on her website, found her little contact form– like went through the whole toping of the topics list, went through found the one that was most appropriate, you know jumped in there in all caps– I was like I can’t believe this segment would be in Rachael, this is crazy, this is what I’m doing, this is what you need to know boom-boom-boom, and I just laid out like five tips basically. It was essentially a pitch of me not knowing how to write a pitch and I did it in all caps because I was like being dramatic about it because I thought it was the craziest thing that I’d ever seen on television.

And here’s how I can prove you wrong and March, so six months later– almost seven months later the producer calls me out of the blue, I must’ve left my phone number in there, calls me out of the blue, I’m in the kitchen, my heart like starts racing. I’m like “what is going on?” like I completely forgotten did I have even sent that on her website and so “they’re like yeah we’re going to send a crew to your house next week” and I’m like “a crew to my house, what?”

Steve: That’s awesome, that’s incredible.

Erin: That’s actually pretty that’s an amazing like I think part just getting lucky and that was them taking a chance on me. Yes, I had a lot of local media experience, but that was the first time that I had ever done anything at the national level in front of a live audience. That was a little bit more intimidating than I was expecting it to be.

Steve: This is just based on an email, you didn’t even send in like an audition video or anything.

Erin: No.

Steve: They just came?

Erin: Yeah.

Steve: Wow, okay.

Erin: I think you know I chatted with the girl on the phone for 20 minutes probably, so she probably got a good sense of my energy and personality and you know she was asking pretty pointy questions you know, and I may or may not have jumped on the couch right after I got off the phone.

Steve: I can’t see you doing that.

Erin: No, maybe not.

Steve: Wow, okay that’s pretty amazing, so that probably propelled your first book to do really well and then things probably just kind of snowballed after that, right? You got follow on book deals after that and…

Erin: Yep, I had follow and book deals, I had another kids and then I wasn’t in the news very much because when you’re big and pregnant and fat, you don’t want to be on TV. So I had to go– I went through that twice. I think the most pregnant I ever was on the news was seven months, I was like, okay I can’t do this anymore. I was yeah anything, I’m wearing all black, facing directly straight to the cameras, so you can’t see the fat belly– not that it really matters, but pregnancy is a beautiful thing, but when you’re on television it just makes you more self conscious but…

Steve: Sure, I can see that.

Erin: So yeah I kind of went– I’d gone– my media you can actually see like I did a bunch in 2011 because that’s when I was between you know between kids or whatever and then I did some video work for a brand, and then found out I was pregnant with number four and then I did the Ray Ozman show when I was five months pregnant, but I was– I’m really tall, so I can hide a belly for a long time when I’m pregnant. So I was able to hide it pretty well for that segment. So then and then after that I didn’t do any, they wanted me to come back on the show but I was like “I’m sorry I can’t, I’m going to be too pregnant.” So then just in this last year– just this January we did, we started pitching again pretty aggressively and I was on Rachael Ray again this February and then did an island segment in May, so…

Steve: That’s incredible. So let me ask you this Erin, if someone listening to this show wanted to kind of start a site, publish a book or get on TV today, and if you had to start all over again, what advice would you give them and how would you have proceeded if you were to start all over?

Erin: I would not have proceeded any differently, the path that I’ve been on is he path that I’m supposed to be on and the things that happened, happened as they were supposed to and me writing into all caps was you know me writing in all caps to get into the show page or whatever I think that when…

Steve: Let me give an example of what I mean by that question. So for example, link parties today might not be as effective anymore because Google was devaluing those type of link carnival type of things, right? So if you were to start all over today you know how would you have achieved the same viral nature that your blog experienced?

Erin: I think one is going to be the concept.

Steve: Okay.

Erin: You know that we’ve seen blogs in the recent past do crazy things, 100 days of real food with Jason, those like went crazy because It’s 100 days of real food, it’s a very similar challenge you know, seems unattainable but really is attainable. And they break it down for you very similar kind of nature concept at five dollar dinners.

Another one is Simple Green Smoothies, those guys or those girls just blew it out of the water by creating awesome content, beautiful pictures, simple design and they were very strategic with working on instagram. So I think it partly depends on the niche and what your site, your concept is but if you can pick out— there is a girl named Val Warner I think how you say her last name, and she has a fantastic instagram polling. Also she sells these beautiful little journals that she creates and she just has this little heard of people over on instagram.

Steve: Yeah.

Erin: And so I think maybe it’s tumbler, maybe you are really clever and comedic and you can do those little mean photos and sayings and what not and you just have this crazy tumbler presence that you can turn into products or whatever. So I think it partly depends on the niche. For me it was recipes every night of the week and that’s best in a blog format. Obviously that was before all the social networks were really popular. But some people’s Facebook pages like Taylor who is in our community of bloggers and her Facebook page this year I think is close to half a million already and it’s just…

Steve: Crazy.

Erin: Going crazy. And she`s been strategic about it and she is being – if you talk to her she is very you know, analytical about it and she is very strategic for what she is doing and keeping the growth as rapid as it is. She is doing a great job with that, but you know she’s also got a very focused content and theme and niche. So I think a lot of it depends on what your topic is, how you are resonating with people, and how if that makes sense how you connect with them and how you are helping them you know. I think a lot of these sites and using the examples in the more recent past, it’s you know– and me too with five dollar dinners is I`m here to help people.

I would still be doing this if I wasn’t making any more. Maybe not to the same extreme, but I would still be putting out ideas and content as you know as I was able to if I wasn’t doing it as a business you know. But you know at least NJ [phonetic] said they are helping people with eating, making smarter choices with what they are eating. Eating more real food and you know the girls Jadah and Jen from Simple Green Smoothies– they are helping people, they are passionate and want people to be smarter about what they are eating as well. So I think some of these newer sites that have you know– I say newer but they have been around for long too, but the Simple Green Smoothie site is very new, two years. So they you know they just being– and that’s green smoothies– that is all.

Steve: Yeah.

Erin: So it’s just, it`s – but it resonates with people, it`s like I should be making a green smoothie for breakfast. I`m going to make that one that they just put on instagram right now. I`m going to my kitchen right now and I`m doing it right now and then you feel better about yourself. So they come back because they want more recipes for the smoothies. So it’s – yeah I thinks it’s a really roundabout way of answering your question.

Steve: Yeah, I think I can just summarize basically what you are saying is you know if you going to start something you want to start something unique that has a very unique message that actually helps people right?

Erin: Yeah exactly, and you guys are a prime example of that as well. Both with e commerce and you know my wife quit her job site.

Steve: Yeah I think yeah. I didn’t think about it that way, but yeah now that you have said it that way yeah. We were trying to help people you know start their own businesses and kind of get out of some sort of rut that they are in financially. So hey Erin we have been talking believe it or not for quite a while now. I did want you to kind of talk a little bit about your latest project which is kind of five dollar meal plan because I think it’s pretty cool. We are signed up right now, so if you want to kind of just describe what that’s all about and what your future plans are for that, that would be great.

Erin: Yeah, so about four years ago I looked into having a meal plan subscription service built. Like a database centre you know this whole beautiful thing, built by a development company and it was going to cost a lot of money, more capital than I had at the time. And so I kind of put it on the back burner, but it was always– it’s always has been part of the website and always has been a – you know something that I want to help people with and will continue to help people with and decided earlier this year was approached by Jim Weng, who I know you know and he said, I think there is an opportunity here to take your current meal plans and make them better. But we have to do it in a subscription service form, and I`m like funny you should say that because I used to think that and then I looked into it then it was so expensive.

He goes no-no-no, we would do it like this. And then I`m like that’s totally doable yes we should do that. So here is how it looks, we send you an email with your meal plan, you go about your week making all the meals and you are happy because you don’t have to think about the meal planning piece that is – can be very stressful and take a lot of time and energy and focus that you don’t have on a weekend when you maybe should be meal planning or the middle of the week when your dog is vomiting all over your carpet [laugher].

Steve: I saw that posting.

Erin: Which is what happened to me early this week, right? So that is legit true story. So yeah right, it happens, vomit happens.

Steve: I like how you like bring out these disgusting stories when you talk about the food.

Erin: I`m so sorry, on the first interview ever regurgitating spells of sweet potato. No, stop but seriously life happens like kids get sick but how much money does it cost–how much does it cost you to order a pizza?

Steve: Are you asking me that question?

Erin: Well like hypothetically. Like 25 bucks up to the delivery guy, right. So 25 bucks, so my whole thing is that you can you know– the five dollar meal plan is a subscription service that does cost just five dollars a month. It’s really inexpensive, less than any other meal plan subscription service you are going to find out there, and you know that the recipes in there are all done by me. So they are all going to have like my stamp of approval on them which means they are all going to be budget friendly.

Steve: Yes. That is key.

Erin: Yes, which a lot claim to be and actually I spoke with some women this morning or this – at lunch today, and one of them asked me are these like normal recipes like normal stuff? I’m like yes, I don’t buy stuff from– like I don’t buy that. This all like pretty normal pantry staple you know meats, fruits, vegetables, pretty basic easy to make. I have four children. Like I don’t have– I`m not in the kitchen for four hours preparing these meals every day, because who has time for that? So yeah, they have this kind of the five dollar dinner mom’s stamp of approval on them, so you know they are going to be budget friendly.

One of the interesting things that we found in talking to people who were part of our pre launch group was that you know we talked a little bit about, well would you want something that where you build it yourself like you can go in and I want to make this plus this plus this and then it populates a shopping list basically. Which is not out of the realm of possibility, it’s something we could develop in future. But most people said no, I just want it sent to me.

Steve: I hear you, and you know you mentioned that when you first pitched this idea it was too expensive right, but then Jim came along and presumably he pitched a much more economical solution. So what’s that– what’s the platform that you are using for that service?

Erin: We are using email.

Steve: Email? Okay.

Erin: Yes so I had originally kind of had this in my head where you would come in and to this dash board and you would pick categories and build things and it would be very sleek and pretty and easy to use. But again we– but I did not do any testing, I did not do any surveys, I didn’t ask user anything, what they would want to see and I think that’s where in launching a separate product that we’re consulting for and with Jim’s experience in business and online– being an online entrepreneur he understands product launches. We both have the same understanding of a product launch. So we’ve been much more strategic about how we’ve gone about setting it up, and so getting the feedback of no I would just– the majority of it. There were some people that would want to do this one way or the other, but the majority of it was no we just want it sent to us.

Steve: Right, okay.

Erin: We want you to do it all for us, it was were pretty much like okay we are just going to go with a simple email system, and we also have a dashboard where you can download the plans from the website and your dashboard as well.

Steve: Right. Yeah, it’s funny how sometimes the simplest solution ends up working out, you don’t need to pay the big bucks, right?

Erin: Exactly so that’s – you know and at that time when I had first looked into it, it didn’t even occur to me to just set up kind of this like automated email system you know. That wasn’t even like an option, so I think this is a fantastic compromise of you know kind my original idea which wasn’t going to work without money you know investment…

Steve: Sure.

Erin: To what users are wanting you know these days. We – it’s a fast paced society we are living in and people want quick and easy and a meal plan delivered to your inbox is pretty quick and easy.

Steve: Yeah, I’ll be sure to link up that service in the show notes and..

Erin: Thank you.

Steve: Erin if anyone has any questions for you, where can they find you online?

Erin: So you can find me at fivedollardinners.com like I said my inbox is nearly empty all the time, so I will get back to you pretty quickly. I have a contact form on the site, my email is also fivedollardinners@gmail.com which is pretty generic and easy to find as well – I`m easy to find that way too.

Steve: Awesome Erin, hey well, thanks a lot for coming on the show. I learned a lot and your story is just incredible. So thanks a lot for coming on.

Erin: Yeah thank you so much for having me, it’s fun to get to share it and kind of walk that down memory lane.

Steve: Yeah, totally awesome story. Well take care Erin, I will catch you later.

Erin: Thanks, you too.

Steve: I hope you enjoyed that episode. I liked Erin the minute that I met her at the world domination summit because she is so down to earth. And even though her website is crazy successful and she is practically a TV star, she is really easy to talk to and extremely humble. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode37 and once again I just want to thank 99 designs for sponsoring this episode. I know a lot of you listening out there are waiting on the sidelines and trying to get the courage to start your own online business. I also know that a lot of you out there run your businesses already, and know that your website design could be better.

Designing a website doesn’t have to be intimidating thanks to 99 designs where you can get over 300,000 designers to compete for your design. All you got to do is list your design on their site, and within 48 hours you will get dozens of designs submissions to chose from and from there you ask for slight tweaks and changes until you are 100% satisfied with the results. And the best part is that the price is very reasonable and there is 100% satisfaction guarantee.

So go to 99designs.com/mywifequit and get your logo, website, whatever you need designed right now. And by using the 99designs.com/mywifequit link, and telling them that Steve from mywifequitherjob.com referred you, your design listing will be bolded, highlighted and given a prominent background and featured before all the regular listings so that your request stands out among the rest.

If you enjoyed listening to this episode please got to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information and find the show more easily on the web to get awesome business advice.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest complement that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. And as an added incentive I`m also giving away free business consultations to one lucky winner every single month. For more information about this contest go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to my wife quit her job.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the my wife quit her job podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information, visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!